' • -e w 1 ■ 1 . r.^ --’ - •• . ■V ' . . > , / S +1 s . 1 >:<■, • •( ^ \ • . . < ./ - - v ■' * . , ■ * ■' i.v ,il ss oTy . ... i *v . ' \ •. \ v ■ ,?7 :l •y . - „ ,.'s; ■ i\ ,• \ v • t ■ ■ . • / • y • ‘ , c'. ' . . . ■■ ■ . ■ t ' . ,.v I - * V . ' ' . ' ‘ ‘ ' . h < .. 1 ■ V • ’• * * .x. *• . . - - . ' 7 ! • • ’ ) I / ‘ ' V ■' i .»< ' : j ■ i '■) ■ . \ X V V Y' , K ' .. , * (W • • ... ■ ' ' ~ . J 1 V - , . r ." ' ■■ ' ' ,/• . i'x - •' . y - . -■ ? v - ■ % >r ' ■ ’ y,- y • K • . 7 ‘ '* . r \ - _ ^ i ' . \ ' , • ' * -v. * • K , J J /. , ' i V v , . . . . ■ i ( • • ■ y r y • v ; . •*? ■ y '... ( V . ' v ' ■ ■ - . - i • • ■ ■ ■ • i- V.. .* . r • » - - 1 V . • * S \ •* , ' . , s. y. • y V < ■ 1 y . 7 : . \,C : ' r . 7 < - . ■ ’ . •-* ■ ■ ; .■ - ^ yy v '• *1 . - . *»: ; ; - • -v y 'V - - > . , - V ; • , ■ 1 / : . • fiP ' ; ' ' ' . * : - ,«• ■ ‘ v' . . ' " v. . ,.y .v ' ■ ■ . 1 . . ■ ■ -t ■ ' • ' , ■I - > rj *v. . * •’ V' . , ■ r ’i r. ' ■ • • < •> ■ .) '* j* • \v» , . - ... v. , - - • •>? l . /.a . f , r \-' 1 ■ 'V- C A ^ ' / 1 • • , . • ■ >• • t. ;• . - : . . • >. /- I -ii ; >■» j / ■" '•c: v \ ■ s > ' ' - V V . • * ' , - . A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION BY THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A. RECTOR OF LYNDON, AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. CAREFULLY REVISED AND CORRECTED BY REV. J. A. SPENCER, A. M, FOURTEENTH AMERICAN EDITION- BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY CHESTNUT HILL, MASS. NEW-YORK: D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 8 46 & 848 BROADWAY. M.DCCO.LVI. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, By D. APPLETON & COMPANY, In the Clerk s Office of the District Court of the Southern District of ft Yorl 155469 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS, 13. Ut, &c. continued. ‘That nobody, &c. > [Vocab. of Phrases followed by ut.] ). 14. Quin after negative sentences. [Vocab. of Verbs, &c. followed by quin.] . 41 15. Quominus. [Vocab. of Verbs followed by quominus.] . 43 VI. 16. Interrogative Sentences.*. 45 17. Interrogative Words. 45 18. Dependent Questions. . 46 19. Double Questions. An in single questions. 47 20. May, can, &c. as principal Verbs. 49 ^11. 21. Apposition. 52 22. Nominative after the Verb. Attraction of the Predicate. [Vocab. of Apposition Verbs.] . 64 23. Dative after esse . 56 X CONTENTS. 8JCC f. PAGE VIII. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. IX. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. X. 35. 36. XI. 37. 38. XII. 39. XIII. 40. 41. XIV. 42. XV. 43. XVI. 44. XVII. 45. 46. 47. XVIII. 48. 49. 50. 51. XIX. 52. XX. 53. 54. XXI. 55. 56. 57. YXII. 58. 59. The Genitive. The Genitive continued. Partitives. Genitivus Qualitatis. Opus est. Summus mons, &c. (64). The Genitive after Adjectives . The Genitive continued . The Genitive continued. The Genitive continued. Impersonals with gen.. The Dative. [Vocab. of Adjectives with dat., &c.]. The Dative continued. [Vocab. of Verbs governing the dat.] The Dative continued. [Vocab. of Compounds of esse.J-» • ) [Vocab. of Verbs that take<7a£. or acc. 84.].> The Dative continued. Verbs with two constructions -•• • [Vocab. of Verbs that take dat. of person with acc. of thing; or acc. of pers. with abl. of thing. —Vocab. of > Verbs with different constructions in different mean¬ ings.] . Verba that take a second Dative. Est mihi nomen . [Vocab. of Verbs followed by two Datives.]. The Accusative. [Vocab. of transitive Compounds of in- > trans. Verbs.].) The Accusative continued. The Ablative. The Ablative continued. [Vocab. of Verbs governing the abl.] The Vocative. Attraction of the Vocative. The Passive Voice. The Passive Voice continued. Time. Place. Space. Gerunds and Partic. in dus. [ Epistola scribenda.] . . [Vocab. of words following the constr. of the proper C names of places, 122. J. . Participles. Ablative Absolute. Participles continued. Participles expressing a purpose . Participles continued. The Supines. Pronouns . Pronouns continued. Is, hic, iste, ilie . Pronouns continued. On the translation of any . Pronouns continued. On the prefixes and affixes of the Inter- gatives • .. Comparison. Remarks on some of the Tenses. Remarks on the Tenses continued... Forms of Conditional Propositions (435). Conditional Propositions continued. Conditional Propositions in dependent sentences. On Oblique Narration. Oblique Narration continued. Mood in subordinate Clauses. Dependence on an infinitive . 58 60 66 69 70 74 76 79 82 86 88 89 90 93 96 99 102 104 107 110 115 117 124 126 125 131 133 137 140 142 145 149 152 156 160 162 165 CONTENTS. XI SECT. PAGE. XXIII. 60 Qui with Subjunctive. [Vocab. of phrases, &c., with which qui takes the subj.]. 169 61. Qui with the Subjunctive continued. 171 XXIV. 62. Quum with the Indicative...^ [Vocab. of Conjunctions that govern the subj. 494.]_ \ 174 XXV. 63. Antequam and Priusquam . 179 XXVI. 64. Dum, donee , quoad , &c. [Vocab. of Adverbs with gen.]_181 XXVII. 65. Quod . 183 XXVIII. 66. The Roman Calendar.186 XXIX. 67. Connection of Propositions by the Relative, <£c. 189 XXX. 68. On the Roman way of reckoning money. 192 69. On the division of the A$ } the method of reckoning fractions, interest, &c. 194 Tables for Reference. I. Genders. 196 II. Formation of the Perfect and Supine. 197 Table of Differences of Idiom, &c. 202 Questions on the Cautions. 211 Questions on the Syntax. 214 ’ ,»* • ' - . . A - • ' . . mm . ' • % INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. On the Arrangement of Words in a Latin Sentence. 1. The general distinction between the English and Latin Grder is this : t 2. OO” In Latin the governed and dependent words generally stand before the words on which they depend; so that in simple sentences, the verb, when not particularly emphatic , stands at the end of the sentence. 3. Thus in simple narrative, after the conjunction comes the subject (nom. case); then the governed cases with adverbs and expressions of time , place , manner , &c., and last of all the verb. 4. But if the verb is emphatic, it must be placed earlier in the sentence.—Quod non dedit fortuna, id non eripit. Mirabile videtur, quod non rideat haruspex, &c. Non intelligunt homines, quam magnum, vectigal sit parsimonia. For it must always be remembered that— • 5. 0^7" The degree of prominence and emphasis to be given to a wordy is that which mainly determines its position in the sen¬ tence. —And, * 6. a) The two emphatic positions in a sentence are the beginning and the end; “ by the former our attention is excited^ and on the latter it rests.” (Crom- bie.) 6) Add to this, that the more unusual a position is for any word, the more emphatic it is for that word. Thus, “arbores seret diligens agricola, quarum adspiciet baccam ipse nunquam.” (Cic.) c) A word that generally stands close by another receives emphasis by separation from it; especially if it be thus brought near the beginning or end of a sentence. Voluptatem' percepi maximam'. Propterea quod aliud iter haberent nullum'. hEdui equites ad Csesarem omned rever¬ tuntur. d) Another principle affecting the position of words is the harmonious arrangement of syllables; the flow of the sentence. 14 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. i • 7. Genitive. The genitive, whether dependent on a sub- stantive or adjective, stands first if it be the more emphatic; if not, not. But it is rendered more emphatic by separation see 6, c). a) It probably somewhat prefers the position before the govern ing noun, when that is not decidedly emphatic. b) When the governing substantive has an adjective with it, the order is generally adj., gen., subst. (Vera animi magnitudo.) 8. Attributive and its substantive. Of these the more emphatic stands first. But see 6, c). a. A very short precedes a longer word: hence the demon¬ stratives usually stand before their nouns, and monosyllable sub stantives before their adjectives. 9. Apposition. Here too the more emphatic precedes: but generally the word in apposition stands last. a. This is particularly the case with titles, &c., in apposition to proper names . Q. Mucius Augur ; Agis rex; Pythagoras Philosophus. But, urbs Roma ; though Cyprus insula, Hypanis fuvius. 10. Words dependent on Adjectives. Here too the more emphatic precedes, with something of a preference for placing the dependent words first. 11. Ablative absolute. The more emphatic first. 12. Infinitive dependent on Verb. The more emphatic first; generally the infinitive. a. Of two infinitives, the more emphatic first. 13. Adverbs. Generally, immediately before the words they belong to. Quoque immediately after its word. 14. Words that modify the meaning of an adjective are usually placed between it and the substantive. (Proelio magis ad eventum secundo, quam, &c.) 15. Opposition and contrasted notions. a) A repeated word, or a word akin to a word already used in the sentence, is generally brought as near to that word as possible. Timor timorem pellit. Nulla virtus virtuti contraria est. Virtutum in alia alius vult excellere. Aliis aliunde est periculum. b) Of two contrasted clauses or groups of words, of parallel construction, the order of the first is often reversed in the second * INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 15 so that two of the antithetical words are as far apart as possible. Fragile corpus animus sempiternus movet. Ratio nostra consen¬ tit ; pugnat oratio. Quse me moverunt , movissent eadem te pro¬ fecto. # 0 Enim, vero, autem, quoque, quidem (with of course the enclitics), cannot be the first words of a clause. PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. L. The common concords are taken for granted; that— (1.) A verb agrees with its nominative case in number and person. (2.) An adjective, pronoun, or participle, agrees with its substantive in gender, number and case. (3.) A transitive verb, whether active or deponent, takes after it an accusative of the person or thing acted upon. (4.) Verbs of existence (such as be, become, turn out } &c.); passive verbs of being called, considered, chosen, &c., take a substantive or adjective after them in the nomi¬ native case. (5.) The thing by which stands in the ablative; the person by whom, in the ablative with the preposition a or ab. (6.) One substantive depending upon another is put in the genitive case. * Obs. When a pronoun is the nominative case to a verb, it is not expressed in Latin ; except for the sake of emphasis or particular distinction. * (a) In the same way the possessive pronoun is seldom expressed, when there can be no doubt as to whose the thing is. See 3 (a). • (0) When there is any distinction to be expressed, as, for instance, when I am opposed to you,* the pronouns must be expressed. * The pron. is expressed, even when the distinction is only between two ac* tions of the same person. Ejeci ego te armatis hominibus, non dejeci. 18 NOMINATIVE CASE AND VERB. [§ 1 . 2 - 4 . I. § 1. Nominative Case and Verb. 2. (ti) When two or more nominative cases singular come to¬ gether, they take a plural verb,* which agrees with the nominative case of the most worthy b person. ( b ) The verbs est and sunt are often omitted. 3. ( a ) Et ego c et Balbus sustulimus manus, Both I and Balbus lifted up our hands. (b) Amici veterrimi optimi, The oldest friends are the best. 4 . Vocabulary 1. And, et; que enclitic; atque ; If, si. Both—and, et—et. Hand, mSnus, us, f. Sister, sbror, oris, f. Well, b6nS. Hunger fames, is, f. Seasoning, > condimentum, i. n. Sauce, ) • Army, exercitus, us, m. a The verb is often however in the singular, agreeing with one of the nomi¬ natives, and being understood with the other. This is the common construc¬ tion with et—et; quum — turn, &c., when both the nominatives are singular , and of the same person. b The first person is said to be more worthy than the second, the second than the third. c For “ Balbus and /,” the Romans, putting first, said “ Ego et Balbus .” When therefore Cardinal Wolsey said “Ego et Rex meus,” he was a good grammarian but bad courtier. H d Et joins words each of which is considered independently , and as of equal importance: atque ( = adque) or ac, which is an abridged (and less emphatic; form of the same word, adds a notion that is, if anything, of more importance than the preceding one (= ‘and also,’ 1 and moreover’): que joins a word closely to another, as an appendage to it, as belonging to it, and often as forming one complex notion with it. When et connects principal clauses, subordinate ones and single words must be connected by que , or (if similar notions) atque. Atque is used before vowels or consonants, but especially before vowels. Ac is used before consonants (though not very often before the k sounds); but not before vowels or h. Mr. Allen shows that ac (though very rarely met with before g, q) is not very uncommon in Cicero before c. So also Zumpt. ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. 19 § 2 . 5 - 9 .] War, A Gaul, Many, Very many, Caesar, To lift up, To be in good health, > To be well, 5 To wage (properly to carry), To conquer, bellum, i. n. Gallus, i m. multi, ae, a. permulti,* ae, a. Caesar, CaesSris, m. tollSre, sustul, sublat. vSlere, valu, valit. gSrSre, gess, gest. vincgre, vie, vict. Exercise 1. 5. If you and the army f are-in-good-health, it is well (p. 14, 13). Both you and Balbus lifted up (your) hands. Both you and I (1 Ohs. (5) have waged many' wars. Both you and Balbus have waged very-many' wars. The best' sauce (is hunger.) The Gauls were conquered by Csesar. Hands were lifted up both by you and by Balbus. If you and your sister are-in-good- health, it is well. II. § 2. Accusative with Infinitive . 6. The infinitive takes before it not the nominative, but the accusative, s 7. Many sentences that in English are joined to a verb by the conjunc¬ tion ‘ thatf are expressed in Latin by the accusative and infinitive. 8. In turning such sentences into Latin ‘ that * * must be omitted; the English nominative turned into the accusative; and the English verb into the infinitive mood of the same tense. 9. The accusative with the infinitive follows verbs ( sentiendi et decla¬ randi) of feeling, knoicing, wishing, hearing, believing, thinking, <&c.; and such expressions as, it is certain, manifest, true, &c. * * Per in composition with an adjective, adds to it the mswaiin.g' of ‘ very? * f Exercitusque. Que must always be appended to the io tv r of the two words connected by it. * This idiom is not uncommon in English, though far less common than in I-a tin. “ I ordered him to be dismissed ” (for ‘ I ordered that he should be dismissed ’). “ I saw him to be a knave ” (for ‘ I saw that he was a knave ’)• 20 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. [§ 2. 10-13, 10. (a) Respondeo, placere et milii locum, I answer that the place pleases me too. ( b ) Respondit, placere et sibi locum, He answered that th& place pleased him too. (c) Sentimus calere ignem , nivem esse albam, dulce mei, We know-by-our-senses, that fire is hot; that snow is white, honey sweet. 11. Vocabulary 2. To answer, To understand, To deny, To sin, I remember, To know-by-the-senses, To injure, offend-against, Law, Cautions. respondere, respond, respons. intelligere, intellex, intellect, negare, av, at. peccare, av, at. mgmini, Imper. memento; pi. mementote, sentire, sens, sens, violare, av, at. lex, legis,/. * 12. [C. i.] 0 ^7* Him, her, them (or he, she, they, when they are to be translated by the accusative ) must be trans¬ lated by the proper case of sui, when they and the nominative of the verb stand for the same person. Also, in the same case, his, hers, its, theirs , must be translated by suus. 13 . ( He says that it pleases him. C He said that it pleased him. In English the dependent verb (by a kind of attraction) assumes the past form, when the verb it depends on is in a past tense. Hence- % 0^7" [C. ii.] In a sentence with ‘that 5 dependent on a past tense, the perfect is to be translated by the present (and imperfect) infinitive, whenever the notion expressed by it is not to be described as over before the time of the principal verb. h i OO 5 ” [C. hi.] ‘ Should’ after ‘ that’ is to be translated by the present infinitive, when it does not express either duty or a future event. % h Thus “he said that it pleased him”—when 1 at the time of his saying it! ( placere ) : before the time of his saying it ? ( placuisse ). § 3 . 14 - 17 .] ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE 21 Exercise 2. 14. He answered that he 11 * * had waged many' wars. He denies that he has sinned (or : says that he has not sinned). 2 f He says that he does not 2 understand. He says that Caesar will not 2 offend-against the laws. Remember that hunger is the best sauce. He answered that he understood. 2 ’ He answered, that both you and Balbus were-in-good-health. Both you and Balbus have sinned. § 3. Accusative with Infinitive continued. 15. (a) After hope, promise , undertake , &c., the future infinutive * us used with the accusative of the pronoun ; and (b) after pretend, the acc. of the pronoun. 16. (a) Sperat plerumque adolescens diu se victurum (esse), k A young man generally expects to live a long time. (b) Simulat se furere, He pretends to be mad. • 0^7” [C. iv.] ‘ Would,’ * should,’ after a past tense are future forms : ( He says that he will come. ( He said that he would come. 17. Vocabulary 3. A business, A journey, To hope, To come, To promise, To undertake, engage, negotium, i, n. Iter, YtlnSris, n. sperare, av, at. vgnlre, ven, vent. polliceri, pollicitus ; promittSre, promis, promiss.t recipSre, io, recep, recept. * These Numerals, followed by a curve, refer to the Cautions. ' t These Numerals refer to the Table of Differences of Idiom. i For ‘ he promises to come ) = he promises that he will come. He hopes to live ~ he hopes that he shall live. He pretends to be mad he pretends that he is mad. * With the compound infinitives esse is often omitted. , I Promittere (to give it forth) is the general word for promising , whether good or evil. Polliceri is to offer from one’s own free-will and inclinations, used only of promising good. Polliceor being used for free and gracious promises, 22 AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVE. [§ 4 . 18 - 21 , conflcgre, io, confec, confect. simulare, 1 " av, at furgre, (neut.: no perf. or supine .) To finish, accomplish, To pretend, To be mad, To (my, your, &c.) satis¬ faction, satisfactorily, successfully, To have a prosperous voyage, ex sententia navigare. ex sententia" Exercise 3. 18. Solon pretended to be mad. I will pretend to bemad. He promised to come. I engage to finish the business to your satisfac¬ tion. I hope that you will have a prosperous voyage. The business has been finished by Balbus. I hope to finish the business. He was pretending to be mad. I promised to finish the business. He answered, that Caius had had a prosperous voyage. He answered that he would*' finish the business. He says that he will not 2 come. He has accomplished his journey satisfactorily . III. § 4. Agreement of Adjective with Substantive. 19. (a) When an adjective agrees with several singular nouns, it will be in the plural number, and agree with the most worthy. 20. (b) If the substantives are things that have not life , the adjective is usually in the neuter gender. 21. (c) When the noun is ‘ man ,’ ‘ woman / ‘ thing, 9 it is seldom expressed in Latin. * [C. v.] ‘ Thing 9 should be expressed by ‘ res 5 (fern.) when the adjective alone would leave it doubtful whether men or things were meant. ^ Thus ‘of many things' not multorum , but multarum rerum. promitto would naturally be often used of promising what has been requested. Hence- Ultro polliceor ; promitto (ssepe) rogatus : Nec mala polliceor, mala sed promittere possum. m Quae non sunt simulo; quee sunt ea dissimulantur. “ The pronoun should be expressed (ex mea sententid , &c.) whenever to le&Vf It out would cause an ambiguity. ‘23 §4. 2*2-25.] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVE. 22. (a) Castore t Pollux ex equis pugnare Vi si sunt, Castor and Pollux were seen to fight on horseback, ifi) Inter se contraria sunt beneficium et injuria, A benefit and an injury are contrary to each other. (c) Boni sapientesque ex civitate pelluntur, The good and wise are banished (literally, driven from the state). ( d ) Praeterita mutare non possumus, We cannot change the past. (e) Omnia mea mecum porto, I am carrying all my property with me. 23. * Obs. 1. The neuter plural without a substantive is generally used in Latin, where we use the singular. Thus- much, very much, multa, permulta, little (few things), pauca, Obs. 2. The neuter adj. every thing, the past, omnia, praeterita, very little, perpauca. 24. servare, av, at. maledicere, dix, diet ( dat .). accusare, av, at. fidem fallSre; fallPre, fefelli, y falsum, deceive, beguile. fidem praestare ; praestare, praestiti 1 , praestitum, et praestatum. mentiri, mentitus, multa mentiri. contra officium, (it is against duty.) * [C. vili.] 1 For ’ before a substantive or pronoun followed by the injin., is not to be translated. The construction is the acc. with injin . a It is a sin \ ^ or a not io P arents< ( that a boy should not obey his parents. Exercise 6. 39. It is pleasant to be praised. It is a breach of duty not to keep promises. It is a breach of duty to praise what ( plur .) is disgraceful. I hear that you keep your promises, a thing which (37, c) all' good men do. I hear that you are going to keep your word. It is disgraceful to break one’s word. It is one thing to revile, another to accuse. It is certain that Balbus has deserved well of me. It is a breach of duty to lie. Both you and Balbus have uttered many falsehoods. It is disgraceful to lanish the good and wise. It is easy (for me) to carry all my property with me. 4) It is a breach of duty for a man to revile men. I have praised, not blamed you ( note *, p. 17). * * Homo is the general term for man , i. e. for a human being , distinguished from other living creatures. Vir is man as distinguished from icoman. Homo is often used contemptuously: vir , respectfully ; a man with a manly character, y Distinction between fallo and decipio: Nulla fallentis culpa saepisslm e fallor ; At quum decipiar , culpam deceptor habebit. z Cic. has preestaturus. v a But we shall see below that if ‘ for ’ follows immediately after ‘ it is,’ it must De translated by the genitive. ‘ It is for a rich man to do so and so divitis est. &c. $ 7 . 40 - 44 .] THE RELATIVE. 20 §7. Relative continued. (Fundamental Rule for the employ¬ ment of subjunctive tenses.) * Wherever dependent verbs are used in the subjunctive, the following is the fundamental rule for the use of the tenses. * 40. 0^7“ The imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunctive are the regular attendants of the past tenses of the indicative. But—the perfect definite b (or perfect with ‘ have’) is con¬ sidered a present tense. Hence the present, future, and perfect with ‘ have 1 are followed by the present , or (for a completed action) the perfect of the subjunctive. 0 00“ The future perfect is not a subjunctive tense. 41. The only future subjunctive is the part, in rus with sim, essem , &c. But where we use a future in a dependent sentence, the Romans often used the present or imperfect subjunctive. (On some English Relative forms.) * 42. ‘ That ’ is often a relative pronoun. (Especially after superlatives; the interrogative who; the same; and when both persons and things are meant.) % 43. (a) ‘ As’ is often, in effect, a relative pronoun. The relative ‘as’ must be translated by qui after idem; by qualis , quantus , quot , after talis, tantus, tot, respectively. » 44. (1) ‘ BuV is often, in effect, a relative pronoun, when it follows universal negatives , as nemo , nullus , nihil. (2) The relative ‘ but ’ is to be translated by quin with the subjunctive, (c) (3) When ‘ but ’ might be substituted for a relative with not , the relative and not may be translated by quin ; d if the relative is in the nom. (or even acc.) case. » b The perfect definite is used of actions done in some space of time, a part of which is still present. c Thu3 then the Present Future Perfect with are followed by the have ’ Present subj. Perfect subj. (for a completed action). Imperfect subj. Pluperfect subj. (for an action completed before the time spoken of). * With other cases than the nominative and accusative, the use of the relative Imperfect Perfect Pluperfect ttre followed by the 30 RELATIVE CONTINUED. [§ 7 . 45 , 45 * [C ix.] fj* ‘4 s’ and ‘ but ’ are often (in effect) relatives. % [C. x.] HjT ‘ Such ’ in English is often used where size is meant rather than quality. ‘ Such — as’ should then be translated into Latin by tantus — quantus ; not talis — qualis. 45. (a) Talis est, qualis semper fuit, He is such as he has „ ever been. {b) Idem est qui semper fuit, He is the same that (or as) he has ever been. (c) Nemo est, quin 0 te dementem putet, There is no one but thinks you mad (or, who does not think you mad). 46. Vocabulary 7. The same, Rule, Expediency, Expedient, Honor, the honorable, honorable conduct, Nobody, no one, To think, deem, This, That, Nearly, Another, Never, Before, To be able, can, Wave, * (a) Sunt qui putent (Obs. Idem, eadem, idem; gen. ejusdem, &c. regula, a e,f. utilitas, atis,jf. utilis, is, e. honestas, atis,^/*. nemo, inis ; nemo = ne hbmo. putare, av, at. hie, heec, hoc : g. hujus, &c. ille, illa, illud ; g. illius, &c. f6re, alius, a, ud; g. alius, D. alii, &c. nunquam, antea, posse, p'dtui.f fluctus, us, m. (See. 33.) subj. after * sunt quV ) there are some who think Exercise 7. * [C. xi.] §£jt ‘ That’ when it stands for a substantive which has been expressed in the preceding clause, is not to be translated. * * HjT The Imperfect and Pluperfect of the Subjunct. are the regular at¬ tendants of the past tenses of the Indicative. with non is commonly preferred. Z. When qui non must be used will be ex¬ plained below. 6 Quin is qui ne{ — ut non). The demonstr. pronoun (which is the real nom.) is sometimes expressed : as in 88, (a). f This verb is compounded of an old adj. potis , neut. pote, with sum. 1 Pot’ is prefixed to the tenses of sum , ts being changed into ss, and pot-esse, pot- essem shortened into posse, possem (posses, &c.). The perfect tenses regular from votui ( —potisfui). No imperat. : the part, potens is used as an adjective- RELATIVE CONTINUED. 31 § 8 . 47 - 51 .] 47. This is the same as that. The rule of expediency is the same as that 1 u of honour. This is nearly the same as another thing. You are such as I have always thought you. There is nobody hut knows, that the Gauls were conquered by Caesar. There is no one who does not (45, c ) understand, that you are pretending. There is no one hut knows that the past (23, Obs. 1,) cannot be changed There is no one hut knows, that these things are contrary to each other. Both you and I are such as we have ever been. The waves were such x0) as I had never seen before. -There are some who think you mad (46, a). There were some who blamed me. § 8. Relative continued. * 48. (a, h) When the relative connects (by means of to he or a verb of naming , &c.) two substantives of different genders, &c. it generally agrees with the latter, rather than with its ante¬ cedent. * * (This is the rule; agreement with the antecedent the exception. Z. K., &c.) * 49. But when the second substantive is a foreign word, the relative generally agrees with its antecedent. (Z.)s (Jovis stella , quce qxxs&av dicitur.) 50. (a) Domicilia conjuncta, quas urhes dicimus, Contiguous dwellings, which we call cities. (h) Tliehce, quod Bceotise caput est, Thehes, which is the capital of Boeotia 51. Vocabulary 8. Glory, gloria, ae,/. Honorable, hbnestus, a, um. Star, stella, ae; astrum, i, which is properly a Greek word; and sidus, 6ris, n, a ? Kruger approves of Zumpt’s rule; but thinks that we cannot go beyond this in determining when agreement with the antecedent should be preferred. Bremi says: “videntur id (pronomen) ad antecedens substantivum referre si ad vocabulum respiciunt ; sin vero ad rem, ad consequens. 5 ’ But Kruger shows that even if this should explain Cicero’s practice, it is obviously at variance with that of other writers. 32 RELATIVE CONTINUED. [§ 9 . 52 , 53 . Perpetual, lasting File, Island, Sea, Ocean, As it were, The world, Head, capital city, To reject. To admire, wonder at, To be washed. To inhabit, To call (in sense of naming), constellation, and also,one of the great heavenly luminaries, e. g. the sun. the moon, Sirius, &c. sempiternus, a, um. ignis, is, m. insQla, a e,f. mSre, is, n. oceanus, i, m. quasi. orbis terrae, or terrarum ; orbis, is, m. c£put, itis, n. repudiare, av, at. admirari, admiratus, circumfundi, circumfusus (literally, to be poured around ; and either the island or sea is said circumfundi), incolere, incolu, incult, vocare, h appellare, nominare, av, at. Exercise 8. 52. He rejects glory, which is the most honorable fruit' of true 7 virtue {Gen. before fructus). He is admiring those perpetual fires, which we call stars. The island is washed by the sea, which you (pi.) call ocean. We inhabit a great island, as it were,* which we call the world. There is nobody but 9) thinks Rome the capital' of the world. k There is no one but thinks that Balbus has deserved well of us.-There are some who laugh. There are some who laughed (46, a). § 9. Relative continued.—Relative ivith superlative : tl The first who —” 53. (a) When the antecedent has a superlative * with it, the adjective is generally put in the relative clause. 4 * h Vocare, appellare , nominare are all to call; but vocare has, beside this , the meaning of to call = summon ; appellare , that of appealing to, of calling to for aid ; nominare, that of naming, in the sense of appointing or electing. i Quasi should stand bet ween great and island. i k Orbis terrarum, rather than terrae , when there is a decided reference to other lands. * The same rule holds good of other adjectives and of appositions. RELATIVE CONTINUED. 33 §9. 54-57.] * 54. ( 'b ) To express “ the first person who did a Cdng” the Romans did not use a relative sentence, but made primus agree with the nominative of the principal verb. 55. (a) Volsci civitatem, quam habebant optimam, perdiderunt, TheVolsci lost the best city they had. (b) Primus mala nostra sensit , He icas the first person who perceived our evils. 56. f Eng. He was the first who did this : (or,) He was the first ta j do this. Eat. He the first did this. Vocabulary 9. fidelis, is, e. servus, i, m. Faithful, Slave, God, Deus,i i, m, et,/. Fire ( = conflagration), incendium, i, n. To help, a person in perplexity, &c., subvenire, ven, vent m (dat. of person). To lose, amittere, amis, amiss; perdere, n per- did, perdit. An opportunity, occasio, onis,/. To lose an opportunity, occasionem amittere. Now = already, jam. Such is your temperance ( quae tua est temperantia, With your usual tern- ^ qua es temperantia, 0 perance ( pro tua temperantia. As fiar as I know, quod sciam. Exercise 9. 57. He was the first who promised to help 3 me. They will lose the best thing they have. I will send the most faithful slave I have. He was the first who denied that there are' gods. The fire is such 10) as 1 have never seen before. The constellations are. the same, that they have ever been. He was the first who undertook to finish 3 the business. I hope that you, such is your temperance , are already well. No one, as far as I know , has l Deus, V. Deus, Plur. ( Dei ), Dii, Dt. Dat. (Deis), Diis, Dis. m That is, to come under a thing; i. e. to support it. i n Amittere is simply to lose. Perdere is to lose actively; i. e. by some exer • lion of one’s own will, &c. Hence perdere is often to destroy. Activi perdo, passivi amittere possum. • Or, cujus es temperantia. a* 34 UT, NE. [§ 10 . 58-60 said this. Sestius was not corner as far as I know. I have lost no opportunity, as far as I know. -There are some who have lost the opportunity (46, a). V. * § 10. Ut, Ne expressing a purpose. 58. (a) ‘ That ’ followed by may or might expresses a purpose, and must be translated by ut with the subjunctive. » ( b ) ‘ That ’ followed by ‘ not ,’ or any negative word (the verb having may or might for its auxiliary), must be translated by ne with the subjunctive. 59. Vocabulary 10. % It is all over with, News of the town, To send or write news, Courtesy, Courageously, Virtuously, honorably, To cry out, To live, To die, To obey, To make the same promise, actum est de (with the ablat.). res urbanae. perscrib&re, scrips, script, = to write fully. humanitas, atis,/. fortiter, honeste, clamare, av, at. vivere, vix, viet, mori, ior, mortuus, parere, paru, parlt (dat.). idem polliceri. 60. (a) Multi alios laudant, ut ab illis laudentur , Many men praise others , that they may be praised by them. (h) Gallinae avesque reliquas pennis fovent pullos ne frigore Icedantur, Hens and other birds cherish their young with their feathers , that they may not be hurt hy the cold . [C. xiii.] 00“ ‘ To’ is omitted after many verbs, which thus seem* to govern two accusatives. p [C. xii.] Intransitive verbs of motion often form their perfect active with ‘am,’ not ‘ have .’ Thus, am came, was come , are the perfect and pluper¬ fect active (respectively). i Such verbs are: give } vouchsafe , assign, grant , send. * UT. QUO. NE. 30 § 11. 61-66.] ' When a verb seems to govern two accusatives, try whether you can¬ not put in to* before one of them. Exercise 10. 61. That you may be able to die courageously, obey' the laws of virtue. He was pretending to be mad, 3 that he might not be banished. He cries out, that it is all over with the army. You promised that you would send me all the news of the town . That you may die courageously', live virtuously [p. 14, 15, (&)]. He praises' Caius, that he may himself be praised by Caius. He will praise' Caius, that he may be praised by Caius. No one, as far as I know, 10 had praised 7 Balbus, that he might himself be praised by Balbus. You, such is your courtesy , 9 promised to finish 3 the business. You, with your usual courtesy , 9 made me the same pro¬ mise 12 as before.-There were some who laughed. * §11. Ut expressing a consequence. Quo. Ne prohibitive. < 62. (a) ‘ That ’ after such, so, &c. must be translated by 1 ut ’ with the subjunctive. \ After these words, ‘that* does not express a purpose, but a conse¬ quence; and the English verb will not have ‘ may ) or ‘might’ with it. « 63. (£) * That,’ when the sentence has a comparative in it, is translated by quo ; which is equivalent to ut eo (‘ that by this ’). s 64. ‘ Not ’ in prohibitions is ne. « 65. (c) ‘ Not ’ therefore with the imperative, or subjunctive used imperatively, must be translated by ne. • Obs. |5* The subjunctive present is more commonly used than the imperative. * 66. ( d ) ‘ As ’ before the infin., and after so, such, must be translated by ut .* Except in*this idiom (where ‘as’ expresses a consequence conceived as resulting on a particular supposition), ut, ‘as,’ goes with the Indicative. * “ He gave him a penny.” What did he give 1 to whom ? \ • It will be seen afterwards, that qui (= ut is) is generally used in sentences of this kind; also that ‘ as not to . . . &c.’ after a negative sentence is quin. 85 36 UT. QUO. NE. [§ 11 . 67-70 * 67. 0^7” No ut or ne goes with the infinitive. 68. (a) Tanta vis probitatis est, ut eam vel in hoste diligamus, The power of integrity is so great, that we love it even in an enemy. (h) Medico puto aliquid dandum esse, quo sit studiosior, 1 think that some thing should he given to the physician, that he may he the more attentive. (c) Ne multa discas, sed multum, Do not learn many things, hut much. (d) Nemo tam potens est, ut omnia quse velit efficere possit, Nohody is so powerful as to be able to perform all he wishes. 69. Vocabulary 11. Daily, Even mind, resignation, Young, Age, time of life, About, Agricultural operations or affairs, Of such a kind, Wind, Season, Multitude, To meditate, meditation, To leave, To learn, To appear, seem, To govern = moderate, limit, To number, quotidie, indies, or in dies.* gequus animus. juvenis, junior = juvenior. aetas, atis,y. de (governs ablat.). res rusticae. ejusmbdi. ventus, i. m. tempestas, atis,./". multitudo, inis,,/. meditari, meditatus. relinquere, rellqu, relict. discSre, didic. videri, visus. moderari, atus (acens.). numerare, av, at. 1 Exercise 11. 70. Meditate upon 7) this daily, that you may leave life witn an even mind. He told many falsehoods' 2 about his age, that he might appear younger (than he is). Do not learn many things, * t From quot dies (as many days as there are ); compare the Greek hcriptpat. Jn dies (daily) — day after day , day by day ; when, that is, we speak of a thing increasing or diminishing daily. In ‘in dies? therefore, or ‘ in dies singulos? each day is considered as a term of a progressive series. Quotidie is ‘ every day,daily? in both senses; eilher, that is, when the simple repetition of an action is to be expressed, or its repetition combined with progressive increase ®r decrease. UT WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 612. 71-77.J 31 but useful things. He spoke much (23, 1,) that he might. De thought wise. Agricultural affairs are of such a kind that the winds and seasons govern them. u I know that my father does not learn many things, but much. I will live virtuously, that I may die the more courageously. T He lived virtuously, that he might leave life with the greater resignation. The multitude of stars is such I0) that they cannot be numbered.-There are some who promise to help me. § 12. English Infinitive translated by ‘ ut ’ with the subjunctive. *■ 71. 03= The Infin. never expresses a purpose in prose Latin. * 72. ( a ) The English Infinitive expressing a purpose may be ‘vanslated by ut with the subjunctive. * 73. 74 * 75 Whenever the English infinitive may be turned into in order that, or that, with may or might, it is to be translated by ut with the subjunctive. Thus, “ I am come to see you” “I am come in order that I may see you.” Here my seeing you is obviously the purpose of my coming. But in many verbs this relation of the purpose is more obscure. For instance- I advise } I exhort ) I ask ) I beg, &c. ) I command you to do it = you to do it = you to do it = ( I advise or exhort you, in order t that you may do it. < I ask, or beg you, in order that you ( may do it. , ( 1 command you, in order that you l . may do it. \ strive to do it = I strive in order that I may do it. By ‘ ut ’ translate infinitive With ask, command, advise, and strive. But never be this rule forgot, Put ‘ne’ for ‘uV when there’s a ‘not.’ 76 But of verbs signifying ‘to command? jubeo takes acc. and infin. —[See however note h 219.] n (a) Romulus, ut civium numerum augeret, asylum pate¬ fecit, Romulus, to increase the number of his citizens, opened an asylum. d iDr'ls’ is the proper pronoun for the third person, when there is no Histinction to be expressed between a nearer and remoter object, and no refer- aace to be strongly marked. * The neuter of the comparative adjective is used for the comparative adverb. 38 UT WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 12 . 78 . 9 (b) Militibus imperavit, ut clypeos hastis percuterent, He commanded the soldiers to strike their shields with their spears. (c) Enitar, ut vincam, I will strive to conquer. ( d ) Magno opere te hortor, ut hos de philosophia libros studiose legas, I earnestly advise you to read alien* tively these books about philosophy . (e) Capram monet, ut in pratum descendat , He advises the she-goat to come down into the meadow . (f) Hoc te rogo, ne* demittas animum, I beg of you not to be disheartened. (Literally, not to depress your mind.) rc. xiv.] When 1 that ’ introduces a consequence, ‘ that not 5 is ut non, not ne. 0 That—not a purpose . ne. — consequence. . .ut non. 78. Vocabulary 12. (Verbs followed by ut.) To ask, To strive, To advise, To warn, To exhort, To command, To charge or commission, To direct, tell, when spoken of an instructor, rbgare, av, at. nlti, more commonly eniti, nisus, and nixus. suadere, suas, suas (dat. of person), monere, monu, monit ( acc. of person), hortari, adhortari, tatus. imperare, w av, at (dat.). mandare, av, at (dat.). praecipere, io, cep, cept. * * For ne, ut ne is found with no perceptible difference of meaning. Z. Orotc - fend thinks that Cicero uses ut ne in the following cases: (1) when the negative does not so much belong to the whole clause , as to a particular part of it, e. g. th9 verb, or quis, quid ; (2) when a demonstrative pron. or pronominal adverb is expressed or implied in the preceding clause; (3) when without ut, ne would stand by a word to which ne is often appended, as non, an. He says that ut ne is found, though less commonly than in Cicero, in Plautus, Terence, Ovid, &c.: but four times (and that in doubtful passages) in Livy, and not at all in Caesar and Tacitus. » w Jubere, to order , bid (with the notion of the thing being right, or of the person having a right to order); imperare, to command with power; praecipere , to direct, from being qualified to do so by superior knowledge ; mandare, to give a charge or commission to a person ; edicere , to declare officially as a magistrate, to publish a proclamation. UT WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 89 § 13. 79, 80.] To order, by a proclamation, or edict, to publish an edict, To decree, Perseverance, Fury, Senate, Dress, To return, To hold a levy of troops, to levy troops, Consul, To assist, To suffer, To take by storm, By letter, edlcSre, edix, edict. decerngre, crev, cret. perseverantia, a e,J. ftiror, oris, m. senatus, us, m. vestitus, us, m. redire* (re and eo). delectum habere. consul, consulis, m. jQvare, juvi, jutum, pati, ior, passus, per vim expugnare, per literas. Exercise 12. 79. I ask you to do this. I asked you to do this. Strive to assist me. He is striving to govern the winds and seasons. He warned Caesar not to believe the Gauls. Do not believe the Gauls. Do not lie. Religion warns men not to lie . It is certain, that the boy is striving to learn. I will exhort the boy to learn. We know that virtue and vice are contrary to each other. He pub- lished-an-edict, that the Senate should return to its (usual) dress. He had charged Trebonius by letter not to suffer Marseilles? to be taken by storm. His perseverance is as great as 9) his fury. The Senate decrees, that the Consuls should levy troops.—There are some who lie. § 13. Ut, &c. continued. % 80. (a) In sentences where ‘ ut ’ should be used (to express a purpose), if a negative follows, ne takes its place, and the affirma¬ tive pronoun or adverb is used. Thus— ' * co, ivi (it generally in the compounds), T turn. Pres., eo, is, it; imus, itis, eunt. Imp. ibam. Fut. ibo. Imperat, i. Subj. pres. earn. Imp. irem. Part iens, euntis. Ger. eundi, &c. y Massilia 40 UT. [§ 13 . 81 — 83 . that nobody, that nothing, that no, that never, not, ut nemo, ut nihil, ut nullus, ut nunquam but, ne quis, ne quid, ne ullus, ne unquam. 81. (b) But if the sentence is a consequence, then ut nemo, &c. should be used. 82. (a) Alexander edixit, ne quis ipsum alius, quam Apelles, pingeret, Alexander published an edict, that no other person than Apelles should paint him ( Purpose). (b) Cimon fuit tanta liberalitate, ut nunquam hortis suis custodem imposuerit,* Cimon was (a person) of such liberality, that he never appointed a keeper for his gardens ( Consequence ). S3. Vocabulary 13. It remains, It follows; the next thing is, That (after reliquum est, restat, and sequitur,) To desert, To make this request of you, To leave = go out of, City, Town, First, At first. For the sake of, For my sake, Fear, Unwilling, Glad, joyful, reliquum est, restat, sequitur.t ut (icith subjunctive). deserere, seru, sert. illud te rogare. excedere, cess, cess ( ablat.). urbs, urbis, f. oppidum, 2 i, n. primum. primo. a causa. mea causa. timor, oris, m. invitus, a, um. laetus, a, um. ** ( Lat.) He did it unwilling ; glad; joyful. (Eng.) He did it unwillingly; gladly; joyfully. * The use of the perfect subj. in this example instead of the imperf. will be explained in another place [418. (a)]. It is not to be imitated in doing the exercises. t Absit ut, 1 be it far from me ’ (as given in the earlier editions), belongs to the later poets and Appuleius. Instead of it we should use velim hoc absit; or quod procul absit, inserted parenthetically. „ 1 “ Oppidum proprie infra urbem est but all cities and towns came to De (frequently) denominated oppida except Rome. (Valla, quoted by Crombie.) . a Primo is sometimes used for ‘ first' but not primum for ‘ at first.* C. $ 14 . 34 - 88 .] QUIN. 41 Exercise 13. 84. Religion warns (us) never to break our word. The boy strives to learn nothing. I first make this request of you, to do nothing against your will for my sake. The Consuls publish-a- proclamation, that no one should leave the city. So great was the fear of all men, that 141 no one left the city. The Senate decreed that the Consuls should hold a levy. It remains that I should assist Balbus. There was no one but exclaimed, that it was all over with the army. They had joyfully helped Balbus. -There were some who assisted Balbus. There were some who denied that virtue and vice were contrary to each other. It •/ follows that you deny virtue and vice to be contrary to each other. * § 14. Quin after verbs of doubting, &c. « 85. (a) When ‘ as not 5 with the infinitive follows ‘so ’ or ‘ such 5 in a negative sentence, it is to be translated by ‘ quin ’ with the subjunctive. * §Pr The sentence before quin is always negative. (An interrogative sentence that expects the answer ‘no,’ is in effect a negative sentence.) * 86. (b) ‘But,' ‘but that,'' or ‘ that,’ after verbs of doubting, denying, restraining, &c., in negative sentences, must be trans¬ lated by quin. » 87. (c) Afte: negative sentences the 'participial substantive governed by a pre¬ position (especially after the verbs mentioned in 86) should be trans¬ lated by quin, with subj. 88. (a) Cleanthes negat ullum esse cibum tam gravem, quin is die et nocte concoquatur, Cleanthes says that no food is so heavy, as not to be digested in a day and a night. ( b ) Negari non potest, quin turpius sit fallere quam falli, It cannot be denied, that it is more disgraceful to deceive than to be deceived. (c) Nunquam adspexit, quin fratricidam compellaret, She never saw him without calling him fratricide. Vix inhiberi potuit, quin saxa jaceret, He could scarcely be prevented from throwing stones. 42 QUIN. [§ 14. 89-92. . Vocabulary 14. [Of words, &c., followed by quin.] Not to doubt, There is no doubt, t It cannot be but that, I cannot refrain from, It cannot be denied, To leave nothing undone to, &c. I am not ignorant, World, Design, Sometimes, noft dubitare. non est dubium (it is not doubtful). fieri non potest quin. temperare 'mihi non possum. negari non potest. nihil praetermittere quin. non ignoro. mundus, i, m. consilium, i, n. interdum. Exercise 14. 90. Who douhts that virtue and vice are contrary to each other ? It cannot he denied that it is disgraceful to lie. Who doubts that the world was made by design ? I don’t doubt that both you and Balbus lifted up your hands. He never sees Caesar without crying out that it is all over with the army. I left nothing undone to finitfi the business. I cannot hut help Balbus. It cannot be denied that Caius has had a prosperous voyage. I cannot refrain from leaving the city. No one is so good as not sometimes to sin. -There were some who left the city. I am not ignorant, that Caius has lost the opportunity. 91. Non possumus, quin alii a nobis dissentiant , recusare, We cannot object to others dissenting jfro??i us. Minimum abfuit ( impers .) Octavianus quin periret, Oc- tavianus was very near perishing. (Or, But a little more, and Octavianus would have perished.) 92. Vocabulary 15. (Words and phrases followed by quin.) Not to object, To be very near, to be within a very little, Not to be far from, To kill, Of iron, iron-hearted, Children, non recusare. b minimum abesse (to be used imper¬ sonally). haud multum ‘abesse, or haud procul abesse (impersonally), interficere, io, fee, feet, ferreus, a, um. libgri (plur.). b From rt and cauna. $ 15. 93-97.] QUOMINUS. To love, amare, av, at. A letter, literte (plur.). Truly, vere. The soul, animus, i, m. The mind, mens, mentis, 0 f. Immortal, immortalis, is, e. Exercise 15. 93. He was within a little of being killed. It cannot be denied that it is disgraceful to break-one’s word. It cannot be denied that duty commands us to keep (75) our promises. I am within a very little of being most miserable. No one is so iron-hearted as not to love his own children. I cannot but 13 send you a letter daily. That you may be able to learn much, do not learn many things. The truly wise man will never doubt that the soul is immortal. I will not object to your banishing me. I will not object to your all leaving the city. It cannot be denied that the rational-faculty should (debeo) command the heart. It cannot be that the mind is not immortal. 20 § 15. Quominus. » 94. Verbs of hindering are generally followed by quominus . * This quo minus (by which the less) = ut eo minus (that the less by it). * 95. With verbs of fearing, 4 that ’ must be translated by, 4 ne ;* ‘ that not ’ by 4 ut.’ ' * a) 4 That not ’ may also be translated by 4 ne non,’ which is stronger than ( ut.' 96. [C. xv.] After verbs of fearing , the En g. future and the participial substantive are translated by the present or imperfect subjunctive with ut or ne. 97. ( a ) Quid obstat quominus Caius sit beatus ? What pre¬ vents Caius from being happy ? (Or, qui4 obstat Caio d quominus sit beatus ?) * c Anima, the breath of life, the vital principle (common to all living things). Animus, 4 the soul,' the mind with its passions, emotions, appetites, &c., 4 the heart.' Mens , the intellectual faculty; the rational faculty. Hence animus should be used for mind, when it means disposition, spirit, &c. » d With quid obstat (especially when the person is represented by a pron. of the first or second person), the dat. is generally omitted. Unless it be a pron., it 44 QUOMINUS. [§ 15. 98-100 ( 'b ) ( Vereor ne veniat, Ifear that he will come. ( Vereor ut veniat, Ifear that lie will not come . / 98. {Eng) What prevents Caius from being happy? ( Lat.) What prevents, by which Caius should be the less happy? 99. Vocabulary 16. (Verbs that may be followed by quominus.) To prevent, To deter, To hinder, It is owing to Caius that, To endure, To fear, Nothing, To obey, To increase, Bv sea and land, obstare, obstlt, obsttt ( dat.). deterrere, de^erru, deterrit. impedire, Ivi, Itum, per Caium stat quominus, &c. sustinere, tinu, tent, vereri, veritus ; timere; metuSre, me¬ tui.® nihil {indeclinable). parere, ui itum {dat.). augere, aux, auct, trans .; crescSre crev, cret, {intrans). terra marique. Exercise 16. [Js quotidie or indies used of daily increase or decrease ?J 100. What prevents us from doing this ? Nothing prevents )ou from doing this. Nothing deters a wise man from obeying the laws of virtue^ Nothing deterred Caius from obeying the laws. I fear that I shall not endure such 10) labours. I fear that he will not be able to endure such labours. I fear that I shall increase your labours. What prevents us from waging war by sea and land ? What prevents you from carrying all your pro¬ perty with you ? Do not pretend to be mad. 3 It cannot be de¬ nied that vice increases daily. It was owing to Caius that we did not wage war by sea and land. will then stand a3 nom. to the next verb. After deter, &c., the acc. should be expressed, unless it be a pronoun of the first or second person. t ® Timere, metuere, vereri, are all used for fear; but (1) if a reverential or humble fear is to be expressed, vereor should be used; (2) if an anxious fear of a threatening evil, metuere. Metus is the fear of the mind arising from a con¬ sideration of circumstances and appearances: timor, the fear that arises from the body; from timidity. (See D. vereri.) Vereor, which expresses the least degree of actuaiyear, should be used to express doubt or fear about the happen¬ ing of such an event, or the truth of such an opinion. Formidare, ‘ to dread,’ of great and lasting fear. § 16, 17. 101-106.] INTERROGATIVE WORDS. 45 VI. § 16 . Interrogative Sentences. « 101. Questions (when interrogative pronouns or adverbs are not used) are generally asked in Latin by interrogative particles. * 102. (a) Ne asks simply for information. ( b ) Nun expects the answer * no :* (c) nonne , the answer ‘ yes.’ * 103. N6 is enclitic; that is, always appended to a word, and written as its last syllable. 104. (a) Scribitne Cams ? Is Cains writing ? (b) Num putas . . . ? Do you think ? ( = you don’t think, do you ?) (c) Nonne putas , . ? Don’t you think ? ( = you do think , don’t you ?) Quid ? nonne canis similis est lupo ? What ? is not a dog like a wolf ? §17. Interrogative Words. 105. Who ? (quis.) How ? (qui, abl.: with an adjective , quam.) How does it happen that ? (qui fit ut . . ? with subj.) ( cur ( = cui rei). Why? \ f , / v * l quare f ( = qua re). , When? (quando?) ( Quum is never interrogative.) Where , Whence, Whither, ubi, ) f ibi, unde, > relatives to < inde, hinc, quo, ) ( eo (huc, illuc). Exercise 17. 106. Have not the good and wise been banished ? Are noi virtue and vice contrary to each other ? Do men govern the * f Quare (■ wherefore) is only used when the cause is decidedly asked: when, that is, an answer is required. Cur is used whether an answer is required or not: hence it is the proper word in expostulatory and objurgatory sentences. 46 DEPENDENT QUESTIONS. [§ 18 . 107 - 115 . winds and seasons? [No.] Shall we not all die? Was not the world made by design ? Do we not owe very much to our parents ? Was it not owing to you that we did not leave the city ? Was not Caius within a very little of being killed ? 24 Were not the waves such 101 as you had never seen before ? Whence do you come ? (or, Where do you come, from ?) Did all promise to help 8 you ? [No.] Did he not promise unwillingly to finish the busi¬ ness ? Do we not all hope to live 3 a long while ? Has he not finished the business satisfactorily ?* There are some who 109 deny that Caius has finished the business. There were some who reviled me. § 18. Dependent Questions . 107. A dependent question is one that is connected with a preceding word or sentence. ■* 108. Dependent questions follow and depend on such words as to ask, doubt, know, or not know, examine, try, &c. » 109. ( a ) ( h ) (c) The verb in a dependent question must be in the subjunctive mood. 110. In English, dependent questions are asked by whether; or by inter¬ rogative pronouns and adverbs. " 111. Since what and who are also relatives, but the relative is in Latin a different pronoun, care must be taken to use quis, quid, (not qui, quod) in dependent questions. * 112. [C. xvi.] Who, ivliat, which, are often dependent interrogatives, especially after verbs of asking, knowing, doubting, &c. 113. After most of these verbs the dependent sentence stands as the accusative to the transitive verb. 114. The verb in an accusative sentence must be in the sub¬ junctive mood. 115. ( a ) Dubito, mm* id tibi suadere debeam, 1 imbt whether I ought to give you that advice. a Obs. In a dependent sentence, num is ‘ whether ,’ and does no* necessarily imply that vhe answer ‘no’ is expected. If, however, the answer ‘n*’ in ex pected, num should be used, not ne. DOUBLE QUESTIONS. 47 $ 19 . 116 - 119 .] (b) Quaesieras ex me, nonne putarem , &c., You ha in - quired of me whether I did not think, &c. (c) Quis es ?— Nescio, quis sis. 116. Vocabulary 17. To inquire, Of (after inquire), To say, Well =r rightly, Dog, Like, Wolf, To be better, i. e. a thing to be preferred, I don’t know whether, I almost think, I am not sure that—not, Dishonourably. quaerSre, quaesiv, quaesit, ex (with ablat.). dicere, dix, diet, recte. canis, is, com. gend. similis, is, e ( dot .). lupus, i, to. satius esse. haud scio an, or nescio an {with junct.). turpiter. } Exercise 18. 117. Where do you come from ? I will ask him where he comes from. Ought I to do this ? I doubt whether I ought to do this. He asked whether a dog was not very like a wolf. 1 don’t know whether he has not said well. He said that he did not 2 know. 2) Balbus has not come, as far as I know . 10 Is it not better to die than to live dishonourably ? I will leave nothing un¬ done to finish 18 the business to your satisfaction . 5 I will ask (him) how great the waves were. Who does not know how delightful it is to be praised by the good ? I will inquire of Balbus how many there were. There are some who 109 have inquired of Balbus. § 19. Double Questions. Use of i an ’ in single questions. *> 118. ( a ) ( b ) In double questions ‘ whether ’ is to be translated by utrum , num, or the appended ne; 1 or’ by an. • Num in direct questions is only to be used when the answer ‘ no ’ is expected. * 119. (c) ( d ) (e) But in dependent questions ‘ whether ’ is often untranslated, and ‘ or ’ translated by an, anne , or the ap- pended ne. 48 DOUBLE QUESTIONS. [§ 19 . 120 - 122 . * 120. (f) An is often found before single questions, but this was at least nst a common practice with Cicero, &c. When an is so used, there is always an ellipse of the other possibility, which may generally be sup¬ plied without difficulty. (a) The supposition involved in the question is often obviously absurd; so that assent is really demanded to the suppressed alternative. The force of such a question may often be given in English by ‘ then' (/?) This use of ‘an’ is often found in replies ; between which and the preceding statement an expression of assent or dissent must be supplied, (y) There is the same suppression of the first supposition, in haud scio, or nescio an ; dubito an ; incertum est an ; queero an ; consulo an; forsi¬ tan (fors sit an), &c. ( Hartung , Partikellehre, ii. 190.) * HIT ‘Or’ in questions is to be translated by an or ne ; never by aut in a proper double question ; when, that is, one question is to be answered in the affirmative, the other in the negative. 121. (a) Utrum ea vestra an nostra culpa est ? Is that your fault or ours ? ** ( b ) Permultum interest, utrum perturbatione aliqua animi an consulto et cogitato fiat injuria, It makes a very great difference, whether an injury is done from some 'perturbation of mind, or deliberately and pur¬ posely. (c) Stellarum numerus par an impar sit, incertum, Whether the number of the stars is even or odd, u uncertain . ( d ) Quaeritur unus?ie sit mundus an plures, It is a ques¬ tion whether there is one world or more. (e) Servi liberine sint quid refert ? What does it signify whether they are slaves or free ? ( f.) An* tum quoque est utilis (iracundia) ? Is (passion¬ ateness) useful even then ? [Is it not then preju¬ dicial ?] 122. Vocabulary 18. It makes a very great difference, permultum interest. What difference is there 1 what) difference does it make? ] quid interest? a In the following passage tne suppressed alternative is so obvious, that we might introduce the question by ‘or.’ Cur misereare potius quam feras opem, ei id facere possis ? an sine misericordia liberales esse nr.n possumus ? Why should you pity , rather than assist them if you can ? Or, is it impossible for us to be liberal without pitying ? MAY, MIGHT ; CAN, COULD. 49 § 20 . 123 , 124 .] There is no difference. Beasts (in their wild state), To drink, Wine, Water, Death, Sleep, Beginning, Another = a second, one more, Or not (often without a verb, as the second member of a dou¬ ble question), nihil interest. ferae. bibere, bib, bibit. vinum, i, n. aqua, ae, /. mors, mortis, f. somnus, i, m. initium, i, n. alter, altera, alterum, Gen. alterius, &c. an non, or annon, usually in direct, necne b in indirect questions. Exercise 19. 123. What difference does it make whether you drink wine or water ? Whether the Romans have conquered or are conquered, is uncertain. Was the world made for the sake of men or Deasts ? Is death an eternal 0 sleep or the beginning of another life ? It makes a great difference, whether death be a perpetual sleep or the beginning of another life. Whether the Romans have conquered or not, is uncertain. § 20. How to translate may, might ; can, could, &c., ivhen they are principal verbs. 124. May; perf. Might {permission). Licet, d it is permitted. * 4 t> By necne the questions are joined copulatively, by an non adversatively. In necne therefore the question is made, as it were, one; and no opinion of the speaker’s is implied as to the thing’s being so or not. In an non the notions are opposed to each other, either simply, or so that it is implied that the one is more probable than the other {Hand). — The verb is more frequently repeated with necne than with annon: the only instance of necne in a direct question is Cic. Tusc. 3, 18. Sunt hcec tua verba, n e c n e ? (K.) Necne generally occurs in dependent questions. * c AZlcrnus, without beginning or end, ‘eternal.' Sempiternus is 1 ever- lastirvg' ‘perpetual ‘ eternal ’ in a looser sense, without reference to an eternity without either beginning or end. Sempiternus is therefore the right word here. f t d Licet, it is permitted, or lawful, by human law (positive, customary, or traditional) : fas est, it is permitted by divine law (including the law of 3 50 MAY, MIGHT; CAN, COULD. [§ 20 . 125 , 120 . Pres. ( 'mihi ) ire licet, I may go. (tibi) ire licet, thou mayest go. &c. Perf. ( mihi ) ire licuit, I might have gone. (tibi) ire licuit, thou mighlest have gone. &c. 125 . Can ; perf. Could ( poiver , possibility). Possum,* * can, am able. Pres, (ego) facere possum, I can do it. (tu) facere potes, thou canst do it. &c. Perf. (ego) facere potui, I could have done it. (tu) facere potuisti, thou couldst have done it. &c. , 7 , . . \ ^ oportet, it behooves. 126. Ought; should (duty, propriety)- | ^beo j 0U aht Pres, (me) facere oportet f j ^ ought to do s ? (ego) facere debeo. (te) facere oportet \ ^ l0u ou ghtest ) (tu) facere debes. v ' r l to do (it) S v 7 conscience): concessum est, it is 'permitted , comprehends both as a general expression. / e Or, queo : cannot , nequeo (Inf. quire , nequire , like eo ). Possum relates to the ability of the doer; queo to the feasibility (to him ) of the thing to be done. Possum, I can do it, if no external hinderances occur: queo , I can do it, because there are no external hinderances, sufficient to prevent me; / am in a condition to do it. This is expressed by saying that possum denotes subjective, queo objec¬ tive possibility : or (in Doderlein's words) possum quantitative, queo qualitative possibility. Doderlein observes: “The best prose writers, as Cicero and Sal¬ lust, and even Pliny and other later authors, frequently use queo, but (likeguis- quam and ullus ) only in negative propositions: that is, only in such as actually contain a negation, or at least are of a negative character.” * f Necesse est, expresses necessity; oportet, duty or propriety; opus est, advisa- bleness. Debeo is the corresponding personal form to oportet, as indigeo to opus est. Oportet expresses the moral claim; debeo, the moral obligation of a par¬ ticular person to satisfy that claim. Debere is generally supposed to be de-habere, ‘to ha \efrom i a person, and therefore to owe it to him. Doderlein is inclined to refer it with debilis, to Mu, 6evu, to want. *■ Or, I should do (it). Thou shouldst io (if). MAY, MIGHT ; CAN, COULD. 5 ? § 20 . 127 - 132 .] 127. Perf. (me) facere ( I ought to have ) , \ « , . . oportuit \ done (it) $ (<¥?«) ^oere debm. (te) facere oportuit j 'tohavcdml^it) | ( (M ) f acere debuisti. (a) Or, with the subjunctive governed by ‘ ut ’ omitted ; (ego) faciam oportet, h I ought to do (it). (tu) facias oportet, thou oughtest to do (it). * 128. (fir May, might; can, could ; should, &c., when they stand in principal clauses, are not auxiliary but principal verbs; and must be translated by the proper tenses of licet, possum, oportet, or deleo, &c. * 129. May, might, are often used of events the possibility of which is granted by the speaker. May or might is then equivalent to may (or might) possibly ; may for any thing I know. C may happen, ) it is to be trans- (a) When ‘ may ’ = may possibly, > lated by fieri ^ may for anything 1 know, ) potest ut . (Fieri potest ut fallar, I may be deceived.) 4 130. The perf. infn. after a past tense of a verb expressing duty, possibility, permission, &c., is generally to be translated by the pres, infinitive. That is, the time is marked by the tense of the verb expressing duty, &c., and the pres, infin. marks the time relatively to that verb. If it is meant, that the action should have been completed before the time spoken of, the perf. infin. must be used. * 131. [C. xvii.] (fir c May,’ ‘might,’ sometimes mean ‘ can,* * could,’ and must be translated by possum. * [C. xviii.] HCr The perf. infin. must be translated by the present infin. after might, could, ought, unless the action is to be represented as over before the time to which might, could, &c., refer. * When the infin. perfect follows ‘ought,’ ‘ought’ is the perfect. 132. Vocabulary 19. To be the slave of, servire, servivi, servitum {dat.). To spend, or lead, a life, agCre, eg, act. h Legem brevem esse oportet , A law ought to be short. Me ipsum ames oportet , non mea, You ought to love me, not merely things belonging to me. 52 APPOSITION. [§ 21 . 133 - 136 . * Virtuous, honorable, Chaste, Moral, To shed one’s blood, For = in behalf of, Country = country of one’s birth, or citizenship, To snatch away, take away, To take away a man’s life, honestus, a, um. castus, a, um. sanctus, a, um. profundere, fud, fus. pro (governs ablat.). * patria ae, f. eripere, erlpu, erept. vitam alicui i eripere. Exercise 20. * [N. B. A parenthetical Hhen ’ in an interrogative sentence is used to indicate that l an ’ is to be used.] 133. May a man be-the-slave-of glory 1 [No.] Ought we not to have obeyed the laws of our country ? What ought I to have done ? I asked what I ought k to have done ? No man may take away another’s life. It cannot be denied, that he has led a very moral' life. Ought he not to have shed his blood for his country ? There is no doubt, that he lived a very disgrace¬ ful' life. Ought' we {then) to be the slaves of glory ? Ought 7 he not to have obeyed the laws of virtue ? It was owing to you that 28 my life was not taken away by Caius. VII. ■ §21. Apposition. * 134. When to a substantive or personal pronoun there is added a sub¬ stantive (without a preposition) explaining or describing it, the latter is said to be placed in apposition to the former. ‘ Alexander the conqueror of Persia.’ * 135. A noun in apposition may be turned into the predicate (nom. after the verb) of a relative sentence. 136. (a) A substantive in apposition must agree in case with the substantive of which it is spoken. * i Obs. The personyrom whom is put in the dat. This dat. may be explained thus: it is the person towards or against whom the action of snatching away life is directed. k The pluperf. must here be used, for the imperfect would fix the duty to the time of asking. APPOSITION. 53 $ 21 . 137 - 142 .] 1 137. (6) If the substantive of which it is spoken be feminine , the fern, form should be chosen for the substantive in apposition , whenever there is one. 138. (c) If the principal word be the name of a town, i with urbs or oppidum in apposition to it, the verb or participle gene¬ rally agrees with the apposition instead of the principal noun. (With this exception, agreement with the principal noun is tke rule, though a rule that is not always observed.) * 139. ( d ) The English ‘as,’ ‘ when' for,' standing with a noun, are often omitted, and the Latin substantive placed in apposition. 140. {Eng.) The city of Rome. The island of Cyprus. {Lai.) The city Rome. The island Cyprus. 141. (a) Alexander victor tot regum atque populorum, Alex¬ ander the conqueror of so many kings and nations. Usus magister egregius, Experience an admirable , teacher. ' ' I Philosophia magistra morum, Philosophy the teacher of morals. (c) Volsinii, oppidum Tuscorum opulentissimum, totum concrematum est fulmine, Volsinii, the most wealthy town of the Tuscans, was entirely destroyed (burnt) by lightning. (i d ) ^Edem Salutis, quam consul voverat, dictator dedi¬ cavit, He dedicated as dictator the temple of Salus , which he had vowed when consul. 142. Vocabulary 20. To take, King, Philosophy, Inventor, Teacher, Manners, morals, character, Discipline, Frugality, Parent, Athens, Branch-of-learning, Maker, causer, cSpgre, io, cep, capt. rex, regis, m. philosophia, ae, f. inventor, oris; inventrix, Icis, magister, tri; magistra, ae. mores, um, m. disciplina, ae, f. frugalitas, atis, f. genitor, oris; genitrix, Icis. Athenae, arum, f. doctrina, ae, f. effector, oris; effectrix, Icis. i The name of a people often stands with the substantive civitas , in apposi¬ tion to it in the singular; ‘ Car monens es, quas est longe firmissima totius pro* vinciae civitas.' Caes. Bell. Civ. ii. 19. 54 NOMINATIVE AFTER THE VERB. [§ 22. 143-140. Wisdom, sapientia, se,/. Happy, beatus, a, um. An old man, senex, senis, G. plur. senum. To wish, desire, be willing, velle, vblu,- To blot out, efface, destroy utterly, delere, delev, delet. Treaty, foedus, Sris, n. To renew, rgnovare, av, at. Exercise 21 . 143. Apiolse, a town of the Latins (Latini), was taken by king Tarquinius. Philosophy was the inventor' of laws, the teacher' 4 of morals and discipline. Frugality is the parenF of virtues. It cannot be denied, that philosophy was the inventor' of laws. Caius used to call™ Athens the inventor" of all branches-of- learning. It cannot be denied, that wisdom is rightly called the maker of a happy life. I do not desire the same things as an old man, that I desired when a boy (p. 14. 15, b). I have left nothing undone to finish 18 the business to your satisfaction. It was owing to you 82 that the city of Rome was not destroyed by fire. The treaty between the cities of Rome and Lavinium 0 has been renewed. Has not the treaty been renewed between the cities of Rome and Lavinium ? Ought not the treaty between the cities of Rome and Lavinium to have been renewed ? § 22. Nominative after the verb.—Attraction of the predicate. * 144. (a) If the verb esse, &c. standing after a verb that is immediately followed by the infinitive, has a participle or adjec¬ tive with it, it will stand in the nominative case. * 145. (b) After a verb of wishing, &c.p the accusative of the pronoun is sometimes expressed, and sometimes omitted, if it means the same person as the nom. of the principal verb. * 146. (b) If the acc. is omitted before the infn the noun or parti, ciple with the infinitive is attracted into the nom. case . m Hj 3 ‘ Would ’ or ‘ used to ’ may be considered as signs of the Imperfect. (Dicebat, would say; used to say.) n Plural. 0 Inter Romam Laviniumque urbes. P Studii et desiderii. 55 § 22 . 147 - 150 .] NOMINATIVE AFTER THE VERB. * 147. (c) After verbs of declaring, foe.'* * the accusative under the same circumstances, is sometimes, but less commonly omitted. • 148. (c) When the acc. pronoun is omitted before the injin. after a verb of declaring, &c., the adjective or participle is gene¬ rally attracted into the nominative ; but sometimes not, especially when it is the part, of the fut. in rus, esse being omitted. 149. (a) Soleo (possum) esse otiosus, I am accustomed to be ( 1 can be) at leisure. (8) Vult \ se ' esse Vrind^m, ) Hg ^ t0 u tU fir$L ( esse princeps, ) , \ K ., ( se esse paratum, ) ^ 7 . , (c) Ait < r > tie says that he is ready . ( esse 8 paratus j ) Facturos u pollicentur, They promise to do it. 150. Vocabulary 21. (Of Apposition-Verbs ') * To become, to be made, To turn out, To be named = appointed, Tc be elected or chosen, 7 o be made (of an appointment to an office), To be born, To be considered, or held, To seem, appear, To be rendered, An orator, fieri, factus, evadgre, evas, evas. nominari, nominatus, eligi, electus. creari, creatus. nasci, natus, haberi, habitus, videri, visus. w reddi, redditus, orator, oris, m. i Sentiendi et declarandi. * r Cicero is fond of inserting se after velle. * 8 In Cicero the pronoun is seldom omitted except after fateri, dicere , opinari , and similar verbs. (Ochsner.) t Bentley says: c ait esse paratum * “ne Latinum quidem est;” which, how¬ ever, Kruger thinks is too much to say. ♦ u But the participle of th efut. acc. standing (with the omission of esse) for the fut. injin. is sometimes attracted , especially in poetry. ‘ Visura et quamvis nunquam speraret Ulixen.’ Propert. ii. 7. 45. ‘ Venturacpie rauco | Ore mina¬ tur hiems. Stat. Theb. i. 347. So with other predicates. ‘Retulit Ajax | Esse Jovis pronepos .’ ‘ Acceptum refero versibus, esse nocens .’ ‘ Sensit medios de¬ lapsus in hostes,’ &c. (JC.) ' T By apposition-verbs are meant the verbs that make no complete predicate: but require a noun after them, which is rather in apposition to the subject (the nom. to verb) than governed by the verb. • w Tb appear must be translated by videri , when it means to seem; by appa> rere, when it means to come into sight; to be seen; to be evident. 56 DATIVE AFTER ESSE. [§ 25 . 151 , 152 . A poet, To be wont, or accustomed, To desire. To have rather, Rich, To begin, Troublesome, To cease, leave off, Timid, To go on, continue, By accident, poeta, se, m. solere, solitus sum. cupere, cupiv, cuplt. malle, malu,- dives, divitis. coepisse ; incipere, cep, cept.* molestus, a, um (with dat.). desinere, desii, desit, timidus, a, um. pergere s perrex, perrect. casu. Exercise 22. 151. I had rather be-in-good-health' than be rich. I begin to be troublesome to you. Cease to be timid. There is no doubt that the boy will turn out an orator. Do not continue to be troublesome to Caius. It cannot be denied that Balbus seems wise to many persons. No one is born rich. No one becomes good by accident''. Numa Pompilius was made king. It was owing to you that 12,2 1 was not made king. He promises to perform 3 the business (omit esse). No one can be happy without virtue. There is no doubt, that no man can be happy without virtue. I had rather be a good man, than seem (one). Many persons can¬ not turn out orators. A poet is born, not made. Was the world made by accident or by design ? § 23. Dative after esse. % 152. (a. b . c. d .) When esse , &c., having the same subject as the principal verb, follows a verb that governs the dative , if the * * Coepi has only the tenses derived from the perf. Coeptus est is used for its perf. before pass, infinitives. So desitus est (ceased), though more rarely. ( Zumpt.) When he adds that the perf., pluperf, and fut. perf. have respectively the meanings of the pres., imperf, and simple future, I believe him to be mis¬ taken, for: (1) In many passages coepi has certainly the meaning of the perf. (2) In many more, I think in all, the Latin idiom requires one of the perfect, where we should use one of the imperfect tenses. Coepi is regularly joined only with the infin. : incipio with (infin. or) a noun (as its subject or object): and coepi dwells more on the action begun; incepi gives more prominence to the keginning that is made, and is altogether more emphatic. (D.) DATIVE AFTER ESSE. 57 § 23 . 153 - 155 .] accus. pron. is omitted, the noun after esse either remains in the accus. or is ( more commonly) attracted into the dative J 153. (a) Expedit bonas esse vobis, It is expedient for you to be good women. (b) Licet esse beatis , They may be happy (if they please). (c) Medios esse non licet, We may not be neutral. ( d ) Mihi negligenti esse non licet,* * I may not be negligent. 154. Vocabulary 22. * (Verbs in the third person governing the dat., and often used with a sentence as their subject.) It is permitted, I have leisure, It is given, It is expedient, It is profitable, It is injurious, hurtful, Negligent, Neutral, Luxurious, licet. vacat mihi (but dat. of pronoun gener¬ ally omitted when the person is known). datur, datum est. expedit. prodest, profuit, &c. nbcet. negligens, tis. medius, a, um. luxuriosus, a a, um. Exercise 23. 155. Let us be permitted 15 to be miserable. Let us be per¬ mitted to be neutral. There is no doubt that no man may be neu¬ tral. It is injurious to be negligent. There is no doubt that it is expedient for all to be good. Many persons doubt what is ex¬ pedient for them. It is not given to all to be wise. It is expe¬ dient for no man to be luxurious. I have no leisure to be luxu¬ rious. It cannot be denied that few have leisure to be luxurious. There is no doubt that it is profitable to all to spend a virtuous' life. There is no doubt that a wise man would rather be-in-good- health'' than be rich. There is no doubt that no one becomes good by chance. Had you rather be rich, or be-in-good-health 1 • y The gen. and ablat. are never attracted in this way. We may not say: 'Interest Ciceronis esse eloquentis ‘ damnor a nolente esse bono’ (K.) * ‘ Per quam non licet esse negligentem’ (sc. mihi). (Catull.) * a Adjectives in dsus, (u )lentus, idus, denote being full of what the root ex* piesses. o Let-it-be-permitted to us. * 3 * THE GENITIVE. 58 [§ 24 . 156-161 I asked him whether he had rather be-in-good-health or be wise. You oupdit not to have been lQ) neutral. o VIII. § 24. The Genitive. 156. (a) The Romans often used a dependent genitive where we use prepositions ; in, for, with, &c. i 157. Almost every substantive that depends so closely on another as to form almost one notion with it, may in Latin be expressed by the geni¬ tive , no matter what preposition we should use in English. ' 158. The genitive is joined attributively to its substantive, and as no two languages exactly agree, it often happens that what one language ex¬ presses by an adjective , another for want of an adjective would express by the genitive case. Hence— * 159. (6) Where we use the genitive or the preposition ( of’ with a substantive, an adjective may often be used in Latin. ■’*160. (c) Where we use a substantive with an adjective agree¬ ing with it, an adjective in the neuter is often used in Latin, with I a genitive governed by it. (a) These adjectives are indefinite numerals and demonstrative pronouns. They are only used as quasi-substantives (governing the gen.) in the nom. and acc. singular. • (/?) The following are peculiar phrases: id temporis, at that time: id aetatis, of that age: quid aetatis 7 of what age? 161. (a) Gratia beneficii, c Gratitude for a kindness. Mu¬ lierum Sabinarum inj urice, The wrongs done to the Sabine women. Luctus filii, Grief for his son. Suarum rerum fiducia, Confidence in his own affairs. Pyrrhi regis bellum, The war with king Pyrrhus. (b) Res alienee, The affairs of others (or, Other people’s affairs). Causa regia, The royal cause ; or, The ** c 1 The genitive is subjective , when it denotes that which does something, or to which something belongs: it is objective , when it denotes that which is the object of the feeling or action spoken of. The objective genitive usually fol¬ lows the noun on which it depends.’ (Z.) § 24 . 162 .] THE GENITIVE. 59 king’s cause. Timor externus , Fear from without; fear of foreign enemies. (c) Quantum voluptatis, Hoiv much pleasure. Aliquid temporis, Some time. Nimium temporis, Too much time. Multum boni, Much good. Plus boni, More good. Quid novi ? (what of new ? =) What new thing ? what news ? * (Obs. Boni, mali, novi, falsi, are used as substantives after Jiese neuters .) 162. Vocabulary 23. Gratitude, Benefit, favour, Weight, burden, Heavy, Light, Flight, escape from, Labour, Remedy, Anger, To overpower, (by a violent emo¬ tion,) Care, Not one’s own; of others, Affair, Difficult, Silver, Gold, Nature, Of Abdera, Advantage = profit, gain, To receive or gain advantage, Replies; says he, Compassion, pity, Poor, What, Too much, More, gratia, ae,/. beneficium, i, n. bnus, 6ris, n. gravis, is, e. lSvis, is, e. fuga, 33 ,/. labor, oris, m. remedium, i, n. ira, ae, /. ^ frangSre, freg, fract (literally to break). cura, ae,/. alienus, a, um. res, rei,/. difficilis, is, e. argentum, i, n. aurum, i, n. rerum natura. Abderites. 0 emolumentum, i, n. emolumentum capere; cep, capt. ; inquit (always following a word or two of the reply), misericordia, ae,/. pauper, paupSris. quid, nimium, plus.f e Names from one’s native town end in Ensis ; Anus (from towns in o, ( there is need) is followed by an ablative oj what is needed.* The person who needs must be put in the dative. * 171. ( f ) After opus est, an English substantive is often translated by a pas¬ sive participle. f 172. (g) But the thing needed is often the nom. to the verb sum ; or the ace. before esse. * §£jf* In this construction the verb sum will agree, of course, with its nom. * In the former, it is always in the third person sing.; opus being its real nom. 173. {Eng.) r I have need of food. {Lot.) J (1) There is a business to me with food {abl. without prep.). [ or (2) $ Food is a business to me. ( These things are a business to me. The second construction is preferred with neuter pronouns and ad¬ jectives. (Z.) 174. How many are there of you ? — how many are you ? There are very many of you, = you are very many. Few of whom there are, — who are few. % When ‘of* with a demonstrative or relative pronoun follows a plu¬ ral numeral or superlative, the numeral often expresses all who are meant by the pronoun ; and then the pronoun and the numeral must be in the same case in spite of ‘ of \k % 175 [C. xix.] fjT ‘ Of you,' 1 of us,' are not to be translated after how many , or other numerals, when the whole party are spoken of. i Opus est {it is a task or business). Grotefend, comparing the Greek Zpyot c(ttl rtvos, thinks that the ablative originally expressed the means by which the business is to be accomplished. Probably opus esse had, in various construc¬ tions, come to have nearly the meaning of to be necessary or required: and then other constructions were commonly, or occasionally, used before the ablative prevailed. Plautus uses even the accusative, as if it were the object required: the gen. is still sometimes found : probably the preference was at last given to the abl., from that being the usual case after verbs of needing, or requiring. k Consider, therefore, after such words, whether the pronoun expresses more, or no more, than the numeral. 62 THE GENITIVE. [§ 25 . 1 . 76 , 177 . (d) When of us, of you, are omitted, the verb will be of th e first and sec ond pers. respectively. 176. (a) Uter vestrum ? Which of you ? Alter consulum, One of the consuls. Graecorum oratorum prcestan- tissimus, The best of the Grecian orators. (b) Plato totius Grcecice doctissimus , Plato the most learned man of all Greece. (c) Hordeum est frugum mollissimum, Barley is the softest species of corn. Vir summo ingenio ,i A man of the greatest ability. Vir excellentis ingenii , A man of distinguished ability. Ingentis magnitudinis serpens, A serpent of immense size. Classis septuaginta navium , A fleet of seventy ships, (e) Acuto homine nobis opus est, We have need of an acute man. Quid opus est verbis ? What need is there of words ? (/) Properato m opus est, It is necessary to make haste. (, g ) Quarundam rerum nobis exempla permulta opus sunt, Of some things we have need of a great many examples. 177. Vocabulary 24. Which (of two), uter, utra, utrum; g. utrlus. Each (do.), uterque ; g. utrlusque. Another; one (of two things), a ) a| a|t alterum aIt6 . iu9 . second; one more, > * * i According to the German grammarians, the gen. denotes a permanent , the abl. a temporary state. Grotefend says, the gen. is used of a thoroughly inhe¬ rent and permanent quality, penetrating the whole being, and making the thing what it is: whereas the abl. is used of any part or appendage of the thing spo¬ ken of, and only so far as it manifests itself; which part or appendage, more¬ over, may be accidental and temporary. To establish this he quotes: “ Murena mediocH ingenio, sed magno studio rerum veterum, multae industriae et magni laboris fuit.” ‘Murena showed but moderate talents, though a great zeal for antiquarian pursuits; industry and laborious perseverance constituted his char¬ acteri Why not as well or better, ‘ He showed great industry and persever¬ ance ; but his mind was ( essentially, and, permanently) one of little power, though with a great fondness for antiquity V Was his ingenium (the in-bom power of his mind) a less permanent quality than his industria ? Zumpt says : ‘ With esse, Cicero seems to prefer the abll * f m Properare is used of a praiseworthy haste for the attainment of a purpose ; THE GENITIVE. 6.1 ' § 25 . 178 .] Of Miletus, Greek, Roman, To predict, foretell, Eclipse, Sun, Body, Food, meat, Drinking, drink. Serpent, Immense, Size, Lemnos, To find, discover, Milesius (162, e). Graecus, i, m. Romanus, i, m. praedicere, dix, diet, defectio, onis,/. sol, solis, m. corpus, corpdris, n. clbus, i, m. potio, onis,/. serpens, entis, com.gend. ingens, ingentis, magnitudo, inis,/. Lemnos, 11 i,/. invenire, ven, vent; reperire, repgr, repert. 0 consuetudo, inis,/, natura, ae,/ (often argentum, i, n. silver), avbcare, av, at. conjunctio, onis,/. Custom, Nature (i. e. a man’s nature), Money, To draw away, Connection, Honour (i.e. probity, trustworthi- ) f j^gg e j y* * ness), ) ’ ’ ( making haste, } properato. There is need of) deliberation, > consulto. ( prompt execution, ) mature facto. Exercise 25. 178. One of them was a Greek, the other a Roman. ThalesP of Miletus was the first of the Greeks who 8 predicted an eclipse of the sun. I did the same when (139) consul. He «ays (ait*) festinare = to be in a hurry. An adj. properus was formed from pro ^ forth forwards ), as inferus, exterus, from their prepositions. (D.) * n Greek nouns in os of the second decl. are declined like Latin nouns of the 2d, but have acc. on or um. » » 0 ‘ Invenio , properly to come upon any thing, expresses the general notion of to find: reperio , like to find out and to discover , implies that the thing found was before hid , and was sought for with pains.’ (D.). Crombie observes that inve¬ nire is the proper word for the faculty itself; when we talk, that is, of the power of discovering generally, without adding what; i. e. without an accusative after it. He quotes from Cicero , ‘vigere, sapere, invenire , meminisse,’ a passage which plainly proves that invenire does not exclude the notion of searching , though it does not (like reperire) necessarily imply it. p Thales, ctis. ► ^ q Fari is to tcuk r use articulate speech: loqui, to speak or talk (opposed to taclre , to be silent); dicere is to say , the transitive form of loqui. As distin- 64 THE GENITIVE. [§25. 17b. that there is no occasion for making-haste. The body has need of much food. Are not serpents of immense size found in the island of 27 Lemnos ? It cannot be doubted that he is a man of no honour. What need have we of your authority ? It cannot be denied that the body has need of meat and drink. (We) have need of deliberation. It cannot be denied that we have need of deliberation. Is not custom a second nature? Yerres used to say 52 that he had need of many things. How much money have you need of? I left nothing undone to 18 draw-away Pom- pey from his connection with Csesar (156). How many are there of you ? l I will ask how many there ar e of them. 179. The top of the mountain. N. summus mons, G. summi montis, &c. The middle of the way. media via, mediae vise, &c. The rest of the work. reliquum opus, reliqui operis, &c. So, ima quercus, the bottom (or foot) of the oak; universa Graecia, the whole of Greece : sapientia prima, the beginning of wisdom : extremus liber/ the end of the book , &c. ' Some English substantives relative to position, are often translated into Latin, by adjectives agreeing with their substantives. Such are, end, middle, whole, top, &c. These adjectives generally stand before their substantives.® guished from loqui, dicere expresses a more artificial or studied speech, loqui being to speak in the style of ordinary conversation. As distinguished from ajo, dicere is to speak for the information of the hearers, ajo expressing the as¬ sertion of the speaker, as the opposite of nego. Hence ajo is Isay — I assert , affirm, maintain (but somewhat weaker than these words). Inquit (which Do- derlein derives from injicit, throws-in) is used to introduce the words of an¬ other, and also the objections which we suppose another to make. (Bentley ) It is also used in a vehement re-assertion (‘ one, one I say'). r The adjective so used does not distinguish its substantive from other things of the same kind, but a part of itself from another part. Thus summu .* mons is the mountain where it is highest: not, the highest of a number of mountains. ■ Not, however, always, e. g. ‘sapientia prima' ( Hor .), and, ‘In hac insula txtremd est fons aquae dulcis,’ &c. (Cic. Verr. 4. 118.) $25. 180, 181.] THE GENITIVE. 6** 180. Vocabulary 25. The Alps, Cold, Snow, To melt, To count, reckon, Out of, A thousand, To survive, Three hundred, To swear, Moon, Lowest, Planet, Master = ‘master of a house,’ ‘ owner of any property,’ slaves as well as any other. Wool, Black, White, Some—others, Only, Chameleon, To nourish, support, River, Neither—nor, Alpes, ium, f. frigus, dris, n. nix, nivis, f. liquescere, lieu, —— numerare, av, at. ex ( ablat .). mille (indecl. in sing. In plur. millia, ium, ibus,t &c.) superesse, superfui {dat.). trecenti, ae, a. jurare, av, at. luna, ae, f. infimus, a, um. planeta, or es, ae, m. dominus, i, m.; herus, i, m. is a master only in relation to his servants oi slaves. lana, ae, f. niger, gra, grum. albus, a, um. alii—alii. solus, a, um, G. solius, chameleon, ontis, or onis, m. alSre, alu, alit or alt. flumen, inis, n. nec or neque, followed by nec or neque. u Exercise 26. 181. On the top of the Alps the cold is so great, that the snow never melts there. Count how many there are of you. 31 Out of ( ex) so many thousands of Greeks (but) few of us survive. Three hundred of us have sworn. The top of the mountain was held by T. (Titus) Labienus. The moon was considered the lowest of the planets. It cannot be denied that custom is a second nature. Slaves are of the same morals as 9) their master. t Millc the adj. is indeclinable. % u ‘ Nec and neque stand before either vowels or consonants.’ (Z.) Mr. Rid¬ dle says: ‘in good writers nec is found usually only before consonants; neque before vowels.’ But merely taking the examples as they are given in Broder’s Grammar, we have from Cicero , ‘nec sibi nec alteri;’ ‘ neque naufragio neque Incendio‘ nec hominum ‘ neque perfringi.’ 66 THE GENITIVE. [§26. 182-184. Who is there but 9) understands that custom is a second nature ! Caius promises that he will finish the rest of the work. Three hundred of us have finished the rest of the journey. Of wools some are black, others white. The chameleon is the only animal that 8 is nourished neither by meat nor drink. T The Indus is the largest of all rivers. § 26. The Genitive continued. (Gen. after adjectives.) * 182. Adjectives which signify desire, knowledge, recollection, fear, participation, and their opposites ; together with verbals in ax, and many of those that express fulness or emptiness, govern the genitive. * (a) These adjectives have an incomplete meaning , and maybe compared with transitive verbs. The governed substantive expresses generally the object of some feeling of the mind. ' 183. ( b ) To this class belong many participles used adjec- tively. (c) In Poetry^ the gen. may almost always stand after an adjective, where its relation to the adjective might be expressed by ‘ with respect to? 184. (a) Avidus novitatis, Greedy of novelty. Insidiarum plenus, Full of plots. Beneficii immemor, Apt-to- forget a favour. Rei maritimae peritissimi, Very skiful in naval affairs. Magnae urbis capax, Able to contain a large city. (b) Veritatis amans, Attached to truth ; a lover of truth. Amans patriae, A lover of his country. Officii negligens, Negligent of duty. (c) Audax ingenii, Bold of temper ; of a bold temper. Insolitus servitii, Unaccustomed to slavery. Insue¬ tus laboris ( Cces .). Fidissima tui (Vir g.). Seri studiorum (Hor.). Utilis medendi (Ov.). + 9 Potus, us. “ Potio is the act of drinking , and that on which this action is performed ; a draught ; a liquid swallowed: potus is drinking , and drink in itself, without reference to the action .” (R.) v And in Tacitus , who has: vetus regnandi , summus severitatis, &c. THE GENITIVE. 67 §* * 6 . 185 .] .’ 85 . Vocabulary 26 . To hate, Courage, Contention, Truth, Philosopher, Glorious, Jest, To hesitate, To undertake, In-such-a-manner, Not even, Nothing but, To take in good part, to receive favourably. Odisse* (with tenses derived from the perfect), virtus, utis, f. contentio, onis, f veritas, atis, f. philosophus, i, m. gloriosus, a, um. jbcus, i, m. dubitare, y av, at. suscipbre, cep, cept. Ita. ne— quidem, (with the word the even be¬ longs to between them; ne jSco qui¬ dem, , not even in jest.) nihil aliud nisi, (the following adj. is not to agree with nihil but with the substantive after nisi.) boni consfilere,* sulu, suit; in bonam partem acclpbre. * (Adjectives governing the Genitive.) Mindful, Unmindful, apt-to-forget, Negligent, careless of, inatten tive to, Greedy, Eagerly-desirous, Fond, desirous, Skilled in, Unacquainted with, ignorant of, memor, bris. immemor, bris. negligens, tis. avidus, a, um. studiosus, a, um. cupidus, a, um. peritus, a, um. rudis, is, e. * * Of this verb the per/., pluperf , and fut. per/, are respectively used for (that is where we should use) the pres., imperf., and simple fut. This is the case with most verbs that express simple emotions and operations of the mind, which are completed the moment they exist. The moment I do hate, I have hated; the moment I do know, I have known. * y Dubitare, to hesitate, is generally followed by inf. % * So, aequi boni {or aequi bonique) facere, to take in good part; to he satisfied. Lucri facere, to tum to account; to get the credit of. In boni consulere, boni is probably a gen. of the price or value, consulere being used in its first sense (according to Riddle) of ‘ to think upon, whether by oneself or with others.’ He derives it from an obsolete conso, from which censeo is derived. Doderlein thinks con-sulere meant originally ‘ to sit down ’ (from the same root as soZ-ium, seZ-la, and perhaps soZ-um), and that boni is an old adv. (of the same form as fieri) ; so that boni consulas =z bene considas or acquiescas. It occurs in Q,uint., Sen., Ac. • not, I believe, in Cicero. 68 j THE GENITIVE. [§ 26 . 186 A partner, A lover of, attached to, Productive of, Such a lover of, Exercise 27. consors , 1 tis (;properly adj., one who has the same lot), amans, tis; diligens , 1 tis. efficiens, tis. adeo amans, or diligens. 186. All men hate (him who is) apt-to-forget a kindness Courage is greedy 7 of danger. Many are fonder of contention than of truth. Pythagoras calls (those who are) eagerly-desirous of wisdom philosophers. All men ought to be mindful of benefits (received). Cicero has lost Hortensius, the partner* of his glori¬ ous labour. That ( Iste ) basest of all men is the same that he always was. Epaminondas was such a lover® of truth that he did not utter-a-falsehood even d in jest. We ought all to be such lovers of our country as not to e hesitate to shed our blood for it. I will warn the boy not to become inattentive to duty. He said that he was not 2 negligent of duty. It cannot be denied, that we ought all to be lovers of our country. He begs me to take these things in good part. They say that virtue is not productive of pleasure. Let war be undertaken in-such-a-manner that nothing but peace may seem (to be) sought for. 1 Soctus, ‘ a companion;’ ‘ associate;’ ‘ member of the same society ‘ sharer of the same fortune;’ in which last meaning it is synonymous with consors. Comes , ‘companion,’ ‘fellow-traveller.’ Sodalis^ ‘ companion in amusement or pleasure.’ (C.) Consortes fortuna eadem, socios labor idem ; Sed caros faciunt schola, ludus, mensa sodales Vir comis multos comites sibi jungit eundo. Com-it-es, con and ‘i£,’ as in supine of eo. a Amare expresses the affection of love; diligere (properly, to choose apart) the preference of one object to another. If therefore any thing of deliberate choice or preference is to be expressed, diligere should be used. b Consors. Socius would imply that they shared the same toil, not that Hortensius had a separate share of the same occupation. c Diligens with gen ., his attachment to truth being a principle with him. In the next sentence, amans, because, though patriotism should be a principle, affection for one’s country is the thing required. d Say: ‘ that he uttered a falsehood not even in jest.’ • A consequence ; not a purpose. § 27 . 187 , 188 .] THE GENITIVE. 69 § 27. The Genitive continued. > 187. 188 . (a) (Eng.) To prefer a capital charge against a man. J To make a man an accused-person of a capi. tal matter. Aliquem rei capitalis reum facere. (b) (Eng.) To bring an action against a man for bribery. (Lat.) Aliquem de ambitu reum facere. (c) (Eng.) To prefer a charge of immorality against a man. (Lat.) Aliquem de moribus reum facere. (d) (Eng.) He has informed me of his plan. (Lat.) Certiorem me sui consilii fecit.* Vocabulary 27. * (Adjectives governing the gen.) Tenacious, Capable of containing, Without, Accused of, In his absence, Bribery Extortion, Assault, Impiety, tenax, acis, capax, acis, expers, tis (ex, pars). reus f (from res). absens, tis (adj. agreeing with the subs.). 'ambitus, us, m. from ambire, to go round, to canvass. Properly, there¬ fore, to accuse a man de ambitu is, ‘ to bring an accusation about his can¬ it * ^ vassing:’ and then, as ‘reum facere de moribus ’ is ‘ to accuse of immoral¬ ity,' 1 so to accuse him de ambitu is ‘ to accuse him of improper, illegal can¬ vassing,’ i. e., of bribery, r res or pecuniae repetundas ; or repetun- < dae alone ; properly things or moneys ' to be claimed back, vis s (violence). impietas, atis, f. *■ * Certiorem facere may also be followed by abl. with de: ‘ Eum de rebus gestis certiorem faciunt.’ * t “ Reos appello non eos modo qui arguuntur, sed omnes quorum de re dis¬ ceptatur; sic enim olim loquebantur.” (Cic. De Orat. 2, 43.) From the olim it is plain that reus had come to be used of the defendant almost exclusively. 8 Vis, vis, —, vim, vi j vires, virium, &c. Gen. vis in Tac., but very rare. 70 THE GENITIVE. [§ 28. 189, 19f> To prefer a charge against, To inform, To learn, Design, plan, Full, Danger, reum facSre. certiorem facSre; fee, fact, discere, didic, consilium, i, n. plenus, a, um. periculum, i, n. Exercise 28. 189. We are very tenacious of those things which we learned as 22) boys. The island of Pharos is not h capable-of-containing a great city. They are going to prefer a charge of immorality against Caius. They have brought an action against Caius for an assault. They have preferred a charge of impiety against Caius in his absence. I left nothing undone to 18 inform Csesar ol my design. I fear that he will not* 3 inform me of his design. It is disgraceful to be without any learning. I fear that he will not keep his word. He promised that he would 4} leave nothing undone to draw away Pompey from his connection with 54 Csesar. There is no one but 9) believes that you will be without anyi dangers. He warns k us that all things are full of danger. There are some who 109 deny that virtue is productive ot pleasure. § 28. The Genitive continued. 190. ( o ) Such a substantive as property, duty, part, mark, &c., is often omitted in Latin after £ to he so that to be is followed by a genitive governed by this substantive, or an adjective in the neuter gender agreeing with it. (Such a noun as officium, munus, indicium, &c., must be under¬ stood. * This genitive is construed in various ways in English: and therefore * * h Non is ‘ nothand is ‘ certainly not ,’ 1 surely not ,’ used especially with adjectives , adverbs , and impersonal verbs. % i ‘ Any ,’ after expers , must be translated by omnis, ‘all.’ t k When moneo does not mean to warn or advise us to do (or not to do) some¬ thing, it takes acc. with injin. (not ut nc). THE GENITIVE. 71 §28. 191-200.] there are various English phrases that may be reduced to this con¬ struction. * 191. (a) Such phrases are ; it is characteristic of; it is incumbent on; it is for (the rich, &c.,); it is not every one who; any man may; it demands or requires; it betrays, shows, &c .; it belongs to. « When the adjective is of one termination (and therefore would leave it doubtful whether man or thing is meant), it is better to use this con¬ struction. (‘It is wise;' not 1 sapiens est,' but ‘ sapientis est.') *192. So when the predicate is an abstract noun in the nom., it is more commonly in theg-en. in Lat.—‘It is madness,' ‘ dementiae est. 5 * 193. ( b) These genitives are used in the same way with facere, feri , haberi , duci. * 194. (c) Verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, &c., take a genitive of the charge. , 195. {f) But if the charge be expressed by a neuter pronoun, it stands in ihe accusative. « 196. This construction may be explained by the omission of crimine, or nomine, which are sometimes expressed. - 197. (c) Instead of the gen,, the ablat. with de is very common. . 198. (d) The punishment to which a person is condemned, stands generally in the ablat.; sometimes in the gen., and often in the acc. with ad. t 199. (e) Satago, k misereor, and miseresco, govern the gen. : verbs of reminding, remembering , * 1 and forgetting, the gen. or accusative. % But verbs of reminding rarely take an accus. unless it be a neut. pronoun. Sallust has the three forms: admonere aliquem, rei; de re; and rem. 200. (a) Imbecilli animi est superstitio, Superstition is a mark of (or betrays) a weak mind. Judicis est, It is the part (or duty) of a judge. Est boni oratoris, It is the business of a good orator. In¬ genii magni est, It requires great abilities. Cujus- vis hominis est errare, Any man may err. Meum est, It is my business. Extremae est dementiae, It is the height of madness. Suae ditionis facere, To reduce to subjection ; to bring under his domin¬ ion. k Satagere (to be doing enough): ‘ to have one’s hands full. 5 1 When memini and recordor signify ‘ to make mention of' memini takes the gen., or ablat. with de ; recordor , the acc .— Memini seldom takes the acc. of a person, except in the sense of remembering him as a contemporary. (Z.) 72 THE GENITIVE. N [§ 28. 201. (5) Tempori cedere semper sapientis est habitum , It has always been held a wise thing to yield to the times. (c) Proditionis accusare, To accuse of treachery. De pecuniis repetundis damnari, To be condemned for extortion. (fit) Capitis (or capite) damnari, To be capitally condemned (or, condemned to death). Ad bestias condemnare, To condemn to the wild beasts. (e) Misereri omnium , To pity all. Meminisse praeterito¬ rum, To remember past events : meminisse beneficia , To remember kindnesses. Ofiicii sui commonere, To remind a man of his duty. Dissensionum obli¬ visci, To forget disagreements. (f) Si id me accusas, If you accuse me of that. (So, id me admonuit.) 201. Vocabulary 28. To accuse, To charge falsely, to get up a charge against, To prosecute, To acquit, To remember, To forget, To remind, put in mind of, To pity, To condemn, accusare, m av, at. insimulare,” av, at. postulare, 0 av, at. absolvere, solv, solut. meminisse , p recordari, q also to matce mention of. oblivisci, oblitus, admtinere, commonere, ui, Itum, misereri, r miseritus, misertus; miseres cere. damnare, 8 condemnare, av, at. m Incusare is ‘ to accuse ,’ but not in a court of justice, i * Properly, ‘ to pretend a thing against a man.’ ° Literally, ‘ to demand ,’ i. e. for punishment. . p With tenses derived from the perf. (See odi, 185, x.) Imperat, memento; pi mementote). % * q Meminisse is, ‘to retain in my recollection,' * 1 ‘to remember: ’ reminisci is, ‘to recall a thing to mind,’ ‘to recollect: 1 * recordari is, ‘to recall a thing to mind, and dwell upon the recollection of it.’ (D.) \ * r Miserari governs the acc. Miserari is ‘ to show compassion,’ misereri , ‘ to feel compassion,’ as an act of free will, implying a generous mind, and thereby distinguished from miseret me tui (I am miserable on your account), which car¬ ries with it the portion of an irresistible feeling. (D.) * 8 Damnare aliquem voti (or votorum), is, to condemn a man to pay his vow (oi vows) by granting his prayers. Also, damnare votis. THE GENITIVE. T8 § 28 . 202 .] An Athenian, Atheniensis (162, e). Socrates, Socrates, is, m. Barbarian, barbarus, i, m. To live for the day, forgetful, that > . d - is, of the morrow, ) it is agreed upon, it is an allowed | constat.t fact, Superstition, superstitio, dnis,f. Feeble, imbecillus, a, uni. To disturb, agitate, perturbare, av, at. Constancy, firmness of mind, constantia, ae, f To persist, perseverare, av, at. Error, error, oris, m. Treachery, proditio, onis,./*« Sedition, seditio, onis,./. A Christian, Christianus, i, m. Injury, injuria, ae, j. Adversity, res adversae. To condemn to death, capitis damnare. To acquit of a capital charge, capitis absolvSre. Religion, religio, onis, f. Exercise 29. 202. The Athenians (falsely) charged Socrates with impiety, and condemned him to death . It is for barbarians to live for the day (only). It is an allowed fact, that superstition is the mark of a feeble mind. It requires great constancy not to be disturbed in adversity. It is characteristic of a fool to persist in error. It is your business to obey the laws of your country. It is not every man who can leave life with an even mind. It was owing to you that he did not accuse Balbus of treachery. He promises* to prosecute Dolabella for extortion. He was condemned to death by Augustus. Caius was acquitted of sedition by Augustus. Do not forget benefits. It is the duty of a Christian to pity the poor. It cannot be denied that (86) it is the duty of a Christian to pity the poor. I fear that he will not 53 easily forget the inju¬ ry. I fear that he will remember the injury. Did you not admonish me of that (200,/) ? Adversity puts us in mind of reli¬ gion. It cannot be denied that he has been acquitted of the capital charge. * t Literally, it stands together as a consistent truth. 4 74 THE GENITIVE. [§ 29. *203-206 • § 29. The Genitive continued. (Impersonal verbs.) * 203. (a) With interest and refert (it concerns or is important) ; * 1) Ths thing that is of importance may be either (a) an infin¬ itive (with or without acc.) or (/?) a neuter pronoun (hoc, id, illud, quod: so that they are not quite impersonal), or a clause intro¬ duced either (y) by an interrogative, or (5) by ut or ne. % 2) The person to whom it is of importance is put in the gen. with interest or refert ; but, instead of the personal pronouns, a possessive pronoun is used in the ablative feminine : med, tud, sud, nostra, vestrd : so cujd sometimes for cujus.* * 3) The degree of importance is expressed either by the gen. (magni, parvi, quanti, &c.) ; or by an adverb (multum, plurimum , magnopere, nihil, &c.). * 4) The thing with reference to which it is of importance is governed by ad; as magni interest ad laudem civitatis, it is of great importance to the credit of the state. % 204. (b) These impersonals , pudet, piget, pcenitet,tcedet, miseret, take an accusative of the person feeling, a genitive of what causes the feeling. 205. What causes the feeling may also be a verb (in the infinitive , or in an indicative clause with quod, or a subjunctive one with an interrogative word). 206. (a) Intelligo quanti reipublicce intersit omnes copias con¬ venire, 1 am aware of what importance it is to the republic, that all our forces should assemble. Interest omnium recte facere, It is the interest of all to do right. Quid nostra refert ? Of what importance is it to us ? (or, What does it signify to us ?) Magni interest ad laudem civitatis, It is of great im¬ portance to the credit of the state. Magni interest, quos quisque audiat quotidie, It is ofi great consequence whom a man hears every day. u To be explained perhaps by reference to causa , gratia. It seems to bo proved that these are (as Prisdan teaches) ablatives, since the a is long: e. g. Ter. Phorm. iv. 5, 11:—Datum esse dotis. De. Quid tua, malum! id referti Ch. Magni, Demipho. Refert •zz.reifert, for ‘adrem fert’ or confert, THE GENITIVE. 75 $29. 207, 208.] Illud mea magni interest, te ut videam, Itis of great consequence to me that I should see you. Vestra interest, commilitones, ne imperatorem, pes¬ simi faciant, It is of importance to you, my com¬ rades, that the worst sort should not elect an em¬ peror. (b) Ignavum pcenitebit aliquando ignavice, The slothful man will one day repent of his sloth. Me non solum piget stultice meae, sed etiam pudet. I am not only sorry for my folly, but also ashamed of it. Taedet me vitae, I am weary of my life. Taedei eadem audire milites, The soldiers are tired of hearing the same thing. Tui me miseret, mei piget, I pity you ; I am vexed at myself. 207. Vocabulary 28.* It concerns, it is of importance or J consequence, it is the interest of/ . interest, refert; the latter very rarely when a person is expressed, unless by a pronoun; principally in quid refert ? what does it signify 'l what difference does it make? and nihil refert , it is of no consequence, or makes no dif¬ ference. I am sorry for, vexed at, I repent, am discontented or dis¬ satisfied with, I am ashamed of, I pity, I am disgusted at; am weary or tired of, plget me. poenitet me. pudet me. miseret me (see 201 r ). taedet me; for perf pertaesum est. Like; equal to; as good as, On account of, ' instar; an old subst. signifying a model or image: and as such followed by <( the genitive. It should only be used I of equality in magnitude , real or figu¬ la rative. ( ergo, governing and following the geni. c tive. It is the Greek epyoj. To present, Crown, Golden, donare, av, at. corona, a e,f. aureus, a, um. Exercise 30. [What are the various ways of translating whether—or ?] 208 What difference does it make to Caius, whether he 76 THE DATIVE. [§ 30. 209-212. drinks wine or water ? It makes a great difference to me why he did this. It makes a great difference to us, whether death is a perpetual sleep or the beginning of another life. I will strive that no one 14 may be dissatisfied with the peace. It is of great importance to me, that Caius should 3) be informed of my design. I will strive that it may be your interest to finish the business. It is your business to strive that no one may be dissatisfied with the peace. We pity those men who have been accused of treason in their absence. I will strive that no one may recollect my error. I am ashamed of, and vexed at my levity 7 (p. 14. 15, a). I will strive that no one may be ashamed of me. It is your interest that they should not condemn me to death. It is the interest of all, that the good and wise should not be banished. Plato is to me equal to {them) all. That {ille) one' day was to Cicero equal to an immortality. He was presented ( perf .) with a golden crown on account of his virtue 7 . (For the Genitive of price see under the Ablative.) IX. § 30. The Dative. {Dative with Adjectives.) * 209. Adjectives which signify advantage , likeness, agreeable - ness, usefulness, Jitness, facility, &c. (with their opposites), govern the dative. « 210. But of such adjectives, several take a genitive without any essential difference of meaning. 211. Natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inutilis, vehemens, aptus, accommodatus, idoneus, may also be followed by ad with the acc. of the object, or purpose, for ivhich. * * Propior (nearer), proximus (nearest), take dat., but sometimes the accus 212. Vocabulary 29. (Adjectives governing the dative.) * Grateful (both actively and pas¬ sively) acceptable; agreeable, gratus, v a, um, * T Suavis and dulcis are 'sweet the former especially sweet to /he sense oi smelling, the latter to that of taste; both being used generally and figuratively THE DATIVE. 77 § 30. 212.] Liable, subject, exposed to, Common, obnoxius, a, um. communis, is, e. V 4 (Adjectives that take Gen. or Dat.). Like, similis, w is, e ; superi. simillimus. Unlike, dissimilis, is, e. Equal, par,* paris. Peculiar to, proprius, a, um. Foreign to ; averse to ; inconsis- > ^ , um tent with, ) Friendly, a friend, amicus, a, um; amicus, i, m. Unfriendly, an enemy, inimicus.* Allied to (of a fault), chargeable ) affinig a [ s e> with, ^ ’ * I * * * 5 & g .. . ( superstes, b Itis ; used substantively, a °’ (■ survivor. * (The following are often followed by ‘ ad ’ to express a purpose or object, for which, &c.) Born, natus, partic. of nascor. Convenient; of character, obliging, commodus, 0 a, um. like our ‘ sweet.' Jucundus , that which directly causes joy and delight. Gratus. that which is grateful or acceptable from any cause. Amoenus, agreeable or de¬ lightful to the sight, though extended to other things by later writers. Dulcia delectant gustantem ; suavia odore ; Jucunda exhilarant animum, sed grata probantur A gratis: quae visa placent loca, amoena vocamus. Dbderlein thinks that amoenum is not ‘ quod amorem prsestat, 5 but is a syncope for animoenum, as Camoence for Canimoence, and is equivalent to ‘ animo laxando idoneus.’ $ w Similis takes gen. of internal, dat. of external resemblance. This does not hold without exception; but to express, like me, him, &c. (i. e. equal to), the^en. should be used: I lie tui similis, mores qui servat eosdem ; Ille tibi similis, faciem qui servat eandem. *■ * Similis expresses mere resemblance : ecqualis denotes mutual and absolute equality ; par, mutual congruity, proportionate equality. (C.) « y Alienus also governs the abi., and especially with ab. ‘In the sense of dis¬ inclined, hostile, the prep, is rarely wanting.’ (Z.) « * Hostis, properly a stranger; hence a public enemy (an enemy to my country, not necessarily tome personally). Inimicus, one who is an enemy to me per¬ sonally. Amicus, inimicus , as adjectives, may be compared; and as such generally take the dat. * a Also to be implicated 6r concerned in (a conspiracy, &c.) ; an object (of sus¬ picion). b Aqualis and superstes have usually a dat.; but the former more commonly & gen., when it signifies a ‘ contemporary .’ (Z.) V c Commodus (from con, modus), commensurate with. 79 THE DATIVE. [§ 30. 213 Inconvenient, unsuitable, Fit, Suitable, serviceable, Fitted, adapted, Useful, expedient, good, Useless, Prone, Innocent, Word, Fault, Lust, Age = time of life, incommodus, a, um. aptus, a, um. idoneus,* af um. accommodatus, a, um. utilis, is, e. inutilis, is, e. proclivis, is, e. innocens, tis verbum, i, n. culpa, as,/ libido, inis,/, aetas, tatis,/ {Eng.) Common to kings and peasants (or, to kings with peasants). (Lat.) Common to kings with peasants Exercise 31. [Should invenire or reperire be used for finding what has been sought 7 (177, o.)J 213. It cannot be doubted that (we) men are born for virtue. It cannot be denied that it is very inconsistent 7 with your charac¬ ter to lie. It is easy to an innocent man to find words. I fear that you will not find words. It cannot be denied that death is common to every age. His father warned him not to think him¬ self born for glory. I fear that these things are not 53 useful for that purpose (res). Don’t you understand to how many dangers we are exposed ? I fear that these things will not be agreeable to the rich. We all love (those who are) like ourselves/ Our own dangers are nearer to us (p. 14. 15, a) than those 11) of- others. He says that he is not 2 chargeable with this fault. It cannot be denied that he was of a character very averse from * * Idoneus expresses a natural fitness actually existing, but that requires to be observed, made available , or (if spoken of a person) called forth. Aptus ( = con¬ venienter junctus) expresses actual fitness, now existing. In use, the two words may be thus distinguished: (1) Idoneus necessarily requires a purpose to be mentioned or implied. Aptus does not necessarily require the mention of a purpose, but may express what is fit generally. (2) Idoneus may express a person’s fitness to suffer, to be acted upon. Aptus expresses a fitness or readiness to act. (3) Idoneus, spoken of a person, describes a fitness that may never be observed or called forth: aptus, a fitness actually existing; that has been called forth, and is ready to act. [Idoneus from ideo, as ultroneus from ultro. (D.)] * Nostri, gen. pi. THE DATIVE 79 $31. 214, 215.] impiety (p. 14. 14). There is no one but 9> thinks it inconsistent with your character to keep your word. I wished to be like Balbus (149, b). You, such is your temperance, 9 are the enemy of (all) lusts 7 {gen.). I will strive to discover what is 16) expe¬ dient for the whole of Greece. I fear that these arguments are not fit for the times. Are you exposed to these or greater dangers ? Exercise 32. [What is the Lat. for delightful to the eyes.] 214. Are not your own dangers nearer to you than those of others ? It cannot be denied that he is (a person) of a very oblig¬ ing character. Many persons say that their own dangers are nearer to them than those 11 * of-others. They say that they are not prone to superstition. Might he 17) not have spent 18 ’ a more honourable life ? It was owing to you that our life was not taken away. Is philosophy' the best teacher of morals and discipline ? [No.] He used to say that Athens was the inventor of all branches-of-learning. It was owing to you that I did not turn out an orator. I had rather be like Cato 0 than Pompey. Even Bal¬ bus is not f averse to ambition. It cannot be denied that (we) have need of a mind averse from superstition. Have we done more good or evil ? This is common to me and you. There is no one but understands that these things are common to the rich man and the poor man. I cannot but 18 take these things in good part. zs I will strive that nobody 14 may pity me.e Is wisdom peculiar 7 to you ? [No.] I fear the boy will not be the survivor of his father. There is no doubt that we are come 181 into a very de¬ lightful place. $ 31. The Dative continued. 215. All verbs may be followed by a dative of the thing or person to, for, or against which any thing is done. Hence— • Begin with ‘ CcUonid and go on with ‘ than Pompey.* f ‘Not even Balbus ia.’ s Miseret , not misereri. See 201, r. 80 THE DATIVE. [§31. 216—222. * 216. The dative follows verbs that signify advantage or dis¬ advantage ; verbs of comparing ; of giving and restoring; of promising and paying ; of commanding and telling ; of trusting and entrusting; of complying with and opposing ; of threatening and being angry, &c. *• 217. Of these verbs many are transitive , and govern x the acc. * * (a) With these verbs the acc . expresses the immediate , the dat. the remoter object of the verb. • 218. (a) Verbs of comparing are also followed by the prepositions, cum, inter, and sometimes ad. ( b ) Of verbs that signify advantage and disadvantage, juvo, Icedo, delecto , and offendo govern the acc. % 219. (c) Of verbs that signify command, h rego and gubemo govern the acc., tempero and moderor the acc. or dat. * * 220. Tempero and moderor with the dat. are ‘to moderate,’ ‘re¬ strain within proper limits:’ in the acc. ‘to direct’ or ‘govern.’ Temperare ab aliqua re = ‘ to abstain from.’ 221. (a) Confer nostram longissimam aetatem cum aeternitate, Compare our longest life with eternity. Hominem cum homine comparat, He compares man with man. Vitam utriusque inter se conferte, Compare the livf's of both of them together. (b) Libris me delecto, I amuse myself with books. Offendit neminem, He offends nobody. Haec laedunt oculum, These things hurt the eye. Fortuna fortes ad-juvat, Fortune helps the bold. (c) Moderari animo, To restrain your feeling. Tempe¬ rare sibi, To restrain oneself. Temperate ab injuria, To abstain from (committing) injury. 222. Vocabulary 30 . (Verbs governing the dat. but followed by no preposition in English.) Advise, suadere.i suas, suas. !» Jubeo takes acc. with infin. It may be followed by ‘ut’ with subj. if used absolutely, without the mention of a person. (Z.) «. 4 i Monere (properly, to make a man think of something. D.) calls his attentior 81 $ 31. 222.] the Believe, Command, Please, Displease, Envy, grudge, Help, aid, assist, Heal, cure, Hurt, Indulge, Favour, Marry (of a female), Obey, * « Oppose, Pardon, Persuade, Resist, Spare, Threaten, To compare, DATIVE. credSre, credid, credit; (also to entrust, with accus. of ichat is entrusted). imperare, av, at. placere, placu, placit. displicere. invidere, vld, vis (it may also have accus. of the thing grudged). auxiliari ; subvenire, ven, vent; succur¬ rere, curr, curs; opitulari, sublevare and juvare take the accus. k mederi. i nbcere, nocu, nocit. indulgere, induis, indult. favere, fav, faut. nubere, m nups, nupt ( properly to veil), parere (of the habit) obedire (of particu¬ lar acts). repugnare, av, at. ignoscere, ignSv, ignot. persuadere, suas, suas, resistere, restrt, restit. parcere, peperc et pars, pars et parcit, minari (with accus. of the thing threat¬ ened). comparare ; conferre, 1 » tfil, collat. to something from which he is to draw an inference for himself by his own reason and good sense. Hortari appeals to his will; suadere , to his understand¬ ing. Suadere is to attempt to persuade ; persuadere is to advise effectually ; tc persuade. » k Auxiliari (to make oneself a man’s auxilium ), to increase a person’s strength; to help. Juvare (allied to juvenis ; properly to make youthful, powerful, active; hence) to help (one who is striving. D.); to facilitate the accomplishment of a purpose; support. Opitulari (from opes), to aid with one’s means, credit, re¬ sources, a person who is in great need or peril, from which he has no power to deliver himself. Subvenire (to come-under, i. e., to support); to come to the as¬ sistance of a person in difficulty or danger. Succurrere, to run to the assist¬ ance of; which implies a more pressing danger; to succour. Sublevare, to raise a man up ; to hold him up ; to support:—figuratively, to alleviate, mitigate , lighten. (R.) Adjuvo and auxilior do not necessarily imply, that the person as¬ sisted needed assistance; the other verbs do. Adjuvare (to help forward) often means to increase; enhance. (C.) * l Mederi (to administer a remedy with good effect) relates rather to the sick person , or to the operation of the physician; sanare, to the disease, or to the operation of the medicine. (D.) * m To be married is nuptam esse, and we find, nuptam esse cum aliquo. * *> Conferre (t* (a. b.) The second dative expresses the purpose or some similar notion. It is the common construction to express the purpose for which a man comes , or sends another. * 237. (c) A second dative often stands after sum, where we should use the nominative. Such verbs as proves, serves, &c. may often be translated by sum with the dative ; and an adjective after £ i to be’ may often be translated into Latin by the dat. of a substantive. * 238. ( d ) The English verb 4 have ’ may often be translated by sum with a dative/ {Eng.) I have a hat. I have two hats. {Lat) There is a hat to me. There are two hats to me. It is obvious that the acc. after ‘ have' will be the nom. before ( to be;' the nom. before 1 have ,' the dat. after ‘ to be.' * 239. (e) In ‘ est mihi nomen,' the name is either in the nom., the dat., or (less commonly) the gen. The construction with the dat. is even more common (in the case of Roman names) than the regular construction with the nom. It is an instance of attraction, the name being attracted into the case of mihi. (K.) t 240. {/) The dative of a personal pronoun is often used to point out, in an animated way, the interest of the speaker, or the person addressed, in what is said. 241. (a) Pausanias, rex Lacedaemoniorum, venit Atticis aux¬ ilio, Pausanias, king of the Lacedcemonians, came to the assistance of the Athenians. (b) Pericles agros suos dono, reipublicas dedit, Pericles gave his estates as a present to the state. (c) Magno malo est hominibus avaritia, Avarice is a great evil (or, very hurtful) to men. Ipse sibi odio erit, He will be odious (or, an object of dislike) to himself. (d) Fuere Lydiis multi ante Croesum reges, The Lydians had many kings before Crcesus. (e) C. Marcius, cui cognomen postea Coriolano fuit, Caius ( So ‘ can have ' may be translated by f poiest esse.' $ 34. 242.] THE DATIVE. 89 Marcius, whose surname was afterwards Coriola¬ nus. — Fonti nomen Arethusa est, The name of the fountain is Arethusa. (Nomen Mercurii est mihi, My name is Mercury.) (/) At tibi repente paucis post diebus venit ad me Caninius, But, behold, a few days afterwards Caninius comes to me. 242. Vocabulary 34. v (Verbs that are often followed by two datives.) * (1) With auxilio (assistance). Come, venire, ven, vent. Send, mittere, mis, miss. Set out, proficisci, profectus. * (2) With culpce, vitio, crimini. (3) To impute as a fault, To reckon as a fault, fault, To give as a present, To be a hindrance, culpas dare, ded, dat (with acc. of thing). turn into a > vitio s vertere, vert, vers (with acc. of ) thing). dono or muneri, dare (with acc. of thing). impedimento esse. To be a reproach, to be disgraceful, opprobrio i esse. To be hateful, odio esse. To be detrimental, detrimento esse. To be an honour, to be honourable, honori esse. To be very advantageous, magnae utilitati esse. To mean,k To throw himself at any body’s feet, sibi velle ; mihi tibi , &c., to be used ac¬ cording to the person meant. se i ad alicujus pedes, or alicui ad pedes projicgre, jec, ject. * s Vitium is any flaw, blemish, or fault; whatever makes a thing imperfect. It may therefore be found in things as well as in actions and persons, g Culpa is fault; whatever is blamable; hence vitium may be used for culpa, but culpa not always for vitium* * Scelus always implies a wicked intention; culpa not al¬ ways, but often only a want of prudence, caution, &c. % h A praemium is given to reward, with reference to the merit of the recerver: i a donum, to produce joy, with reference to the gratuitousness of the gift: a t munus, to express affection or favour, with reference to the sentiment of the giver. (D.) % « PrSbrum is ‘ w T hat a person may be reproached with opprobrium is ‘ what he is (or has been) reproached with ‘ a reproach' actually made. (D.) k That is, not what one's meaning is, but what one means by such conduct. * l Projicere se alicui ad pedes, which Krebs formerly objected to, is quite correct: (See Cic. Sest. 11; Caes. B. G. 1, 31.) THE ACCUSATIVE. 90 [§ 35. 243-245. t fC. xxi.]fjr‘ What’ is sometimes used for ‘how’ (quam): sometimes for ‘how great’ (quantus). Exercise 37. 243. He promises to come 3 to the assistance of the Helvetii. Timotheus set out to the assistance of Ariobarzanes.™ It was owing to you , that I did not throw myself at Caesar’s feet. It is the part of a wise man always to fear for himself. There is no doubt that (86) he is going to consult the interests n of Caius. I fear that these things will not 5 3 prove an honour to you. I don’t understand what he means (by it). It is very honourable 0 to you, to have been engaged in such l0) a battle. There is no doubt that superstition ought to be a reproach to a man. They turn my greatest ( see Index I.) praise into a fault. I hope that men will understand howp odious cruelty is to all men. I will warn Caius howp advantageous it is to keep one’s word. He says that he has not many slaves. I will ask them what they mean. I will not object (87. 91.) to their imputing this to me as a fault. He pro¬ mised 3 to give them the island of Lemnos as a present. Might you not have brought 18) a charge of immorality against Caius ?* * 7 X. § 35. The Accusative. * 244. (a) Many intransitive verbs become transitive when com pounded with a preposition that governs the accusative ; and a few when compounded with a preposition that governs the abla¬ ti ve.i » Of these, those that are not deponent have generally a passive voice. % 245. (b) Neuter verbs may take a substantive of kindred meaning or origin in the accusative ; and verbs of tasting or smelling of take the thing in the accusative. m G. is. n Part, in rus with the proper tense of sum. 0 Say: ‘ It is for a great honour.* p ‘ How ’ must be translated by quantus. * ♦ q With many of them the preposition is often repeated; and with others the THE ACCUSATIVE- 91 §35. 246-249.] • 246. (c) Other neuters are used transitively to express a tran¬ sitive notion combined with their own proper notion. * Thus, sitire (to thirst) = ‘ to desire as a thirsty man desires horrere — ‘ to fear, and express my fear by shuddering;' properare mortem, ‘to cause death, and to cause it in haste.’ —This figurative use of neuter verbs is common to all languages. 247. » It has been already mentioned that the accusative of neuter pro¬ nouns is found with verbs, with which the accusative of a substantive would be wholly inadmissible. 248. (a) Pythagoras Persarum Magos adiit, Pythagoras vis¬ ited the Persian magi. Pythagoras multas regiones barbarorum pedibus obiit, r Pythagoras travelled over many countries of the barbarians on foot. Postumia tua me convenit, Your Postumia has been with me. (b) Somniare somnium, To dream a dream. Servire servitutem, To suffer a slavery; to be a slave. Ceram olere, To smell of wax. (c) Sitire honores, To thirst for honours. Idem gloriatur, He makes the same boast. Idem pec- cat, He commits the same sin. Multa peccat, He commits many sins. 249. Vocabulary 35. » ( Transitive compounds of Intransitive Verbs.) Attack, aggredi, ior, aggressus. Visit, adire, 8 adii, aditum. To enter into a partnership, coire societatem; coeod m ^ ( urbem (but better) urbe excedere, cess. To stir out of the city, 1 ( cess. abl. is more common than the acc.; excedere and egredi, in their proper mean¬ ing of going out , should be followed by e or the abl. But Livy has urbem excedere. 1 r Ob in oberro , &c., seems to be an abbreviation of amb, a^i. (D.) * 8 Visere is, to pay a visit as a friend or companion; adire , to visit on busi¬ ness, or in consequence of some tcant; convenire , to visit, on business or not, salutare , to pay a complimentary visit. (D.) t The compounds of eo have generally perf. ii, not ivi. 92 THE ACCUSATIVE. [§ 35. 250, To exceed the bounds of mode¬ ration, To die, To call upon; have an interview with; hence, to speak to, To come to a determination; to adopt a resolution, To encounter death, To smell of, To have a strong smell of; to smack of, To taste of (i. e. have taste or flavor of), To thirst for, To boast of, To grieve for, To sail past or along, Hardly any body, Coast, Speech, Antiquity, Citizens, Wonderful, To dream, Herb, Honey, modum excedSre. mortem obire, obii, obitum; obeo. convenire, ven, vent. consilium inire. mortem oppetere, petivi, petii, petlt. u Plere, olu et olev, olit et olet. redblere. v sapere, io ( per/. rare , saplv et sapu saplt). si tire, Iv, It. gloriari, atus. dblere, dolu, dolit. praetervehi, vectus, nemo fere (‘ almost nobody’), ora, ae,/. oratio, onis,,/'. antiquitas, atis,y. clvis, m. et f. mlrus, a, um. somniare, av, at; somnium, ‘ dream, herba, a e,f. mei, mellis, n. Exercise 38. [How must the infin. be translated after to persuade ?] 250. It cannot be denied that you have dreamt a wonderful dream. He published-a-proclamation that nobody 14 should stir from the city. I won’t object to your entering into a partner¬ ship (87. 91) with me. 6 ) Have you entered into a partnership with Balbus or with Caius ? He has commissioned me to have an interview with Csesar. The honey (pi.) smells of that herb. His whole speech smacks of antiquity. Does not Caius’s speech * * * u Obire mortem, or diem supremum (for which obire is used with the acc . omitted), is only spoken of a natural death, which the mortem obiens simply suffers ; oppetere mortem is, if not to seek it, yet at least to meet it xcith frmncsa and a disregard of life. (D.) * v Re has in many compounds the meaning of forth; thus redolere ‘to smell forth‘ to emit a smell.’ It thus becomes a strengthening prefix: Dodcr lein thinks that, as such , it is possibly the Greek ipi. THE ACCUSATIVE. 93 § 36. 251-254.] smack of Athens ? It is the duty of a good citizen to encounter death itself for the state. Ought he not to have encountered l8) death for the state ? Marcellus sailed past the coast of Sicily (Sicilia). Three hundred of us 19 ) have come to this determi¬ nation. There is hardly any body who has not (44, (3) ) come to this determination. I fear he will not 53 choose to enter into a partnership with me'. I fear he will enter into a partnership with Caius. May a Christian thirst' for honours ? He makes the same boast as 9 ) Cicero. I cannot but 18 grieve for the death of Hortensius. It is a difficult (matter) to put off all (one’s) human-feelingC Both you and Balbus have exceeded the bounds of moderation. There are some who exceed the bounds of moderation. § 36. The Accusative continued. x 251. (a) Verbs of asking , teaching , and concealing , may have two accusatives , one of the person and another of the thing. • 252. But very frequently (and with some verbs always) either the person or the thing is governed by a preposition. Obs. Thus doceo, to give information, prefers the ablative with de. After peto, and sometimes after the other verbs of begging, the person is put in the abl. with a: and after rogo, interrogo , &c., the thing often stands in the abl. with de. * 253. (c) Transitive verbs that take two nominatives in the pas¬ sive, take two accusatives in the active, one being in a sort of apposition to the other. . *■ The apposition accusative completes the meaning of the verb, which cannot form a complete predicate by itself. Such verbs are verbs of calling, appointing to an office, considering , &c., together with facio, efficio, reddo , &c. J The second accusative is often an adjective. » 254. (d) facio and efficio a sentence with ut is often found instead of the second accusative ; and when the accusative of the first verb represents the same person or thing as the nom. of the second, it is generally omitted. {Eng.) The sun makes all things (to) flourish. {Lot.) The sun makes that all things should flourish. 94 THE ACCUSATIVE. [§ 36 . 255 - 257 , (Eng.) He had Lysis for (or, as) his master. ( Lat.) He had Lysis his master ( = as his master). % 255. [C. xxii.] Off "‘ For ’ and ‘ as ’ are to be untranslated, when the noun that follows can be placed in apposition to anothei noun in the sentence. 256. (a) Racilius me primum sententiam rogavit , Racilius aske~ me my opinion first. (Verres) parentes pretium pro sepultura llberftm pos . cebat, Verres used to demand of parents a payment for the burial of their children. Quis musicam docuit Epaminonda m ? Who taught Epaminondas music ? Nihil nos celat , He conceals nothing from us. (») Socrates totius mundi se incolam et civem arbitrabatur, Socrates used to consider himself an inhabitant and citizen of the whole world. (c) Mesopotamiam fertilem efficit Euphrates, The Eu¬ phrates makes Mesopotamia fertile. Homines ccecos reddit cupiditas et avaritia, Desire and avarice render men blind. ( d ) Fac ut sciam, w or (with ut omitted) fac sciam , Let me know. Temperantia sedat appetitiones, et ejicit, ut hce rectse rationi pareant, Temperance quiets the appetites, and causes them to obey right reason. 257, Vocabulary 36. Ask, rbgare,* * av, at. „ ( petere, petlv, petii, petit ( person to be ’ ( governed by ab.). w In comic writers the acc. is often expressed: ‘ Eum ita faciemus , ut quod viderit, non viderit.’ ‘Ego te faciam, ut miser sis.’ ‘Neque potui Venerem facere , ut propitia esset mihi.’ * * Petgre and rogare are the nost general expressions of a wish to obtain , whether in the way of a request or a demand; thus standing between poscere and orare , but somewhat nearer to orare. Of the two, rogare relates immediately to the person applied to, petere to the favour asked. Postulare and exlggre denote a simple demand (without any accessory notion to strengthen it) as a quiet declaration of the will: but in postulare the stress lies on the wish and wilt of the person making the demand; in exigere on the legal ob'igation of the per- § 30 . 258 .] THE ACCUSATIVE. 95 Claim, require, demand, Beseech, Pray, Adjure, Teach, Unteach, Conceal, To teach Socrates to play on the lyre, To think = to imagine, To think, or to be of opinion = to deliver it as my opinion, To think = to reckon, judge,con¬ sider, To think, as opposed to know, Not only, but also, postulare, av, at; poscSre, poposc, pos clt; flagitare, av, at. obsecrare, av, at. orare, av, at. obtestari, tatus. dbcere, docu, doct. dedbcere. celare, av, at. Socratem fidibus docere (i. e. ‘to teach him with the strings’), putare, av, at. censere* * (the word for delivering an opinion in the senate-house). existimare = exsestimare/to pronounce judgment after a valuation;’ arbitrari. ‘ to decide as an arbiter.’ opinari, atus. non solum— sed etiam ; or non solum — verum etiam. To give much information about, multa docere de (the person in accus.). • Again and again = most earnestly, etiam atque etiam. Experience, usus, us, m. Just =: fair, right, equitable, sequus, a, um. Discourse, sermo, onis, m. Exercise 39. 258. Experience, the best master, has taught me many 7 things. Who taught you to play upon the lyre ? I ask you' (thee) again and again not to desert me. I will not conceal from yt>u the dis¬ course of Titus Ampius. I fear that he is preparing 53 to conceal those things from his parents. He had warned Caius not to con¬ ceal any thing 14 from his parents'. These things I not only ask of you, but also demand. Who taught you those? (bad) manners (of yours) ? I will unteach you those manners (of yours). The Gauls have given me much information about their own affairs. son against whom it is made. Poscere and Jlagitare denote an emphatic de¬ mand : but the poscens only demands in a decided manner, from a feeling of right or power, the Jlagitans with passion and impetuosity under the influence of a vehement desire. (D.) Henc Q Jlagitare may be ‘ to demand importunately ;’ ‘ to.importune .’ * x Censere is followed by the acc. with injin.; or, if the opinion is given to be followed, by ut with the mbj.; but the ut is often omitted. » 7 late is the demonstrative of the second person ‘ that qf your».' 1 96 THE ABLATIVE. [§ 37 . 259 - 261 . I fear that you will not consider yourselves citizens of the whole world. Religion will make us obey the laws of virtue. He thought* * it just, that citizens ( acc .) should 3 ' spare citizens (p. 14, 15, a). There is hardly any body but thinks it iust that you should spare me. 259. Vocabulary 37. * (Impersonate with acc.) It escapes me, me fugit, fallit ; praeterit.* Unless I am mistaken, nisi me fallit. It is becoming, decet. It is unbecoming, dedecet. (Eng.) It is becoming (or unbecoming) to (or in) an orator to be angry. \ ( Eat .) It becomes (or misbeseems) an orator to be angry. Exercise 40. [Of sanare and mederi , which relates principally to the skill of the 'physician ? (222, 1.) ] 260. Three hundred of us , 31 unless I am mistaken, survive. I do not forget (it does not escape me) to how many dangers we are exposed. You, such is your temperance , 9 have learned to rule your mind. It is not every one who can 39 cure the mind. I will ask Caius, whether he can cure the mind. All of us not only ask you for peace', but even demand it (of you)., It is your duty to succour the citizens now almost despaired of. It becomes a wise man not to be disturbed in adversity. It is becoming to a boy to hear much , to speak little. It is not unbecoming in an orator to pretend 7 to be angry. 3 It does not escape me, how odi ous 50 impiety is to the good. XI. § 37. The Ablative. * 261. (a) The ablative expresses the means or instrument , and often the cause or manner. N 1 Censebat. Censere should be used when the opinion is the expression of settled conviction. * Ltitet me and Ititet mihi , though they occur in Justin, Pliny, «fee., should be avoided. (C.) THE ABLATIVE. 97 $ 37. 262-266.] * 262. (b) The price for which a thing is bought, sold, valued , or done, is put in the ablative. 263. (c) The adjectives magno, parvo, &c., are generally put by themselves, the substantive pretio being understood. % 264. But some of these adjectives often stand alone in th e geni¬ tive, especially after verbs of valuing at such a price, with which this is the regular construction. „ (< d) Tanti and quanti (with their compounds), pluri s, minoris , always stand in the genitive. With verbs of valuing, magni , parvi , maximi, minimi, plurimi , also stand in the gen. ,* *but magno , permagno , and parvo , are found in the abl. also with aestimare. % With verbs of price, magno , per¬ magno, parvo, minimo, plurimo, nimio, vili, stand in the ablative. . (e) The substantives, Jlocci, nauci, nihili, pili, &c., also stand in the gen. after verbs of valuing. ' Multi _ ? are no , usedj bu , ( magni, Majoris^ j C pluris. 265. (a) Terra vestita est floribus, herbis, arboribus, frugibus , The earth is clothed with flowers, herbs, trees, fruits. Cornibus tauri se tutantur, Bulls defend themselves with their horns. ( b ) Viginti talentis unam orationem Isocrates vendidit, Isocrates sold one oration for twenty talents. (c) Venditori expedit rem venire quam plurimo, It is for the interest of the seller that the thing should be sold for as high a price as possible. (d) Te quotidie pluris facio, I value you more every day. (e) Totam rempublicam flocci non facere , Not tu care a lock of wool (or, as we should say, a straw, or rush ) for the whole state. 266. Vocabulary 38. To value, To hold cheap, V To cost, %' To sell (intrans.) ; to be sold, aestimare, av, at. parvi pendSre; pepend, pens, stare, stSt; or constare (with dat. ol person). venire, 0 eo, venlv, and venu, C. • b The passage in Phaedrus, ‘Multo majoris alapae mecum veneunt,’ is per¬ haps the only instance. (B.) * c Venire venum ire, to go to sale, from an old substantive Venus. So ; vo 98 THE ABLATIVE. [§ 37 . 267 , To sell, To buy, More highly, for more, dearer, For less, For as much—as, For just as much as; for no more than, For how much, Too dear, To reckon or think nothing of, Not to care a straw for, vendSre, vendid, vendit. emere, em, empt. pluris. minoris. tanti—quanti. C tantidem—quanti. quanti 1 nimio, nihili facere. flocci facere ( literally , to make , \ reckon it ‘ at a lock of wool ’.) non hujus facere, mbdius, i, m. triticum, i, n. sestertius, i, m. mercator, oris, m. L 0 » Not to care that for it, Peck, Wheat, Sesterce,d Merchant, / (Eng.) To cost a person much (or dear). . ( Eat .) To stand to a person at much. [C. xxm.] fjf When one, two , &c., mean one, two , &c., apiece or for each , they must be translated by the distributive numerals, singuli , bini , &c. Exercise 41. 267. That victory cost the Carthaginians ( Pceni ) much blood. It cannot be denied that that victory cost us much blood. Mer¬ chants do not sell for no more than they bought (at). He says that he does not care a straw for my glory. I will ask him for how much he bought these things. I sell my (goods) for as much as Caius. The peck of wheat was at two sesterces. For how much does wheat sell ? Epicurus thinks nothing of pain. There is hardly any body* * 9 who does not (44, (3) ) hold his own things cheap. I do not care that for you. My life is valued at ten' asses a day. e It is foolish to hold one’s own (blessings) cheap. He says that I have bought these things too dear. Merchants never sell for less than they bought (at). I will ask what 2lJ corn is selling for. nun-dSre, ven-dere =r venum dare. Tacitus has posita veno, exposed for sale. Veneo is conjugated like eo, having venii rather than venivi for perf ., and imperf. % veniebam as well as venibam. No imperat. ; no supines, gerunds or participles. d A Roman coin, worth about three and a half cents Federal money. A thou* sand sestertii made one sestertium , which was a sum, not a coin, • Denis In diem assibus. § 38 . 268 - 273 .] THE ABLATIVE. 99 § 38. The Ablative continued. * 268. (a) Verbs of abounding , filing, loading, &c., and their opposites, such as verbs of wanting, depriving of, emptying of, govern the ablative. * 269. ( b) But of these Zgco and indigeo (especially the latter) govern the geni¬ tive also. * 270. (c) Some verbs of freeing from, removing from, differing from, being at a distance from, &c., are sometimes followed by the ablative, but generally (in prose) by a preposition.* * 271. ( d ) Fungor , fruor, utor (with their compounds), potior, vescor, dignor, glorior, take the ablative : as does also supersedeo. * But potior takes the genitive , when it means Ho obtain sovereign power over.’ 272. (a) Pericles forebat omni genere virtutis, Pericles was eminent in every kind of virtue (i. e. admirable quality). (b) Res maxime necessarise non tam artis indigent, quam laboris, The most necessary things do not require skill so much as labour. (c) Athenienses bello liberantur, The Athenians were res¬ cued from the (threatened) war. Leva me hoc onere, Relieve me from this burden. (d) Divitiis, nobilitate, viribus, multi male utuntur, Many men make a bad use of riches, noble birth, (and) strength. Augustus Alexandria brevi potitus est, Augustus soon gained possession of Alexandria. 273. Vocabulary 39. (Verbs governing the ablative.) To deprive of, privare, av, at. * To bereave of, deprive of, orbare, av, at. . To rob of (by open violence as an > U| g 5 u enemy), ) * To be without, carere,i» carui et cassus sum, carite/ cass. t With defendere , exsolvZre, exonerare , lev are, the ablative alone is to be pre¬ ferred. (Z.) ' e Expilare, compildre are Ho plunder ,’ as robbers. i h Carere is simply ‘ to be without egere is ‘ to need, to wantindigire it 1 to IOC THE ABLATIVE. [§ 38. 27«. To stand in need of, need, re- ( egere ( ablat. or gen.) or indigere {which quire, To free from, set free from, re¬ lieve from, is stronger ) egere, egui, liberare,i av, at. To use, uti, usus. To discharge, perform, fungi, functus ; perfungi {stronger^. «. To enjoy, To feed on, live on, eat, To boast of, frui, fruitus, and fructus, veseik (no perf). ( gloriari ; also followed by de ’ and by ( ‘in’ when it signifies ‘ to glory in* To make the same boast, Idem gloriari. f niti, nlsus and nixus ; in aliquo niti, u To rest or lean upon, \ ‘to lean on a person for 1 that is, ‘ to rest with’ in the support, sense of ( depending upon his exertions, &c To rejoice, gaudere, gavisus. Medicine, medicina,! se, f. Milk, lac, lactis, n. Flesh, caro, carnis,./. Cheese, caseus, i, m. Fever, febris, is,/ - , {abi. i.). Quite, plane. Debt, ( aes alienum, another man’s money ; ( aes aeris, n. copper. A heavy debt, magnum aes alienum. Severity (of a disease), gravitas, atis,/. Disease, morbus, i, m. Perversely, perverse. {Eng.) Make a bad (perverse, &c.) use of it. {Lat.) Use ill ( perversely , &c.). feel that I want;’ the in expressing intra animum. With reference to an advan tage desired, carere is simply, ‘ to be without a desirable good,’ egere , ‘ to be without an indispensable good.’ (D.) This seems to be the proper limitation of Cicero’s definition; that carere is ‘egere eo quod habere velis.’ i Also with a, ab. k Vesci is the most general expression for supporting life by food , including edere and bibere as the actions of men, pasci and potdre as the actions of beasts. When vesci relates, as it generally does, to eating, it denotes any manner of eat¬ ing, chewing, swallowing, &c.: whereas cd£re, comedZre supposes the manner in which a man eats, by biting and chewing. In vesci the principal notion is the purpose of eating, the support of life ; in edere, the means by which life is sup¬ ported, the action of eating. (D.) l Medicamentum or medicamen is a medicine with reference to its material substance, as it is prepared by an apothecary: medicina, with reference to its heal¬ ing power, as it is prescribed by a physician,- remedium is a preventive, a remedy against an impending evil. (D.) §38. 274-276.] THE ABLATIVE. I 101 Exercise 42. [Should * every day ’ be translated by indies , or by quotidie , when there is no progressive increase from one day to another ?] 274. Do not deprive another of his praise 7 . I rejoice that you are quite without fever. The body, to be (ut) in good health, requires many things. 5) Nature herself admonishes us every day how few things we require. He 'promised to set me free from my debt. Have I not set you free from a heavy debt ? Many men make a perverse use of reason. They live on milk, cheese, flesh. It ivas owing to you 22 that I was not bereaved of my children. But a little more 24 and Caius would have been bereaved of his children. It is not every man who can think nothing of pain. It is a disgraceful thing (for a man) to boast of his vices. May I not make the same boast as Cyrus ? I will exhort Caius to discharge (75) all the duties of life. The safety of the state depends upon you alone (in te uno). Do men alone feed on flesh ? [No.] The severity of disease makes us require 66 medicine (gen.). * 275. The manner or cause , and any word that restricts the meaning of another to a particular part of a thing spoken of, is put in the ablative. 276. Vocabulary 40. Lame of one foot, claudus altgro pede. * (Adjectives* followed by the abl.) Worthy, deserving of, dignus, a, um. Unworthy, indignus, m a, um. Banished, extorris, is, com. gend. (from ex terra ). 1 Relying on, fretus, a, um. Contented, contentus, a, um. Endued with, praeditus, a, um. To deserve, dignus, um, &c., esse. Censure, reprehensio, onis,/. » * Adjectives signifying want or freedom from (vacuus, liber, &c.), take the abl., or the abl. with a, ab. r m Dignus and indignus are (less commonly) followed by the genitive, t n Profugus is one who has fled from his country; exsul and extorris imply that the person is under sentence of banishment. Extorris relates rather to the misery of the exile exsul, to his punishment and disgrace. (D.) 102 THE VOCATIVE. [§ 39. 277, 278. Punishment, poena, a e,f. Severe (of punishment, &c.), gravis, is, e. Motion, motus, us, m. (what declens. 1 why ?) Reality, res, rei, f. Name, nomen, inis, n. {Eng.) He deserves to be loved. 0 * (Lat.) He is a deserving (person) who should be loved (dignus est qui ametur). [Eng.) To inflict punishment on a person. % {Lat.) To affect {= visit) a man with punishment (aliquem poena afficere). Exercise 43. 277. Are they deserving of praise', who have done these things ? [No.] I think this man deserving not of censure only, but also of punishment. These things are unworthy of us. 1 cannot but think 18 these things unworthy of us. He has threat¬ ened me with 4i severe punishment. I have said this (pZ.), relying on your compassion. There is no doubt that he will inflict a severe punishment upon you. Nature is contented with a little. Age¬ silaus was lame of one foot. Had you rather be blind, or lame of one foot ? The mind is endued with perpetual motion. It cannot be doubted that the mind is endued with perpetual motion. It cannot be denied that he sold his country for gold. He is ar orator not in reality but in name. He is a boy in age. He deserves to be praised by all. It is not every one who can heal the diseases of the mind. It cannot be denied that he is banished from his country. There are some who 109 deny that these things are unworthy of us. XII. § 39. The Vocative. (Attraction of the Vocative.) 278. Sometimes, in poetry, a vocative is used instead of a nomi¬ native after the verb.p 0 So, he does not deserve to be, tic., ‘ indignus est, qui,’ &c. p Examples in poetry are Matutine pater, seu Jane libentius audis. (Hor.' ’Tune ille Odrysiae Phineus rex inclytus orae ? Tu Phoebi comes , et nostro dilecte parenti? (Val. Flac.) So in Greek o\/3u yivoio ! (Theocr.) (K.) THE VOCATIVE 103 §39. 279-281.] Another vocative has generally preceded, and this second vocative is attracted into agreement with it; but sometimes it merely refers to a nominative of the second person. v (a) The phrase ‘ macte virtute esto !’ (a blessing on your valour! or, good luck to your valour!) is probably an example of this construction, made being the vocative of mactus from mag-ere q (to increase, enrich, &c.). The only objection to this explanation is Livy’s adverbial use of made with the infinitive. (See example: juberem made virtute esse.) (K.) 279. ( b ) On the other hand, a nominative sometimes stands in apposition to a vocative, or where a vocative would be the regular construction. This is especially the case with solus, unus, primus. 280. ( a ) Macie virtute esto ! A blessing on your valour ! or, ‘ Go on in your valour /’ Macti virtute, milites Romani, este ! Good luck, O Roman soldiers, to your valour ! Juberem macte virtute esse , &c. 1 would say , a bless¬ ing on your valour ! &c. ( b ) Audi tu, populus Albanus ! Listen, ye people of Alba! ' Salve primus omnium parens patrirn appellate ! Hail thou, the very first who was ever called the father of his country ! pietas, atis, f. in (with accus.). r ave, salve 3 {imperatives of the 2d conju- * < gation—vale, valeto is only fare- ( well!). (toga, se, f. (as opposed to the mili • C tary cloak, it means the civil gown). * q The root mag (the Greek pey) of this obsolete verb is still found in magnus and mcxtare (to present with; to honour). (D.) 0 r Pietas is dutif ul affection (towards the gods, one’s parents, relations, country , and even ben factors), arising from a natural feeling: caritas (properly their dear¬ ness to us) is founded on reason and a just appreciation of their value. * • That ave was a morning, salve an evening salutation, does not appear to be established. Suetonius makes salve the morning, and vale the evening saluta¬ tion. (See Habicht.) * i A woollen upper garment, covering the whole body, and forming the ordi¬ nary dress of a Roman citizen. It was a flowing robe, covering the left arm, but leaving the right at liberty. 281. Vocabulary 41. Dutiful affection, piety, 1 Towards, Hail, farewell! The toga,‘ 104 THE PASSIVE. [§40 282-286. r triumphus, i, m. (a public procession A triumph, < granted by a decree of the senate to a f victorious general). To gain a triumph for a victory > de or ex Ga „ is tr i umph5re . over the Gauls, ) To lead the captives in triumph, captivos per triumphum ducgre. People, 11 p'dpulus, i, m. (the vocat, not in use). Exercise 44. 282. A blessing on thy valour, Titus Manlius, and T on thy piety towards thy father and thy country ! Hail thou, the first who has deserved a triumph in a civil gown ! Hear, O people of Rome! A blessing, O citizens, on your dutiful-affection towards your country ! A blessing, O boy, on your diligence ! You, such is your diligence , 9) will soon finish the business. His diligence is as great as 9) his abilities. It cannot be denied that (86) his diligence is as great as his ability. There is no doubt that he told many falsehoods about his age, that (63) he might appear younger (than he is). It cannot be denied that he told many falsehoods, that he might not be banished. I ask you again and again to succour (75) me. There were some who 109 denied that I had deserved a triumph. XIII. § 40. The Passive Voice. % 283. (a) The agent after a passive verb (which is regularly under the gov¬ ernment of a or ah) is sometimes put in the dative , especially in poetry, \ and after the participle in dus. * S84. The accusative after the active verb (the object) becomes the nomi¬ native before the passive verb. *. 285. ( h ) But verbs that govern the dative in the active are used impersonally in the passive ; so that the nominative before the English verb becomes the dative after the Latin verb. 286. (c) Vapulo , veneo , Jio, having a passive meaning, have also a passivt construction. u Not in the sense of folk or follcs, as in English, but oi& people. T Ac. (See 4, d.) THE PASSIVE. 105 § 40. 287-290.] * 287. [C. xxiv.] OCT" ( d) To express the future subjunctive passive we must not use the participle in dus with sim, essem , &c., but futurum sit, esset, &c., followed by ut. * 288. (e) The future infinitive passive is made up of the supine in um with iri ; but when verbs have no supine, we must use fore or futurum esse, &c. * This substitute for a future infinitive passive must be used even when the verb has a supine, unless the event is to be described as being about to happen. In other words the supine with iri is a paulo-post futurum. * 289. (f) So also fore ut with the subjunctive should be used for the future infinitive active, when the event is not to be described as being now about to happen. 290. (a) Mihi consilium captum jam diu est, My resolution has long been taken. (b) Gloriat tuce invidetur, Your glory is envied. Philosophise vituperatoribus satis responsum est, The revilers of philosophy have been sufficiently answered. (c) Rogatus est, an ab reo vapulasset, He was asked whether he had been beaten by the prisoner. Ab hoste venire, To be sold by an enemy. A me fieri, To be doing by me. ( d) Nescio, quando futurum sit, ut epistola scribatur, w 1 don't know when the letter will be written. (e) Dixit fore ut oppidum expugnaretur, 1 He said that the town would be taken. Dixit oppidum expugnatum iri, He said that the city was about to be taken. (G.) (f) Nunquam putavi fore ut supplex ad te venirem, 1 never thought that I should come to you as a sup- pliant. {Eng.) You are envied, favoured, spared, answered, &c. * ( Lat .) It is envied (favoured, spared, answered, &c.) to you. {Eng.) I don’t know when it will be written. * {Lat.) 1 don’t know when it will be {subj.) that it be written. * Of course esset and scriberetur after a past tense. * The tense of the subjunctive verb depends not on fore , bu pn<*t (Polyb .); ‘ Tyrus septimo mense capta est’ (Curt.): no\iopK&v iirra privas (Pint.) ‘after a siege of seven months’ (Clinton). 8 Nearly so with ante: ‘ Ante triennium quam Carthago deleretur, M. Cato mortem obiit.’ The use of the subjunctive here will be spoken of below. Obs. In this construction postquam is oftener followed by the pluperfect than by the perfect. (See 514.) The following is an example of the perfect: ‘Nero natus est post novem menses quam Tiberius excessit.'’ (Suet.) t From vesper, vesperis. * * From KoirSi, common : the principal meal of the day. §43. 312-316.] PLACE. SPACE. 115 Exercise 48. 312. The cily was taken by storm three years after the siege began." Hamilcar was slain nine years after he came (had come ) into Spain. Carthage was destroyed seven hundred years after it was founded. He died the year after he was banished. Why did he go out in the evening ? I will ask why he set out in the evening. Canius came to supper in good time. Is this said to have been done by night, or by day ? He died a few years ago. He died the day after he had called upon me. He was killed the year after Saguntum was taken. Was not he killed in the battle of Cannse ? He set out at the time of the Latin Games. The town was taken five months after it began to be blockaded. It is said 67 that Caius killed his slave by poi¬ son. Did he kill his slave by poison or by starvation ? Has he not killed his enemy by the rope ? I am afraid that Balbus has killed his slave by poison. XV. § 43. Place. Space. * 313. (a) If the town at which a thing is done, is a singular noun of the first or second declension, it is put in the genitive : if not, in the ablative . T « 314. (b) In answer to whither ? the place is put in the accusa¬ tive : in answer to whence ? in the ablative. * These rules apply only to the names of toicns and small islands. Be¬ fore other words prepositions must be used; and before these , when the name has an adjective . w 315. Urbs, oppidum, locus , in apposition to the name of a town in the genitive , stand in the ablative. 316. Such combinations as ‘ school at Capua,’ 1 Carthage in Africa &c._ are not admissible in Latin. But the name of the town must be gov- Say : ‘ after it began to be assaulted.’ T If oppidum or urbs come before the proper name, it must take a preposition, (Z.) t w In almost all the constructions of time and space the prepositions are occa¬ sionally expressed. Thus ‘ ab Epidauro ‘ per totam noctem &c. 116 PLACE. SPACE. [§43.817-319. erned by the preceding rules, and the other nouns governed by a 'pre¬ position. (C.) {Eng.) Running to his mother at Naples. {Lai.) Running to Naples to {prep.) his mother. Currens ad matrem Neapolim. (C.) * 317. (c) Local space is expressed by the accusative : sometimes by the ablative. * * * With distare, exstare , eminere , acc. or abl. is used (but not quite in¬ differently) : with abesse, ex- dis- cidgre, acc. should be used; with con- sidgre, castra facere, the acc. or abl. sometimes with prep, a, ab. 318. (a) Yixi Horace, Tarenti, Athenis, Gabiis, Tibitre , I have lived at Rome, Tarentum, Athens, Gabii, Tibur. (b) Legati Athenas missi sunt: Ambassadors were sent to Athens. Fugit Tarquinios Corintho, He fed to Tarquinii from Corinth. (c) Tridui viam processit, He advanced a three days ’ march. Campus Marathon abest ab oppido Atheniensium cir¬ citer millia passuum decem, Thefeld of Marathon is about ten thousand paces from the city of Athens. Bidui abest, It is a two days' * 1 journey from us (iter understood ). Milites aggerem latum pedes trecentos exstruxerunt, The soldiers threw up a mound three hundred feel broad (or, in breadth). 319. Vocabulary 46. A pace, passus, us = 4 Eng. feet, 10.02 inches. A Roman mile of a thousand paces, mille passus. Miles, millia passuum (thousands of paces). * Two days, biduum, l, n. * Three days, triduum, i, n. To be distant from i to be at a ) ab dlst5re , distit distance of, ) To be nearer; not so far off, propius abesse. To post himself; encamp, considSre, sed, sess. • * Zumpt says, ‘If not the distance is to be expressed, but only a place to be designated by the circumstance of its distance, the abl. is used in the eighth edit, of the original, he says, ‘in the acc., but the abl. is also correct.’ (C'*- Q i. 48.) } y Distare generally takes a. 117 $44 320-322.] GERUNDS AND THE PARTICiPLE IN DUS. * To depart a finger’s breadth, transversum digitum discedere. % As they say, as the saying is, ut aiunt. Carthage, Carthago, inis,./* *. Thebes, Thebae, arum. Exercise 49. (How must 1 lam answered ’ be translated? 285.) 320. He lived many years at Veii. The boy died at Carthage. My father and mother died at Thebes. Why did he set out for Rome in the evening ? I have lived several years at Carthage. Might he not have lived at Rome ? I almost think it would have been better for ( dat .) the Roman people to have been contented with Sicily and Africa. They are building a wall two hundred feet high. The town is five (Roman) miles from Carthage. He has posted himself (at a distance of) four miles from Caesar. Caius is nearer to Caesar than Labienus. Are (then) you nearer to me than Labienus (is) ? I have been informed that Caesar is at a distance of two days’ march from us. There is no doubt that the revilers of philosophy have been sufficiently answered. Does he not deserve 61 to be relieved from his debt ? From this rule I may not depart a finger’s breadth, as the saying is.* XVI. $ 44 On the Gerunds and the Participle in dus (Gerundive). 321. * The Gerund is a verbal substantive , but with the power of governing what bexongs to the other parts of the verb.* Another peculiarity is, that it cannot take an adjective in agreement with it. * The Gerund corresponds, as far as it goes, with the English 1 verbal substantive ,* or ‘ participial substantive in ing ,’ but its use is far less extensive.* 322. % The Gerundive or participle in dus is nearly allied to the Gerund: * Transversum, ut ajunt, digitum. * The pupil cannot be taught too early or too carefully to distinguish the ‘participial substantive ’ from a participle. It may be compound as well as sim¬ ple : every participle, except the simple past participle, having a substantive use. ‘ An affectation of being distinguished :’ ‘ the pretext of their having seized some traders ‘ after his having been tumbling about in his mind 'ne poor sen¬ tence ‘ an atonement for his having been betrayed into,’ Ac. 118 GERUNDS AND THE PARTICIPLE IN DUS. [§44. 323-327. t its meaning is passive denoting necessity, fitness , or something intended; what must, should , or is to be done. * 323. (a) When the participle in dus is in the neuter gender with the third per¬ son sing, of esse, a whole conjugation may be formed to express what one must, or should do. * * The person is put in the dative. * 324. In the oblique cases the part, in dus in agreement with a substantive, is nearly equivalent to a gerund governing that substantive in the case of its verb. ns ... , ( scribendi epistolam. * Of writing a letter, j , 1 . ( scribendae epistolae. 325. A whole conjugation may be formed with the part, in dus and sum. Present Imperf. $ Amandus sum, lam to be loved. I Amandus es, thou art to be loved, &c. ( Amandus eram, I teas to be loved. £ Amandus eras, thou least to be loved, &c. Obs. Amandus eram ox fui is generally to be rendered should (or, ought to) have been loved. * The reason is this: a thing which was (then) a thing to be loved, is (now) a thing which ought to have been loved. 326. (a) Pres. Scribendum est, j °g m “ s To repay a kindness, to prove one’s gratitude, evertgre, vert, vers, operam dare.i conservare, av, at. stttdere, studu,-( dat.). literae (pi.; also, a letter = an epistle), tempus impendere, pend, pens (dat.). id agere (‘ to be doing that ’ and nothing else ;k agere, eg, act), agere causam. gratiam or gratias habere, gratias agere. gratiam referre: fero, till, lat (the per¬ son to whom must be in the dat.). purgare, av, at. ‘ To clear = excuse, • Obs. ‘ Should ,’ which the pupil has been taught to translate by debeo or oportet , must now be translated by the part, in dus, whenever it is not emphatic; when¬ ever it might be turned into 1 it is to be,’ &c. Exercise 51. 338. He is of opinion that these things tend (c) to the over. * b The dat. of the purpose is sometimes found instead of the acc. with ad: dis¬ trahendo hosti, or ad distrahendum hostem. When the verb governs an object in the dat., the agent is sometimes expressed with ab, to avoid ambiguity:— Cives 1 quibus a vobis consulendum est.’— ♦ Obs. Caius consulendus est (must be consulted) : Caio consulendum est (the ‘ nterests of Caius must be consulted). b i Vacare (to have leisure for) is never used in this sense by the best writers. (Hotting. Cic. Div. i. 6.) k Followed by ut with subj. 0 122 GERUNDS AND THE PARTICIPLES IN DUS. [§ 44. 339 throw of the state. Do these things tend to the preservation 01 the overthrow of the state ? There is no doubt that (86) the state is not able to pay (c). It is the part of a Christian to spend his time in assistingi the wretched. Let us consult the interests of those with whom we have to live. I will inquire of Caius whether Balbus should be consulted. We must consult the inte¬ rests of Balbus. It was owing to you 22 that the interests of Caius were not consulted. I made it my first object to (ut) preserve the Roman territory. I cannot repay your kindness. There is no doubt that he is going to thank you. I will inquire of Caius whose cause he is going to plead. Every animal makes it its first object to preserve itself. We must strive to conquer. Must we not repay the kindness of those from ( prep. a) whom we have received benefits ? I persuaded Caius to devote himself to litera¬ ture. They had come into the camp for the purpose of clearing themselves (334). They had called upon Caius for the purpose of clearing themselves. There were some who consulted the interests of Caius. 339. Vocabulary 48. * % (Words following the construction of proper names of places.) At home, From home, Home, At my, your, another man’s &c. house, dbmi. m dbmo. dbmum. n • domi meae, tuae, alienae, &c. On the ground, In the field, Out of doors; out, To dine out, 5 humi (which may follow a verb of either ( rest or motion). militiae. 0 , > fbras (after a verb of motion ) foris (after > other verbs), foras coenare. l Sublevandis : as subvenire , succurrere govern a dat., they cannot be put in agreement with their object. m Domus is partly of the second, partly of the fourth, and has both forms in some cases. The following line gives the forms not in use : Tolle me, mu, mi, mis, si declinare domus vis: but it has domi for at home , &c.; though not for ‘ of the house.' n Also ‘ to Pomponius' s house,' Pomponii domum, without a preposition: ‘ to my house,' domum meam. ° Belli and militice are used only in connection with dOmi: btllo however \* used for in war. (Z.) 123 $ 44 . 340.] GERUNDS AND THE PARTICIPLE IN DUS. Into the country, From the country, In the country, To return, To return, turn back, To be reconciled to, * To confer an obligation on (i. e. on a superior), Youth, To cast forth, To resolve, * Approved (of valor), tried, rus. rure. ruri (less commonly , rure). redire, eo, Iv, it. revertere, vert, vers; or reverti . p in gratiam redire cum aliquo, gratiam inire ab aliquo ( Cic .), apud ali quem ( Liv.) ineo. juventus utis, /.; juventa, ae, f. Juven¬ tus, also ‘ the youth. projicere, jec, ject. constituere, stltu, stitut. * spectatus {lit. seen). Exercise 52. 340. Titus Manlius spent his youth in the country. When Tullius returns ( shall have returned ) from the country, I will send him to you. Quintus resolved to spend his life in the country. On the day after he returned from the country, he was accused of treason. He is the same in the field that (45 ( b ) ) he has always been at home. He answered that Pomponia was sup¬ ping out. Might he not have spent his life in the country ? They {illi) kept their word both at home and in the field. He set out into the country. There is no doubt that he set out for the country in the evening. There is no doubt that he will cast these things out of doors. Diodorus lived many' years at my house. Balbus came to my house. Had you not rather be in your own house without 7 danger', than in another-man’s with' danger 7 ? There is no doubt that he was a person of most-ap¬ proved 7 merit ( virtus ) both at home and in the field (p. 14, 14). It cannot be denied that he has resolved to turn back home. There is no doubt that you will confer an obligation upon Csesar. Bal- p Redire properly expresses the continued action which intervenes between the momentaneous actions of the turning back (reverti), and the return or arrival home (revenire). (D.) Redire is said of one who returns after having arrived at his journey’s end and finished his business; reverti of one who turns back before he has completed his journey or business. ( Ernesti .) ♦ % ^ Juventa , youth = the time of youth ; juventus (utis), youth = the time of youth; or, ‘the youth’ = the young men: Juventas , the goddess of youth. Cicero does not use juventa ; but Livy and later writers use juventa for the time of youth, juventus for the youth. (D.) 1^4 THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. [§ 45. 341-345. bus is already reconciled to Caius (per/-)- We must succour the miserable. There is no doubt that a Christian should succour the miserable.* * There is no doubt that he threw these things (forth) on the ground against his will. The Roman youth were of approved valour in war. XVII. § 45. On the construction of Participles. (Ablative absolute.) * 341. Every attributive word involves an assertion. Thus f a Jine house’ = a house which is a pint one. ‘ Charles's hat = the hat which belongs to Charles, &c. * 342. Thus then every participle makes an assertion in an indirect man¬ ner ; it assumes it attributively, instead of stating it predicatively; that is, as a formal proposition. * 343. Whenever therefore it is convenient to express by a complete sentence the assertion assumed by a participle, we may do so, connecting it with the principal sentence by a relative pronoun, or a conjunction (or con¬ junctional adverb) of time, cause, limitation , &c. * 344. On the other hand, subordinate sentences connected with a principal one by relative pronouns or conjunctions (such as when, after, if, since, because , although, &c.), may often be expressed by participles. 345. Since the use of the participle is far more extensive in Latin than in English, such sentences must very frequently be translated into Latin by participles. By this construction the Latin gains more compact¬ ness and power of compression than the English possesses, but with an occasional vagueness from which our language is free. r . * * See page 121, note h. • r Since in the attributive combination no particle of connection is expressed, its relation to the principal parts of the sentence must be gathered from the general meaning of the author. An instructive example of the possibility of misconnecting occurs in a late review of Tate's Horace (Quart. Rev. No. cxxiv.) Speaking of the passage, Causa fuit pater his, qui macro pauper agello Noluit in Flavi ludum me mittere, &c. (Sat. I. 6, 71.) the reviewer, understanding the meaning to be, because the father' s means were slender, he would not send his son to a provincial school, but carried him to Home — proceeds to consider, how education could be cheaper in the capital than in the country. If the critic had but construed the passage correctly, he would have found ro grounds in it for speculating about foundation schools, &c. at Rome, but have remained satisfied with the obvious meaning, that, 1 though the father’s 125 $ 45. 346-348,] the construction of participles. • * * 346. When a participle does not refer to a noun or pronoun already governed or governing in the sentence, it is put in the ablative in agreement with its own noun. » l (a) An ablative thus unconnected with the general structure of the clause in which it stands, is called an ablative absolute. * (/?) In turning a subordinate sentence into the participial construc¬ tion, if the nominative of the subordinate sentence be not a noun occur¬ ring in the principal sentence, or a pronoun representing such a noun , 347. ( 1 ) ( 2 ) (abl. abs.) ( 1 ) ( 2 ) (abl. abs.) ( 1 ) ( 2 ) (abl. abs.) ( 1 ) ( 2 ) (abl. abs.) I. the construction must be the ablative absolute. Examples. ( Nobody who considers this, will hesitate. ( Nobody considering this, will hesitate. ( Nobody, if Caius considers this, will escape c Nobody, Caius considering this, will escape $ Alexander, after he had taken Tyre, marched on, &c. ( Alexander, having taken Tyre, marched on, &c. { The King, when Alexander had taken Tyre, retired, &c. ( The King, Tyre being taken by Alexander, retired, &c. { I desire joys which will last for ever. ( I desire joys about-to-last for ever. ( I desire heaven, because its joys will last for ever. ( I desire heaven, its joys being about-to-last for ever. J ( We miss many things, though they stare us in the face. (We miss many things staring us in the face. ( We miss many things,though some truths stare us in the face. ( We miss many things, some truths staring us in the face. II. III. IV. 348 . Vocabulary 49. (Preposition a , ah, abs.) * A before consonants: ab before vowels and sometimes before the consonants in hilaris and j; abs is much less commonly used, except before te, s and never except before t and qu. * The meanings of a are (1) from; (2) by, governing the agent after pass, verbs; (3) after; (4) on or at, of relative position ; (5) on the side ox part of; (6) in point of; (7) the office held. From a boy, a puero. Immediately after the battle, confestim a proeliod ' In front, * a fronte (frons, tis,y. et m. ‘forehead’). means were slenderf he nevertheless would not send his son to a school that wa» thought good enough for the children of great centurions, but resolved to give him the best education the capital could afford. • Butler says that it is found before all the consonants except b. % * * Pugna is any battle, from a single combat to the general engagement of large armies : proelium is an engagement of troops. Ddderlein seems to confine the meaning of praelium too much, when he makes it only the ( occasional engage¬ ment of particular divisions of an armyfor Nepos says, ‘ illustrissimum est vradium apud Plataeas.’ Acies when used of a battle is a general engagement. 126 THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. [§ 46. 349, 350 In flank, In the rear, At two miles distance; two miles off, « So near home. * To make for us, To be on our side ; to stand on our side, v To be of a man’s party, \ An amanuensis, * Again from the beginning; all over again, Exercise 53. * [Obs. A (p) prefixed to a clause, indicates that it is to be translated participially.] 349. Let us oppose the evils p that are coming'. Must we spare even p those who resist (us) ? [No.] We must spare them even p though they should resist (us). I must not despair p if (but a) few 7 stand on my side. Timotheus increased by (his) many virtues the glory p which he had received from his father'. Caius, p after he was banished, lived many years at Athens. The father, p after his son was banished, lived many years at Carthage. We do not believe w a liar, even * when he speaks the truth. The father turned back, p because he feared for his son (231). Caius, p who was accused of treason, has been acquitted of the capital charge. 41 Why did you turn back so near home ? The Gauls attack the Romans in the rear. Ariovistus posted himself at about two miles off. He took Massilia p after it had been block¬ aded two years. A treaty was ratified p after the city had been besieged for two years. Do not these (arguments) make for us ? Scipio immediately after the battle returned to the sea. Almost from a boy he has devoted himself to literature. a latere u (latus, eris, n. * side ’)• a tergo. a millibus passuum duobus tam prope a dbmo. a nobis facere. a nobis stare. ab aliquo sentire; sens, sens, a manu servus. * * v ab integro (integer, gra, grum, whole). § 46. The Participle continued . • 350. (a) The participle of the future in rus often expresses the purpose with which a person acts. u On the Jlanks (a lateribus). r So, ab epistolis , a secretary: arationibus , a steward or accountant. v We believe a liar, not even, &c. (ne — quidem). 127 §46. 351-356.] the construction of participles. % 351. ( b ) The participle in dus often expresses the end or pur. pose for which a thing is done. ' (a) This is especially the case after curare (to cause a thing to oe done) and verbs of giving, receiving, sending, undertaking. In English the infin. active is often used where the injin. passive would be allowable , but less common. (0) He gave them the country to dwell in. (Or) He gave them the country to be dicelt in (by them). * 352. Of two connected sentences, one may often be got rid of by turning its verb into a participle. ' Of course the more emphatic should be retained; for instance that which is the effect rather than that which is the cause; that which is the consequence rather than that which is the condition; that which is posterior in point of lim e rather than that which precedes it. 353. f It is a peculiarity of the English language, that we use a present par¬ ticiple when, though two events are closely connected , yet that repre¬ sented by the participle must be over before the other begins. * [C. xxx.] 00^ A present participle must be translated by a perfect participle (or its substitute, qiium with perf. or pluperf subj.) when the action expressed by it must be over, before that expressed by the verb begins. Examples. 354. (a) I write to aid the student. ) j (part.) I write going-to-aid the student (adjuturus). ) (b) He gave them the country to dwell in. (part.) He gave them the country to-be-dwelt-in ( habitandum )• 355. He apprehended them and took them to Rome. > jjj (part.) He took them apprehended to Rome. > He took up the bundle and ran off. ) jy (abl. abs.) The bundle being takenup, he ran off. ) _ (Eng.) Leaping from his horse, he embraced him. (Lat.) Having leapt from his horse, he embraced him. II. 356. Vocabulary 50. To cause to be done; to have a thing done, To contract to build, To let a thing out to be built by contract, A sentence, To corrupt, To learn by heart, To repair, To pull down, Bridge, aliquid faciendum curare. aliquid faciendum conducSre aliquid faciendum locare. *» sententia, se, f. corrumpere, rup, rupt. ediscere, edidici (no oup.). reficgre, io, fee, feet, diruere, ru, rift, pons, pontis, m. 128 THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. [§47. 357-300 Exercise 54. 357. Conon causes the walls p which had been pulled down b> Lysander,* Pto be repaired. He undertook p to corrupt Epami. nondas with money. For how much will you undertake p to cor¬ rupt Balbus ? He had contracted p to build a bridge. He gave Cyrus to Harpagus p to be killed. Carvilius, when 27 consul, had let out the temple (cedes?) of Fortune (Fortuna) p to he built by contract. We give boys sentences Pto learn by heart (354, b). He has set out for Rome r to free his son from debt. I cannot but think 18 you corrupted by gold. Forgetting 3 " the benefits which he received from Caius, he took cruel measures against him. (Be¬ gin with relat. clause ; 30, 31.) He says that it is not 2 necessary to make haste. There are some who 109 have turned-back home. § 47. The Participle continued. The Supines. 358. (a) No Latin verb (except the deponents and neuter- passives) has a participle of the perfect active. Hence this participle must be translated by the (passive) past participle put absolutely, or by quum with the perfect or pluperfect sub¬ junctive. ' 359. (b) An English substantive may often be translated by a participle. It is very frequently necessary to translate abstract nouns expressing a mode of action in this way; as such nouns are comparatively seldom used in Latin. f 360. (c) So also the ‘participial substantive ’ may often be translated not only * G. L/ysandri. y JEdes and templum are both a temple : but in the former it is considered as the one principal building which is the dwelling-place of the God ; in the latter as the whole temple , with all its buildings, courts, &c. JEdes in the sing, has generally the adj. sacra with it, or the name of the Deity: Jovis, Minervae , &c. Fanum is a spot consecrated for the erection of a temple by the augurs; and hence the temple itself, considered as a consecrated place, ‘a sanctuary .’ Delu¬ brum was either the temple itself, as a place of expiation and purification; or, according to others, the part of the temple where the image of the Deity stood; the shrine. Templum is from reyvw, rcytru {cut), a portion ‘ cut ojf" 1 by the augurs; delubrum probably from de-luo , to wash away: Doderlein thinks that fanum is the German Bann, Engl. ban. THE PARTICIPLE. 12‘J [§ 47 . 361 - 364 . Dy the participle in dus, but by other participles. This is a common way of translating it when it is under the government of 1 without.'' 361.* * After ‘ tohcar ' and 1 to see ’ the present injin. active must be translated into Latin by the present participle active. ' 362. When the participle of an abl. absol. is ‘ being,’ it is omitted in Latin, and two substantives, or a substantive and ad¬ jective, are put together in the ablative. * 362.* The supine in urn (act.) follows verbs of motion: the supine in u (vir¬ tually, though not really pass.) follows a few adjectives (such as best, difficult, &c.), and the substantives_/as, nefas , &c. a) The supine in um with ire means ‘ to go about to' &c., implying effort and exertion. 363. (a) (Eng.) Caesar, having crossed the Rubicon, marched to Rome. (Lat) $ Caesar, the Rubicon being crossed, marched to Rome. I or, Caesar, when he had crossed the Rubicon, marched to Rome. (6) 1. Tarquinius, after his banishment from Rome, &c. Tarquinius, being banished from Rome. 2. After the banishment of Tarquinius, consuls were elected. (ail. abs.) Tarquinius being banished, > con8u]s were e|ected (or) After Tarquinius banished, ) (Tarquinio expulso ; or, post Tarquinium expulsum.) (Eng.) From the foundation of Rome, > a RomS condM (Lat.) From Rome founded, ) (So, ante Romam conditam, &c.) (Eng.) By the practice of virtue, > virtute cuM . (Lat.) By virtue practised, ) (Virtute colenda, by practising virtue.) (Eng.) A reward for having despised the deity; or, for contempt of the deity. (Lat. A reward of ( — for) the deity despised (spreti numinis merces). (c) (Eng.) He assists others without robbing himself. (Lat.) He assists others, not robbing himself (se ipsum non spolians). (Eng.) He goes away without your perceiving it. (Lat.) He goes away, you not perceiving it (te non sentiente). (Eng.) He goes away without saluting any body. (Lat.) He goes away, nobody being saluted (nemine f salutato). (Eng.) He condemns him without hearing him. (Lat.) He condemns him unheard (inauditum). 364. Vocabulary 51. At the suggestion of the Magi, Magis auctoribus ( auctor , an adviser) Under your guidance, S te duce <7°° beln 6 °" r leader; dux ' du c cis, m. et f.) In the reign of Herod, Herode rege. 1 > 1 . t On neminis, nemine, see the index under ‘ Nobody.' * * Or, Herode regnante. If the reign were that of a Roman Emperor, imptr vrde must be used G* 130 THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 47 . 365,360 Against the will of Cams, Caio invito. In the life-time of Augustus, Augusto vivo. I have completed the work, opus absolutum habeo. a I plainly see through his design, consilium ejus perspectum habeo It cannot be said without impiety, nefas est dictu. It may be said without impiety, fas est dictu. Hard to find, difficilis inventu. * 365. [C. xxxi.] 0The English present part. act. is gene, rally translated by the Latin past partic. when the verb is deponent. * This arises from the principle given in 353, and from this: that th* Romans spoke of a feeling as over , the moment it had been felt; and of a mental operation as over , the moment it was performed; whereas w*- should describe both as present; as now going on. Exercise 55. [Which word for to light should be used of a funeral pile? 299, h.] 366. p If nature opposes, you will strive to no purpose. Pytha goras came into Italy p in the reign of Tarquinius Superbus, p After Dion (G. Dionis) was killed at Syracuse, Dionysius gained possession of the city. iEneas, p after the taking of Troy Dy the Greeks, came into Italy. The slave, having lighted the funeral pile, cast himself at his master’s feet. 51 They returned to Veii p without waiting for the army of the Romans. They could scarcely be restrained from 17 condemning you to death without hearing you. At the suggestion of Caius, Balbus pre¬ tended to be mad. 3 I am afraid that 1 do not 53 see through Balbus’s design. The son died p after the banishment of his father. He pretends that he has finished the work. I have now finished the' work which I promised to perform 3 (Invert), r After the taking of Massilia by storm, a league was made ( Express post). Was (then) man born p to drink wine ? You have recovered from a severe disease p by drinking water. I heard Caius cry out, that it was all over ivith the army. Is virtue hard to find ? [No.] You will do what shall seem best to be done. Why do you go about to destroy yourself? They sent to Delphi, to consult (sup.) what should be done. a From this idiom, which dwelis more on the possession of the completed ac* tion than on its mere completion , arose the perfect with have in our own and othe» modern languages. § 48 . 367 - 373 .] PRONOUNS. 131 XVIII. §48. Pronouns. * 367. (a) ‘ Own,’ when it is to be more strongly expressed than by meus, tuus, suus, &c., must be translated by ipsius or ipsorum (as one or more are meant) after those pronouns. % 368. (b) Self, — selves, &c., in an oblique case are often trans¬ lated by ipse and a personal pronoun together; the ipse being in the nom. if the meaning is that that agent did it; in the case of the personal pronoun, if his doing it to himself is the stronger notion. 369. * * Properly sui relates to the nominative case of its own verb; but it may be used, in a dependent clause, for the nominative of the principal verb, when either the grammar or the sense would prevent its being re¬ ferred to the verb of its own clause. * 370. (c) Hence in a dependent sentence, that expresses some thought or purpose of the subject of the principal sentence— * His, him, her, their, denoting the nominative of the principal sentence, should be translated by sui or suus, whenever (from the grammar or the obvious sense ) there would be no danger of under¬ standing it to mean the nominative of its own verb. > His, him, her, their, denoting the nominative of the principal sentence, must be translated by ipse, when there would be danger of understanding sui or suus to mean the nominative of its own verb. , 371. (d) Suus often refers to an oblique case, especially when quisque or unusquisque is used. * 372. * Obs. Nostrum and vestrum are to be used (not nostri , vestri) when ‘ of us ,’ ‘ of you ’ = ‘ out of us' ‘ out of you that is to say, after parti¬ tives (including numerals , comparatives , and superlatives) .b 373. ( a ) Mea ipsius culpa, My own fault. Nostra ipsorum culpa, Our own fault. (b) Me c ipse consolor, I console myself. Se ipsos omnes natura dilligunt, All men naturally love themselves. ' b Nostrum and vestrum are also used when they have omnium in agreement, omnium nostrum, &c. * e The cases of the personal pronouns (except tu and the genitives plural) are 132 PRONOl T NS. [§ 48 . 374 (c) Cicero effecerat, ut Q. Curius consilia Catilinte sib\ proderet, Cicero had induced Q. Curius to betray to him (Cicero) the designs of Catiline. (It being obviously absurd to suppose that Curius was to betray them to Curius.) Persee, mortuo Alexandro, non alium, qui imperaret ipsis, digniorem fuisse confitebantur, The Persians , after the death of Alexander, confessed that nobody had ever better deserved to rule over them. ( Qui imperat sibi, might have meant 1 a fitter person to govern himself.’) ( d ) Hannibalem sui cives e civitate ejecerunt, Hannibal ivas banished by his fellow-citizens. 374. Vocabulary 52. To befall, happen, accidere, d cid, ( dat ). To happen, turn out, evenire, ven, vent. To happen (of fortunate events), contingere, tig, tact, (dat.). It was this man’s good fortune, huic contigit ut, &c. To restore liberty to his country, patriam in libertatem vindicare. To defend (a thing or person if) defen(Brei fend> fens . actually attacked), ' To defend (a thing or person, if and whenever it is attacked ;) > tueri, e tuitus et tutus, to take under one’s protection, ) His own friends, or adherents, sui ( plur.). For its own sake, propter sese. sometimes strengthened by ‘ met ’ to signify self with or without ipse: mihimei ipsi , sibimet ipsis, nobismet ipsis, de memet ipso, &c. Se is also doubled into sese: for tumet , tute is said. Matthise says, that Cic. never puts ipse in the nom. aftei this appended met. t d Accidere and evenire are said of any occurrences whatever; contingere, ob¬ venire, and obtingere, only of fortunate ones. But accidentia are occurrences that take us by surprise ; evenientia those that are expected. Accidentia are repre¬ sented as the effects of chance; evenientia as the results of preceding actions oi events; contingentia as favours conferred upon us by good fortune; obtingentia and obvenientia as advantages < /a//mg p to our lot. (D.) From the use of contingere to describe the happening of fortunate occurrences, accidere would come to be generally used of unfortunate ones. * ‘Neither is in itself stronger than the other; foras the defendens shows more spirit and strength in resisting an actual danger, so the tuens shows more ca re and affection in endeavouring to prevent an anticipated one. (D.) $ 49 . 375 - 377 .] PRONOUNS. 133 Exercise 56. [How is through to be translated, when it expresses the cause ? (261 )] 375. The mind is a part of me. The better part of you is immortal. Let none of us doubt that it is expedient to obey the laws of virtue. Which of you is believed ? Many evils have befallen me through ( all .) my own fault. Do not many evils happen to us by our own fault ? All men favour themselves. These evils may have happened to us (129 (a) ) through our own fault. It cannot be denied that the mind is a part of ourselves (of us). I will pray Caius to take my cause under his protection. Ought he not to have commanded himself ? It is not every man who can command himself. He is an enemy to himself. We should practise justice for its own sake. They prayed Artabazus to take their f cause under his protection. He was called king by his own adherents. It was this man’s good fortune to restore liberty to his country. I fear that he will not be able to restore liberty to his country. They ask to be allowed to take all their property with them. There are some 109 who favour themselves. § 49. Pronouns continued. (Is, hic, iste, ille.) » 376. ( a ) He , she, it; they, are translated by is, ea, id, when they merely stand for a person or thing either before mentioned or about to be described by a relative clause. * ‘ Is' is wholly without emphasis, or the power of distinguishing one object from another. One of its main duties is to act as a mere ante¬ cedent to the relative.? * 377. When used to distinguish objects, hie denotes the nearest, ille the most remote, iste that which is the nearest to the party addressed. * (c) Iste may be considered as the demonstrative of the second person = ‘ that of yours,' ‘ that which is knoun to (or concerns) you' f Ipsorum : for suam might mean, they prayed him to support his own cause. ? ‘is qui pugnat’ means 1 the combatant' or ‘a combatant' (accordingly as ne has been mentioned, or not mentioned before): while ‘ hic qui pugnat,’ ille qui pugnat,’ signify respectively ‘tfiis combatant,’ 1 yonder combatant.’ 184 PRONOUNS. [§ 49 . 378 - 384 . 378. From this power of denoting comparative nearness and remoteness (whether in space or time), hie and ille are used to discriminate between the different words that form the subject of discourse. Thus then, s Of two things already mentioned, hie relates to the nearer, the latter ; ille to the more remote, the former. ll * Hie, referring to what immediately precedes, must occupy a very early, if not the first place in its sentence. 379. " While hie refers to what has just come from the pen (or mouth), ille may be opposed to it in another direction, and introduce some new matter. 380. * * So also hie may refer to what follows, but it must then descend from its prominent place at the beginning of the sentence, to occupy one equally emphatic either at, or very near, the end. 381. ♦ 1 Ille,' from relating to the past, may denote that which has long been known, whether favourably or unfavourably. (b) Here ille i = the well known; the famous. 382. *. In letters, iste relates to the place where the person addressed is residing, and to the things that concern him : in trials, iste denotes the opposite party, as long as he is directly addressed; but when the speaker turns to the judges, he may use hie to denote the opposite party. (G.) * As ille may mean ‘whom all know' so iste may mean ‘whom you know,' whether for good or notA So also hie may mean ‘ whom you or / see before us.’ 383. ( d ) ‘ Ille 5 is used before 1 quidem where we use ‘it is true,’ ‘ indeed ,’ to make some partial concession, to be followed by a ‘ hut,.’ 384. ( a ) Dionysius servus meus aufugit : is est in provincial tua, Dionysius, a slave of mine, has run away : he is in your province. (b) Medea ilia, The famous Medea. Magnus ille Alex¬ ander, The celebrated Alexander the Great. Of the passages where hie relates to the more remote word of a sentence, ali probably may be explained by one or other of these considerations:—(1) The well-known order of the actual occurrence or existence of the things may be re¬ versed in the sentence. (G.) (2) Hie may denote what is before our eyes. (3) Or hie may denote 1 id de quo potissimum, agimus.' (Raschig ad Liv. xxiv. 29.) • Ille can never perform the part of & mere antecedent to the relative ( = is ); and the employment of hie for this purpose must be confined to those cases where the relative clause precedes (see 30, (c) ), so that here too it supports its ordinary character of referring to what has just been mentioned, k In this way iste is often used to express contempt, but by no means always PRONOUNS. 135 § 49 . 385 , 386 .] (c) Ista, civitas, That state of yours. ( d ) Non sine ratione ille quidem , sed tamen, &c., Not without reason it is true, but yet, &c. 385. Vocabulary 53. v And that too, t Nor that; and that too not, That only, * To know, To know = to be acquainted with, * To know thoroughly by expe¬ rience ; to be conversant with, k- To take away, * * ■ *■ To make a beginning with, Of a common kind, et is ;i isque ; et idem, idemque. nec is. ■ is m demum {that at length , as if the oth- 1 ers had been travelled through before this was arrived at), scire, n sclv, scit. novisse, nosse ( perf. of noscere, to learn to know, to make acquaintance with). I callere, ui (properly, to be hard , as a hand becomes by much manual la- 1 bour; acc.). adimere 0 (of good things) eximere (of bad things) em, empt. They govern the dat. of that from which, facere initium a. vulgaris, is, e. Exercise 57. 386. He has killed both his father and his mother ; the former by poison, the latter by starvation. What prevents him from making a beginning with himself? This™ only is true wisdom, to command oneself. What ra true wisdom is, the wise only know. Do you know Caius ? I will ask what true wisdom is. At how much is that state of yours to be valued, from which the good and wise have been banished ? I doubt whether this is true happiness or not. I have had an interview with Caius.: he says that he has l Some scholars doubt the existence of the forms ii and iis. Grotefend gives dat. eis (also iis) : Zumpt (in his eighth edit.) ii {ei), iis {eis); adding that the former are the more common, and generally written in MSS. with a single i. • ra When is, hie, or qui, &c. stands as the subject of an apposition-verb (150), it generally agrees with the following noun, where we might suppose it to agree with ‘ thing.’ [“ Ea demum est xerafelicita*.”] * n Scire relates to a proposition; if followed by an accusative only, it is a neut. pronoun, or nihil. It expresses actually acquired knowledge. * Nosse is to have become acquainted with the signs and marks by which a thing may be known : it ‘describes therefore knowledge as the result of external or internal percept ion! * R.) Hence nosse is often followed by the accusative of a noun. • Demitur quidlibet ; adimuntur bona ; eximuntur mala. (D.) 136 PRONOUNS. § 49 . 387 , 388 . not seen the man. Do not take away from me my liberty. That (famous) Plato has takt n away from me all fear of death. Apollo admonishes us to become acquainted with ourselves. It is not every one who can 39 know himself. Those good things which can be taken away, are not really good things, p Having set my son 7 at liberty, he has taken away all my^ care. I have been praised by a good man it is true (cl), but (one who is) unskilled in these matters. Christians after death will enjoy a happy life, and that too an eternal one. He has always devoted himself to literature, and that too of no 82 common kind. 387. Vocabulary 54. Also, (may often be translated by) idem. r * This or that, as well as some other, et ipse. # Where you are ; in your neigh- \ . .. * i IS LlC» ^ bourhood, *■ Even or very (with that), ipse; illud ipsum s (‘even that’). To join battle with, to give bat -) ...„ J t preshum committere tie to, ) 1 o your neighbourhood ; to where > j or istuc , you are, ) From your neighbourhood; from ) j gt j nc where you are, ) Proud, superbus, a, um. cum. Exercise 58. [How must ‘I am believed’ be translated? 285.J 388. Those whom we love, we also wish to be happy. Let him who commands others, learn also to command himself. Are (then) liars believed in your neighbourhood ? Those who come from your neighbourhood, say that you are proud. It is not becoming for 57 a Christian to be proud. I had already set out to p Say : ‘are not true good (things).’ Say: ‘ all care from me .’ * T Nihil est liberale, quod non idem justum (which is not also just). * s To justify the use of ille (to denote any thing, provided it did not immediately precede) there must always be an intermediate object to which hie is applicable: yet, not if the remote event be one of general notoriety. “ Q,uid T. Albutius 7 nonne aequissimo animo Athenis exsul philosophabatur 7 cui tamen illud ipsum numquam accidisset si, &c.” (De Fin. v. 108.) Adverbs of motion to a olace end in o or uc; of motionyrora, in inc , nde. PRONOUNS. §50. 389-391.] 137 your neighbourhood. Even that would never have befallen me, in your lifetime. A Christian may not be proud. Do not join battle. I fear the Romans will not be willing to join battle with the Gauls. It cannot be denied that justice should be practised for its own sake. It remains, that I should give battle to the Gauls. It follows, that it is a difficult thing to know oneself. I know that in your neighbourhood you both are wise and seem (so.) Such 10) a war was undertaken, as Rome had never before seen. §50. Pronouns continued. (On the translation of ‘any. 5 ) % 389. ‘ Any 5 when all are excluded is quisquam or ullus. 390. ‘ Any 5 when all are included is quivis u or quilibet. * (a) All are excluded in sentences that are really or virtually^ negative ; and after vix (scarcely), sine (without). » (/?) All are included when ‘ any ’ means ‘ any you please ,’ ‘ every.' » (y) ‘ Q-uisquam ’ is used without, ‘ ullus 5 generally with a substantive. Quisquam may however be used with designations of men (homo, civis), &c. 391. ( b ) ‘ Any 5 after si, nisi, num, ne, quo, quanto, is the in¬ definite quis ; w of which the feminine singular and neut. plur. are quce or qua, after si, num, ne (and ec).* * t " In quivis (and utervis) a deliberate and thoughtful choice is supposed, in qui¬ libet (and uterlibet) a blind and inconsiderate one.— Quilibet generally carries with it some expression of contempt. (D. after Lachmann.) * v Sentences that are virtually negative (that is, as good as negative) are (1) such questions as expect the answer ‘ no ,’ and are asked not for information but assent; thus, ‘ can any man believe this 1 ’ = ‘ no man surely can believe this ;’ (2) comparative sentences; ‘he was taller than any of his friends’ = ‘none of his friends was so tall as he.’—With respect to sine, aliquis should follow it in a negative sentence (in which it is to be considered positive), and ullus in a positive sentence (in which it is to be considered negative). (G.) * w Quisquam sometimes follows si, but it then generally implies that the exist¬ ence of the exception is very doubtful. And even without si it is used to ex¬ press any single person or thing. “ Quamdiu quisquam erit, qui te audeat defendere, vives.” Such expressions as ‘ sine omni cura’ for ‘sine ulla cura ‘ are only found in Plautus and Terence. In Cicero ‘sine omni cura’ would mean ‘ without all (imaginable) care.’ v * Whether quw or qua should be preferred, is a disputed point. The poets use qua with few exceptions. (Z.) The form qui is also used in the sing. nom. mate.: si qui , ecqui. Even aliqui ( = aliquis) is found in a few passages of Cicero. 138 PRONOUNS. [§ 50 . 392 - 396 . (But aliquis follows these particles when the any or some is emphatic.) * 392. £ Any ’ is translated by aliquis x or quispiam , when it means 1 some one or other,’ ‘some.’ % 393. ( d ) The indefinite article ‘a’ may sometimes he trans, lated by quidam, aliquis, or quispiam ff when ‘ a certain ’ or ‘ some 1 might be substituted for ‘ a .’ * 394. (e) Nescio quis (the quis agreeing with the subst.) is sometimes used for quidam, but it generally carries with it some notion of contempt or of indifference at least. {Eng.) Henry, Charles and John. {Lat.) Henry, Charles, John. Or, Henry and Charles and John. 395. (a) Solis candor illustrior est quam ullius ignis, The brightness of the sun is more intense than that of any fire. An quisquam potest sine perturbatione mentis irasci ? Can (then) any man he angry without some mental agitation ? (b) Num quis irascitur infantibus ? Is any body angry with infants ? (c) Quodlibet pro patria, parentibus, amicis, adire peri¬ culum .... oportet, We ought to encounter any danger for our country, our parents, and our friends. Mihi quidvis sat est, Any thing is enough for me. (d) Agricola quispiam, Some husbandman (any, or a, hus¬ bandman). Pictor aliquis, Any, or a, painter. (el) Prope me hic nescio quis loquitur, Some body or other is talking here near me. 396. Vocabulary 55. quisque,* quaeque, quodque ; G. cu- j usque. * Every body, * If ‘ some 5 is emphatic — some at least, though but little, or of a bad quality, aliquis should be used. I *y When quidam expresses ‘a’ it implies 1 a certain' one, though it is unne¬ cessary, perhaps impossible, to name it : quispiam and aliquis do not imply an allusion to a particular individual. » * Quisque is a sort of enclitic, and therefore never stands at the beginning of a sentence in prose, and seldom even in poetry. The corresponding emphatie form is ‘ unusquisque 1 each particular one' § 50 . 397 .] PRONOUNS. 139 Every body who ; whoever, Whatever; every—that, Why 7 How? Somebody — a person of conse¬ quence, At once—and, Any one man, Take care ; see that, % Rashly; inconsiderately ; without sufficient reason, What? % Some how or other, • quisquis, - quidquid (quidquid, every thing that; whatever). quicunque, a qnsecunque, quodcunque; G. cujuscunque, &c. quid ? qui? aliquis, aliqua, aliquod; G. alicujus. idem—idem.b quivis unus, vide ne. temSre. • quid? nescio quombdo. Exercise 59. 397. Can (then) 0 any man govern the seasons ? Take care not to he angry with any body without sufficient reason. Take care to do nothing inconsiderately. Can (then) any of you govern the seasons? Hardly anyone can govern himself! Everyman ought to defend his own 1 * * * * * 7 friends. d Will any man hesitate to shed his blood for his country ? This might have happened to any body. Shall (then) any thing deter me from encountering 21 any danger (whatever) for my country' and my parents 7 ? Is not any thing enough for Balbus ? He is braver than any (390, v) of the Gauls. If any one breaks his word for the sake of his friend, he sins 7 . Do you (then) believe that any Roman (you please) is braver than any Greek ? You may say any thing (you please) here. Whatever things are in the whole {omnis) world, belong to men. Some are the slaves of glory, others of money. How does it happen that you (pl>) do not know this ? What ! do not all understand this ? There are some who believe any body. 1 Quicunque is the adjective form of quisquis. b Fuere quidam qui iidem ornate, iidem versute dicerent. (Z.) 0 Though num expects the answer no, it does not imply that the answer ‘yes’ sannot possibly be given, as ‘ an ’ does. ‘ An quisquam ’ is therefore more com¬ mon than ‘num quisquam,’ and stronger than ‘num quis' d Quisque should immediately follow cases of sui or suus, and numeral* 'decimus quisque , every tenth man). 140 pronouns. [§ 51 . 398—402 % § 51 . Pronouns continued. (On the prefixes and affixes of the interrogates.) 398. (a) The syllable ec often appears as a prefix, and the syl¬ lable nam as an affix, to interrogative pronouns and adverbs. * *The ‘ec’ is from en! eml hem! a particle calling for attention to what is going to be said. Nam ’ is properly namely, by name ; so that quisnam is, who by name; name or tell me, who. (Hartung .) * The en stands alone in, l En unquam cuiquam contumeliosius audistis factam injuriam, &c.7 ’ ( Ter. Phorm. ii. 3.) Nam is appended to quis, quid, ubi, num, &c. * 399. (b) ‘ Always ’ after one superlative and before another, may be translated by quisque, agreeing with the same substantive that the superlatives agree with. « The singular is generally to be used, when a substantive is not to be expressed in Latin. 400. (a) Ecquid e sentitis in quanto contemtu vivatis ? Do you perceive at all (or, perchance) in what contempt you are living ? Num quidnam novi accidit? Has any thing fresh occurred ? * ( b ) Optimum quidque rarissimum est, The best things are always the rarest. s Altissima quaque flumina minimo sono labuntur, The deepest rivers always fiow with the least sound. (c) Doctissimus quisque, All the most learned men . (d) Aliud alii natura iter ostendit, Nature points out one path to one man, another to another. Aliud alio fertur, One thing is borne in one direction, another in another. 401. (Eng.) One Balbus. ( Lat .) A certain Balbus. (Quidam.) * (Eng.) One does one thing, another another. f (Lat.) Another does another thing. 402. Vocabulary 56. * Little = but or too little, parum (with genit.). • Ec ( r= en) prefixed to quis, quid, quando, &c., puts a question doublingly\ out intimates that the answer ( no’ is rather expected. It often gives a tone of impatience to the inquiry. f In a sentence of this kind, one—one must be translated by alius—alius and another —another be untranslated. PRONOUNS. 141 § 51 . 402 .] € t A little =r some, but not much, A considerable quantity; some considerable. In the mean time, Meanwhile; all that time, Sometimes = now and then (ap¬ proaching, as compared with nonnunquam , to the notion of but seldom). paulum, or paulfilum. | aliquantum (with genit.). interim. interea.^ >interdum. * * * Sometimes (approaching to the 1 notion of pretty often). , Ever, < I .1 In a different direction; to some j other place, ! * From a different direction, Any where = any whither, | Nowhere or whither, Strength, * HjT Rarius interdum quam nonnunquam; aliquando^ (the last be¬ ing properly some time or other , and often therefore equivalent to at last ).i unquam (with negatives); aliquando (when it means, at some one time, be it when it may); quando (after si, nisi, ne, &c., when the ever is not em¬ phatic)^ • alio (387, t). aliunde. usquam,i aliquo, quo (to be used accord¬ ing to the Rules for ‘ any .’ See Any, Index I). nusquam. vires, virium, &c. (in sing. ‘ force ’ j ‘violence’; vis, vim, vi). nonnunquam esse memento. ^ * • £ Interea refers to an event continuing during the whole interval: interim to one that occurs at some time or times within that interval. Hence, as Doderlein observes, in negative sentences interea is the regular word, as the possibility and expectation of a thing’s happening is always of some duration. . « h The syllable ali , whether as prefix or termination, always denotes quality. Thus ‘ si aliquis adest,’ is, ‘ if there be any one present, be he who or what he may :’ whereas ‘ si quisquam adest ’ would mean ‘ if there be but one present, no matter whether more or not.’ (G.) Aliquando is properly '■at one time, whether near or far off,' but as a thing’s once happening may prove the possibility of its often happening, aliquando is often equivalent to aliquoties. But in the golden age it is used by preference of things that had better happen never. (D.) * i It gets this meaning from its being implied by the nature of the sentence that no early time remains. In this meaning it is often joined with tandem ( e= tam demum. D.). * k Hence ‘ever’ = at any time, is translated by unquam , anquando, or quando, according as ‘any’ would be translated under the same circumstances, by xdlus, aliquis, or quis. Si quis, si quando are pearly equivalent to whoever, whenever. ' i Usquam is more regularly the ‘ any where ’ of rest hut is used after verbs' of motion, as we use where. COMPAKISONS. § 52. 403, 404. 142 Exercise 00. * [‘Ever ’ after whether, when marked as emphatic, is to be translated by ecqvando. * ‘ Perchance,' 1 after whether, is to be translated by the addition of quid to en or num: ecquid, numquid. ► When ‘ ever ’ and ‘ any ' are marked as emphatic (in other cases) they are not to be translated by quando, quis. * ‘ ’ emphatic is to be translated by a 'pronoun.'] 403. What prevents us from banishing every tenth man ? We have lost some considerable time by playing. They say that they shall never 2 die. We shall all die some time or other. The best men always ( b ) die with the most resignation. In the mean time one Octavius called upon me at my own house. None of you called upon me all that time'. There is no one but (44, (2) ) is sometimes mistaken. Most' of us are pretty often, all of us are sometimes deceived (p. 14, 15, b). Which is the wiser, Caius or Balbus ? Does any man believe liars ? In the mean time a 7 (393) greater fear seized upon the soldiers. I hear that there is a' greater fear in the city. If you ever return ( shall have returned) home, you will understand these things. Have you ever' heard this from any body ? [No.] If you are setting out any where, return in the evening. Are you going to set out to some other place ? Nowhere. Some considerable time has been lost (in) asking my friends. Some persons devote themselves to one thing, others to another. Virtue is not of such 10 ' strength as to defend herself. 15 Have you perchance two countries ? Let me know whether I shall ever' see you. There were some who had two countries. XIX. § 52. Comparison. * 404. (a) The regular particle of comparison is quam (than). The things com- pared will of course be in the same case. , (a) When the same noun belongs to each member of the comparison, it is omitted in one. In English we express it in th e first clause, and use the pronoun ‘ that ’ for it in the second. This 'that' is not to be trans lated into Latin. COMPARISONS. 143 $ 52 . 405 - 409 .] * 405. ( b ) Sometimes quam is omitted, and the following noun put m the ablative . m « (a) As a rule, the ablative should not be used in this way, except where the same noun would follow quam in the nominative. Sometimes how¬ ever the ablative , especially of pronouns , is used for the accusative after quam. In the construction of the acc. with injin. this would be regular, w (/?) Moreover, the construction with the ablative should not be used, un¬ less the object with which another is compared, actually possesses the property m in question. v - 406. (c) Comparatives and superlatives are often accompanied by ablatives, expressing by how much one thing exceeds or falls short of another. »407. (d) The English the—the ( — by how much—by so much) are expressed in Latin by quanto— tanto ; quo — c.o or hoc. A sentence of this kind may also be expressed by ut quisque with a superlative, followed by ita with another. »408. ‘ Somewhat ’ and l /oo’ with the positive are expressed by the compa¬ rative , when those adverbs are not emphatic. And sometimes an em¬ phatic positive is expressed by the comparative. 409. (a) Europa minor est, quam Asia, Europe is less than Asia. (£>) Non ego hac nocte longiorem vidi, I have not seen a longer night than this. (c) Multo difficilius, Much more difficult. ( d ) Eo minor est arcus, quo altior est sol, The higher the sun is, the less is the arc. Tanto brevius omne tempus, quanto felicius est, The happier any time is, the shorter it is (i. e. appears). Ut quisque est vir optimus, ita difficillime esse alios improbos suspicatur, The better a man is, the more difficulty he has in suspecting that others are wicked. (e) Romani bella quaedam fortius quam felicius gesse¬ runt, The Romans carried on some wars with more courage than success. Pestilentia minacior quam perniciosior, A pestilence m If I say a person is ‘ sapientior Caio ,’ I ascribe wisdom to Caius, though less of it than to any other person. If I say he is ‘ sapientior quam Caius, ’ I do not necessarily ascribe to Caius any wisdom at all. 144 COMPARISONS. [§ 52 . 410 . more alarming than (really) fatal (or, alarming rather than destructive). (y*)Prcelium majus quam pro numero hostium editur, A severer tattle is fought than could have been ex¬ pected from the (small) number of the enemy. (Or, a tattle unusually severe for the number of the enemy.) Alexander consedit regia sella multo excelsiore quam pro habitu corporis, Alexander sat down on the royal chair , which was far too high for his stature. ( g ) Res graviores (important). Morbi graviores (sc vere). 410. Vocabulary 57. Passionate, Angry, Considerably more, Many times as great, Are hard to be avoided, or diffi- .. . , ., ’ £ difficile vitantur, cult to avoid, iracundus, a, um. iratus, a, um. aliquanto plus (see 402). multis partibus major. Hidden, Snares, Frequent, Loquacious, Old age, Difference, Worse, occultus, a, um (partic. of occtilSre). insidiae, arum, f. creber, bra, brum ; frequens, 11 tis. loquax, acis, senectus, utis, f. distantia, a n,f. pejor, or, us {lessgood than, deterior). (in re- (Words by which superlatives are strengthened). As shortly as possible, Extremely flourishing sources), Far; by far, The very least, The most unjust possible, or in the world, (Eng.) He is too proud to be a slave quam 0 brevissime. • longe opulentissimus. multo. vel minimus. ; vel iniquissimus. (Lat.) He is prouder than that he should be a slave. %, n Creber denotes close and crowded succession, and often implies censure: fre¬ quens denotes a plentiful supply, and rather as an epithet of praise. Frequens is also used of a place ‘ much resorted to ,’ and a ‘ full ’ senate-house: in which sense creber is not used, but celeber , which is related to it as KuXOnru) to kovtttu). (D.) 0 Potest , possunt, &c., may be inserted after quam. i Aves nidos quam pos¬ sunt mollissime substernunt ’ = tam molliter, quam possunt mollissime. (G.) 145 §53. 411,412.] REMARKS ON SOME OF THE TENSES. * (Quam ut mancipium sit, or possit esse.) (Eng.) I took the greatest pains I could . ( Lat.) I took pains (as great) as p the greatest I could ( quam ). (Eng.) As great a difference as there can possibly be. (Lat.) A difference as great-as the greatest can be. * (Quanta maxima potest esse distantia.) Exercise 61. 411. That report was frequent rather tharf certain (e). The better a man is, with the more resignation will he die. The most hidden dangers are always the most difficult to avoid. The more hidden a danger is, the more difficulty is there in avoiding it. 93 The more passionate a man is, the more difficulty has he 93 in commanding himself. He is too angry to be able to command himself. I prefer the most unjust peace in the world to the justest war. Saguntum was an extremely flourishing state. I will say as shortly as possible, what it seems to me should be done. 67 They perceive the very least things. They worship Libera, whom they also 86 call Proserpina. I have accomplished the longest journey 1 possibly could. I have finished the business with the greatest care I possibly could. In important matters, there is need of delib¬ eration. 30 Old age is by nature somewhat (408) loquacious. We have lost considerably more gold than you. It is an allowed fact , that the sun is many times as great as the earth. There is the greatest possible difference of character between them. XX. § 53. Remarks on some of the Tenses. * 412. Theperfect definite (perf. with have) is virtually a present tense, being used of an action begun at some past time, and carried on up to, or nearly up to the present moment. Hence, as we have seen (40, d), it may be followed by the present ox perfect subjunctive. p Q uam maximas potui copias — tantas, quam maximas. (G.) » Nevertheless the Roman ear was so accustomed to the imperf. subj. after the perf., that they used it (even where the perf. is plainly equivalent to our perfect with ‘have’), provided ‘theaction could be conceived as one advancing gradually to its completion.’ (Z.) ‘ Diu dubitavi (have long doubted) num melius sit,’ &c., would sound strange to Roman ears: they preferred ‘num melius essetf even when they did not narrate, but were only stating the result. (K.) 7 146 REMARKS ON SOME OF THE TENSES. [§ 53 . 413-416 413. (a) To express, ‘ I have been doing a thing for a long time,’ the Romani said * 1 * * * 1 am doing it for a long time already.’ (Jam pridem cupio, I have long been desiring.) * 414. In animated narrative, the past is often described by the present. # (b) The present when thus used ( prcesens historicum) may be followed either by the present subj. (according to the general rule for the sequence of tenses), or by the imperfect subj. (as being itself virtually a past tense). The imperfect is, on the whole, the more common. (Z.) * 415. (c) A present tense after relatives , or, ‘ when? 1 if? 1 as long as? ‘ before? &c., is generally to be translated by a future , when the action expressed by it is still future. * The action is generally still future, when the verb in the prin¬ cipal clause is in a future tense or the imperative mood. r * If one action must be completed before the other begins, the future perfect should be used. In this case the perfect definite is sometimes (by no means always ) used in English. 5 * 416. (1) (Eng.) Whensoever I take t my journey into Spain I will come to you. (Lat.) Whensoever I shall take my journey, &c. (2) (Eng.) When I have performed this, I will come, &c. (Rom. xv. 28.) (Lat.) When I shall have performed this, I will come, &c. (3) (Eng.) When he is come (perf. def.), he will tell us, &c. (John iv. 5.) (Lat.) When he shall have come , he will tell us, &c. \4' (Eng.) (Saying) they would neither eat nor drink, till they had killed . Paul (Acts xxiii. 12). (Lat.) (Saying) they would neither eat nor drink , till they should have killed Paul. r The subjunctive present used imperatively, is virtually an imperative. * 8 The Roman, viewing the future action or event from his present, marked its futurity, and, if necessary, its completion : the Englishman removes himself to the ‘ when ’ spoken of, and contemplates it as a state then existing. The Roman considered it relatively: the Englishman considers it absolutely. There are some constructions, in which the completion of the action is not marked, even in Latin; for instance, in the use of the imperfect subjunctive in marking the relative time of a wish, request, or question: e. g. ‘ He answered when he was asked;' ‘ quum interrogaretur ,’ not interrogatus esset, though the question must be completed before the answer is given. 1 Even in Latin, the present (after si) is sometimes used, as in English, in connection with a future; but only when it is to intimate that the future event depends upon some present circumstance or resolution. Examples are: Per¬ ficietur bellum, si non urgemus obsessos,’ &c. Liv. v. 4. ‘ Si vincimus, omnia nobis tuta, &c. . . . patebunt .’ Sail. 58, 9. (G.) (On the siibj. pres, after 9 i, see 435 (6)). 147 § 53 . 417 - 419 .] REMARKS Of* SOME OF THE TENSES. (5) {Eng.) As soon as they hear of me, they shall obey me (2 Sam, xxii. 45). {Lat ) As soon as they shall hear of me, they shall obey me : (or) As soon as they shall have heard, &c. * 417. ( d ) ‘ Should,’ ‘ would,’ 1 could,’ &c., when used to soften an assertion by throwing into it an expression of doubtfulness, are generally to be translated by putting the verb in the 'present or perf. of the subjunctive. * a. In this idiom the perfect does not appear to bear any reference to the completion of the action. (See 428, note *.) « b. (c) Vzlim, nolim , malim, are often used in this manner, and often in connection with the verb in the subjunctive governed b y ‘ut’ omitted. * 418. ( f ) After ut a consequence (but not a purpose) is often put in the perf ’. subj., instead of the imperf., after a past tense. * a. This occurs very frequently in Cornelius Nepos. The use of the perf gives more prominence and independence to the consequence. (K.) # b. The imp. subj. marks (1) something past, (2) something contem¬ porary with another in past time, (3) something contemporary and continuing. + c. The perf. subj. is either the subj. of the aorist (‘wrote’) or of the praeteritum in praesenti (or perf. definite, ‘have written’). (K.) ” 419. ( a) Jam pridem cupio, I have long desired. Vocat me alio jam dudum tacita vestra exspectatio, Your silent expectation has for some time been calling me to another point. Copice, quas diu comparabant , Forces which they had long been collecting. (Z>) Subito edicunt Consules, ut ad suum vestitum Sena¬ tores redirent, The Consuls suddenly published an edict, that the Senators should return to their usual dress. (c) Quum Tullius rure redierit, mittam eum ad te, When Tullius returns from the country, I will send him to you. Facito hoc ubi voles, Do this when you please. Si te rogavero aliquid, nonne respondebis ? If I put any question to you, will you not answer ? {d) Hoc sine ulla dubitatione, confirmaverim , u I would assert this without any hesitation. » The perf. subjunctive used in this manner to withhold a positive assertion, occurs in negative sentences oftener than in positive ones. (G.) 148 REMARKS ON SOME OF THE TENSES. § 53 . 420 . (e) De me sic velim judices , 1 would wish you to judge thus of me. Nolim factum, I could wish it not to be done. (Nol¬ lem'' factum, I could wish it had not been done.) (/) Quo factum est, ut plus, quam collegse, Miltiades valuerit , The consequence of which was , that Mil tiades had more influence than his colleagues. 420. Vocabulary 58. For some time, * Long; for a long time, t Long ago, To desire, To long, dudum, or jamdudum (applied to short preceding periods; an hour or few hours; less, generally, than a day), diu, or jamdiu w (of an action continued suspended, or not occurring, through the whole period). pridem or jamprldem (referring to a past point of time; not, like diu, to a past period of time). cupere, x io (150), iv, It (this is of thein- wardfeeling: optare is to desire zz. to express a wish for). avere ( defect. verb ) this denotes a rest - less impatient longing; gestire, a de¬ lighted , joyous longing. bis terve. Not above two or three times, Two or three times; several times, bis terque. * (The Preposition Ad.) * (1) To; (2) at; (3) up to, until; to the amount of; (4) for, &c. To a man, ad unum. * * * When a conceived case is to be expressed with the intimation that the fact corresponds to it, or may so correspond, the pres, and perf of the subj. are used: but when it is to be intimated that the fact docs not, or cannot correspond to it, the imperf. or pluperf subj. must be used. (Z.) * w But pridem and diu are often interchanged, though only in constructions where the notions of duration or of a distant point of beginning (respectively) may easily be implied, though the exact word would require duration rather than a point, or a point rather than duration. In 1 jampridem cupio,’ &c., the notion of continuance is plainly implied: in the corresponding English construc¬ tion we have it expressed. Dudum. — diu-dum (where dum restricts the mean¬ ing as in vixdum, nondum) : pridem = irplv If] (Hartung ) or rp'iv ?>fiv. (D.) t x Velle, cupere, denote the inward feeling; optare, expetPre, expression oi that feeling. Velle and optare denote, respectively, the calm feeling and its expression, cupere and expetere the eager, excited feeling and its expression. Avere expresses a restless, impatient longing; gestire a delighted anticipa tion. (D.) § 54. 421, 422.] remarks on some of the tenses. 149 To extreme old age, He is nothing to, =: compared to. ’ } ad eum nihil est. ad summam senectutem. him, For a time, As many as two hundred, - Word for word, ' At most, * At least, * At last, ad tempus (also, ‘at the proper time’), ad ducentos, ad verbum. ad summum, or summum only. ad minimum; minimum, ad extremum. (a) (Eng.) They do nothing but laugh. (Lat.) They nothing else than laugh (nihil aliud quam ridenti faciunt omitted). Exercise 62. [By what verb should to take away a bad thing be translated ?] 421. I have for some time been desiring to take away from you that care of yours. I have long desired to call upon Caius. p After his soldiers had been slain to a man, he himself returned to Rome, p Having taken Marseilles by storm, 77 he returned home. I am longing p to take Marseilles, and obtain a triumph for a victory over the Gauls. He was whipped with rods several times. He was whipped with rods two' or three' times' at most. There is no doubt that Caius is nothing (compared) to Balbus. Time is wanting p for finishing that business (of yours). I would wish you to pardon me. Caius to extreme old age learned some¬ thing additional * every day. At last all held their tongues. I am longing to return thanks to Caius. It cannot be denied that death is a rest from labours. 54 Do we not give boys sentences to learn by heart ? 75 He gives boys the longest sentences he can 95 to be learned by heart, word for word. They do nothing but cry out, that it is all over with Caesar’s army. His industry was such, l0) that (418) he learned something additional every day. § 54. Remarks on some of the Tenses continued. 422. (a) The perfect subjunctive (as well as the present) i used as an imperative. y Addiscebat aliquid. 150 REMARKS ON SOME OF THE TENSES. [§ 54. 423-427. * 423. (b) The future is sometimes used, as in English . for the imperative ; in other words, we sometimes express a wish that a person should act in a particular way, in the form of an assertion that he will so act. * 424. (c) Questions that do not ask for information, but for assent , are to be translated into Latin by the present or imperfect of the subjunctive , according as a present or past time is refer¬ red to. t The object of such questions is, to excite the same emotion or prod ce the same conviction in the minds of the persons addressed, that he speaker himself feels or pretends to feel. If they are negative in form, the answer or expression of assent will be affirmative; and conversely, if not. 425. 4 , These ‘questions of appeal’ (which usually express perplexity or some emotion ) may be asked by auxiliary verbs in English in various ways: the thing to be considered is, ‘ does the question require an an¬ swer for information , or mere assent (or sympathy) V , a [Forms of ‘questions of appeal’ in English.] (1) With Pres. Subj. What shall I do? (when asked in perplexity, implying that nothing satisfactory can well be done.) What am I to do? What can I do? Why should I relate this? (Ans. You need not.) (2) With Imperf. Subj. What was I to do? What should I have done? What ought 1 to have done ? 426. (1) (Eng.) He taught the children of the principal men. ( Lat .) Principum liberos erudiebat. (Imperf. expresses a state con¬ tinued or an action often repeated in a past space of time.) ( 2 ) (Eng.) You would have thought. You would have believed. (Lat.) Putares. Crederes. (3) (Eng.) I remember reading that (or, to have read that). ' (Lat.) I remember to read that (t legere z memini). (4) (Eng.) It would be tedious, endless, &c. (Lat.) It is tedious, endless, &c. (longum, infinitum est). (5) (Eng.) It would have been better. (Lat.) It xcas better (utilius_/m7 a ). So satius, par, idoneum, &c.fuit. 427. ( a ) Quod dubitas, ne feceris , What you have doubts about, don’t do. (b) Si quid acciderit novi, facies ut sciam, If any thing netv happens, you will let me know (= let me know). * * But the inf. perf. follows memini , Ac., when the speaker does not carry him self back, as it were, having himself seen , heard , &c. what he describes. • a Erat or fuerat must be used, if the time requires those tenses : and the ii\fin . pres, follows these expressions. (See 130.) 151 §54. 428, 429.] remarks on some of the tenses. (c) Quid faciam ? What am I to do ? What can I (or shall I) do ? Quis neget, &c. ? Who can deny . . . ? Quid facerem ? What icas I to do ? What ought 1 to have done ? What should I have done ? 428. Vocabulary 59. A banquet; an entertainment, If I may say so without offence, Under favour, A favour; pardon, convivium, b i, n. pace tua dixerim, bona taa venia, venia, m, f. To pardon (spoken of a superior), ] veniam dSreC < als0 ‘ t0 S™‘ a P ermls - c sion’). To ask pardon for a fault, delictid veniam petere ; petiv, petit. Look to that yourself, id ipse videris ; or tu videris. Let Fortune look to, or see to, it, fortuna viderit. I can scarcely believe, vix crediderim.* * * (The Preposition Adversum or Adversus.) Adversus, or adversum, corresponds almost exactly with our against in all its uses; but has besides the meanings over-against (= opposite) and towards. Exercise 63. [Translate, ‘i am pardoned.’] 429. Who can deny that a banquet is preparing ? c There is no one but wishes that a banquet should 3) be prepared. You would have thought that a banquet was prepared. What was I * b Epulce , drum is the most general notion, a meal , whether frugal or sump¬ tuous, with only the members of the family or with guests, public or private : convivium is a meal with guests, a dinner-parcy: dapes a religious banquet, a banquet after a sacrifice; epulum a banquet in honour of some person, or on some festive occasion; comissatio a riotous party, a drinking bout. (D.) c The ignoscens pardons from his heart, forgives and forgets; the veniam dans passes over as a favour what he might justly resent or punish. The friend or equal ignoscit ; the superior or more powerful person veniam dat. (D.) * d Doderltin thinks that delictum is not a sin of omission as is generally thought, but that it has the same extent of meaning as peccatum : both expressing sins against prudence as well as those against morality; errors as well as sins. V + Vix crediderim — vix credam — vix credo. But this perf. subj. does not always stand for the present indie, but sometimes for the perf. ‘ Tum vero ego necquidquam Capitolium servaverim ’ ~ servavi. (K.) * * In English we have no present or imperf. passive, except in a few verbs that form these tenses with what is inform the present participle of the active voice, but is probably the participial substantive , which used to be governed by the 152 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [§ 55. 430, 431 to do ?—the banquet had been long preparing. The latter says that a banquet is preparing : the former denies (it). He taught the boys to play on the lyre. Do not prepare a banquet. It would he tedi¬ ous (426) to relate all the evils that have happened to us by our own fault. Under favour I would say, my brother, that opinion of yours is f very often' (p. 13, 6.) prejudicial. Are they too to be pardoned ? It cannot be denied that they have several times asked pardon for their fault. Let fortune see to this, since we may not use reason and counsel. I rememoer their charging Cams with immorality. They published an edict that no one 14 should be capitally condemned without being heard. Justice is piety towards the gods. Would it not have been better, not to have concealed those things from your father 1 They do nothing but mock the poor (420, a). There are some who perceive the very least things. XXI. § 55. On the principal kinds of Conditional Propositions. * 430. In conditional (or hypothetical ) propositions, the clause with ‘ if’ is the condition or conditional clause ; the other, the consequence or consequent clause. • 431. Sometimes the consequence is expressed in the indicative mood, no doubt being intimated as to the existence or non-existence of the condi¬ tion. * (If this is A, that is B.) * Here we have ‘ possibility , or simple supposition, without any expres¬ sion of uncertainty .’ preposition * l 2 3 * on 5 or l an’ shortened into ‘a.’ Thus ‘the ark was a preparing' (1 Pet. iii. 20). 1 Forty and six years was this temple in building ’ (John ii. 20). There is no trusting the mere look of a form, as the following table will show (1) He . . . is coming . . . (pres, act.) (2) The house . is building . . . (pres, pass.) (3) This . . .is asking (too much) (‘ is,’ uitli the participial substantive ) (1) He . . is come .... (perf. act.) (2) The house . is built .... (perf. pass) (3) He . . . is loved (by all) . (pres, pass.) < Indie.: pace tua dixerim, &c., being only parenthetical insertions. 153 § 55. 432-435.J conditional propositions. * 432. Sometimes, however, though the consequence is expressed in the in¬ dicative, uncertainty is expressed as to the existence or not of the condition: it being implied however that this uncertainty will probably be removed. I» * - V» - * ( l If I have any thing, I will give it youand I will see whether 1 have or not.) Here we have uncertainty with the prospect of decision. * 433. Sometimes the consequence is itself expressed in a conditional form: and then the condition is merely contemplated as a conceivable case , but no hint is given as to its being likely actually to occur or not. (If you were to do this, you would greatly oblige me.) Here we have (according to Hermann and Butlman) ‘ uncertainty without any such accessary notion as the prospect of decision.’ r 434. Lastly, the consequence may express what wouldbe doing , cr would have been done, if a condition that is actually unrealized , had been real¬ ized just now , or at some past time. If 1 had it, I would now give it to you (but I have not) If 1 had had it, I would have given it you. (Forms of Conditional Propositions .) 435. (a) (») («) (d) Si quid habet , datf If he has any thing, he gives it. Si quid habeam , dabo, If I have any thing, I will give it. Si quid haberet, daret , h If he should have any thing, he would give it. (1) Si quid haberet, daret, (2) Si quid habuisset, dedisset, 1 Tflie had any thing, he would give it. If he had had any thing, he would have given it. s The consequence may also be in the imperative or in the future. (See 437, i.) h On this, see 445. It is, to say the least, very uncommon to find a proposi¬ tion of this form, from which the notion of the possible realization of the con¬ dition is not excluded. (See Zumpt’s opinion, 419, v.) Kuhner says, ‘si hoc dicas 'lav rovro Xtyjjj and ei rovro Xcyots : sometimes, however, the last rela¬ tion is expressed as in Greek, ‘si hoc diceretur, vere diceretur.'' (Vol. ii. p. 546.) The same form of proposition is used in a different way, when the imp. subj. ( 2= the Greek optat.) is used to express something frequently occurring in past time. ‘ Caesar—Si peteret per amicitiam patris atque suam, non Q,uidquam proficeret' —Hor. Sat. i. 3. 4. (See Heindorf ad loc.) 7* 154 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [§55.436-441. 436. Here we see that the forms (c) and (d) (1) coincide. The form (c) means, ‘ if at any time he xvere to have any thing, he would give it but such a sentence, though not necessarily intimating the impossibility of this case occurring, of course, does imply that it has not occurred. It thus runs very near to the meaning of (d) (1), which, besides imply ing that it has not, implies that it will not occur. These two cases are not distinguished in Latin : the context , or our previous knotvledge, must determine whether the case is contemplated as possible, or not. * 437. ( a ) Possibility, or simple supposition , without any expres¬ sion of uncertainty : the indicative in both clauses. ♦ (b) Uncertainty with the prospect of decision : ‘si’ with the subjunctive present (or perfect) ; the indicative , commonly the future,' in the consequence. ♦ (c) Uncertainty without any such accessary notion a£ the prospect of decision : the imperfect subjunctive clauses. % ( d ) Impossibility, or belief that the thing is not so : the subjunctive in both clauses, the imperfect for present time, and a continuing consequence ; the pluperfect for past time. % 438. But the consequence may refer to present , the condition to past time ; or vice versa. ‘ If I had received a letter ( accepissem ), I would now read it (recitarem). ‘ If I at this time wanted any thing (opus esset), I would have come (venissem) myself.’ * 439. Since, ‘ I would give it you (now), if I had it (now)’ comes to the same thing as ‘ l would have given it to you, if I had had any,’ the im¬ perfect subjunctive in Latin may often be translated by the forms ‘ would have ’ (could or should have), when it is implied that the condition will not be realized. * 440. ( d ) When the form ‘ would have ’ is in the consequence, the pluperfect in the condition must be in the subjunctive in Latin. * 441. With the imperfect and pluperfect , ‘si’ always governs the subjunctive. » The imperative may stand in the consequence. Of course the perf. or fu¬ ture, both the simple and the periphrastic future, may stand in either clause, or both : si illud mihi beneficium tribuetur (or tributum erit ox fuerit), magnopere gaudebo. In the second class, tributum sit , ox fuerit, ixom fuerim. 155 $55. 442—444.] conditional propositions. * 442. Since we use the indicative conditionally , care must be taken to translate this by the subjunctive (435, b.) when ‘ should ’ might be used; when, that is, there is ‘uncertainty with the prospect of decisioni 443. Vocabulary 60. Happy, * Much less, Not to say, I do not say, I will not say, * All, Cautious, « All taken one by one; each of them singly, ► For instance, • To rise, The Dog-star, {Eng.) No painter. beatus, a, um.k S nedumi (generally after a negative; if a ( verb follows it must be in the subjunc). ( ne dicam (of what might probably be l said with truth), non dico. non dicam. * omnes {all together , cuncti, universi). m cautus, a, um. singuli, ae, a. * verbi causa, orior, oriri, ortus. Canicula, ae, f. {.Lat.) Nemo pictor. {Eng.) This does not at all terrify me. {Lat.) This terrifies me nothing. Exercise 64. [Ota. ‘ If he were to ’ &c. = ‘ if he should ’ &c.J 444. If a happy life can be lost 7 , it cannot be happy'. He who does not defend a friend, if he can, sins 7 . If all things are brought about" by fate, nothing can admonish us to he more cautious. Peleus, if he were to hear it, would lift up his hands. Pe- t » k Faustum and prosper are said of things only, not of persons. ‘ That which is prosperum merely satisfies the hopes and wishes of men, like ‘ wished for ,* ‘desired the faustum refers more to the graciousness of the gods : the fortuna - tus is a lucky person : the beatus feels himself happy (as he is) and is contented.’ (D.) Felix expresses both that which is, and that which makes happy ( beatus , only what is ‘ happy') : and relates principally ‘ to the obtaining, possessing, or enjoying external goods, and supposes a man’s own co- operationi Th's latter circumstance distinguishes it from fortunatus , which also relates more to par¬ ticular events. i Nedum is sometimes followed by ut: ‘ nedum ut ulla vis fieret.’ {Liv. iii. 14.) I • m Cuncti (opposed to dispersi) ‘ all actually united universi {opposed to sin¬ guli or unusquisque) ‘all taken together.’ As meaning ‘ all ,’ 1 the whole, ’ in the sing., totus represents the thing as originally ‘a whole! omnis, cunctus, uni¬ versus, all represent it as originally made up of certain parts, of which the aggre¬ gate is taken. (D.) D Fiunt. 156 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [§ 56. 445 leus, if he heard it (but he has not), would lift up his hands. If any one were to do this he would lay the king under a great obligation. Even Caesar could not have done this ; much less can you (443, note 1). The boy should be admonished, that he may show himself the more cautious (63, b). All the wisest men 92 are aware that the interest of each and of all is the same'. I can scarcely think him equal to all of them taken one by one, much less to all of them together. If you are equal to them all- together, you will easily conquer them all-taken-one-by-one. If Fabius, for instance, was born p at the rising of the dog-star, he will not die in the sea. He is not equal 0 to them all taken one by one, not to say to them all together. He is equal to them all taken one by one, I do not say to them all together. No painter would say this ( perf. subj.). Know that I do not fear these things at all. There were some 109 who did not fear these things at all. § 56. Conditional Propositions continued. * 445. (a) Such conditional sentences as would in English have were to —, should, or would, in both clauses, often take the verbs of both clauses in the subjunctive present. * a. The conditional clause is here a contemplated possibility (resem¬ bling, in this, the third class; si haberet , daret) ; but the thing contem¬ plated is contemplated as occurring now, and therefore often agrees with the second class (si habeam dabo), in implying a prospect of decision. « Hence if a contemplated case is contemplated as occurring now, the present subjunctive should be preferred to the imperfect: and when the possibility of its occurring now is to be strongly intimated, the present is the only proper form. (1) Tu si hic sis, aliter sentias. If you were here, you would think differently. ( 2 ) Tu si hie esses, aliter sentires. If you icere here (which you neither are nor will be), you icould think differently: (or) If you had been here, you would have thought differently. !*• /?. From the ambiguity of the form ‘ si quid haberet, daret,' the subj. pres, should probably be preferred, when it is not intended to intimate that the condition is improbable or impossible. The pres. subj. may be 0 Impar est. 157 § 56. 446-450.] conditional propositions. used of suppositions really impossible, if it is not the speaker’s objeci to intimate this: ‘ Si exsistat hodie ab inferis Lycurgus gaudeat,' &c. {Liv. 39, 37.) 446. The three conditional tenses of the subjunctive , are scri¬ berem, scripsissem, and scripturus essem. 447. ‘ Scripsissem 5 and ‘ scripturus essem ’ are both used to express our 1 would have written.’ But ‘ scripsissem ’ intimates that the thing would certainly have happened : scripturus essem, that it would probably have happened, because it was so intended or arranged. (5) Thus, ‘ he would have slept ( = he intended to have slept, and therefore we may suppose would have slept ) there, if he had gone on,’ should be translated by the part, in rus with esset. p But the indicative {crat, fnilj is more common, when the inten¬ tion is to be positively expressed. 448. (c) The imperfect and pluperfect of the indicative are often used instead of the same tenses of the subjunctive, in the conse¬ quent clause. (It is then better to let the consequent precede the conditional clause.) 449. (d) The particle si is occasionally omitted ; the verb of the conditional clause should then begin the sentence. 450. (a) In quo si tantum eum prudentem dicam, minus quam debeam prcedicem, In which if I were only to call him prudent, I should commend him less highly than I ought. ( b ) Conclave, ubi erat mansurus, si ire perrexisset, The chamber in which he would have lodged, if he had continued his journey. (c) Perieram, nisi tu accurrisses I had perished ( = should have perished) if you had not run to my assistance. (d) Dedisses huic animo par corpus, fecisset quod opta- P So also in the third class ‘ si quid haberet daturus esset ' is correct, where daturus esset = ‘he would be prepared to give.' ( Kruger: who quotes Tac. H. U. 77, ‘cujus filium adoptaturus essem , si ipse imperarem.') *» A conditional clause often refers to a consequence implied: ‘Pons Sublicius iter pcene hostibus dedit, ni unus vir fuisset' = {et dedisset) ni unus vi rfuisset. 158 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [§ 56. 451 bat, Had you given this mind a body like itself, hfi would have done what he desired. 451. Vocabulary 61. But if; if however, But if not, * Unless; if not, ♦ Although; though, ' Although indeed, * Unless indeed, Power, The thing is so, To put himself in their power, To be in our own power, < < sin, sin autem, sin minus . 1 nisi . 8 ' etsi: etiamsh—followed by tamen, yet, (sometimes tamen 'precedes etsi, when the unexpected nature of the event to be described is to be made more prom¬ inent ; for tamen etsi, tametsi is found, and the tamen is sometimes repeated in the principal clause.—Although may also be translated by quamquam , u quamvis and licet.) - quamquam (suggested by a former J statement: it nas no influence on the mood). nisi forte; nisi vero. f potestas, atis, f. (of might with right , and therefore the proper word for i conceded power); potentia, &,f. (of [ actual inherent power), res ita se habet, potestatem sui facere, in nostra esse potestate. t r Or, sin secus, sin aliter. * 8 ‘ Your memory will be weakened nisi eam exerceas’ implies that if you ex¬ ercise it, it will not be lessened. But from si non you might not infer this, but only draw the strict conclusion that if you do not exercise it, it will be lessened. The si, in si non, is the conjunctioh, the non belongs to the verb or other word in the proposition. * t The compounds of ‘ si 5 follow the same rule as si: With the pres., per/., and fut. they take the indicative unless the thing is to be asserted contingently and doubtfully s with the imperf. and pluperf they generally take the subj., though Here too the indicative comes in, when they introduce, not a supposition, but a fact. ‘ Tametsi a duce deserebantur ,’ (Cses.) ( Si,' like our 1 if,' is sometimes used for 1 whether;' ‘Tentata res est, si primo impetu capi Ardea posset.’ « u Quamquam (quam ( how' strengthened by doubling) is 1 however much,' but expresses ‘ however much a thing really exists,' or can, or must exist. It there¬ fore takes the indie, when the thing is not to be represented as doubtful. Quam¬ vis (or quantumvis) is ‘however much a thing maybe conceived possible,' and therefore takes the subj. Licet is no particle, but an impersonal verb, and may occur in any tense. ‘ Licet recte agas, tamen, &c.' ‘ Act as right as you please. yet, &c.’ ‘ Detrahat .... fortuna licebit' — Quamvis — ‘ although ' (as in Nep quamvis carebat nomine; with indic.) belongs, generally speaking, to a latei age. CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. 159 § 56. 452.] (Eng.) Even this is not just unless it is voluntary. * ( Lat.) Even this is so (only) just, if it is voluntary. (Ita justum est .... si est voluntarium : v ita here zzz or that condition or supposition.) ♦ [C. xxxii.] '■But' ( = except, unless) after a negative is nisi, or (if it stands before a substantive) the prepos. prceter. Exercise 65. [How is ‘ that ’ translated after ‘ it follows ’1 (83)] 452. If you were to ask me what is the nature of the gods, I should perhaps answer nothing (445). If the thing were so, I should rejoice (445). If there be nothing in our own power, let us go away. If they had remained, he would have put himself in their power. We must cultivate eloquence, though some make a perverse use of it. Nothing would be in our own power, if the thing were so. The Stoics say that no man is divine, but the wise man. Who can deny (424) that the most hidden snares are always the most difficult to avoid ? I love my enemy, more than you envy your friend. Caius is more brave than prudent. w I don’t know whether 25 any thing better than friendship' has been given to man by the immortal gods. Though these things are contrary to each other, we must nevertheless use them. Who will deny (424) that these things are of importance to us ? Though the thing were so, yet this could not be said without impiety. 1 almost think that these things are not in our own power. If this be true, I shall rejoice : but if not, I must bear it with resignation. This itself is not just unless it is voluntary. r So, ‘Patres decreverunt ut,.quum populus regem jussisset, id sic ratum esset m Patres auctores fierent. (Liv. i. 17.) • w Grotefend distinguishes between three forms of comparison, thus:— Caius fortior est, quam prudentior — Caius is, indeed, both brave and pru¬ dent ; but yet more brave than prudent. Caius magis fortis est, quam prudens = Caius is just as brave, as he is not prudent. Caius fortis est, quam prudens = Caius is brave, but not at all prudent (where potius may be supplied). The last two forms belong to late writers, especially Tacitus. CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. 160 [§ 57. 455 § 57. Conditional Propositions in dependent sentences. * 453. ( a ) Possibility without, any expression of uncertainty. (Caius, si quid habet, dat.) Dicebant Caium, si quid haberet (or, si quid habeat) dare. * ( [b ) Uncertainty with the prospect of decision. (Si quid habeam , dabo.) Dicebat, si quid habeat (or haberet ), se daturum.* * (c) Uncertainty without any such accessary notion. (Si quid haberet , daret.) Dicebat, si quid haberet, se daturum esse. f (Or daturum fore, if the independent proposition would be dcJurur essem. See 447.) ( d ) Impossibility , or belief that the thing is not so. (1) (Si quid haberet , daret.) This form in a dependent sentence coincides with form (c). (2) (Si quid habuisset, dedisset.) Dicebat, si quid habuisset, se daturum fuisse. % (3) When the verb of the conditional clause is in the pluperf., that of the consequent clause is in the im- (Si quid accepisset, daret.) Dicebat, si quid accepisset , se daturum esse.? * (4) The verb of the conditional clause in the imperf., thnt of the consequent clause in the pluperfect.' (Si quid opus esset, venisset.) Dicebat se, si quid haberet, daturum fuisse. Dicebat se, si quid haberet, daturum. (or) Dicebat se, si quid habeat, daturum. * Obs. The conditional forms of the infinitive are scripturum esse (pres.), scripturum fuisse (perf.) ; scripturum fore (fut.). Of these scripturum esse is also a mere future infinitive; the two others are only conditional forms. y Obs. The form daturum esse cannot be used to express 1 impossibility or belief that the thing is not so' unless the verb of the conditional clause is of the pluperf. subj. ‘ Dicebat si patris literas accepisset , se eas cum fratre communi¬ caturum esse.’ The form ‘ si literas acciperet se communicaturum esse,’ would not imply this , but only express the receiving of a letter as a contemplated case 'belonging to class (c) ). 16 6 57. 454-457.] conditional propositions. 454. Hence, when we have to make these sentences dependent, we must put for dat, dahit, daret, dedisset: dare, daturum esse , daturum esse, daturum fuisse : for daturus esset, daturum fore. 455. We also see that the first two classes (when the verb is in the future) are no longer distinguished. Si quid habet, dabit. ) Si quid habeat, dabit. ) 1 Dicebat se, si quid haberet, daturum;’ or, ‘si quid habeat for where the perfect subjunctive would regu¬ larly be expected after a past tense like dicebat, the present is often found with apparently no difference of meaning ; but not the imperfect for the present, Kruger.) 456. Vocabulary 62. remanere, mans, mans. conferre, conttil, collat (in, with acc.) familiariter uti ; usus, instruere aciem; instrux, To remain, To confer benefits upon, To be intimate with, . To draw up an army, instruere aciem ; instrux, instruct. To draw up his army in three lines, triplicem aciem instrugre. To engage, confligere, flix, flict. Either—or, aut a —aut; vel— vel ; sive—sive. Or, aut; vel; or the enclitic ve. * 457. f£jT 1 At' when the thing was done not in but near , should be translated by apud, or ad with acc. (The battle apud Salamina. ‘ Apud' is found in later writers even for ‘in.’) * Grotefend observes, that Caesar generally retains the subj. pres, or perf. (after a past tense) when those tenses would stand in direct narration: but that Cic. and Liv. generally turn them into the imperf. or pluperf. (See 418.) ♦ a ‘ Aut ’ expresses a difference in the things ; ‘ vel' a difference in the expres¬ sion. (Z.) Vel is the imperative from velle , as fer from ferre: its proper meaning therefore is, ‘ if you please :’ so that ‘ A vel B ’ was originally ‘ A or, if you like, Bthat is, ‘A or B: one or the other, no matter which.’ Hence, its meaning ‘ even:' vel maximus, ‘ the very greatest, if you please.’ ‘ Aut' is used in the case of opposite notions, when if one is, the other is not.%f VeV should be used when the notions are not opposite in themselves; especially when only some of the possible suppositions are mentioned. It very often evidently retains its original meaning, of expressing indifference as to which notion is taken; and should always be used when such indifference is to be expressed. Thus ‘ The nobles can either corrupt or correct the morals of a state,’ vel cor-' 162 ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. Exercise 66. [§ 58. 458, 459. [How is can deny to be translated in a question of appeal? (445.) ] 458. He said, that if a happy life could be lost, it could not be happy. He has long appeared to me somewhat disturbed. 87 Who can deny, that some are borne one way, some another ? He answered that Peleus, if he had heard it, would have lifted up his hands. He answered that he could have 47 no friendship with these, if they remained in Gaul. It is certain, that if any one had done this, he would have laid the king under a great obligation. It is certain that, if any one does this, he will lay the king under a great obligation. If any one does this, 98 he will have deserved well of the state. I fear that nobody will be permitted to be neu¬ tral. I fear that he has not concealed from you the discourse of T. Ampius. (As to) what is best to be done ( sup .) do you / see to that (428). I will strive to prove myself grateful (memor) for the benefits, of which you have conferred very many 31 upon me. They say, that the rule of expediency is not the same as that of honour. 10 Having drawn up his army in three lines, he engaged with Mardonius, p He drew up his army, and engaged with the Gauls at Geneva. There were some 109 who lifted up their hands. XXII. § 58. On oblique narration. s 459. * When one person has to report the speech of another, he may do this in two ways. He may either introduce him as speaking, and put in his mouth the exact words used; or he may only state the substance of what he said under a change of form. (a) In the first way of narrating, the speaker uses the first person. “ Cae¬ sar said : ‘ / am of opinion,’ ”—and so on. rumpere, vel corrigere, for they can do which they please. It sometimes = both — and. ‘ He was his equal, r el moribus vel fortuna.’ * Ve (abridged from vel) commonly unites single words, not propositions: it is often appended to si, ne {site — seu: neve ~ neu). Sive—sive ; seu—seu — 1 eithei —or,’ ‘ whether —or,’ when it is to be left doubtful which of two statements is correct, or which of two terms is applicable (the second being an alias of the first). Crombia observes that sive—sive should generally be used when ‘ either (ox whether)—or * may be turned into ‘ be it — or be it .’ ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. 163 §58. 460-462 • (6) In the second way, the substance of what he said is given in the third person. “ Caesar said, that he was of opinion,”—and so on. This second w r ay, in which the speech of another is reported in the third per¬ son, is called oblique or indirect narration. * 460. ( a ) In oblique narration, the principal verb or verbs will be of the infinitive mood. * (b) All the subordinate clauses that express the original speaker’s words or opinions will have their verbs in the subjunctive mood. * fCr Hence conjunctions and adverbs that go with the indicative in direct narration, go with the subjunctive in indirect or oblique narration.b (Thus in the example (453, a), ‘ Si quid habet dat,' becomes, when re¬ ported, ‘ Dicebant Caium, si quid haberet , dare.’) •y(c) When a speech is reported in oblique narration , (1) the verb or participle on which the infinitive depends is often omitted : (2) questions for an answer are asked in the subjunctive : questions of appeal gene¬ rally* * in the infinitive (with interrogative pronouns and adverbs) : (3) the imperative in direct becomes the subjunctive in indirect narration. * 461. (d) The subjunctive being thus employed to express the speech or sen¬ timent, not of the speaker or writer, but of the person about whom he is speaking or writing, naturally came to be used in constructions where the sentiments of another were less formally reported. Thus in the fable: ‘The vulture invited the little birds to a party,’ ‘ quod illis datu- rus erat’ would mean that he really was going to give them the party; but ‘ quod illis daturus esset ’ would only mean that he said he was going to give them a party. So with the verbs of accusing, the charge stands with quod in the subjunctive , because, the accusers asserted that the crime had been committed: the indicative would make the histo¬ rian or speaker assert the truth of the charge. 462. [ Direct .] (a) ( b ) Quantum possum, te ac tua vestigia sequar, As far as I can, I will follow you and your footsteps. \ b Obs. fj* As the subjunctive has no future, the future and future perfect be¬ come the pres, and perfect of the subjunct. respectively. Senties — quum ages: sensurum esse, quum agas. — Faciemus, quum imperaveris: facturos esse, quaa imperaverit (from imperaverim). If the speech is narrated in past time (is intro¬ duced, that is, by a past tense) the fut. and fut. perf. will become the impe'f. and pluperf. in the oblique narration. * Not quite always: thus Caes. B. G. 5, 29. postremo quis hoc sibi persua¬ der et? &c. 164 ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. [§ 58. 463, 464 [Oblique.] Clamavit se, quantum posset, eum atque ejus vestigia secuturum , He cried out that he, as far as he could, would follow him and his footsteps. ( c ) (1) Legatos ad Csesarem mittunt : “ sese paratos esse * portas aperire, &c.” They send ambassadors to Ccesar : (saying) that they are ready to open the gates, &c. (2) Interrogabat : 1 cur paucis centurionibus pau¬ cioribus tribunis . . . obedirent ? c Quando ausuros (esse) exposcere remedia, nisi, &c. ? 5 He asked, 1 why they obeyed a few centurions and still fewer tribunes ? When ( said he) will you dare to demand redress, if, &c. ? ’ 13) (Hirri necessarii fidem Pompeii implorarunt:) prcestaret quod proficiscenti recepisset, Make good ( said they ) ivhat you promised him when he was setting out. (i d ) Socrates accusatus est, quod corrumperet juventutem, Socrates was accused of corrupting the young men. 463. Vocabulary 63. ' (The Preposition Apud governing acc.) * (1) With = in the house of, in the mind or estimation of; amongst: « (2) In the presence of. 4 (3) lN = in an author’s writings: 7 (4) At, of place (see 457). apud me. multum valere apud. apud Xenophontem. loqui apud populum. He was with me, To have great influence with, Cyrus in Xenophon , To speak in the presence of the people, Yesterday, To-morrow, heri. eras. Exercise 67. 464. Must we not all die ? He cried out, ‘ that he was ready to shed his blood for his country; must we* * not all die (he c As ‘ questions for answer ’ may be of a very objurgatory character, it is often indifferent whether the question be put in the infin. or the subjund. Thus In Liv. vii. 15. ‘ Ubi illi clamores sint arma poscentium? &c.’ i ubi illos clamorei esse . . . .’ might have stood equally well. * ‘ Wej ‘ you must be turned into ‘ they.' ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. 165 §59. 465-467.] asked) ? should not an honourable death be preferred to a dis¬ graceful life ? ’—Almost all (of them) visited Balbus ; ‘ Keep (said they) your word : d finish the business which you undertook to finish.’—‘ What is this, 5e said he, ‘ O Tribunes ? are you going to overthrow the state under the guidance of Appius 7 Herdo¬ nius 7 ? ’—P. Valerius came to the Tribunes, crying out, ‘What is this ? Are you going to overthrow the state under the guidance of App. Herdonius' ? ’—He cried out, ‘ that he called the Quirites to arms : that he would dare against the tribunes what the founder of his family had dared against the kings.’—What was I to do? all were crying out, that it was all over with the army. The Roman people had not 47 the same fortune at home that (they had) fn the field. My (friend) Balbus has more influence with me than any other person. Socrates in Plato says that the soul is not mortal. § 59. Oblique narration continued. (Mood in subordinate clauses. Dependence on an infinitive.) * 465. (a, kn the oratio obliqua , even when dependent on a past tense, the present (and perfect) subj. are used when the clause expresses a general truth , independent of the judgment of the speaker, and when the reporter of the speech wishes to make the sentiment his own. { *• 466. (b) Remarks that are really the reporter’s (i. e. were not made by the speaker) are, of course, in the indicative. The Indicative is also used by the Historians , when the writer wishes to intimate that what is said is really so, and not merely so stated by the speaker. v 467. (c) The subordinate clauses inserted in propositions whose verbs are in the infm. or subjunctive, must have their verbs in the ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. 167 § 59. 470-472.] Be ( intelligere (. intellecturum esse S quid ageret (or agat ) hostis. i quid egisset (or egerit) hostis, quid acturus esset (or acturus sit) hostis. (2) And (after any tense of dico, &c.) C quid ageret (or agat) hostis, se intellexisse < quid egisset (or egerit) hostis. quid acturus esset (or acturus sit) hostis. 470. Vocabulary 64. * (Prepositions Erga, Inter, Ob, Per.) ♦ Erga, acc.: Towards (oi favorable dispositions).k » Inter,I acc.: Between; among; in the midst of, during. On the journey, inter viam. They love me and each other, et nos et inter se amant. ♦ Ob, accus. ; on account of. Before my eyes, ob oculos. » Per, acc. Through (of -place, time, and means). By (oi the sec¬ ondary agent m by whom we do any thing; and in adjurations, in which it is separated from its noun by pronouns —‘per ego te,’ &c.). By the leave of (digladientur per me licet: for any thing I care). • Per se = by him, &c., alone (ipse per s e),for its own sake ; naturally ; of itself , &c. Per in permagnus, pergratus, &c., is often separated from the adjec- tive ; ‘ per mihi .... gratum feceris.’ 471. (a) (Eng.) To make a bridge over a river (See Ex. 469 (b) ). ♦ ( Lat .) To make a bridge in a river. (b) (Eng.) The town in question. * (Lat.) The town de quo agitur. Exercise 68. [Translate the clauses marked thus (t) both as the speaker's , and as the narrator’s.] 472. Catilina informs (them) that he had sent forward Man¬ lius to the great body of men" f whom he had prepared to take arms . 72 They warn them to depart from all the islands] - which * i Kruger: who observes, that the use of the present, &c. may often be explained by the purpose of the writer, to intimate that what is said, still and generally holds good: and that sometimes there may be what Hermann calls a 1 mutatio incertarum sententiarum in certas ;’ but that in many other passages no reason can be discovered for the employment of the pres, and perf rather than the im- perf. and pluperf. k Rarely of hostile dispositions. (Z.) • Inter sometimes stands between two substantives: ‘Fsesulas inter A rre- tiumque.’ m For instance, to send a letter ‘ by a slave’ (per servum). • Ad eam multitudinem. 168 ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. [§ 59 . 473 , 474 . are between Italy ( Italia ) and Africa. He had contracted to build 75 a bridge over the river 0 Danube ( Ister , tri, p. 14, 9, a). He answered, that custom, f which is a second nature, was on our side. Let them go away for any thing I care. He answered that he feared the waves, f which were such as he had never seen before. He answered that you, j* such is your temperance ,p were already well. He said that he was the first who 8 accomplished that journey. They cry out, 1 Why are these (questions) asked ? (460, c.) who is so powerful as to be able to perform all he wishes ? ’ (68, d.) * 473. (a) The acc. and injin. with ne in the oblique narration resembles, but must be distinguished from, its use to express emotion in direct narration. q (a) Adeone hominem infelicem esse quemquam, ut ego sum ! That any man living should be so unfortu¬ nate as I am ! Exercise 69. [In what mood are questions qf appeal asked in oblique narration 7 460, c.J 474. That you should be able {inf. pres.) to bear this ! That you should say this! He said that we ought not to learn many things, but much. They cried out, £ Could any man bear this ? Would she never see them without calling them betrayers of their country (88, c) ? Let her learn (they said) to govern her tongue.’—I fear that nobody will prefer a capital charge against him. They say that Caius has been accused of bribery ; which (36, b) I shall not easily be induced to believe. r He says that 0 ‘Rivus’ brook; ‘fluvius’ river; ‘amnis’ abroad, deep river. ‘Flumen* (properly the ‘ stream ,’ flu-imen) is also used as a general term for ‘ river' (being used here of the Danube ); especially when there is reference to its stream. p In a sentence of this kind, consider whether the reporter of the answer should be represented as making it his own; if so, the subj. present shoul. used by 465 (a). q For which ul with the subj. is also found : Tene ut ulla res Jrdngat7 — Tibi ego ut adverser ? ' 1 * Obs. Credo , which takes a dat. of the person believed, takes an acc. of the QU1 WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 169 § 60 . 475 - 477 .] he has not received the letters which I sent him (32, c). Who will deny that it is the duty of a Christian to keep his word 1 Who will deny that it is wise 39 to have death always before one’s eyes ? They replied, that they sent the letter by a slave. They answer, that the town in question is two hundred (Roman) miles from Rome. I had perished, if y ou had not succoured me. XXIII. § 60. ‘ Qui ’ with Subjunctive. % 475. ‘ Qui ' takes the indicative, only when it refers to a 'particular object in the most clear and direct way; when there is no vagueness or indefinite¬ ness whatever in the reference. But when its reference is at all vague or indefinite, it governs the subjunctive. 476. % Qui therefore governs the subjunctive whenever the object described by the relative could not, as it were, be seen and touched. Whenever it does not describe an individual object , but only refers it (or them) to a particular class by a mark common to all the class, it governs the subjunc¬ tive. When therefore for ( who,' 1 which,' we might substitute 'of such a kind as to,’ ‘ such that,' &c., qui governs the subjunctive. * (a) Qui with the indicative may refer an object to a class, but it then describes it (or them) in the most definite way. ‘ Qui non defendit amicum, quum potest.’ 1 A man who actually does not defend his friend when he can.’ *477. Vocabulary 65. \ (Phrases after which qui is generally indefinite , and therefore takes the subjunctive.) Some men ; or there are some who, sunt qui. There are not wanting men who, non desunt qui. * (Negatives and virtually negatives.) Who is there 7 quis est 7 How few there are 7 quotusquisque est 7 Quotusquisque est is used interrogatively and in the singular; i. e., how many does each man who belongs to the class make 7 Quotus est7 being ‘how many does he make7’ So, too, nemo; nihil est; an Hf>. ullus, fro¬ thing udieted: and though am believed' is ‘ mihi creditur,' it must be ‘ego credor ' (tu crederis, &c.) when an infin. immediately follows (/ am believed to • Vote done this). 8 170 QUI WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 60 . 478 , 470 (Reperio, invenio, habeo.) There are found persons who, reperiuntur, inveniuntur, qui.» You may find, reperias, invenias qui, Ac. (Nihil est quod, Ac. We have reason to rejoice, Nihil habeo quod, Ac.) ' est quod gaudeamus = ‘ there is some¬ thing of such a kind that we should rejoice on account of it.’ ! Quod ’ as an acc. neut. pron. (195, f.) going with gaudeo. What is there that you can com- j w eB , d 5ri possis , plain of 7 > We have no reason to desire, non est quod desideremus. You have no reason to hurry, nihil est quod festines. 478. (a) {Eng.) I have nothing to accuse old age of. {Lat.) I have nothing which I may accuse old age (quod incusem senectutem). (6) {Eng.) A pen to write with. {Lat.) A pen with which one may write. (c) {Eng.) Men who abound in silver, in gold (and), in estates. {Lat.) Men who abound in silver, who in gold, who in estates. (c?) {Eng.) Men who abound neither in silver, nor gold, nor estates. {Lat.) Men who do not abound in silver, not in gold, not in estates. 479. Vocabulary 66. To drive away, t Stick, « Bird, * Put; lay down, or aside, To cross over, To allow it to happen, abigere, eg, act. # bacillum, t i, n. * avis, u is, f. , ponere, v pbsu, pbslt. trajicere, jec, ject. commiitere (ut, with subj.). • Obs. With sum, reperio, habeo , Ac., qui with the indicative is found, when it expresses particular objects in the most definite way. This is naturally oftener the case when qui relates to the subject , which is mostly a particular object (or objects), than when it relates to the predicate , which is generally some class in which the subject is contained. Tum primum reperta sunt, quae per tot annos rempublicam exedere : not ‘ there were found evils which preyed on^ Ac.’ but ‘ the evils which have actually preyed on the state for so many years, were then found for the first timed u t A diminutive of baculum. n Volucres are all ‘ xcinged creatures ,’ insects included. Avis is the general name for ‘ bird : 5 ‘ ales ’ is the word in poetry and the language of the augurs for the larger birds, especially the eagle. In augury, alites were the birds whoso flight, oscines the birds whose song or cry, was prophetic. (D.) * * Ponere aliquid, ‘ to lay down ’ a thing; ‘ to get it out of our hands‘to get rid of it.’ Locare and collocare are ‘ to put a thing in its right place ‘ to place* advisedly for some purpose. QUI WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 171 §61. 480, 481.J To be on the point of, Jewel, Unburied, ineo esbe (ut, with subj.). gemma, ae, f. inhumatus, a, urn. Exercise 70. 480. Diogenes ordered himself to be cast forth unburied. Then w his friend said: ‘ To the birds and beasts ? 5 ‘ By no means,’ said he, ‘ but put x a stick by me, to drive them away with (478).’— There are some icho think that Caius is pretending. There were some who thought that Caius was pretending. There are not wanting persons, who deny that the rule of expediency is the same as that of honour. There are found some, who say that we should not cultivate virtue. It is incredible how weary I am of life. We must cross over that sea which (48) you call ocean. There are some who think, that the best thing we have (53) will be lost. They cry out, that we shall lose the best thing we have. We have no reason to hurry. I have nothing to accuse you of (478). You have reason to rejoice, that you have concealed these things from your father. You will scarcely find any one to believe this. He was on the point of being killed. Had you rather be like one? (212, x) of these persons who abound in gold, in silver, in jewels, or (like) C. Fabricius, who had none {nihil) of those things ? How few there are, who have death always before their eyes! § 61. ‘Qui’ with the subjunctive continued. % 481. Qui takes the subjunctive, when it introduces the ground of the assertion in the antecedent clause. (a) Here there is some difficulty in determining whether qui is used i —at that time , turn. * * * Then = after that, inde, deinde. ( —therefore, igitur, itaque. * Ponitote. The forms of the imperative in to, tote, nto, are used in solemn commands and prohibitions, such as laws, wills, &c. y [C. xxxiv.] ‘ One’ often means l some one > (aliquis), or ‘ a certain one (quidam). 173 QUI WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 61. 492-485. definitely or not. * l He was laughed at by all the rest, who did not ac¬ knowledge these faults to belong to Socrates;’ this seems definita enough, but it is in the Latin, ‘ qui non agnoscerent.’ * (/?) When therefore for ‘ who ’ may be substituted ‘for he (she, it, &c. z ) the verb should be the subjunctive. * 482. For qui alone, utpote qui, quippe quip m qui are also used, generally with the subjunctive. 9 483. Qui takes the subjunctive, when it has the force of ut with a personal or possessive pronoun. b * It has this force after (1) dignus, indignus, idoneus, &c. (2) tam, talis, ejusmodi, is (such), &c. (3) comparatives with quam. (4) is sum c (= talis sum), ‘7 am a man too.' (5) quis sum ? (6) when it expresses a ‘purpose. (a) When qui = ut is, and introduces a consequence, the perf. subj. may be used for the imperfect by 418. Zeno nullo modo is erat, qui, ut Theophrastus, nervos virtutis inciderit. Cic. Acad. i. 10, 35. [al. incideret .] * 484. Qui governs the subjunctive, when we may substitute for it, ‘ although,’ i since,’ ‘ because,’ ‘ seeing that,’ &c. with a personal pronoun. -* (a) Qui takes the subjunctive after unus and solus, signifying ‘ alone,’ l only.’ * 485. Qui, in narrative, is followed by the subj. of the imperfect and pluperfect, to express a repeated action taking place in past time. A The relative adverbs (ubi, qua, &c.) govern the subjunctive of these tenses in the same way; and as far as they can be substituted for the relative, they follow the rules above given. 1 This of course will not apply to the use of qui to introduce a new sentence where we use l for he,' &c. » a Utpote qui, quippe qui = ‘ inasmuch as they;’ ‘ for they.’ Grotefend re¬ marks that utpote, quippe may generally be translated by ‘ namely,' ‘that is.' Our ‘ as being' will often give the force of them still better: they often stand before attributives only. ‘ (Democrito) quippe homini erudito, &c.’ % b Thus qui — ut ego, ut tu, ut ille; ut nos, ut vos, ut illi; through all their cases. So, cujus — ut meus, tuus, &c. : quorum — ut noster, vester, &c. I ° But ‘ut' is sometimes used after ‘is es,' &c. ‘Neque enim is es, Catilina, ut te .. . . ratio a furore revocarit.’ (Cic. Cat. i. 9, 22.) Te is here emphatic. * d Examples of qui and relative adverbs used of repeated actions are: ‘ Nec quisquam Pyrrhum, qua tulisset impetum, sustinere valuit.’ ‘ Semper habiti «unt fortissimi, qui surpmam imperii potirentur.' (Z.) QUI WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 173 §61. 486.] ( Lat .) He is not a proper person 486. The kind of sentences in which the relative may be thus introduced in Latin, will be best learned by examples. (a) (Eng.) He was despised by them, for they saw through him. r He was despised by them, who saw through him (subj.). (Lat.) < He was despised by them, as-being who saw through him t (subj.). (b) (Eng.) He deserves (or, does not deserve) to be loved. (Lat.) He is worthy, (or, unworthy) j who should be lmed " C whom you should love. (c) (Eng.) He is not a proper person to be received. who should be received, whom you, should receive. (d) (Eng.) None are so good as never to sin. (Lat.) None are so good, who never sin (subj.). (e) (Eng.) None are so great, as to be independent. (Lat.) None are so great, who are independent (subj.). (f) (Eng.) Of such a kind (or, such) that we can neglect duties for their sake. (Lat.) Of such a kind, for the sake of which we can neglect duties, (g) (Eng.) Too short to be the whole life of man. (Lat.) Shorter than which can be f the whole life of man. (h) (En°-) $ Benefits greater than I can requite. ° ( Benefits too great to be requited. (Lat.) Benefits greater than which? I can requite, r I am not a man to believe this. (i) (Eng.) < I am not so foolish , simple, &c., as to believe this. ( I am not one who believe h this. (Lat.) I am not he (is) who would believe (qui putem). (j) (Eng.) Who am I, that my writings should be honoured thus 1 (Lat.) Who am I, whose writings should be honoured thus 7 (k) (Eng.) They sent ambassadors, to sue for peace. (Lat.) They sent ambassadors, who should sue for peace. (l) (Eng.) He deserves praise (or blame) for having done this. (Lat.) He deserves praise (or blame) who did this (subj.). (m) (Eng.) Wretched man that I i am, who thought, &c. (Lat.) 0 me miserable, who thought, &c. (qui with «* *£;'.). e Dignus (or indignus) qui ametur. f Quam quae sit, or possit esse. (See Difference of Idiom 94.1 s Q,uam quibus gratiam referre possim. * h Obs. The verb after qui takes the person of ego , tu , &c., not of ‘ is' or man, verson. * ‘ I am not one who much or oft delight To season my fireside with personal talk,’ &c. ( Wordsworth.) • i ‘O me miserum !’ or ‘me miserum !’ The interjections O, heu, prohl take the acc.; hei and vee the dative; en and ecce the nom. or the acc. (the latter 174 QUIJBI WITH INDICATIVE. [§ 62. 487,48^ Exercise 71. [Translate ‘ I am not one who think.' * 1 486. t\] 487. We must take care to use such (is) a liberality as (qui) may be of service to our friends, (and) hurt nobody. There is no doubt, that the Gauls are too brave to be conquered (486, g) in one battle. Those eternal fires, which (48) we call stars, are too many to be numbered. He is a proper person to be received (486, c) into your friendship. Nothing is so valuable, k that we should barter for it our faith and our liberty. No one can be so great, as (483, (2) ) never to require the services of his friends. The benefits, of which 31 you have conferred upon me very many, are greater than I can repay (486, h). I am not pne who think that this world and every thing that is in it, was made by chance. There are some who believe, that this most beautiful world and all that is in it, was made by some chance or other. Who am I, that all men should consult my interest (486, j) ? Who will deny, that this life is too short to he the whole life of man ? You are the only person (484, a) on whom the safety of the state depends. p If Cato had died, Cicero would have been the only person on whom the safety of the state depended. I am not so simple (486, z) as to deny this. XXIY. § 62. Quum with the Indicative. » 488. Since quum with the indicative i is far less common than with the subjunctive, it is important to get a clear notion when it should take the indicative. chiefly in Comedy. Z.) The acc. of personal pronouns may stand in the qcc. without the interjection , and even other words are so used. k Tanti, . . . quo vendamus = ut eo vendamus. i When 9 mm, antequam , priusquam , &c., take the indicative , either (1) the oc¬ currence is connected with a state that presents itself vividly to the speaker's recollection , or with a fixed and definitely marked point of time: or ( 2 ) it falls without preparation or notice into the middle of another action (which is sus¬ pended or broken off by it), and thus is naturally described in an unconnected and abrupt manner. (Hartung Partikellehre, ii. 335.) 175 § 62. 489, 490.] quum with indicative. * ( a ) Quum takes the indicative when it simply marks the time , without carrying with it any notion of a cause or occasion. > ‘ When ’ marks the time in this definite way, and is to be translated by quum with the indicative, when ‘ i/icn ’ might be substituted for it. ‘ It was night when he left the room,’ =s ‘it was night: then he left the room. % (b) Quum takes the indicative when, though it does introduce a cause or occasion of what is stated in the principal sentence, it nevertheless describes the time in a very marked manner, refer¬ ring to turn, nunc, &c., or some noun of time expressed or under¬ stood in the principal clause. * (c) Quum takes the indicative, when what is said in the prin¬ cipal clause is not only contemporaneous with the action expressed in the quum clause, but is actually included in it. • When a ‘ when ’ clause stands in this kind of close relation to its principal clause, the participial substantive under the government of ‘in’ may generally be substituted for it. ‘ When you censure them, you censure me.’ ‘ In censuring them, you censure me.’ * ( d ) There are two less common meanings in which quum goes with the indicative: * (i) When it means ‘ since ’ of time." 1 * (2) When it is equivalent to quod, after gaudeo, gratulor , &c. % 489, The meanings in which ^ quum' always takes the subjunctive, are since, inasmuch, as, although, whereas. * * In the sense of ‘ when ’ it takes the subjunctive, when the statement introduced by ‘ when ’ is also the cause or occasion of what is asserted in the principal clause. • With the imperf. and pluperf. quum generally takes the subjunctive, though the,notion of a cause, or even of an occasion, is hardly, if at all, perceptible. ‘Quum Agesilaus reverteretur ... decessit.’* (Com. Nep. I. 8, 6.) 490. ( a) Jam ver appetebat, quum Hannibal ex hibernis movit, The spring was already drawing on when Hannibal moved from his winter quarters, h) Ager quum multos annos quievit, uberiores efferre fructus solet, Afield, when it has lain fallow many years, generally produces more abundant crops. M Ex eo tempore quo. Obs. That the pres, is used. (See 490, d.) * Or quum with the indie, of imperf. and pluperf. 176 QUUM WITH INDICATIVE. [§ 62. 491, 492, (c) Quum in portum dico , in urbem dico, When I say into the port, I say into the city. (In saying into the port, I say, &c.) ( d ) Nondum centum et decem anni sunt, quum de pecu¬ niis repetundis a L. Pisone lata lex est, It is not yet a hundred and ten years since the law about ex¬ tortion was carried by L. Piso. Gratulor, quum tantum vales apud Dolabellum, I con¬ gratulate you on your influence with Dolabella. 491. (a) ( Eng.) In attacking one , you attack all. * (Lat.) When you attack one, you attack all ( qnum with indie.). (b) (Eng.) It is many years since he was first in my debt. 1 » ♦ (Lat.) There are many years, when he is in my debt. (c) (Eng.) I congratulate you on your influence with Caius. (Lat.) I congratulate you, when you avail so much with (apud) Caius (d) (Eng.) I do not like to be abused. * (Lat.) I am not abused willingly (libenter). 492. Vocabulary 67. * This being so ; this being the case, quae quum ita sint. J quum (to denote the ground on which a judgment is formed); quoniam = quum, jam (used when the ground i? an acknowledged fact 0 ). C Non quod—sed : non quodP (with sub- ( junct.). » male audire (‘ to hear ill ’). (quia; quod (with indie., except where I the subjunc. is required for some other * «! reason.— Quia introduces a strict cause of the effect: quod the conceived cause or ground of an action). nullus dubito. ^ quam nullus, gratulari, gratulatus. * Since, Not that — but, To be spoken ill of, * Because, I don’t at all doubt, How insignificant, To congratulate, n Multi sunt anni quum ille in cere meo est. 0 Quando is sometimes used in this sense; and also quum. ‘ Itaque, quando vestrae cautiones infirmae sunt Graeculam tibi misi cautionem.’ (C. Fam. vii. 18.) ‘Tu quum instituisti , .... scribe ad me.’ (C. Fam. vii. 32.)—Ut has sometimes the meaning of though: l ut desint vires, tamen est laudanda voluntas.’ p For non quod, we often find non co or ideo quod: but also non quo: all with subj. ‘ Not as if not ’ is 1 non quin.' q This expression belongs to the language of common conversation, ii 3 t books. QUUM WITH INDICATIVE. 177 § 62 . 493, 494.J t To take \ sumere, sumps, sumpt.; capere, io,' cep ( capt. * To take hold of, prehendere, prehend, prehens. To do well, praeclare facere. * fGr The subject of congratulation stands in the acc. or in the abl. witl de or in; or in the indie, with quod , for which quum is sometimes used (See 491, c.) Exercise 72. [With what mood may interrogatives be used in oblique appeals? (460, c)] 493. This being the case, I am unwilling to leave the city. Caesar, when he had conquered the Gauls (= having conquered the Gauls), returned to Rome. We know how insignificant the strength of men is. Who, when he sees this (= seeing , or on seeing this), would not make merry (perf. subj.) with you ? Phocion was constantly poor, though he might have been very rich. Is it not several years since Caius was (first) in your debt ? Is there any man who can be compared with Balbus ? You do well in loving the boy (491, a). When I assert the one, I deny the other. He says that, if I had conquered the Gauls, he should have congratulated me on my victory. I congratulate you on your having recovered ( that you have recovered). Does any man like to be ill spoken of? I will hold my tongue, not that I believe the man, but because it makes no difference to me. They cried out, ‘ Why did he advise this ? might they depart a fnger’s breadth from the rule of honour ? ’ They asked, 1 Was not Caius nearer Rome than Labienus ? 5 (question for information). They answer that we ought to consult the interests of those with whom we have to live. 27) 494. Vocabulary 68. (Conjunctions that go with subjund. only.) S quasi = quam si (relating to manner ), tanquam s = tarn quam (relating to de- gree ; ‘just as if’). • r Sumimus quo utamur: capimus quod habeamus; prehendimus quod tenea mus. (D.) Sumere (to take of my own free xcill and choice) is generally spoken of something that we may appropriate: capere ( seize upon ) often denotes the taking what does not belong to us. (H.) • Also velut si, velut, ac si (and sometimes sicut ; poetically ceu). After tan * * quam, si is often expressed, and may always be understood. 8 * 178 QUUM WITH INDICATIVE. [§ 62. 495—497. * Would that, utinam. , O that! O si! r dummtfdo (for which dum, modo are . Provided only, * < used separately—‘ not,' after these ( words is ‘ne ). It is nearly the same thing as if, perinde fere est ac si. As if forsooth, quasi vero. % Perhaps, * forsitan (often with perf. subj.). 495. 0With these words the general rule for the sequence of tenses (40) is to be observed. The English would mislead us. Pugnat, quasi contendat , He fights as if he contended, or were contending, &c. Pugnavit, quasi contenderet , He fought as if he had been contending, &c. * 496.** With utinam the pres, and perf. are used, if the thing wished is not io be represented (whatever it may be) as impossible to be realized. » The imperf. and pluperf. express wishes that are (in the speaker’s opinion) impossible , or unlikely , to be realized. Not ’ after utinam is regularly ne, but very often non. Exercise 73. (Obs. In the principal clause the ita or sic ,<■ to which quasi or tan - quam refers, is often expressed.) 497. They saluted Caius 7 (just) as if he had been consul'. Many, not to say all, saluted Caius, as if he had been consul. Would that you were consul ! Would that I had been engaged in that battle ! Would that I had been able to avoid suspicion ! Provided your word be kept, I don’t care a straw for all the rest. Provided you do not break your word, I don’t care this for all the rest. Would that the letter had not been written ! Live with men as if the immortal gods saw you. (Insert ‘ sic ’ in the princ. clause.) Speak with your friends, as if all men heard you. All men are calling upon me, as if forsooth it were my business to assist all men. Would that Varro himself would apply vigorously to my cause! Perhaps some one may say, that these things are too small to be seen with the naked eye (pi.). How few are there, who apply-vigorously to another man’s cause ! ^ • <• Sic relates more to something preceding and actually given: ita to something following and supposed. (R. and H.) $ 03. 498-503.] antequam and priusquam. 179 XXV. § 63. Antequam and Priusquam. * 498. (a) When the principal verb is in the present tense, the verb in the clause with antequam or priusquam may be in the pres, indicative or subjunctive. % 499. ( b ) When the principal verb is in the future, the de¬ pendent verb may be in the future perfect, or the present sub¬ junctive ; sometimes also it is found in the present indicative. % 500. (c) When the principal verb is in a past tense, the de¬ pendent verb is either in the perfect indicative or in the imperfect subjunctive in the perfect indicative, if there is no closer con¬ nection between the two occurrences than precedence in point of time, what is stated in the subordinate clause being stated as an actual occurrence in the imperfect (or, if necessary, the pluper¬ fect) subjunctive, when there is a closer connection between the two occurrences than that of mere precedence in point of time. •. 501. And, generally, whenever there is a closer connection be¬ tween the two clauses than that of mere priority (whenever, for instance, it is stated or implied to be necessary, proper, or designed with a view to some purpose , l that the one action or event should precede the other) ; and whenever the two are contemplated as forming a connected sequence, the subjunctive should be used. v 502. Obs. When the stress is on the before , ante or prius stands in the prin¬ cipal clause; either early in it (which is their most emphatic position), or just before the quam, but not forming one word with it. When they are thus emphatic, the verb being in past time, the perf indicative is commonly used (rather than the imp. subj.): especially when a nega¬ tive accompanies them : non ante, nec ante, non prius. * 503. ( a ) Ante rorat quam pluit, It drops before it rains. t In the following passage Livy uses the pres, where we should rather have expected the subj. ‘ Sed ante quam opprimit lux majoraque hostium agmina obsepiunt iter . . . erumpamus’ (xxii. 50). So too in Virgil: ‘Sed mihi vel tellus, optem, prius ima dehiscat, | Ante, pudor, quam te violo,’ &c. (jEn. iv. 25.) In Nep. iii. 2, the imp. subj. is used where there seems to be only the simple relation of precedence in point of time. ‘ Aristides interfuit pugnae navali apud Salamina, quae facta est prius quam ille poena (exsilii) liberaretur.' 180 ANTEQUAM AND PRIUSQUAM. [§ 63. 504-505. , Tempestas minatur antequam surgat, A temqwsl threatens before it gets up. (b ) Antequam aliquo loco consedero , longas a me literas non exspectabis, Till I settle somewhere , you will not expect long letters from me. ' Antequam de republica dicam , exponam vobis bre¬ viter, &c. •s Priusquam respondeo . . . dicam, &c., (Phil. ii. 3.) Priusquam conor .proponam, &c., (iii. de „ Orat. 25.) (c) Hasc omnia ante facta sunt, quam Verres Italiam attigit, All these things were done before Verres reached Italy. Ducentis annis ante quam Romam caperent, in Italiam Galli transcenderunt, The Gauls crossed over : nto Italy two hundred years before they took Rome. 504. (1) {Eng .) A mortal body must necessarily die. {Lat.) It is necessary , that a mortal body should die (Corpus mor¬ tale interire necesse est ; or intereat necesse est; the subj being governed by ut omitted). (2) {Eng.) There is no living pleasantly. {Lat.) It cannot be lived pleasantly (jucunde vivi non potest). 505. Vocabulary 69. (The Prepositions Prjeter, Secundum ) * Prjeter, beside; beyond, above (of degree); contrary to; besides; to say nothing of, except, but. Contrary to expectation, praeter expectationem. Contrary to your custom, praeter consuetudinem tuam. * Secundum {from sequi), ‘following.’ Along; after (of time), after, next to; according to; in favour of (with verbs of judging, &c.). t He made a decree in your favour, secundum te decrevit. Exercise 74. [How are questions of appeal to be translated in oblique narration'!] 506. I will not leave the city before I have had an interview with Caius ( b ). Before I set out, I had an interview with Balbus (c). He answered that, before he set out, he had an interview with Csesar. There is no living pleasantly, unless you live (impers. pass.) according to nature. Under the guidance of na¬ ture- there is no going wrong. Contrary to expectation, the DUM, DONEC, QUOAD, &C. 181 §64. 507-511.] Praetor has made a decree in favour of Caius. They exclaim, ‘Arc not hidden dangers always the most difficult to avoid?’ Who can deny, that the Praetor has made a decree in your favour? This being the case, I have no doubt that the Praetor will make a decree in your favour. This being the case, the world must necessarily be governed by some wise mind. Virtue must neces¬ sarily' hate vice. I am not so foolish as to deny (486, i) that virtue and vice are contrary to each other. If I had not believed Caius, I should never have put myself in their power. Who is there who denies this ? XXVI. § 64. Dum, Donee, Quoad, &c. * 507. (a) Dum, donee, quoad (= until, till) take the indicative when they merely mark the time up to which the action or state is to be continued. > 508. ( b) Dum, donee, quoad (= until, till) take the subjunctive ; when that up to which the action or state is to be continued, is to be represented, not as a fact , but only as what mo.y possibly occur ; especially when it is itself the object pursued. % 509. (c) Dum, whilst, takes a present indicative even when the principal verb is in a past tense. * This arose from an endeavour to represent duration in a vivid man¬ ner. A past tense is occasionally found, e. g. ‘ qui dum veritus est , non vidit.’ {Cie. ad. Att. i. 16.) ‘ Q,uae divina res dum conjiciebatur , quae¬ sivit,’ &c. ( Nep. Hann. ii.) « 510. Dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad u (= as long as) take the indi¬ cative. 511. (a) Epaminondas ferrum in corpore retinuit, quoad renun¬ tiatum est vicisse Bceotios, Epaminondas retained • u In the sense of ‘ whilst ,’ 1 as long as,’ donec always denotes a space of time carried on to such a termination: dum denotes this, but more with reference to the space itself, than to its termination. Quoad marks the continuance of the time quite up to the point mentioned : it relate# to a demonstrative expressed or understood in the principal clause. When the statement introduced by whilst to the cause or occasion of what follows, dum should be used. 182 T,uri. DONEC, QUOAD, &C. [§ 64. 512-514. ihe spear in his body, till it was reported to him tha\ the Boeotians had conquered . '.>> jJ ; j [ferant,, d^jiec defervescat ira, Let them put off (the purpose of taking revenge) till their anger cools . -c) Rum Romani ea parant . . . jam Saguntum oppugna - hatur, Whilst the Romans were making these prepa¬ rations, Saguntum was already besieged. r >i’ 2 . Tocabulary 70 . Afte- Before, As soon as, When as soon as, postquam ; sometimes posteaquam. antequam ut primum ; quum primum ; simul ac, or atque : (with indie.) ubi; ut; (with indic.) (Adverbs of place with genit.) Where in the world are you 1 ubi terrarum es ? Where in the world are we 1 To such a height of insolence, To what a degree of madness, As far as I can, . 4s far as can be done; as far as possible. * To meet, < To march against the enemy, 6 Nearer, * ubi gentium surnus ? eo insolentiae, quo amentiae. quoad ejus facere possum (where the genit, ‘ejus’ relates to tne preceding proposition). quoad ejus fieri potest. Enough, Abundantly, obviam (with the dat : obviam, from ob, via). obviam ire hostibus. ( prdpius (with dat. o'r acc. (see 211) So (■ proxime). (Adverbs of quantity with genit.) ' sat, or satis, v of what is really enough; affatim of what a given person thinks or feels enough. Affatim = ad fatim, ‘ to satiety fatis an old substantive from the same root as fatisco, fatigo, and fastidium. (D.) abunde. Abundance of timber, abunde materiae. 513. (Eng.) In addition to this , he was blind. * (Lat.) There was added to this, that he was blind (Huc accedebat , ut caecus esset. With a pres, tense, accedit). 514. With the adverbs meaning ‘as soon as,’ the English pluperfect should be translated by the perfect. In this sense, postquam ‘after* is usually i i * * Sat before polysyllables, satis before dissyllables. (Baumgarlen Crusius ad Sueton.) QUOD. 183 §65. 515, 516.] followed by the perfect indicative. (See note 8 , page 114.; When the pluperf is used, the succeeding action is generally not represented as following the other immediately : e. g. P. Africanus , p o s t c aquam bis consul et censor fuerat, L. Cottam in judicium vocavit (Cic. Div. in Case. 21): this however is not always the case: e. g. Nep. Lysand. 4 (end): p o s t quamde suis rebus—d ix era t ) — librum—tradidit. When continued states or repeated actions are described, the principal verb being in the imperfect , the imp. or pluperf. is used. c Simulae se re¬ miserat .... reperiebatur .’ (Nep. Alcib. 1.) (Z.) Exercise 75. [How are questions of appeal to be translated in direct narration! 427, c.] 515. As long as he was in the city, I opposed his designs. Men, whilst they teach, learn. Who can deny that men learn whilst they teach ? As soon as the business is finished, 90 I shall wait upon Caius. As soon as the business was finished satisfac torily, he waited upon Caius. Wait till Caius returns. 98 Let me know where in the world you are. Men have now arrived ( impers. pass.) at such a height of madness, that p whilst all men consult their own interests , no man provides for the interests of his country. It is the part of a wise man, as long as he lives, to prefer virtue to all things. In addition to this, he was lame of one leg. How few are there who provide-for-the-interests of their country! He persuaded the Athenians to march against the enemy. Wait at Rome till you recover. The business is too difficult to be finished by any w body. It is not every body who can finish such l0) a business in a few days. We learn many things whilst we are playing. Have we {then) need of some Greek master to teach us 108 to play upon the lyre ? Let us neither ask what is disgraceful, nor do it p when we are asked. XXVII. § 65. Quod. % 516. ‘ That ’ is expressed by ‘quod,’ when it introduces the ground of a former statement, or the explanation of a term in a former proposition ; especially when it refers to a demonstrative pronoun or adverb expressed or implied. w Show the ambiguity of this sentence by translating it in two ways. 184 QUOD. [§ 65. 517-521 • Such pronouns and adverbs are id, hoc, illud: to, ideo, idcirco, prop terea, interea, ita, tam, sic, (pc. » 517. Verbs of the affections (rejoice, grieve , wonder , &c.,) are followed by quod, or by the accusative with the infinitive. x % 518. Quod takes the indicative, except when it introduces the ground of another person’s judgment or conduct; when it takes the subjunctive (by 461). * Of course it must be followed by the subjunctive in oblique narration: and it must be remembered that when an acc. with infin. follows a verb of saying, &c., the narration is oblique. * 519. The ground of an accusation is, of course, in the sub¬ junctive (by 461); so also the reason for which another person praises or blames any body. 520. * ‘ Quod ’ with a verb is often the proper way of translating the parti¬ cipial substantive under the government of a preposition. (1) (Eng.) He accused him of having betrayed the king. r (Lat .) He accused him, that he had betrayed the king (quod with subj ). (2) (Eng.) His having spared the conquered, is a great thing. t ( Lat.) That he spared the conquered, is a great thing. (or) That (or, this) that he spared the conquered, is a great thing, y (3) (Eng.) He praised (or blamed) him, for having done this. ( Lat.) He praised (or blamed) him, that he had done this. (Quod with subj.: the indicative would intimate that the narrator believed him to have actually done it.) (4) (Eng.) Many persons admire poems without understanding them. (Lat. ) Many persons admire poems, nor understand them. (neque intelligunt.) (5) (Eng.) You cannot be ruined without ruining others. ( Lat.) You cannot be ruined so as not to ruin others. (ut non 1 with subj.) 521. Vocabulary 71. «. To be praised; grieve for, dblere a dolu, dolit, (with acc. or abl. with de). * * * Quod, introducing the statement as a fact, is naturally better suited to the past than to the present. ‘ Gaudeo quod scripsisti ’ is better than ‘ te scripsisse .* (Z.) | With verbs that express an emotion ox feeling (gaudeo, doleo, miror), the acc. with inf. is the more common: with those that express the manifestation of an emotion or feeling (laudo, reprehendo, accuso, misereor, gratias ago, grat¬ ulor, consolor), quod is preferred. (Z., 8th ed.) , y Magnum est hoc, quod victor victis pepercit. • * Or ‘ quin ’ if the sentence is of a negative character. «% * Dolere is to feel vain or sorrow; maerere is to show it by outward signs that QUOD. §65. 522.] 1H5 * Grieve; grieve for, * To mourn ; bewail, i To be glad, , To rejoice, Exceedingly, To recruit oneself, mcerere, moestus (with acc. or abl.). lugere, lux, luct laetari, laetatus, gaudere, b gavisus sum. vehementer, se reficere. • (The Preposition de.) « De, concerning , about ; down from; from (Cicero has, audire de ali¬ quo : so emere, conducere de aliquo): of with partitives: by or accord¬ ing to, of advice (de consilio meo) ; with words of time ; &c. In the middle of the night, media de nocte. By night, de nocte. . Late at night, multa de nocte. On purpose, de industria. « To know a man by face, de facie nosse. Unexpectedly, de improviso. Exercise 76. > [In sentences dependent on an infin., what tenses are sometimes found instead of the imp erf. and pluperf. subj.? 469, d.~\ 522. Know that I do not know the man even by face. I am exceedingly glad that you have finished the business to your satisfaction. I rejoice that you have obtained a triumph for a victory over the Gauls. 1 shall wait at Rome till I recruit myself. He answered that he was going to remain at Rome till he had recruited himself. I will not leave Rome before I have recruited myself. Caius praises the greatest poets without understanding them. I had rather be a good man without seeming (one), than seem one without being (so) [Translate with ut]. Would you prefer being wise without seeming (so), or seeming wise without being so ? I did not fear that any one would grieve for the death of abandoned citizens. No one ever grieved more for the death are involuntary, arising from an irresistible feeling (and thus mcerere and moeror rise above doler e and dolor) lugere is to show it by conventional signs; to mourn. (D.) % 4 b Gaudere is to Jecl joy ; hctari is to show it by joyful looks, &c. (D.) Doder- lein thinks Cicero mistaken when he makes Icutari express an exulting, triumph- ant joy, gaudere a more temperate delight. But could Cicero be mistaken on such a point, involving no principle of etymology, but only a correct perception of the relative force of two words in common use ? At all events, according to Doderlein’s own explanation, Icetari, expressing the manifestation of joy in con¬ sequence of an irresistiblefeeling , might be expected to riee above gaudere , just »s mcerere above doler e. 186 THE HOMAN CALENDAR. [§ 66. 523-528 of his only son, than he grieved for that, of his father. Why should V now bewail the life of men ? This being the case, what reason have we 109 for bewailing the death of abandoned citizens? How few are there , who would bewail the death of Caius ? They p set upon the enemy unexpectedly, and put them to flight. He did it in sueli a manner (ita) that it seemed to be done on purpose. XXVIII. § 66 . The Roman Calendar. 523. The Roman months were of the same number of days as the English months, but were differently divided. 524 . The first day of the month was called the Kalends (Ka- lend®) : the Nones (Nome) fell on the fifth or seventh : the Ides (Idus, uum, f.) were always eight days after the Nones , that is, on the thirteenth or fifteenth. 525. In March, July, October, May, The Nones were on the seventh day. (And therefore the Ides on the fifteenth.) 526. Days between the Kalends and the Nones were reckoned by their distance from the Nones : those between the Nones and the Ides by their distance from the Ides: those after the Ides by their distance from the Kalends of the following month. Hence a day after the fifteenth of May, would be such a day before the Kalends of June. 527. Suppose we take the third of March; this is a day before the Nones of March, which happens on the seventh. Now 7—3 = 4: but the Ro¬ mans reckoned both days in , so that they would call the third of March not the fourth , but th e fifth day before the Nones. 528. To suit this Roman way of reckoning, we must subtract the given day from the number of the day on which the Nones or Ides fall increased by one. If the day be one before the Kalends, we must subtract from the last day of the month increased by two . If the remainder be two, the day will be pridie ; because the day the Romans would call the second day before , was ‘ the day be • fore, as we speak. THE ROMAN CALENDAR. 187 §66. 529-531.] 529. Thus take the 3rd, 9th, 23rd of June : (1) In June the Nones are on the fifth: therefore three must be sub« tracted from (5 +- 1 =) six ; and the remainder being 3, the day is ‘ the third day before the Nones of June.’ (2) In June the Nones being on the fifth, the Ides are on the thirteenth , and the subtraction must be from fourteen. Hence subtract 9 from 14: the remainder being 5, the day is the fifth day before the Ides of June. (3) Since June has thirty days, we must subtract from thirty-two. Hence substract 23 from 32; the remainder being 9, the day is the ninth day before the Kalends of July. OCT (The adjective forms are used with the months,® and Idus is fern.) 530. To express when ? 1 On the third before the Kalends of March ’ is by rule ‘ die tertio ante Kalendas Martias,’ which was shortened by the omission of die and ante into ‘ tertio Kalendas Martias ’ or ‘ iii. Kal. Mart.' 1 But another form is used (almost exclusively) by Cicero and Uxy; this form is ‘ ante-diem tertium Kalendas Martias ’ shortened into ‘a. d. iii. Kal. Mart.? a form which cannot be explained gram¬ matically. This ante-diem came to be treated as an indeclinable substantive, and the prepositions ad , in, ex, were prefixed to it, as to other suhstantives of time. 531. [When 1 on what day ?] Natus est Augustus ix. Kalendas Octobres, Augustus was born on the twenty-third of September (32 — 9=23.) Claudius natus est Kalendis Augustis, Claudius was born on the first of August. Claudius obiit (or excessit) iii. Idus Octobres, Claudius died on the thirteenth of October (16—3=13.) Meministine me ante diem (a. d.) xii. Kalendas Novem¬ bres dicere in Senatu ? Do you remember that I spoke in the Senate on the 21 st of October? (33 — 12=21.) [Against or by such a day : for such a day.] Consul comitia in ante diem tertium Notias Sextiles c These forms are, Januarius, Februarius, Martius, Aprils, Maius, Junius, Q,uintilis (or Julius), Sextilis (or Augustus), Septem-, Octo-, Novem-, Decem' >ris. 188 THE ROMAN CALENDAR. [§ 66. 532-535. (= Augustus' 1 ) edixit, The Consul fixed the elections by an edict for the third of August (6—3=3.) In ante dies octavum et septimum Kalendas Octobres comitiis dicta dies, The time of the elections is fixed for the twenty fourth and twenty fifth of September (32—8=24). Capuam venire jussi sumus ad Nonas Februarias , We are ordered to come to Capua by the fifth ol February. 532. Vocabulary 72. Elections, To my election, To suffer, To lose flesh, To stay (in a place), To compel, * The day before the Ides, To fix by edict, It is worth while, » operae pretium est. 533. (a) (Eng.) Instead of reading, he is at play. * (Lat.) He is at play, whereas he ought to read (quum debeat). (b) (Eng.) Instead of growing rich, he is growing poor. (Lat.) He is growing poor, whereas he might grow rich (quum pos3et). 534. (c) (Eng.) Far from thinking this, I hold, &c. (Lat.) It is so far off that I should think this, that I hold, &c. (tan¬ tum abest ut —ut, e &c.) comitia, orum (properly/ the assembling of the people ’ for the purpose of elect¬ ing the consuls, &c. &c.). ( ad mea comitia (i. e. to the meeting at ( which I am to be elected or rejected), sinere,* siv, sit; pati, ior, passus. * corpus amittere, commorari, cogere, coeg, coact. * pridie Idus : or pridie Iduum, edicere (with acc.). Exercise 77. 535. Tiberius died on the sixteenth of March. Nero was born d The months of July and August were called Quintilis , Sextilis respectively, (= the fifth and sixth month, reckoning from March, the old beginning of the year,) till those names were exchanged for Julius and Augustus in honour of the first two Csesars. '■ * Smere is properly ‘ to let go,' ‘ not to stop,' pati is, ‘ not to prohibit:' sinere has for its immediate object the person acting, pati the action itself: sinere is com¬ monly, though not exclusively, followed by ut with the subj.: pati by the acc. with in fin. (D.) e Tantum abest ut nostra miremur, ut ... . nobis ipse non satisfaciat Demos¬ thenes. Sometimes the second ut is omitted, the clause having vix or etiam : ‘tantum abfuit ut inflammares nostros animos: somnum vix tenebamus.' ICic. Brut. 80.) § 67. 536-539.] connection of propositions, &c. 189 on the fifteenth of December. Caius was born on the fifteenth 0 of October. Balbus died on the twelfth of August. Vitellius was born on the 24th of September; or, as some (say), on the seventh of September. The Consul has fixed (by edict) the elec¬ tions for the 21st of July. I believe that the elections will be fixed for the ninth of April. Say that I shall not be angry with him, if he does not come 98 to my election. I am compelled to stay here till I recruit myself: for I have lost both flesh and strength. There are some who think that the elections will be fixed for the ninth and tenth of July. Instead of being with me, he is at his own house. Instead of being very rich (as he might have been), he is very poor. Instead of applying vigorously to the affair, he is gone into the country. I am so far from praising, that I can scarcely restrain myself from calling you a betrayer of your country. I am so far from believing any body (no mat¬ ter who he may he ), that I scarcely believe you. I was so far from being ill spoken of, that all men praised me. There were some who laughed. XXIX. § 67. Connection of Propositions hy the Relative. Imperative forms. % o36. Any relative pronoun or adverb may be used for the cor¬ responding demonstrative with the conjunction and (and some¬ times, hut, for, therefore, &c.) k 537. When in English such a clause as ‘ they say,’ 1 as — says,’ &c., is inserted parenthetically in a relative sentence, the verb of this clause should generally be made the principal verb of the relative clause in Latin, the other verb being put in the infini¬ tive. 4 538. When in English the relative pronoun is separated from its verb by another clause, which contains a demonstrative pro. noun, the relative should be expressed in that clause in Latin, and the demonstrative be expressed or understood in the other. 539. The imperative may be expressed by several circumlo¬ cutions : 190 CONNECTION OF PROPOSITIONS [§ 67. 540-542. * (1) The imperat, of command by cnra ut (take care to). fac ut (or fac only) with subj. * (2) The imperat, of prohibition by cave with sub ?. (governed by ut omitted), or noli with injin. f 540. (a) (Eng.) Two and two make four : and if this is granted, &c. (Lat.) Two and two make four : if which is granted, &c. (b) (Eng.) Caius, who, they say, was killed at Lugdunum. (Lat.) Caius, whom they report to have been killed, &c. (c) (Eng.) Crassus, who, as Lucilius tells us, never laughed but once. {Lat.) Crassus, whom Lucilius reports to have never laughed, but once. (d) (Eng.) Narratives, by which , when we lead them, we are affected. (Lat) Narratives, which when we read, we are affected. (e) (Eng.) Success with which, if it should fall to out Jot, we should be dissatisfied. (Lai.) Success, if whichs should fall to our lot, we should be dis¬ satisfied. (f) (Eng.) I did this; and if you had not thwarted me, &c. (Lat.) I did this; whom if you had not thwarted, &c. * 541. [C. xxxv.] ‘ Will 5 and ‘ would , 1 ‘ will not ‘ and ‘ would not 1 are often principal verbs, to be translated by velle and nolle respectively. They are to be translated when for will, would, we may substitute is (are, &c.) willing, was (were, &c.) willing. 542. Vocabulary 73. 4 (Phrases with e, ex ; pr.e, pro, in.) * To have a pain in my feet, To cook with water, From a wall, Opposite, over-against, > To be tired with a journey, % To live according to nature, From the heart, ' It is for my interest, (To place) on a table, . For = owing to, especially of ob¬ stacles, . In comparison with him, Safe, * ex pedibus laborare, or dolere. ex aqua cdquere; cox, coct. ex muro. e, not ex, regione.* * c e via languere. * e natura viv 6 re. ex animo (in sincerity). ^ e re mea est.h in mensa. prae (with abl.). ' „ pros illo. V salvus, a, um; incolumis, is. e.l f Cura ut quam primum venias. Fac animo forti, magnoque sis. Cave putes, or noli putare.— Such forms in English are, Hake care to, 5 ( be sure you, 1 t mind you , 1 &c. 8 In Latin, the relative must stand before si. * Another noun will, of course, follow regione in the gen. b So, e republica est. t A person is tutus when he is in safety; securus when he believes hlmsett tc BY THE RELATIVE. 191 § 67. 543. % Pro virili parte, according to one’s duty or power as an individual ( n/.l ‘with all one’s might’); as far as an individual can. * Pro re nata (according to the thing that has arisen) =. according to circumstances. * Pro eo ac mereor , according to my deserts. Exercise 78. 543. I for my 'part wished this: and if Pompejus had not envied me, the republic would now be safe. Philosophy teaches that the world moves ; and if this be true, we also must neces¬ sarily move. Who can deny that this is for my interest? The gods will requite me according to my deserts. Is it not certain, that the gods will requite you according to your deserts ? I am sorry that you have a pain in your head. If you had done this, I should have praised you from my heart. You will not be able to see the sun for the multitude of our javelins. Caius, being tired of his journey, was killed by his slave. They answered that they would receive us. Did he not answer that he would not receive us? Do not think that the soul is mortal. Take care to finish the business to my satisfaction. Do not think that every man can command himself. Be sure to come to my assistance as soon as possible. Who will deny that these things are for the interests of the republic ? I cannot speak for sorrow. Be sure not to impute this to me as a fault. Be sure not to hurry. Be sure not to believe that it is necessary to make haste ; for, if you believe this, it is all over with us. The moon is eclipsed, when it is opposite to the sun. May I not determine what should be done according to circumstances ? It is the part of a good citizen to defend the republic as far as an individual can. Benefits, for which, if you confer them upon me, J will prove myself grateful (memor). You may eat the food p which is placed on the table. He says that he will not eat the cheese p which is placed on the e bo, and is udthout care (se-curus) or anxiety on the subject. Hence ‘Ne si; a curus, qui non est tutus ab hoste.’ Of salvus, sospes, incolumis, — salvus says the least (as it properly relates only to ( existence ); sospes more, as it points to tee protection of a higher power; incolumis the most of all, as it excludes not ly annihilation , but even the supposition of any injury or attack. 192 ROMAN WAY OF RECKONING MONEY. [§ 68. 544-54 table. I shall do what appears 98 best to be done according to circumstances. There were some who could not speak foi sorrow. XXX. § 68. On the Roman way of reckoning money . 544. The Romans reckoned their money by sesterces : and by nummus , when it means a coin, sestertius is always meant. d. q. 545. A sestertius ( = 1 3| or 3£ cents) was not quite equal to ticopenci English money. A sestertium = a thousand sestertii: it was the name of a sum , not of a coin. * 546. Sestertii and sestertia are used quite regularly with nu¬ meral adjectives : but sestertium in the singular is used in a very peculiar way with numeral adverbs. % 547. OCT With numeral adverbs sestertium means so many ‘ hundred thousand sesterces .’ Hence Sestertium semel * * = ‘ a hundred thousand sesterces.’ Sestertium decies = ten ‘ hundred thousand sesterces ’ == a million sesterces. Sestertium vicies — 20 ‘ hundred thousand sesterces ’ = two million sesterces. tic. tie. Obs. With numeral adverbs below Hen times' so many hundred thou¬ sand sesterces are meant. With numeral adverbs above and multiples of ‘ ten times,’ throw away the cipher from the units’ place, and you have the number of ‘ millions of sesterces' Thus, if ‘ sestertium sexcenties ' were the sum ; throwing away 0 from the units’ place of 600, we have ‘ 60 millions of sesterces' for the sum. £. s. d. * A sestertium = 8 1 5£ = 838 68. Sestertium semel = 807 5 10 = $3873 60. Sestertium decies , centies , millies, &c. (that is, the multiples of semel by 10) are got approximately by this rule :—For every cipher in the proposed multiple add to the right hand of 807 one figure taken (successively) from the left hand of the series 291666 continued ad infinitum. Thus to get sestertium millies, since 1000 has 3 ciphers, I must add 3 figures (291) taken from the left hand of the given series to the right hand of 807. Hence millies sestertium — r 807291 = nearly 84,000,000 in whole numbers. 193 $68. 548-552.] roman way of reckoning money. With intermediate numerals, the sum is easily obtained by these rules: Sestertium ter vicies = ‘2 millioji, 3 hundred thousand ses¬ terces 548. In this construction sestertium is declined : Sestertium vicies, two million sesterces. Sestertii vicies, of two million sesterces, &c. 549. In turning the number of sesterces into Latin, remember that to the numeral before ‘ millions ’ I must add a cipher in the units' place (in other words, multiply it by 10) to get the numeral adverb , that is to go with sestertium. Thus in ‘ 2 million sesterces,’ by adding a cipher in the units’ place to 2, I get 20, and vicies is the adverb required. 550. ( a ) Sex millibus aedes conduxit, He hired a house for six thousand (sesterces). ( b) Sex sestertia persolvit, He paid six thousand sesterces. (c) In sestertio vicies (splendide se gerens), On a fortune of two million sesterces. 551. Vocabulary 74. Inheritance, To keep up a certain state, A freedman, Descended from, , Meanly, hereditas, atis, f. splendide se gerCre ; gess, gest. ' libertinus, i, m. (but if spoken in refer¬ ence to his master , libertus. Thus Brutus’s libertus is one of the class libertini). ' oriundus :—‘ nati Carthagine, sed ori. undi ab Syracusis; ‘ born at Carthage, <( but of Syracusan extraction;’ or ‘ de¬ scended from a family that had for¬ merly lived at Syracuse.’ , sordide. Exercise 79. 552. He kept up a certain state with a fortune of three million sesterces. With a fortune of two millions of sesterces he kept up more state than Caius, who had received 10 millions from his father. Caius, the freedman of Brutus, left more than k 15 thou¬ sand sesterces. That you, with a fortune of 10 millions, should live so meanly ! Caius, who was of Syracusan extraction, sent Brutus two hundred thousand sesterces as a present. On the * k With arrplius, plus, minus, &c. quam is often omitted ; the noun standing in the case it would have stood in, if quam had been expressed. Sometimes however the ablat. follows these adverbs. 9 194 ROMAN WAY OF RECKONING MONEY. [§ 69 . 553-555 23rd of November, Balbus sent me as a present twenty thousand sesterces. He gave them three thousand sesterces a-piece. From this inheritance Atticus received about ten million sesterces. § 69. 553. On the division of the As: the method of reckoning frao tions, interest, &c. As Deunx J-L> 1 2 Dextans (+§=) i Dodrans i (-1%=) ~4 Bes (bessis) (tV=) t Septunx JL 1 <> Semis (semissis) (~. 6 - =) 1 v Quincunx 5 1 2 Triens (f t 2 = ) duadrans (A=) i Sextans (l 2 2=) i Uncia AJ 554. These words were used to express the fractions set down opposite to their names. 555. The same division was used in reckoning the interest of money, which was due monthly. Asses usurce — one As per month for the use of a hundred. This was also called centesima. usurae, because in 100 months a sum equal to the whole principal would have been paid. Asses orcentesimse usurce = 12 per cent. Deunces q r 11 Dextantes 10 Dodrantes 9 Besses 8 Septunces 7 Semisses > usurae < 6 Q-uincunces 5 Trientes 4 duadrantes 3 Sextantes 2 Unciae J L 1 Bina centesimae = 24 per cent, and so on. i Dodrans = de-quadrans f 195 § 69. 556, 557.] roman way of reckoning money. 556. ( a ) Statura ejus quinque pedum et dodrantis fuit, His height was jive feet and three-fourths ( five feet nine). (Eum) hseredem fecit ex dodrante , He left him heir to three-fourths of his estate. ( h) Assibus usuris grandem pecuniam collocavit, He invested a large sum of money at 12 per cent. Exercise 80. 557. Caius, the freedman of Balbus, has been made heir to one half of his estate. He has left one Caius, of Carthaginian extraction, the heir to seven-twelfths of his estate ; from which inheritance he will receive, I think, about six hundred thousand sesterces. The freedman of Brutus, who died at Rome on the third of August, has left nearly fifteen million sesterces; and it is thought that Caius has been left heir to half his estate. He is said to have lodged a large sum of money in the hands of" Balbus at 9 per cent. * Apvd aliquem collocare. I TABLES FOR REFERENCE. TABLE I.—GENDERS. Ods. — Mas. exceptions are in capitals ;fem. in the common type ; neut. in italic « (Third Declension.) Mas. terminations. £R^ ORj OS, es increasing , o, when not do, go, io. Principal Exceptions. er) cadaver uber iter ver papaver verber tuber or )arbor aequor marmor cor es) compes merces merges quies os) cos dos os (ossis) os (oris) ■ \chao8 t epos imelos o) caro techo requies seges teges ces First Decl. Fem. except names of men. Sec. Decl. (us, er) § Mas. —except alvus domus humus vannus pelagus virus vulgus (also m.) Fem. terminations. do, go, io,* * as, is, aus, x > es not increasing s impure tis in hypermon. Principal Exceptions. do ORDO CARDO LIGO 10 1 i MARGO (f) t is) AMNIS LAPIS ANGUIs(f) MENSIS AXIS ORBIS CASSISES) PANIS COLLIS qiNis CRINIS ENSIS FASCIS PISCIS POSTIS PULVIS SANGUIS TORRIS FINIS (f) UNGUIS FOLLIS VECTIS FUNIS VERMIS IGNIS X) CALIX CODEX CORTEX GREX POLLEX SILEX (f) +THORAX VERTEX es, pari- syll. BIDENS ( hoe ). s im- $ mons pure ( pons FONS DENS RUDENS +HYDROPS OS) AS ELEPHAS vas (vasis) fas nefas ACINACES. Neut. terminations. e, ct, t , e, Z, 71 , ar, u r, Us. iis monosjU. Principal Exception*. Z) SAL SOL n) LIEN REN SPLEN PECTEN ur) FUR FURFUR TURTUR VULTUR us) pecus (udis) LEPUS syu^ujz 3 ™ Fourth Decl. (us) Mas. except acus idus (pl.) manus porticus tribus Fifth Decl. Fem. except dies (also Fem. in sing.) MERIDIES. ' * Words in io that are not abstract nouns are mas. e. g. papilio, pugio, scipio, septentrio, stellio, unio (pearl), with the numeral nouns ternio, 0.Uaternio, &c. + Properly Greek words. X Those with (f), (m), are sometimes fem. and mas. respectively. * § Greek nouns in odus (exodus, methodus, tf*c.) with dialectus, dipthongua » Properly a contracted conjugation, but with the vowels open in the first pers. singular of the present tense. (Mone-o; mone-is = monSs, &c.) . (1) Most reject e, and form perfect and supine in ui, itum. (Mon-eo, mon-tu, mon -Hum.) v (2) But some retain e, and add v, in the perf.—eo, evi, etum. Deleo, delevi, deletum. Fleo, neo, and verbs formed from oleo a {make to grow)) pleo {fill), and sueo {am accustomed). * (3) Others form perf. from root of present, lengthening the vowel (il short), when pres, ends in a single consonant. Caveo, cavi, cautum : faveo. Fbveo, fovi, fotum : mbveo, voveo : paveo, ferveo (and fertmi); Can • niveo , nivi and nixi. Prandeo (pransum), video (visum), sedeo (sessum), strideo.* t (4) Others form perf. in si. (a) p sounds. {Any p c sound with s~ps; but bs sometimes = ss.) Jubeo, jussi, jussum; sorbeo, sorpsi, sorptum. (/?) k sounds. (The k sound, if impure, is thrown away before s. Any k sound with s —x: qu is to be treated as a A: sound.) Mulceo, mulsi, mulsum. Algeo, indulgeo (indultum), fulgeo, mulgeo t tergeo, turgeo, urgeo, torqueo (tortum). Augeo, auxi, auctum: luceo,frigeo, lugeo. (y) t sounds, {t sound thrown away before s.) Ardeo, arsi, arsum; rideo, suadeo. (<5) Liquid verbs, {r thrown away before s.) Maneo, mansi, mansum : haereo. (s) With reduplication, {t sound thrown away before s.) Mordeo, momordi, morsum : pendeo, spondeo, tondeo. (£) Neuter passives : audeo, ausus sum; gaudeo, gavisus sum; soleo, solitus sum. ( r)) The following have perf. in ui, but do not form their supines in itum. Doceo, doctum; teneo, tentum; misceo, mixtum and mistum; torreo, tostum ; censeo, censum; recenseo, recensum and recensitum. * IV Third Conjugation. * (1) Perfect in i, added to root of present. (a) Acuo, acui, acutum : arguo, congruo, imbuo, induo, luo (luiturus), metuo, minuo, pluo, ruo (rutum, ruitum), spuo, statuo, sternuo, suo, tribuo. Volvo, volvi, volutum. So solvo. . (/?) t sound thrown away before s in sup. Mando, mandi, mansum; pando (passum, pansum rare), prehendo, * Some of which have olesco in pres. Aboleo, sup. abolitum : adolesco, adultum. b langueo, langui; liqueo , liqui and licui smooth, mid. asp. c Mutes with a p sound, p b (ph). - k - c g (ch) - t - t d (th). PERFECT AND SUPINE. 199 scando ; and compounds of cando (kindle), fando (thrust), in cendo, fendo. (y) Bibo (bibi, bibitum); cudo (cusum), dego, lambo, psallo, sctibo (scabi), sido, vello (vulsum: also vulsi), verro (versu md), verto (versum), viso (visum). v ( (2) Perfect in ui. (/S) Salio, salui, saltum; aperio, bperio, amicio (amicui?). A (3) Perfect in si. Farcio, farsi, fartum ; fulcio, haurio (hausi, haustum), raucio (rausum); sarcio, sepio; sancio, sanxi, sanctum; vincio; sentio, sensi, sensum. * VI. Deponents. * Second Conjugation. Fateor, fassus; liceor, licitus; mereor, me¬ ritus: misereor, miseritus, misertus; reor, ratus; tueor, tuitus; vbreor, veritus. * Third Conjugation. Adipiscor, adeptus: amplector, amplexus; com¬ plector, complexus; divertor, diversus; (so praevertor, revertor;) expergiscor, experrectus; fruor, fruitus and fructus ; fungor, functus; gradior, gressus: invehor, invectus; irascor, iratus; labor, lapsus j Ibquor, Ibcutus; mbrior, mortuus; nanciscor, nactus; nascor, natus: * Proper’.^, to separate. In the sense of to see, it has neither perf. nor sup. PERFECT AND SUPINE. 2' , nitor, nisus, nixus : obliviscor, oblitus ; paciscor, pactus; pascui pastus; pStior, passus; proficiscor, profectus; queror, questus sSquor, secutus: ulciscor, ultus; utor, usus. * Fourth Conjugation. Adsentior, adsensus: experior, expertus, metior, mensus; oppgrior, oppertus; ordior, orsus; Orior, ortus.? * VII (fjp sc in verbs denotes the beginning of an action or state.) Inchoatives in sco have no -perfect , but that (in ui) of the root. This would hardly be considered their perfect, did not some of those formed from nouns take a perfect in ui, though no verb in eo occurs. . VIII. In compound verbs (1) a , ce, of the root often become i , sometimes e: (2) e of the root often becomes i: (3) the reduplication of the root is drcpt, except in praecurro and the compounds of posco and disco. e The present follows the third; but 2 sing, oriris or oriris. 9* * TABL E OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 4*c English. 1. You and I, ) Balbus and I, 2. Says that he has not a sinned. Says that he has never, &c. 3. He promises to come. He hopes to live. He undertakes to do it. He pretends to be mad (16). 4. To have a prosperous voyage. 5. To my, his, &c. satisfaction: satis¬ factorily ; successfully. 6 . To fight on horseback. 6 *. It is a breach of duty. 7. He sends the most faithful slave he has. 8 . He was the first to do this, ) (Or) He was the first who did this. $ So , He was the only one who did it. 9. Such is your temperance, Or, With your usual temperance. Latin. I and you, I and Balbus. Denies (negat) that he has sinned. Denies that he has ever , &c. He promises that he will come (acc. with inf.) He hopes that he shall live (acc. with inf.) He undertakes that he will do it (acc. with inf.) He pretends that he is mad (acc. with inf.: pron. expressed). To sail from ( — according to) one’s thought or intention (ex sententid navigare.) Ex sententid. To fight from (ex) a horse, b It is against (contra) duty. He sends the slave, whom he has the most faithful. He the first (person) did this (55). He alone did it (solus fecit). ' Which is your temperance. Of which temperance you are. For ( = in proportion to) your tem ( perance (56). " a Obs. Says not should not be translated by nego unless it is in answer to an actual or virtual question. When the not is closely connected with the following rerb, it should be translated by non. % *» Ex equis, if more persons than one are spoken of. TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 203 English. Latin. 10. JLs far as I know. 11. It’s all over with . . . f To make the same boast. .o J To make the same promise. * j To make many promises. [ To v.tter many falsehoods. 13. To take by storm. 14. That nothing . . . That nobody . . . That never . . . [This is only when ‘ that ’ intro¬ duces a purpose .] 15. No food is so heavy as not to be di¬ gested, &c. He is so foolish as to think, &c. 16. She never saw him without calling him, &c. 17. He could scarcely be restrained from throwing , &c. 18. I left nothing undone to appease him. I cannot but, &c. 19. I will not object to your doing it. 20. It cannot be that the soul is not immortal (89). f Nothing prevents him from do- 21 J in s il - ■ j So, nothing deters him from do- l ing it. 22. It was owing to you that I did not succeed. 23. By sea and land. 5 To be within a very little of. . . ( Or, But a little more and . . . Not to be far from. Which I may know (quod secum). It is done concerning ( actum est de ).. To boast the same thing (59). To promise the same thing (59). Tone 0 ™ 186 ( ™ny things. 'To fight a place out by force (per vim expugnare). Lest any thing ( ne quid). Lest any body (ne quis). Lest ever (ne unquam). No food is so heavy but (quin) it may be digested, &c. So foolish that he thinks (ut), 66, d. She never saw him, but (quin) she called him, &c. He could scarcely be restrained but that (quin) he should throw (88). I left undone ( prcetermisi) nothing that I should not (quin) appease him. I cannot do (any thing) but that (fa- cere non possum quin), &c. I will not object but that (recusabo quin) you should do it. It cannot be (fieri) but that (quin) the soul is immortal. Nothing prevents (obstat) by which he should the less do it (quominus faciat). Nothing deters him by which he should the less do it (99). It stood through you by which I should the less succeed (per te stetit quomi¬ nus, &c., 99). By land and sea. * To be a very little distant but that. . ;e (impers.) quin.J abesse. [minimum abes Haud multum ) Haud procul $ 25. 26. 27. 28. 1 almost think, c I don’t know whether, To take away any one’s life. &c. The city of Rome, the island of Cyprus. He did this as (or when) Consul. $ I may go. I I am permitted to go. I ought to do it. , I ought to have done it. Haud scio an; nescio an, &c. To snatch away life to ( =: from) any one (vitam alicui eripere. 132). The city Rome; the island Cyprus. He Consul ( = being Consul) did this. $ To me it-is-permitted (licet) to go ) (124). It behoveth me (oportet me) to do it. It behoveth me (oportuit) to do it (126). c Haud scio an, nescio an, dubito an may be followed by the negatives, nemo , nihil, nullus , nunquam, or by the for is that follow negatives, quisquam , quic- quam, ullus, unquam. Haud scio an iemo approaches nearer to a denial than haud scio an quisquam. (G.)—But Cicero and his contemporaries never omit the negative. (Matthid, Hand, &c.) £04 TABLE OF English. Latin. 29. I am at leisure to read. 30. I have need of food. 4P 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. There is need of 1 C making-haste, deliberation, prompt execu¬ tion. How many are there of you? How many are there of us? Three hundred of us are come. Of whom there are few. very many. Very many of which . . Some mock, others approve. One was a Greek ; the other a Ro- * man. Such a lover of truth. To take in good part. , He was condemned in his ab¬ sence. To prefer a capital charge against Caius. To bring an action against a man for bribery. To prefer a charge of immorali¬ ty against Caius. To inform a man of a plan. Without any danger . . . It is characteristic of. . . It is incumbent on . . . It \sfor . . . It demands, or requires, firmness. It shows, or betrays, weakness. Any man may do it. It is not every man who can, Ac. y It is wise. To reduce to subjection. ) To bring under his dominion. $ To be capitally condemned. To be acquitted of a capital charge. Common to me and you. To compare things together. * To threaten a man with death. To prefer death to slavery. There is need of (Opus est) < There-is-leisure {vacat) to me to read (154). C (1) There is to me a business with < food {prep, omitted). ( (2) Food is a business to me. ' (the matter) being hasten- ed. (the matter) being con¬ sulted. (the matter) promptly done (177). How many are ye ? {quot estis?) How many are we 7 {quot sumus?) We (being) three hundred are come. (Trecenti venimus.) Who are 5 few ‘ l very many. Which very many (quae plurima) . . . Others mock; others approve (alii—■ alii). The other was a Greek; the other a Roman (alter—alter). So ( adeo ) loving of, Ac. Boni consulere. t (See 185.*) He being absent was condemned. To make Caius an accused-person {reus) of a capital matter (187). To make a man an accused-person ol bribery {gen.) ; or, about bribery (de). To make Caius an accused-person {reus) about morals (de moribus: 187). To make a man surer of a plan {certio¬ rem facere). Without ( expers , adj.) all danger . It is (a mark) of . . . It is {the duty) of. . . It is {the character, privilege, Ac.) of. . It is (a thing) of ( = for) firmness. It is (a mark) of weakness. It is any man’s {task) to do it. It is not every man’s {task) to do it (non cujusvis est), Ac. A is {the conduct) of a wise man. Words in brackets to be omitted To make of his own dominion {suet ditionis facer e). To be condemned of the head. To be acquitted of the head Common to me with you. Tr compare things amongst (or be- ■ween) themselves (inter se) 221 (• (Culpae, or vitio dare, or vertere.) To be for a reproach (opprobrio es»e). To be for a great advantage (magnae utilitati esse). To be for a hatred ( odio esse). (So impedimento , honori , Ac., esse.) * Quanto odio est! {how odious it is!) * Obs. ‘How’ before the adj. must be ‘ quantus ’ in agreement with subst. [51. To throw himself at Caesar’s feet.] [Se Caesari ad pedes projicere; or lite rally.] See p. 89, note 1. 52. Caius would say . . . Caius used to say . . . 53. I fear that he will come. «. I fear that he will not come. 64. The war against Pyrrhus. Connection with Pompey. Rest from labours. Wrongs done to Caius. 55. He did it that he might the more easily escape. 56. To make Caesar retire. Dicebat. I fear lest he come {ne veniat). I fear that he come (ut veniat*). The war of Pyrrhus ] Connection of Pompey ( G ... Rest of labours genitive. Wrongs of Caius J He did this, by which {quo) he might more easily escape. To make that Caesar should retire {fa- cere , or efficere ut, Ac.). 67. It is becoming to (or in) an orator « It becomes an orator to be angry, Ac. to be angry, Ac. {oratorem decet). So, it is unbecoming to (or in) an {Oratorem dedecet . . .) 259. orator . . . 58. This victory cost them many 4 This victory stood d to them at many wounds. wounds {abl.). 266. [Compare the Eng. ‘ this stood me in a large sum.’] 59. Hardly any body. * Almost nobody {nemo fere) 249. * * Or, ne non veniat. \ d This notion is probably that of a debt standing against t man in his credi¬ to/*» bookt 206 TABLE OF / English. 1)0. Make a bad, &c. use of, &c. 61. He deserves to be loved. 62. To inflict punishment on a man. % 63. To gain a triumph for a victory over the Gauls. 64. A blessing on ) your Good luck, or success to ) valour. s Go on in your valour! 65. You are envied, spared, favoured, answered, &c. • 66 . I don’t know when the letter will be written. 67. It seems, is said, &c. that Caius has retired. 68 . We have walked , come, &c. 59. To have reigned above six years. 70. Before the Consulship of Caius. 71. He went to a school at Naples. 72. We should all praise virtue. A time to play. *. Fit to carry burdens. He is born (or inclined) to act. Prepared to take up arms. 73. Whilst they are drinking, playing, &c. To be able to pay. To be equal to bearing the burden. ' To tend to the preservation of lib¬ erty. 74. I have to do another page, v I will have it done. 75. He gave them the country to dwell in. 76. I go to consult Apollo. 77. Balbus having left Lavinium, &c. 78. From the foundation of Rome. ,From the destruction of Jerusalem. The honour of having saved the king (of the king’s preservation). 79. He does it without robbing others. He goes away without your per¬ ceiving it. Latin Use badly (273). s He is a deserving person, who should be loved (dignus est qui ametur). 276. To affect a man with punishment (276) (aliquem poena afficere). To triumph concerning (de) the Gauls. Be thou increased in valour (macte virtute esto : voc. for nom. 280). •i* (Plur . macti este !) It is envied (spared, favoured,answered, &c.) to you (290). I don’t know when it will be ( quando futurum sit) that ( ut ) the letter be written (290). Caius seems, is said, &c. to have retired (nearly always). It has been walked , come, &c. (that is, by us: ambulatum, ventum est). [This is only an occasional and possible construction.] To be reigning his seventh year. Before Caius Consul (ante Caium con¬ sulem). He went to Naples to {prep.) a school. Virtue is to-be-praised by all {laudan¬ da). A time of playing. Fit for burdens to be carried {oneribiu gestandis idoneus). He is born {or inclined) for acting {ad agendum). Prepared for {ad) arms-to-be-taken-up. i During drinking, playing, &c. {inter bibendum, ludendum, &c.) * To be for paying (solvendo esse). To be for bearing the burden (oneri ferendo esse). ,To be of liberty to-be-preserved {con¬ servandae Ubertatis esse). Another page is to-be-done. ,1 will cause it-to-be-done (curabo faci¬ endum). He gave them the country to be dwelt in (habitandam). 354. I go intending-to-consult (consulturus) Apollo (354). Balbus, Lavinium being left, Different men run different ways. ) Some run one way, others another. 92. The best men always , &c. Hidden snares are always, &c. All the wisest men. 93. These are hard to avoid. 'J There is difficulty in avoiding ( these. J He has the greatest difficulty in sus¬ pecting. 94. He is too proud to steal. 96. I armed the greatest forces I could. Latin. ' They condemn him unheard (inaudi¬ tum). I have the work completed ( opus abso¬ lutum habeo). 364. I have his design seen through (per¬ spectum habeo). 364. I heard him singing. I saw him walking (361). That at length (is demum). Et is, tsque, idemque. By a good man that indeed, but an un¬ learned one (a bono illo quidem viro, sed —, or sed tamen, 383). Literature, nor that of-a-common-kind (nee ecc vulgares). ‘ My slaveor 1 a certain one out of (quidam ex) my slaves.’ He took away from me (mihi) ad care That Medea (Medea ilia). Those whom we love, the same (eos¬ dem) we wish happy. 1 know not what of obscure ( nescia quid obscuri). I know not what chance (nescio quis ca¬ sus). Disturbed I know not what (nescio quid conturbatus). ( Henry, Charles, John. \ Henry, and Charles, and John. Whatever opinion (quacunque opinio). Whoever (quisquis) . (More commonly than in English, as we seldom use whoever , when the notion of every is emphatic). A certain (quidam) Balbus. Another man runs another way. Other men run another way (or other ways). [alius —alius (or some adv. derived from a/ius).J Each best man, &c. (optimus quisque). Each hidden snare, &c. (but quisque may be used in the plur. when a subs. is expressed in this construction : oc¬ cultissimae queeque insidiae). Each wisest man (doctissimus juisque.) These are avoided with difficulty (diffi¬ cile). (Difficilius, difficillime, when requlr- He suspects with the greatest difficulty (difficillime) He is prouder than that he (quam ut or quam qui with subj.) should steal. I armed forces (as great) as the greatest I could (quam maximas potui co¬ pias). 208 TABLE OF English. .i- 96. As great a difference as there can ) 'possibly be. > The greatest possible difference, j * 97. I have been long desiring. * They had long been preparing. 98. When I take my journey, I will come. When I have performed this, I will come. When he is come, he will tell us. When you wish to play, remem¬ ber to play fair. * As you sow , so will you reap. I will do it, if I can. * 99. They do nothing but laugh. * * 100. What shall I do 7 ) What am I to do 7 > ^ What can I do 7 } 4 Why should I relat&?'~ •» What was I to do 7 ) What should, 1 have done 7 > & What ought I to have done 7 } 101. You would have thought. You would have believed. You would have said. * 102. 1 remember to have read. * 103. It would have been better. 104. No painter. , This does not at all terrify me. 105. Even this is not just, unless it be voluntary. ► 106. He was more prudent than brave. y 107. To make a bridge over a river. The thing in question. 108. I have nothing to accuse old age of. I have found scarcely any thing to censure. Men who abound in silver, in gold, in estates. Men who abound neither in sil ver, nor in gold, nor in estates. A pen to write with. 109. [Constructions with the relative.] (1) Some persons think: or there are some who think, &c. g (2) You have no reason (cause, occa¬ sion, need, &c.) to hurry. Latin. .A difference as-great-as the greatest can be (quanta maxima potest esse). I am a long time already desiring (Jam- pridem cupio). They were a long time already prepar¬ ing (413). When I shall take my journey, I will come. When I shall have performed this, I will come. When he shall have come, he will tell us. When you shall wish to play, remem¬ ber to play fair. As you shad sow, so will you reap. I will do it, if I shall be able. They nothing else than laugh (nihil aliud quam rident). Quid faciam 7 Cur heec narrem ? Quid facerem ? (425.) Putares. Crederes. Diceres, Memini me legere. It was better (utilius or satius fuit e ). * (Often) nemo pictor. This terrifies me nothing (nihil me ter¬ ret). Even this is so just, if it is voluntary (ita justum . ... si est, &c.). He was more prudent than braver (pru- dentior quamTbr^tor). 452, w. To make a bridge in a river. The thing de quo agitur. I have nothing which I may accuse old age (nihil habeo quod incusem sen¬ ectutem). 478. I have found scarcely any thing, which I may censure. Men who abound in silver, who in gold, who in estates. Men who do not abound in silver, not in gold, not in estates (478). A pen, with which one may write (478). There are some who think (subj.: Sunt qui putent, &c.). There is nothing (on account of) which you should hurry (nihil esi qiiod festines). (or) There is not (any thing, for) which you should hurry (non est quod, &c.). ' * So, satis, par, rectum, justum, idoneum, optimum , consentaneum , melius , csquius, rectius , satius erat—fuit—fuerat. DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 20U English. (3) He was despised by them, for they saw through him. » (4) He deserves to be loved. * * (5) He is not a proper person to be received. (6) None are so good as never to sin. (7) Of such a kind that we can neg¬ lect duties for their sake. (8) Too short to be the whole life of man. (9) I am not a man (or, am not so foolish , simple, credulous, &c.) as to believe this. (10) Who am I that my writings should be honoured thus? (11) They sent ambassadors to sue for peace. (12) He deserves praise (blame, &c.) for having done this. (13) W r retched man that I am, who thought, &c. « (14) How few there are who, &c. 110 . In censuring them you censure me. 111. It is many years since he was first in my debt. « 1 congratulate you on your influ¬ ence with Caius. , 1 don’t like to be abused. 112. A mortal body must necessarily perish. There is no living pleasantly. 113. In addition to this, he is blind. 114. He accused him of having betrayed the king. His having spared the conquered, is a great thing. He praised (or blamed him)^/br having done this. 115. Many persons admire poems with¬ out understanding them. You cannot be ruined without ruining others. 116. Instead of reading, he is at play. Latin. He was despised by them, who saw through him (qui with subj.). He is a worthy person who should be loved. (Dignus est, qui ametur; or quem ames. So, indignus est, qui ametur: or, quem ames.) He is not a proper person who should‘ be received {or, whom you should re¬ ceive). No one is so good icho never sins (subj.). Of such a kind./or the sake of which we can neglect duties. Shorter than which can be (quam quae sit or possit esse) the whole life of man. I am not that (person) who can believe (is qui credam). W 7 ho am I whose writings should be honoured thus? They sent ambassadors tcho should sue for peace ( qui pacem peterent). He deserves praise, &c. who did this (subj.). O me miserable, icho thought, &c. (qui with subj.) Q.uotusquisque est qui. . ? (with sub;.) TI7 icn you censure them, you censure me (quum with indie.). There are many years when he is in my debt (quum in meo aere est). I congratulate you, when you avail so much with Caius (quum, generally quod, tantum vales apud Caium). I am not abused willingly (libenter, It is necessary that a mortal body should perish. [Mortale corpus interire (or intereat) necessef est.] It cannot be lived pleasantly (504). Hither is added, that he is blind (hue acced-it, ebat, &c. uts). 513. He accused him that (quod) he had be¬ trayed the king (subj.). It (or 'this,' ‘ that') is a great thing, that (quod) he spared the conquered (indie.). He praised (or blamed) him that (quod) he had done this (subj.). 520. Many persons admire poems, nor un¬ derstand them (520). You cannot be ruined so as not to ruin others (ut non with subj.). 521. He is at play, xchereas he ought to be reading (quum debeat). f This necesse is an old adj. used in the neut. gender only. * More commonly quod. 210 TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM English. Instead of growing rich (as he might) he is growing poor. i Far from thinking this , I hold, r , &c. 117. And (but, &c.) if this is granted. Who, they say, was killed. Who, as B. says, was killed. By which, when we read them , we are affected. * Do not think. * Take care to do it. *• Be nir « to be ; or mind you are. Latin. He is growing poor, whereas he migtu grow rich (guum posset). It is so far oft, that 1 should think this, that, &c. (Tantum abest ut - ut). 533. If ichich is granted. Whom they report to have oeen killed Whom B. reports to have been killed. Which when we read, we are affected. Beware of thinking, cave putes. Be unwilling to think, noli putor». K Cura ut facias. f Fac ut sis; or, fac si». PERFECT AND SUPINE. 211 QUESTIONS ON THE CAUTIONS. 1. When must him, her, them (he, she, they), be translated by sui? and his, her, its, theirs, by suns? (When the pronoun and the nom. of the verb stand for the same person. C. i. 12.) 2. When is the perf in a sentence with ‘ that' to be translated by the present infinitive ? (When the action or state expressed by the perf. is not to be described as over before the time referred to oy the principal verb C.ii. 13) 3. When must ‘ should' be translated by the ■present infinitive ? (When it does not express duty or a future event. a C. hi. 13.) 4. When are would, should, signs of the future ? (After past tenses. C. iv. 16.) 5. When should 'thing' be expressed ? (When the mas. and the neut. of the adjec. are of the same form. C. v. 21.) 6 . Where is cum placed with the ablatives of the personal pronouns'? (After, and as one word with, them. C. vi. 25.) 7. When a preposition follows a verb, how may you help your judgment in determining whether the preposition gives a transitive sense to the verb, and is probably to be translated by the inseparable preposition of a compound verb ? (By trying whether the preposition clings to the verb in the passive voice. C. vn. 32.) 8 . Is 'for' before a noun and the infn. to be translated'? (No.) What is the construction'? (Accus. with infin. C. via. 38.) 9. What are 'as' and 'but' often equivalent to? (Relatives. C. ix. 45, and 43 (a).) 10. How is 'such' often used in English? (To express size.) How is it then to be translated? (By tantus. C. x. 45.) 11. When 'that' stands for a substantive that has been expressed in a former clause, is it to be translated into Latin? (No. C. xi. 47, note.) 12. What tense is ‘ I am come' ? (Perf. definite of the active voice.)—what, ' 1 was come' ? (Pluperf. of act.) What verb forms the perf. active with am 7 (Intrans, verbs of motion. C. xn. 57, note.) 13. When a verb seems to govern two accusatives, by what preposition is one of them often governed ? (By ' to.' C. xm. 60.) 14. When must ‘ that — not' be translated by ut non instead of ne? and that no¬ body, that nothing, &c., by ut nemo , ut nihil, respectively ? (When that introduces a consequence, not a purpose: whenever, therefore, a ‘ so' or 'such' goes before it. C. xiv. 77.) 15. How must the En g-fut. be translated after verbs of fearing? (By the pres. subj. C. xv. 96.) a To judge of this, try whether you can turn the verb with should into the participial substantive. “It is strange that you should say so.” What is strange? Your saying so. 212 QUESTIONS ON THE CAUTIONS. 16. When are ‘who’ and ‘ which* dependent interrogatives ? (After words ol asking, knowing , doubting, telling, &c. C. xvi. 112.) 17. Does‘may’ever stand for can.?for couZcZ? (Yes. C. xvn. 131.) 18. When is th e perf. injin. to be translated by the pres, injin.? (After might, could, ought, &c., when the action is not to be described as over before the time referred to. C. xvm. 131.) 19. When are ‘ of you,’ ‘ of us,’ &c., not to be translated after numerals, super¬ latives, &c.7 (When all are spoken of. C. xix. 175.) 20. Is an English substantive ever used adjectively? (Yes.) Where does it then stand? (Before a substantive.) How must it be translated? (Gene¬ rally by an adj.: sometimes by ex, de with a subst. C. xx. 234.) 21. For what does c what’ sometimes stand? (For how, or how-great.) When must' what’ be translated by ‘quam’? (When itstandsfor ‘ how ’)—when by ‘quantus’? (When it stands for how-great. C. xxi. 242.) 22. When are ‘for’ and ‘as’ to be untranslated? (When the noun that follows can be placed in apposition to another noun in the sentence. C. xxii. 255.) 23. When must ‘one,’ ‘two,’ &c., be translated by distributive numerals? (When they stand for ‘one a-piece,’ &c. C. xxm. 267.) 24. What is the substitute for a future subjunctive in the passive verb ? (futurum sit, esset, &c., ut . . . with the proper tense of the verb.) What must we take care not to use for it ? (The part, in dus, with sim, essem, &c. C. xxiv. 287.) 25. What is ‘ that ’ often used for after an expression of time ? (For on which; the abl. of relat. C. xxv. 308.) 26. Is that which is inform the present participle act. in ing, always a participle? (No.) What else may it be ? (The participial substantive.) When is it always the participial substantive ? (When it governs, or is governed, in¬ stead of merely agreeing.) To what parts of the Latin verb does the participial substantive correspond? (The Infin. and Gerund.) Canthe participial substantive ever be translated into Latin by a participle? and if so, by what participle?—(Yes, by the participle in dus: but the part, in dus must not govern the substantive, but agree with it, both being put into the case that corresponds to the preposition governing the participial substantive. C. xxvi. 330.) 27. Into what construction must ‘have’ before an infinitive be turned for trans¬ lation into Latin ? (Into the form ‘ is, or are, to be —.’) (I have to do three more pages = Three more pages are tebe done by me. C. xxvii. 336.) 28. What does ‘ is to be done ’ generally mean ? (Necessity, fitness, or intention Does ‘is to be done’ always mean necessity, fitness, or intention? b (No C. xxviii. 336.) 29. What does ‘ is to be,’ &c., mean, when it does not signify necessity, JUness, oi intention? ( Ans . Possibility.) • t> This is what is to be done by all who wish to please the king. ( Necessity .) This is to be done to-morrow. ( Intention.) This is to be done, if you set about it in the right way. ( Possibility .) QUESTIONS ON THE CAUTIONS. 213 30. When must a present partic. active be translated by a perfect participle, oi its substitute quum with the perf. or pluperf. subjunctive ? (When the action expressed by it must be over, before that expressed by the verb be¬ gins. C. xxx. 353.) 31. By what participle of a deponent verb is the pres, participle often translated 1 (By the perf. partic. C. xxxx. 365.) 32. How is ( but ’ (= except, unless) to be translated after a negative? (By nisi ox procter. C. xxxi. 451.) 33. When is l at a town’ not to be translated by the gen. or ablat. ? (When the action was not done in but near the town or place : e. g. { a battle at Mantinea.) How is ‘ at' to be then translated? (By apud or ad.) 34. W T hat does one often stand for? ( Some one, aliquis; or a certain one, quidam.) 35. When an English word is followed by a preposition, what should you always remember? (To consider whether the Latin word to be used is followed by a preposition or by a case: and then by what preposition, or what CMC.) QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX In what respect does a verb agree with its nominative case? an adjective with its substantive ? What verbs take a substantive or adjective after them in the nominative ? [Verbs of becoming, being, seeming, With passive verbs of making, calling, deeming.] In what case does the thing by which stand 7 In what case does the agent, or person by whom, stand? When should the pronoun that is the nom. to the verb be expressed ? 5 1. When two or more nom. cases sing, come together, in which number should the verb be put ? in what person ? With et—et, quum—tum, in which number is the verb generally put ? (a). Which of the Latin words for and is confined to the office of connecting similar notions? (d). §2. What case does the infin. take before it? What Eng. conjunct, is some¬ times to be untranslated? When ‘ that ’ is to be untranslated, in what case do you put the nom. and in what mood the verb ? Mention some verbs, &c. that are followed by acc. with infin. (1) Ve rb s sentiendi et declarandi : Of feeling, wishing, knowing, ^ with which acc. with infin. stands as Believing, saying, trowing, \ the object. (2) Nearly all impersonal forms 1 (with which acc. with infin. stands as the subject), except Contingit, evenit, and accidit, > which are followed by ut. With restat, reliquum est and fit,b ) Do any verbs of the class sentiendi admit of any other construction? [Yes, those that express emotion are often followed by quod: those that express wishing, especially opto, by ut.] § 4. When an adjective belongs to more than one substantive or pronoun, with which should it agree in gender ? and in which number should it stand, even when the substantives, &c., are all sing. ? When the substantives are things that have not life, in what gender is the adj. generally put ? What substantives are seldom to be translated ? c § 5. What are respectively the demonstratives or antecedent pronouns to qui, qualis , quantus, quot ? a That is, where in English we use i iV as the representative of the true nominative. b And sometimes sequitur. c But when ‘man.’ is coupled with an epithet of praise , it should genem’.y be translated (by vir ); especially if it is an apposition. QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 215 Is the relative ever governed in case by a word that is not in its own clause ? In what respects does the relative agree with its antecedent ? [In gen¬ der, number, and person.\ When the antecedent is expressed in the relative, and omitted in the principal clause, where is the relative clause often placed ? what pronoun often represents it in the princi¬ pal clause ? What is the relative 4 what ’ equivalent to ? [ 4 That which.' 1 '] When the relat. agrees with some case of a subst. expressed in its own, but not in the principal clause, what must be done? [Some case of that subst. must be supplied in the principal clause.] i b For what does an infin. sometimes stand ? When an adj. or rel. is to agree with an infin. mood or sentence, in what gender must it be put? When the rel. has a sentence for its antecedent, what do we often find instead of the rel. only ? [7cZ quod, or qucc res : id or res being in apposition to the sentence.] § 7. What is the great rule for the sequence of tenses? (40.) Is the perf. with have considered a past tense? [No.] Is the Jut. perf. asubj. tense? [No.] How should l but,' or a relative with 4 not ,’ generally be translated after nobody, nothing, &c. ?d $ 8. In such a sentence as ‘ Thebes, which is a town,' &c., should which agree with Thebes or with town? When does which, in such a sentence, agree with its proper antecedent? § 9. When the antecedent has a superlative with it, in which clause does the superlative generally stand ? He was the first person who did it. § 10. How is ‘ that ’ to be translated when it is followed by may or might ? what does it then express? [A purpose.] How is 4 that ,’ expressing a purpose, to be translated, when it is followed by not or any negative word ? § 11. How is l that ’ to be translated after so, such? what does it then express ? [A consequence.] How is 1 that 5 to be translated when the sentence has a comparative in it ? What is quo equivalent to, and what is its force with the comparative? [Quo is equivalent to uteo; with the comparative ‘ that by this ? ’ ‘ that the.'] Does quo ever stand for * that ’ when there is no comparative in the sentence ? [Yes ; e it is then equivalent to 4 that by this means.’] How is 4 not' to be translated before the imperative or subj. used imperatively? How is ( as' before the infn. and after so, suchj to be translated. 4 Quin cannot stand for cujus non, cui non; but either these forms must be used or the demonstrative expressed ( cujus ille vitia non videat; or, quin ille ejus vitia videat). In the nom. or acc. qui non may be used, and should be when the non belongs especially to the verb. It is compounded of the old abl. qui, and ne, not. It does not therefore itself contain the pronoun ; but the nom. or acc. of the demonstrative is understood. e “ In funeribus Atheniensium sublata erat celebritas virorum ac mulierum, quo lamentatio minueretur.” (Cic.) » f Quin must be used, if it is, 4 as not to . . . &c.,’ after a negative sentence. '216 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. § 12. What does the Latin inf. never express?" When the English inf. ex¬ presses a. purpose, how must it be translated ?h After what verbs is the inf. to be translated by ut i with the subjunctive? § 13. Give the forms for that nobody ; that nothing, that no; that never. When must that nobody ; that nothing, &c., be translated by ut nemo; ut nihil, & c.? § 14. How must ‘ qs not to . . . &c.’ after a negative be translated ? After what verbs when used negatively, must quin be used ? Is non dubito ever fol¬ lowed by acc. with infin. ? [Nearly always, when dubitare means to hesi¬ tate ; when it means to doubt, the acc. w r ith infin. never follows it in Cicero, but does in Corn. NeposJ] § 15. By what conjunction are verbs of hindering followed ? [By quominus , which is equivalent to ut eo minus.] Are verbs of hindering followed by any other conjunctions ? [Yes; they may be followed by ne, when the thing is so entirely prevented as not to have been begun; by quin after a negative sentence: and sometimes by acc. with infin.k] How must that not be translated after verbs of fearing ? how must that be translated after verbs of fearing? § 16. Which interrogative particle asks simply for information ? i [NS.] Which expects the answer ‘yes?’ [Nonne.] Which the answer ‘no?’ [Num.] * $ 17. When are questions dependent ? [When they follow and depend on such verbs as ask, doubt, know, examine, try: it is doubtful, uncertain, m &c.] In what mood does the verb stand in a dependent question ? In whal s Except in poetry. h The various ways of expressing a purpose are given in the following table 1 Eo ut ludos spectem, g o 5 ludorum spectandorum causa, > I am going to see the games. ludos spectandi Eo ludos spectaturus, Eo ad ludos spectandos, Eo ludos spectatum ( sup.) i The general rule for the use of ut, is that it may be used : (1) To express every request; command (except after jubeo); advice. effect; decree. (2) To introduce the conditions of an agreement or treaty. (3) It is used after all intensive words, such as such, so ( tantis , talis, tot, ita adeo, sic). (4) All purposes may be expressed by ut. (Crombie.j * Obs. Moneo and persuadeo will not be followed by ut (but by acc. and inf.). when the person is not warned or persuaded to do something, but merely tha' something is so. 1 Thus his preface begins with “non dubito./ore plerosque,” &c. k “ Nostros navibus egredi prohibebant.” (Cses.) i But nS appears sometimes to be used as equivalent to nonne. ‘ Estne hoc illi dicto atque facto Fimbriano simillimum ? ’ (Cic. pro Sext. Rose. Am. 33.) m Obs. If you have any doubt whether who, which, what, is a rel. or an inter - rog., ask a question with the clause, and see whether the sentence before you QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 21T mood must the verb be put in sentences that stand as the acc. to a pre¬ ceding verb ? I 19. How must ‘ whether ’ be translated in double questions'? how ‘or?’ If ‘ whether ’ is untranslated, how may ‘or’ be translated? Does an ever stand before a single question ? [Yes: it then implies, with something of impatience, that the answer must be ‘no.’] By what must ‘or ’ not be translated in double questions? § 20. Go through 1 may go, &c. J might have gone, &c. I can do it ; I could hare done it; I ought to do it; I ought to have done it. Translate, I ought to do it, omitting ut. I may be deceived. How is the perf. injin. generally to be translated after might, could, ought ? 8 21. How is the case of a substantive in apposition determined? When urbs or oppidum stands in apposition to the name of a tcnm, does the verb agree with urbs, oppidum, or with the name of the town? § 22. He wishes to be the first. He says that he is ready. § 23. They may be happy. We may be neutral. § 24. When may a substantive and preposition generally be translated by tha gen.? [4ns. When the prepos. joins it io another substantive.] How MUCH PLEASURE ; MUCH GOOD ; SOME TIME. 5 25. What do you mean by a partitive adj. ? What case follows partitive adjec¬ tives? With what does the partitive adj. generally agree in gender? In what gender does a superlative (or solus) stand when it governs a genit. and also refers to another subst. ? In what case does a substantive of description stand when it has an adjective agreeing with it ? By w r hat case is opus est followed ? What other construction is there with opus est? There is no need. What need is there? The top of the mountain. The middle of the way. The rest of the work. The whole of Greece. 8 26. What case do adjectives that signify desire, & c., govern? What case do participles used adjectively and verbals in ax govern ? 8 28. What substantives are omitted after to be ? It is Cicero’s part. It is your part. What case do verbs of accusing, &c., take of the charge? What case do satago , &c., govern ? What case do verbs of remembering and forgetting govern ? In what case may a neut. pron. stand with accu- . sare, admonere, &c. ? 8 29. With interest and refert in what case is the person to whom it is of import ance put ? [In the genitive when the person is expressed by a substan tive: in the abl.fem. when a possessive pronoun is used.] How is the degree of importance expressed? how is the thing that is of importance express¬ ed ? what case of the person feeling do pudet, &c., take ? what case of what causes the feeling ? 8 30. What adjectives govern the dat. ? Mention some adjectives that are fol¬ lowed by ad. What cases may follow propior, proximus? When should similis take the gen. ? (w.) 8 31. In jphatcase do you put the person to, for, or against wlwm the action U readily and obviously answers it. ‘ I don’t know who did it. ‘ Who did it?' ‘I don’t know who did it.* Therefore who is here an interrogative. 10 218 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. done, or the feeling entertained 7 Mention the classes of verbs that take the dat. [Yerba comparandi ; dandi et reddendi; promittendi ac solvendi; imperandi et nuntiandi; fidendi; minandi et irascendi; obsequendi et repugnandi, regunt dativum : quibus addas, Invideo , nubo^faveoqne, indulgeo, parco, Gratulor , auxilior, studeo , medeorque , racoque.J Do any of these take the acc. also ? By what prepositions may verbs oi comparing be followed 7 [By cum or ad. J How is together to be trans¬ lated after compare ? [‘ Together ’ may translated be, After compare, by ' inter sed] What verbs of advantage and disadvantage govern the acc. ? He threat¬ ens ME WITH DEATH. [He threatens me with death should be, In Latin, threatens death to me.] Of verbs of commanding, which govern the acc. only 7 which the dat. or acc. ? § 32. What case do sum and its compounds govern 7 What exception is there 7 Mention the compound verbs that generally govern the dat. [Most of these compounded with Prae, con, sub, Ad, in, inter, ob: Many of those compounded with Ab, post, ante, de, Re, pro, super, e.] § 33. He surrounds the city with a wall. He presents me with a GARLAND." § 34. What verbs govern two datives 7 What case often follows sum where we should put the nom. 7 How is have often translated 7 My name is Caius (239). I have a cow. I have six cows. § 35. Do neuter verbs ever take the acc. ? Explain, sitire honores. § 36. What verbs take two accusatives 7 Do all the verbs that have any of these meanings take two accusatives 7 What transitive verbs take two accusa¬ tives, one in a sort of apposition to the other? § 37. What does the abl. express? In what case is the price put? What ad¬ jectives stand in the abl. to express the price, pretio being understood 7 What adjectives always express price in the gen. ? What substantives stand in the gen. after verbs of valuing ? What should be used instead of multi and majoris ? § 38. What case do verbs of abounding, &c. govern 7 What case may egeo and indigeo govern 7 What case do verbs of freeing from, &c., take 7 What is their more general construction in prose 7 What case do fungor, &c. govern? 0 In what case is the manner, cause, &c., put 7 § 39. How is a roc. sometimes used in poetry 7 What case sometimes stands in apposition to the voc. ? " Mihi coronam, or me corona donat. the phrase ‘ potiri rerum ’ (to become a ruling power) the gen. only is QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 219 f 40. In what case is the agent expressed after the pass, verb, when a, ao, is not used? After what part of the verb is this the regular construction 7 What verbs cannot be used -personally in the pass, voice 7 Go through I am believed .p Mention some verbs that have a pass, construction (286). What is the substitute for a fut. inf. pass., when the verb has no supine to form it with iri? i hope he will recover (use fore ut). § 41. What verbs can govern an acc. in the pass. ? Can a pass, verb or partici¬ ple take an acc. of th apart affected? We have walked enough (trans, by the pass.). Which is the more common in Lat. 1 Caius videtur, dicitur, &c., esse,’ or ‘ videtur , dicitur, &c. Caium, esseV § 42. How is a noun of time put in answer to when ? in answer to for how long 7 How do you express the time in or within which ? How do you express time in answer to how long before or after ? How are ante, post, used in this construction 7 How do you express a point or space of future time for which any arrangement is now made 7 How do you express the exact time by or against which a thing is to be done? Three years ago. Three years old. Above twenty years old* * (307, f ) Three YEARS AFTER HE HAD RETURNED (310 (a) ). § 43. In what case is the town at which a thing is done, to be put? In what case is the name of a town to be put in answer to whither ? in answer to whence? To what proper names do these rules apply? In what case do vrbs and oppidum stand in apposition to the name of a town in the gen. (315) 7 How is local space expressed 7 § 44. Decline ( grieving’* throughout. Of writing a letter. I am to ee loved. Go through, I must write. Go through epistola scribenda. W T hen must the part, in dus not be used in agreement with its substan¬ tive (332)? We must spare our enemies. At home. From home. p Mihi creditur, Tibi creditur, Illi creditur, Nobis creditur, Vobis creditur, Illis creditur, I am believed, thou art believed, he is believed, we are believed, you are believed, they are believed. * These constructions admit of many variations by the introduction of natiu and quam —“ Above thirty-three years old.” major annos tres et triginta natus; major quam annos tres et triginta natus; major quam annorum trium et triginta; major quam tribus et triginta annis. (Z.) Dolere, dolendi, dolendo, dolere, dolendo, The acc. is dolendum only when governed by a preposition, mulantquod dolere intermiserint’ (have intermitted grieving). « N. G. D. Acc. Abl. grieving, of grieving, to grieving, grieving, by grieving. ‘ Se peccati insi- 220 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. Home (after a verb of motion). Into the country. Prom the coun¬ try In the country. On the ground. § 45. What kind of sentences may be translated by participles (344) ? In what case do a noun (or pronoun) and participle stand when the noun or pro* noun is not governed by any other word ? What is this called ? § 46. He gave them the country to dwell in. What does the part, in rus often express ? What does the part, in dus often express? Express ‘ to have a thing made ,’ in the sense of causing it to be made. [Faciendum curare.] § 47. What participle is wanting in all but deponents and neuter-passives? Having left his brother. [Relicto fratre, or quum reliquisset fra trem.] § 48. My own fault. Their own fault (373, a). When— self, — selves are to be translated by ipse and a personal pronoun, in what case may ipse stand ? [In the nom. or in the case of sui , according to the meaning.*] When may him, his, her, its, theirs in a dependent sentence, be translated by sui or suus, even when they denote the nom. not of their own, but of the principal sentence ? By what pronoun must him, her, &c., be translated, when sui or suus would be understood to mean the nom. of its own verb ? Does suus ever relate to the accusative ? With what pron. is this very common ? Which gen. pi. (um or i) is used after partitives (372)? § 49. What is the difference between ‘is qui pugnat,’ and ‘ hie or ille qui pugnat’ (376, g) ? Which of these three pronouns is to be used when he, him, &c., is without emphasis, simply describing a person or thing before mentioned or about to be described by a rel. clause? By what case only of ‘is’ can his, her , their, be translated? [J.us. By the gen.] Of two things already mentioned, what pron. means the latter? what the former? Which pron. means that of yours? Medea illa. Distinguish between hic, iste, ille, referring to different objects. § 50. When is ‘any’ to be translated by quisquam or ullus? when by quis? when by quivis, quilibet? when by aliquis quispiam? Does quisquam ever follow si (notew)? By what pronoun may ‘a’ sometimes be translated ? § 51. What prefx do interrogatives often take? whatq^ir? How should 1 al¬ ways ' with two superlatives be translated ? § 52. When are the pronouns that, those, not to be translated ? When they stand in the second member of a comparative sentence for a sub¬ stantive expressed in the first.] W'hen quam is omitted, in what case is the following subst. put? What case goes with comparatives and super¬ latives to express the measure of excess or defect ? How are the Eng. the —the ( — by how much—by so much) to be translated ? § 53. Is the present ever followed by the imperf subj.? When ? When is the * ‘ He wounded himself,’ se ipse vulneravit ( — ipse, non alius, se vulneravit) : se ipsum vulneravit ( =se, non alium, vulneravit). Hence ipse is to be in the nom. or in the oblique case, according as the notion to which it is opposed, or with which it is contrasted, is in the nom. or in an oblique case. QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 221 Eng. pres, generally translated by the Lat. future ? By what tense is the perf definite often translated ? [Hns. by the f uture perfect.'] How are assertions softened in Latin ? What subjunctives are very frequently used in this way? What conjunction is often omitted after velim, &c. I have LONG DESIRED (410, d). h 54. Is the perf subj. ever used as an imperat. ? What other tense is some¬ times used as an imperat. ? By what tense are questions of appeal, or questions for assent, to be translated ? If he has any thing, he gives it. [Si quid habet, dat. r ] If I have any thing, I will give it. [Si quid habeam, dabo.] If he should have any thing he would give it. [Si quid haberet, daret : but much more commonly, si quid habeat, det.] If he had any thing he would give it. [Si quid haberet, daret.] f he had had any thing, he would have given it. [Si quid habuisset, dedisset.) How is 1 possibility without any expression of uncertainty ’ translated ? How is ‘ uncertainty with the prospect of decision ’ trans¬ lated? How is ‘ uncertainty without any such accessory notion ’ trans¬ lated ? How is ‘ impossibility or belief that the thing is not so,’ translated ? May the consequence and the condition refer, the one to past, the other to present time ? When the consequence has ‘would have,’ how must you translate the pluperf. indie, in the conditional clause? With what tenses may si take the indie.? With what tenses does si always govern the subjunctive ? 156. In conditional sentences are the verbs of both clauses ever in the subj. pres. ? [Yes ; ‘Si quid, habeat, det ,’ should be always preferred to ‘Si quid haberet daret,’ unless it is to be intimated that the supposition will not be realized.] What are the conditional forms of the subj. ? When should scripturus essem be used for ‘ should have written’ ? What tenses of the indie, are used for the subj. in conditional sentences ? Is si ever omitted ? where should the verb of the sentence then stand ? What are the con¬ junctions for although? [Etsi, tametsi, quamquam 8 with indic. ; licet with subj. What is quamvis, and what mood does it govern in Cicero? [However much, however; with subj.] W'hat is etiamsi, and what mood does it govern? [Even if; even though; with indie, or subj.] Do any other conjunct!, express though? [Yes; sometimes, quum, ut, with subj.] $ 57. In a dependent conditional sentence, the verb of the consequent clause will be in the infin.: what infinitives will take the place (respectively of dot. ? of dabit ? daret ? dedisset ? daturus esset ? § 58. Explain the meaning of oblique narration ? In oblique narration, in what mood will the principal verbs stand? [In tne infin.] In what mood will the verbs of the subordinate clauses stand, provided they express the words and opinions, not of tne narrator , but of the speaker? [In the r Either the condition or the consequence, or both, may refer to a past, or future time. • W T hen these conjunctions take the subj. the sentence is generally in the obliqua oratio, taken in its widest sense. (See § 58 ) This, however, does ntf hold good of the later writers. (Billroth.) 222 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. subj.) In oblique narration what is oft» n omitted? [The verb or partic. on which the infinitives depend.] In what mood are questions for answei asked? [The subj.] In what mood are questions of appeal asked? [In the infin.] When questions are - thus asked in the infn ., may interroga - fives be used with the infn.l [Yes.] In what mood is the charge ex pressed with quod ? % 59. When may the pres, and perf subjunct. be used in oblique narration, even when dependent on a past tense? In what mood will remarks stand that are the reporter's not the speaker's ? In what mood do the verbs of subordinate clauses stand, when the principal verb of the propo¬ sition is in infn. or subj. ? With what limitation is this rule to be ap¬ plied ? When may the pres, and perf. subj. be used, although the gen¬ eral rule would require the imp. or pluperf. May the imp. or pluperf. be ever used, when the general rule would require the pres, or perf? How are the ace. and infn. used with nl in direct narration (473) ? S 60. Mention some words, phrases, &c., with which qui takes the subj. [. Ans. After sum, in ‘sunt qui,’ ‘ erant qui,’&c., and after negative and interrogative sentences, nemo, niliil, &c., est : quis est ? an quisquam est ? quotusquisque est ? &c. Also after adsunt qui, non desunt qui, &c., and similar phrases with reperio, invenio (to find).] i 61. W T hat mood does qui govern, when it introduces the ground of an asser¬ tion ? What mood does qui take after quippe, utpote? always or gene¬ rally'] What mood does qui take when it is equivalent to ut with a personal or possessive pronoun? Mention some phrases with which qui has this force. In what other cases does qui govern the subj. (484, 485) ? § 62. When does quum take the indie. ? What mood does quum generally govern, when the verb of the sentence is in the imperf. or pluperf. ? [The subj.'-] How is the subject of congratulation expressed (492)? Mention some conjunctions that always govern the subjunctive. (Vocab. 68.) When are the pres, and perf. subj. used with utinam? when the imperf. and pluperf. ? How is ‘ not 5 generally expressed after utinam , dummodo, &c. § 63. When the principal verb is in the present tense, in what mood is the verb after antequam or priusquam expressed? When the principal verb is in ' the fut., in what mood or moods may the dependent verb be? When the principal verb is in a past tense, in what mood or moods may the de¬ pendent verb be? When should the subj. always be used after antequam , priusquam ? " 64. When do dum, donee , quoad ( = until) take the indicative ? when the sub¬ junctive? What mood do they and o^.amdiu always take, in the sense ol as long as? With the adverbs meaning as soon as, how should the Eng¬ lish pluperf. generally be translated (514)? § 65. When is that expressed by quod? What class of verbs are followed by quod? What mood does quod take? with what exception? $ 66. W T hat was the frst of the month called by the Romans? on what day did 1 But the indie, of lepeatcd actions. QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 223 the Nones fall ? on what day the Ides ? In what months were the Nones on the seventh? How were the days between the Kalends and Nones reckoned ? days between the Nones and the Ides? days after the Ides? Give the rules for each case. § 67. What may be used instead of a conjunction and personal or demonstrative pronoun? Mention some circumlocutions for the imperative. §68. Was a sestertium a coin ? How many sesterces made a sestertium! What is the meaning of sestertium with numeral adverbs? Is sestertium de¬ clinable in this construction ? How may the value of sestertium decies , centies , &c., be got approximately (547, note *) ? I 69. Give the division of the as. Explain asses xisuroe. By what other name v/aa this rate of interest expressed ? V . * ' . J \ PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO / c LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. PART U. A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION PART II. CONTAINING A FULL VIEW OF THE ORDER OF WORDS IN LATIN, AND LONGER LATIN EXERCISES. THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A., SECTOR OF LYNDON, AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. CAREFULLY REVISED AND RE-ARRANGED BY REV. J. A. SPENCER, A.M. NEW-YORK: D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 346 & 8 4 S BROADWAY. M.DOCC.I.YI. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, By D. APPLETON & COMPANY, In the Cierk s Office of the District Court of the Southern District of I* *f-Yorl ADVERTISEMENT. The object of the following Work is to supply boys with an easy collection of short passages, as an Exercise-book for those who have gone once, at least, through the First Part of t r \e Author’s * Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition." Lyndon, April 6, 1844. T. K. A. [Consult the Preface to Part I., at the beginning of the vol ume.] J. A. S. TABLE OF CONTENTS PART II. PAGE. ! On the Order op Words in Latin .. 233 § 1. Position of Attributives. 236 2. Dependent Genitive. 239 3. Participial Clauses. 240 4. Proper Names. 241 5. Antithetical Words. 242 6. Secondary Emphasis; position of words occurring in two t clauses.| ** * ^3 7. On the position of Sum. 245 8. Pronouns. 246 9. Pronouns (continued) . 247 10. The Relative. 249 11. The Relative (continued). 250 12. Interrogatives. 252 13. Prepositions. 252 14. Conjunctions. 254 15. Conjunctions; autem, enim, igitur with esse. 255 16. Non. Haud. 257 17. Comparatives, &c. . 258 II. Longer Latin Exercises. 263 Cautions. 303 Differences of Idiom. 308 Memorial Lines. 312 Versus Memoriales . 313 Vocabulary. 315 Extracts from the “ Antibarbarus”. 329 Index I.—English. 332 Index II.—Latin and Critical Remarks. 350 EXPLANATION OF MARKS, ETC. Words in Italics are to be looked for in the Vocabulary.» -to which the mark |] is prefixed, are to be looked for in the Antibarbarus. Df. and C. stand respectively for the Differences and Cautions at the end of the book. Df. (1) and C. (1) stand respectively for the Differences and Cautions of Part I. a , b , after a word, mean that that word is to be the first or second word re¬ spectively in the clause. S y, mean that the word is to be the last, or last but one (respectively) in tho clause. r. /. mean that the relative clause is to be placed first. a. v. that the sentence is to be translated by the active voice. i means that the word is to be inserted in the relative clause. h means that the word is to stand near the (head =) beginning of the sen¬ tence. ra means that the word is to be placed in as emphatical a position as possible, near the middle of a sentence. p means that the sentence is to be turned into a participial clause. ah — ah indicates that the order is to be retained. a b X h a indicates that the order is to be reversed. • 8 mean that the words over which they are placed, are to be separated. An accent over a word means that it is emphatic. Words in spaced printing (printing) are those to which the direction in timated by a mark or reference applies. 0 prefixed to a word, or to several words, in spaced printing, means that it oi they are to be omitted. * The pupil will there find, not the word only, but the phrase of which t forma a part. For other words a dictionary must be used. PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. i. ON THE ORDER OF WORDS IN LATIN. 1. In the usual arrangement of a Latin sentence, the subject, as the most important word, stands first; and words which modify the meaning of another, precede the word whose meaning they modify. 1. Ratio praeest; appetitus obtemperat. —2. Consuetudo est altera natura.— 3. Habent opinionem, Apollinem morbos depellere. * 2. Hence (a) oblique cases mostly precede the verb (or other word) on which they depend ; ( b ) adjectives and dependent geni¬ tives precede the substantives to which they belong ; and (c) ad¬ verbs precede their verbs or adjectives. (a) Corporis gravitatem et dolorem animo judicamus. (b) 1. Mamertina civitas.—2. Syracusius Philistus.—3. Reliqua vitae in¬ stituta. (c) 1. Sui negotii bene gerens.—2. Sapientia prope singularis. 3. With respect to the usual order of oblique cases ;— The nearer object precedes the more remote: e. g., the accus. after the transitive verb precedes an abl. of manner or instru¬ ment, &c. Helvetii legatos ad Caesarem mittunt. C aes. [/See also exx. under 2 (a).] Descriptions of a place precede the mention of things existing, Dr actions done in it. Caesar a Lacu Lemano ad montem Juram millia passuum decem murum fo»- eamque peiducit. Cces. 234 ON THE ORDER OF WORDS. [§ 1 . 4 - 9 . The cause precedes the effect. Veniebant ad Eumenem, qui propter odium fructum oculis ex ejus casu capere vellent. C. Nep. Exercise 1. 4. [Does mens or animus denote the mind with all its passions, emotions, &c. 1 (92, note c.)] We do not feel a disease of the mind by ° any bodily sensa¬ tion. 1 Caius is going to send a copy 2 of the letter to his father. There is no doubt that the plea of necessity is a valid excuse for Dionysius. It cannot be denied, that he employed an advocate at Carthage. It cannot be doubted that they lived in affluence at Rome. We have been impatient for your arrival. There were some who 3 looked forward with impatience to your arrival. The Gauls attack the Romans, before they have disencumbered them¬ selves of their baggage. The Athenians are going to recall Bal¬ bus from banishment. It would have been better 4 never to have returned from banishment. It is one 6 thing to sin, another to throw the blame upon another. There is no doubt that Philistus the Syracusan (b) lived many years at Rome. It cannot be de¬ nied, that you are connected with Scipio by the ties of blood. 1 ‘By the body.’ 2 See Example. 3 Df. 1109 4 satius fuit, 426, (5). 6 38. * 5. 0 Unusualness of position calls attention to a word so placed, and thus renders it Emphatic. 4 6. Hence in a language which, like the Latin, admits of considerable vari¬ ety in the collocation of words, what ice effect by printing a word in Italics, is accomplished by placing it in an unusual position. ' 7. This unusualness of position is the great principle on which the emphasis or prominence of a word depends. * 8. The beginning and the end of a clause are positions favorable to empha¬ sis because “ by the former our attention is excited, and on the latter it rests.” But of course the beginning of the clause is not an emphatic position for the subject, nor the end for the predicate; but vice versa. * 9. ( a ) The subject receives emphasis by being placed at or hear the end of the clause : {!>) the predicate by being placed at or near the beginning of the clause. (a) 1. Sensit in se iri Brutus. —2. Semper oratorum eloquentiae moderatrix fuit auditorum prudentia. C. (b) Disces tu quidem quamdiu voles ? tamdiu autem velle debebis, quoad te, quantum proficias, non pcenitehit. C. § 1. 10-15.] ON THE ORDER OF WORDS. 235 * 10. An emphatic subject often stands just before a verb which closes the sentence. Eorum, qui exacta seta f e moriuntur, fortuna laudatur. C. *11. A verb stands’ at the head of its clause without emphasis, «vhen it is used with autem to explain a previous assertion. In English we should insert such an explanation parenthetically. 1. Amicum aegrotantem visere volebam: habitat autem ille in parte urbis remotissima.—2. [Cato] objecit ut probrum M. Nobiliori, quod is in pro¬ vinciam poetas duxisset: duxerat autem consul ille in iEtoliam, ut sci¬ mus, Ennium. C. • 12. The verb or adjective precedes its oblique cases when its comparative importance to the whole meaning of the sentence is greater than theirs. 1. Quaeritur an is, qui profuit nobis, si postea nocuit, nos debito solverit. C. 2. Quae perspicuam omnibus veritatem continet propositio, nihil indiget approbationis. C. —3. Iris nunquam non adversa soli est. Sen. —4. Sim¬ iles parentibus ac majoribus suis filii plerumque creduntur. C. » 13. Oblique cases and adverbs receive emphasis by being placed at or near the beginning or end of the clause. 1. Semper oratorum eloquentiae moderatrix fuit auditorum prudentia. C. — 2. Arbores serit diligens agricola, quarum adspiciet baccam ipse nun¬ quam. C.— 3. Erudito homini esse ego iratus, ne si cupiam quidem, non possum. C. —4. Ne vitationem quidem doloris ipsam per se quisquam in rebus expetendis putavit. C. « 14. Of words standing close together, the reversing their usual order gives promidence (I think) to the first rather than to the second. Thus when a b becomes b a, it is b rather than a that receives prominence. Mirabile videtur, quod non rideat haruspex, quum haruspicem viderit. C. Exercise 2. 15. It cannot be denied, that Hortensius* is going to follow the example of Cato. Let Hortensius defend himself from this charge by the plea of °bad health. Brutus felt a that he was invited to a share. He exclaims : “ What 1 advantage will the Carthaginians derive from so great a wrong ? ” Let good examples - v for imita¬ tion be proposed* to boys. a There is no doubt that the plea of necessity is a valid excuse for you. I' will follow 1 the advice of Cato. The examples of those who die 2 for their country are quoted-with-approbation. 3 We are looking impatiently *for the arrival of Cicero. I fear that he will not 4 undergo the danger 236 POSITION OF ATTRIBUTIVES. [§ 1. 16-lb. willingly.* I could not follow 3 such an example, even if I wished it (13, 3). He is always 3 bringing me into danger. I fear that 4 Hortensius* will not ward off the danger from me. I fear that Hortensius will die by his own hands. How few there are who 5 have altogether 8 satisfied the expectations 3 of men ! b 1 How are questions of appeal asked in oblique narration ? [460, (c) (2). j 2 Pro patria mortem ox morte occumbere. 3 Laudare. 4 Df. 153. 6 Df. .1109, (14). 6 * Ex omni parte. § 1. Position of Attributives. '* 16. (a) An attributive receives, perhaps, a slight emphasis from being placed after its substantive; but ( b ) it receives more by separution from it, especially if it be placed near the beginning or end of the sentence. 1 * (a) 1. Sedebat in rostris collega tuus, amictus toga purpurea , in sella aurea , coronatus. C. —2. Jacet inter saltus satis clausus in medio campus herbidus aquosusque. L. (b) 1. In miseriam nascimur sempiternam. C .—2. iEdui equites ad Csesarem omnes revertuntur. Cces. * 17. If the attention is to rest on a substantive having an attrn butive with it, it is placed after the attributive, and separated from it, so as to be thrown as near the end of the sentence as possible. 1. Cimon barbarorum uno concursu vim maximam prostravit. C. Nep. — 2. In iis perniciosus est error, qui existimant libidinum peccatorumque om¬ nium patere in amicitia licentiam. C. —3. Miles quidam parum abfuit, quin Varum interficeret; quod ille periculum , sublato ad ejus conatum scuto, vitavit. Cces. * 18. If an attributive belongs to two substantives, it either pre¬ cedes both, or follows both, or follows the first. 1 Gmjsar makes the position after its substantive theusua/ position of an attri¬ butive ; that before its substantive the more emphatic one. This opinion seems to me utterly untenable: e. g. in the example, “sedebat in rostris collega tuus, amictus toga purpurea , in sella aurea, coronatus,” (Cic. Phil. ii. 34.) who can doubt that the adjectives purple and golden are here more important notions than the substantives toga and chair ?—In this sentence, however, purpurea and au- red gain a little emphasis from their being followed by a slight pause. POSITION OF ATTRIBUTIVES. 237 § 1. 19-22.] ( From, her divine birth and origin.) (1) A divino ortu et progenie. ] (2) Ab ortu et progenie divina. > Not, ab ortu et divina progenie. 8 (3) Ab ortu divino et progenie. J 19. Zumpt confines the position after the first to the ‘familiar style;’ but i. occurs even in the Orations of Cicero, and is, 1 think, the best position, when the second substantive is an emphatic addition: e. g. Cic. Phil. ii. 33. “ Sed arrogantiam hominis insolentiamque cognoscite .” * 20. Of two adjectives or other words joined by ‘ and’ (or some other co-ordinate conjunction) that which is to arrest the attention most is often placed towards the end of the sentence, and sepa¬ rated from the other by one or more of the words that belong equally to both. 4 Obs. The pronouns, and other small unaccented words, are very frequently used for the separation of connected words. 1. Insula est Melita, satis lato ab Sicilia mari periculosoque disjuncta. C. — 2. Omnibus officiis diligenter a me sancteque servatis, &c. —3. Et dolori fortiter ac fortunes resistere. —4. Dominos esse omnium rerum et mode¬ ratores deos. * 21. Obs. This separation of co-ordinate notions is conveniently employed in dividing a long sentence into portions, and thus giving symmetry and strength to the style by preventing the accumula¬ tion of unaccented words. For instance, Wolf writes : l nunc tandem jucundum fructum mihi capere licet variarum curarum : 9 jucundum and fructum are here emphatic, mihi capere licet wholly unemphatic. By arranging the sentence thus, ‘nunc tandem licet | jucundum mihi | variarum curarum | fructum capere ,’ we have a nearly regular alternation of the rising and falling of the voice ; n what Cicero calls intervalla ecqualia . (Reisig .) Exercise 3. [An accented pronoun is emphatic, and to be expressed.] 22. Is it the part of a Christian to yield basely to pain* and fortune* (20,3)? Thick 8 clouds 3 are covering the whole sky. ( Turn into pass, voice.) It is a great thing to be able to endure cold 8 and 8 This sentence (sic) is in Cic. Tusc. i. 12 (26), and Wolf improperly refers divina to both substantives: a supposition which Orelli appears to counte¬ nance by not condemning it. 238 POSITION OF ATTRIBUTIVES. [§ 1. 23-25 hunger.* They believe that they shall derive great ft advantage J from this injury. He' gave me advice boldly* and rashly.* Fired with anger* and ambition , s he / heaped every kind of abuse upon me. It cannot be doubted, that he is easily accessible to flattery. 1 Which 8 advice* they' received with acclamations. He' did many* and rash* ° actions by the advice of Caius. There is no doubt that he is living by alms. Caius has made this question very dark. He has followed a bold' and rash' advice. Deliver me from the yoke 8 of slavery. 8 You see (pi.) the anger and ambi¬ tion of the man (19) ! 1 ‘ that flatterers 2 have easy* access 3 to his ears.’ 23. When a substantive, with a notion joined to it attributi vely, is more nearly defined by some other words, those words are usu¬ ally placed between the substantive and its attributive. Tua erga Lucceium benignitas. C. Tanta fuit in castris capiendis celeritas, &c. Ceos. Halesini pro multis et magnis suis majorumque suorum in rempublicam meritis atque beneficiis, &c. C. Pro hac, quam conspicitis, ad conservandam rempublicam diligentia, &c. C. [ Obs. the insertion of the relative clause.] (a) A deviation from this rule occurs, C. Nep. Miltiad. 3, 3, ‘ hortatus est pontis custodes ne a fortuna datam occasionem liberandi Graeciae dimit terent.’ Here fortuna is emphatic. * (/?) A notion joined attributively to a substantive may be expressed either by an adjective, or a participle, or a genitive case. • 24. (a) A participle generally follows its substantive, as con¬ taining a predicate assumed attributively ; but (b) where the predicate would precede the subject, if the clause were resolved, there the participle should precede the substantive. (a) Ratibus junctis trajectus. L. Consules — regibus exactis creati sunt. (b) Ingratus est, qui, remotis testibus, agit gratiam. Sen. Caesar pulsus, non instante Pompejo, negavit eum vincere scire. Suet. * 25. In other words, the participle should precede, when atten¬ tion is to be called to it rather than to the substantive ; and also when the participle and substantive together form one complex * notion. Temeritas est videlicetjfloren/is cetatis. C. Itaque bene adhibita ratio cermt, quid optimum sit. C. $ 2 . 26 - 29 .] DEPENDENT GENITIVE. 239 Exercise 4. 26. It was decreed, that for his so-great merit towards 1 the state,' he should be called 2 king by the senate. Caius behaved with such courtesy 3 towards all,' that no man was so humble as not 4 to have access to him. I will strive to satisfy* men’s great expectations of me.• I fear that I shall not* satisfy your great* expectations of me.' If (Ego, si, &c.) such an opportunity of success' 7 were offered me, I' would eagerly seize it [I. 445, a, (1).] The Gauls, having lost their baggage, all' fled. The troops of Lentulus p restore the fortune of the day, 8 and rout the enemy. Are you 7 the man 9 to lose such 10 an opportunity of suc¬ cess 7 by your-own laziness?" I fear that I shall not 12 be able to recompense 13 you for your so-great benefits towards 14 me.' There were some, who looked forward to your arrival with impa¬ tience. 1 in. with acc. 2 appellare. 3 Say; ‘ was ofsuch courtesy' (abl.). See ft. humanitas. Choose the word that is nearly = affability. 4 Use qui non. See Pt. I. p. 215, note d. 5 I. 75. 6 Df. 153. 7 rei gerendae. 8 See battle. 9 Df. 1109, (9). 10 tam praeclarus. 11 SeeD.tgTia* via. 12 Df. 153 13 gratiam ' referre* 14 in. § 2. Dependent Genitive. %27. When a gen. depends on two substantives it generally pre¬ cedes both. Hujus autem orationis difficilius est exitum quam principium invenire. C. * 28. When a gen. depends on a substantive that has another genitive dependent upon it, with which it forms one complex notion, it is generally placed before it. * The gen. that forms, as it were, one notion with the substantive, gen¬ erally follows ' it: it is very often an objective genitive. 1. Fortissimi viri magnitudinem animi desideras. C. —2. Themistoclis vitia ineuntis aetatis magnis sunt emendata virtutibus. C. Nep. —3. Cupio ab hac hominum satietate nostri discedere. C. —4. Hujus vos animi monumenta retinebitis corporis in Italia nullum vestigium esse patiemini 7 C. 1 Not always : e. g. hujus rex animi magnitudinem admirans. C. Nep. Ii. 101 240 PARTICIPIAL CLAUSES. [§ 3. 30-32. Exercise 5. 29. It is more difficult to avoid the snares of these men,» than to endure 1 °their arms. Nearly all men’s 1 youthful 3 opinions are gradually weakened. 3 Who would not praise °this great philosopher’s contempt 4 for 5 external things ? I am not the man 6 to laugh at the Christian’s contempt 4 for 5 the things of this life. 7 I have very often admired both 8 the courtesy and the benevolence of Cimon. Extreme 9 cheapness* - followed 10 that year’s 1 dearness of provisions. I don’t doubt that extreme dearness will follow 11 this year’s cheapness of provisions. My Tullia’s weak state 12 kills 13 me with °anxiety. 1 sustinere. 2 Say; ‘ opinions of commencing life.’ Should it be iniens ietas, or cetas iniens 1 (See 25. last clause.) 3 Dod. paulatim. 4 despicientia. 5 Pt. I. 156. 6Df. 1109 (9). 7 Say; ‘of human things.’ 8 quum— tum. 9 Summus. 10 consequi. 11 Pt. I. 290 id). 12 imbecilli¬ tas corporis. 13 exanimare. , § 3. Participial Clauses . * 30. When a participial clause is equivalent to an apposition or relative sentence, it stands as near as possible to the word it modifies. 1. Pisistratus primus Homeri libros, confusos antea, sic disposuisse dicitur, ut nunc habemus. C.—2. Saepe homines rationem, bono consilio a diis immortalibus datam, in fraudem malitiamque convertunt. C. * 31. But when a participial clause is equivalent to a sentence beginning with a conjunction, it is sometimes inserted in the prin¬ cipal sentence, sometimes placed before it, sometimes after it, as its relation to the principal sentence requires. 1. Egyptii et Babylonii, in camporum patentium aequoribus habitantes, (= quum hab.) omnem curam in siderum cognitione posuerunt. C.— 2. Perditis (= licet perd.) rebus omnibus, tamen ipsa virtus se sustentare potest. C. —3. Brutus Consul ita prcelio uno accidit Vestinorum res, ut. dilaberentur in oppida, se defensuri ( — ut defend.). L. Exercise 6. [p means that the sentence is to be turned into a participial clause.] 32. °My reputation being lost, nothing 1 remains 2 but that I PROFER NAMES. 241 [§4. 33-35. should die by my own hands. I gladly receive the honours * offered to me for 3 having saved the state. They alb jly to the town to defend themselvesP °there. Be sure 4 not to neglect your health, which is now re-established. p Can anyone cure a body, that is worn-out? by such*' labours? Who doubts, that such 5 opinions , so deeply 6 implanted, so long entertained , 7 are very hard to root up ? 8 The example of a man p who makes glory his first object , is not to be followed. 1 nihil s aliud s — nisi. 2 See i. 83. 3 ob. Say; ‘ on account of the republic saved.’ 4 cave. See Df. (1), 118. 5 C (1), 10. 6 tam penitus. 7 vetustus : the word for old which refers to the superiority of age. Di>d. anti¬ quus. 8 Df. (1), 93. § 4. Proper Names . % 33. A proper name generally precedes its apposition. 1. Ex praepositio : tis syllaba : slitera.—2. Cato , vir clarissimus. —3 Lemno* insula. * 34. But if the attention is to rest upon the apposition, or if it has a nearer relation to some preceding notion, it stands first. 1. Ejus doctor Plato triplicem finxit animum. C. (because the ejus refers to Xenocrates in the former sentence.)— 2. Homo mirificus, Dionysius (that iconderful person , Dionysius). Exercise 7. 35. I will make no objection 1 to your hissing off the stage °that very bad actor 2 Balbus. I remember that Pamphilus, my host, said 3 that he would not come. You (sing.) have heard Q. Minucius Rufus say, that king Antiochus lodged 4 at his house' °when at Syracuse.* Verres invited Antiochus, king of Syria, to supper. I hear that the excellent Lucilius, 5 a friend of mine, is suffering from a disease that must end fatally. I am vexed that Rutilius, a man p who has deserved well of me, should be living on such confined means. I fear that Satureius, an excellent man, and °one who has deserved extremely-well of the state, will be brought into danger of his life . It is your ° business to be. seech the conqueror to spare the life of Pamphilus, your host- 11 242 ANTITHETICAL WORDS. [§ 5 . 36 - 40 . Your connection 6 Rutilius swore that he owed his life to me : hia father' Numantius 7 would not beg Csesar to spare mine. 1 Df. (1), 19. 2 histrio (=: ‘ stage-player ’) implies something of depreciatioi 3 Df. (1), 2. 4 deversari. ( Luc. vir. opt.) 6 affinis. 7 The accent over father shows that it is to precede the proper name. § 5. Antithetical Words. ' 36. From 7, it follows that antithetical words or notions will naturally often stand, the one at the beginning, the other at the end of the clause. 1. Necessitatis inventa antiquiora sunt, quam voluptatis. C. —2. Errare mehercule malo cum Platone, quam cum istis vera sentire. C. * 37. If the antithetical notions consist of more than one word (each answering to one of the other set), the order of the first set is very often reversed in the second. * 38. If the antithetical notions are in different sentences, they stand, * (a) Either both at the beginning * ( b ) Or both at the end (c) Or the one at the end of its clause, the other at the begin¬ ning ; the order of the first being generally reversed in the second, if they consist of several words. of their respective clauses : (a) Stulti malorum memoria torquentur; sapientes bona praeterita, grata re¬ cordatione renovata, delectant. C. (a b — ab.) (a, 6)Multi in amicis parandis adhibent curam : in amicis eligendis negligentet sunt. C. (ab — ab.) (c) 1. Ut cupiditatibus principum et vitiis injici solet tota civitas: sic emendari et corrigi continentia. C. —2. Metuo ne scelerate dicam in te, quod pro Milone dicam pie. C. (ab X b a.) 39. When a substantive is repeated in a sentence, the two cases generally stand close together. * Obs. Not always : e. g nihil semper Jloret: aetas succedit aetati. C. In sentences of the kind to which this rule applies, the pron. ‘ another ! might generally be substituted for the second substantive, ‘one* being added to the first. 1 Man kills man 5 = ‘ one man kills another .’ 1. Vir virum legit —2. Ex domo in domum migrare. —3. Diem ex die ex¬ spectare. —4. Arma armis propulsare. 40. These forms will be indicated thus: * ab — a b will indicate that the order is to be retained; a b X b a that it is to b« reversed. §6. 41,42.] SECONDARY EMPHASIS. 243 * Obs. The inverted order is called Chiasmus , and i» the favourite form for an¬ tithetical sentences. * Obs. These rules are not invariably observed : e. g. Rerum copia verborum copiam gignit. C. Pausanias magnam belli gloriam turpi morte maculavit. Nep. Iniq uissimam pacem justissimo bello antefero. C. * Exercise 8. * [ Obs. When ‘ o n e ’ is to be omitted (° o n e), ‘another’ must be translated by a case of the substantive that follows one. — “Then indicates that the question is to be asked by an.] 41. I don’t see, bow past pleasures* can assuage 1 present evils (a bxba). I confess that the judgment of the generality 2 differs 3 from my judgment. Laws a punish 4 the wicked, defend and pro¬ tect 5 the good. The opinion 3 which* you / are implanting in my mind, Rutilius is rooting up. 6 The opportunity s which 8 you are seizing, Caius has let slip. 6 The more difficult it is to acquire a knowledge of heavenly things, 7 the more do they kindle °in us the desire of knowing 3 ° them. It is one 9 thing to be unanimously acquitted, another to escape by a sentence 10 purchased by bribery (a b — a b). Do you °then believe, that the mind is strengthened by pleasure, ° a n d weakened by continence ?* (abxb a). Arms must be resisted by arms (39, 4). Is it “then true that “one poet always envies ©another? I by Hercules had rather be condemn* ed a than acquitted* by a sentence 10 purchased by bribery (36, 2). 1 Sedare. 2 vulgus. 3 dissentire (a qua re). 4 supplicio 8 officer e 8 . 5 Ddd. tueri: or I. 374. 6 Invert. I. 30 (d). i ‘heavenly things, the more difficult knowledge they admit of (habent)’ &c. 8 cognoscere. 9 I. 33. 10 See Judgment. § 6. Secondary Emphasis : position of words occurring in two clauses. * 42. In a sentence of some considerable length a word receives a slight emphasis or prominence by being placed just before or after a pause. I For instance, just alter an apposition clause that belongs to the subject. In fact, the beginning or end of any group of words is a slightly emphatic position. 244 SECONDARY EMPHASIS. [§ 6 . 43 - 45 . 1. Oratoris nomen apud antiquos in Graecia | majori quadam vel copia, vel gloria floruit. C — 2. Ccelius talis tribunus plebis fuit, ut nemo contra civium perditorum 'popularem turbulentamque dementiam | a senatu et a bonorum causa steterit libentius. C. * 43. A word that is the subject or object of two sentences should generally precede both. 1 . Hostes , ubi primum nostros equites conspexerunt, impetu facto, celeriter nostros perturbaverunt. Cces. —2. Quem , ut barbari incendium effugisse viderunt, telis eminus missis, interfecerunt. Nep. i The position of a subject at the head of a sentence before the conjunction of an accessory sentence is so common, that it is often found there, even when it is not the subject of the principal sentence also. 1. Hic etsi crimine Pario est accusatus, tamen alia fuit causa damnationis. Nep. —2. Romani postquam Carthaginem venerunt-tum ex Cartha¬ giniensibus unus, &c. % 44. A word that is the subject of one sentence and the object of another, should generally stand before both (as belonging to the principal sentence) and be represented in the accessory sen¬ tence by the proper case of is, ea, id. 1. Rex Prusias, quum Hannibali apud eum exsulanti depugnari placeret, negabat se audere. ( When Hannibal , who was residing as an exile witk King Prusias, wished, &c. -he said - &c.) C.—2. Boios , petentibus iEduis, quod egregia virtute erant cogniti, ut in finibus suis collocarent concessit. Cces. Exercise 9. 45. If the Boii a had sued for peace, they would have obtained it. If Caius does 1 this, he will endanger his reputation. Dio¬ nysius 1 having seen me at Rome, left nothing undone 2 to bring me into odium. Could™ my favourite, your connection, 3 Rutilius, upon hearing this 4 (pi-) almost die with laughter'/ When your favourite 1 Saufeius was staying with 5 my friend Lucilius, 1 °the latter used to get an appetite by walking (44). When Metellus 1 was at Athens, he 0 used to devour litera¬ ture with °that wonderful 6 person' Dionysius. 1 ‘ Shall have done. * 2 Df. Pt. I. 18. 3 apinis. 4 Abl. Absol. 8 apud quem deversari , to stay with any body for a time as a guest. 6 home mirificus. § 7 . 46 - 51 .] ON THE POSITION OF SUM. 243 § 7. On the position of Sum. v 46. Sum, as the mere logical copula, stands either between the subject and predicate, or after them both. Homo est mortalis : or homo mortalis est. * 47. Sum, when it precedes both subject and predicate, is more than the mere popula, and expresses existence emphatically [= ‘ exists ‘ there is.’] Est homo mortalis ( man is undoubtedly mortal). In est necesse the ‘ cst ' is emphatic (= 1 is absolutely necessary :’) or i must in¬ fallibly.' 1. Non vident id se cupere, quod fugitivo alicui aut gladiatori concedi sit necesse. C— 2. Se esse tertium illum Cornelium, ad quem regnum hujus urbis pervenire esset necesse. C. % 48. Sum, when unemphatic, should generally be placed after an emphatic word. * Hence is it not placed after enim, autem, &c., except when it is em¬ phatic. I. Postquam divitiae honori esse coepere, &c. C. —2. Haec conficta arbitror a poetis esse. C.— 3. Ut a te paulo est ante dictum. C. —4. Natura est ipsa fabricata. C. —5. In eoque colendo sita vitae est honestas omnis. C. * 49. On this principle esse is often placed after its governing verb ; especially after such verbs as affirm or deny existence, such as credo, nego, ajo, volo, veto . 1 1. Is igitur versum in oratione vetat esse. C. —2. Defensum neget esse. C .— 3. Quos equidem credo esse, & c. C. —4. Ut socios honore auctiores velit esse. C. * 50. Esse in compound infinitives very frequently precedes a hyper dissyllable participle ; the participle often standing at the end of its clause. Abs te esse liberatas : per te esse recreatas ; latrocinia esse depulsa : esse adeptos: operam esse ponendam (but, prorogatus esse videatur) —all in a email portion of one letter (Epp. ad Quint. Fratr. lib. i. 1). * 51. The est of a compound tense often stands after its parti¬ ciple, at the end of a clause. 1. Nihil amplius desiderarem hoc statu, qui mihi jam partus est. C .—2 Quae tamen (ut in malis) acerbitati anteponenda est. C. 1 By no means always: omni ratione tueare, ut esse quam beatissimos veli» Epp. ad Quint. Fratr. lib. i. I. 246 PRONOUNS. [§ 8 . 52 - 55 , Exercise 10. 52. Dionysius, who says that virtue is not productive of plea¬ sure , is blamed 1 by many. Caius denies that gain should be pursued as a first object. He says that this should be the first object with those who are placed over others, 2 that those who are under their command 3 should be as happy °as possible. 4 I believe that the boy is a liar. 6 He says that pleasure is not to be our first object. All cry-out, that this very false 6 man *is not to be believed upon his oath. He promised that he would place no obstacle °in the way of accomplishing so great an object. 7 Are you'°then going to feel affronted at this ? They teach 0 us, that that opinion should be given up. 1 Ddd. reprehendere. 2 To be placed over others, prceesse aliis. Indic. 3 To be under any body’s command, in cujus imperio esse. 4 1. 410. p. 144. 5 mendax , adj. 6 mendacissimus. ? res. § 8 . Pronouns. * 53. When a substantive has both an adjective and adjective pronoun with it, there are six possible positions, without sepa¬ ration. a 1. Tuae suavissimae litter® 2. Tuae litterae suavissimae 3. Litterae tuae suavissimae b 4. Suavissimae tuae litterae 5. Suavissimae litterae tuae 6. Litterae suavissimae tuae. * (a) If both the predicates are emphatic, the forms 2. 5. should probably be preferred. ' (/?) There may be two adjective pronouns and an adjective: e.g.tuum hoc suburbanum Gymnasium. C. De. Orat. i. 1, 21 {end). (a) Examples of form 1 {which is the English order) are: in hac nostra actione ,(C. De Orat. iii. 59): suis lenissimis postulatis {Cces. B. C. i. 5): in meo gravissimo casu {C. ad Earn. iv. 6,1): in hac praeclara epistola (C. de Fin. ii. 31). 54. If the substantive has a demonstrative pronoun and two adjectives joined by et, the most usual place of the pronoun is after the first adjective. Crassus hic et concretus aer. C. Exercise 11. 55. Do not pester ° t h a t excellent man with your threatening PRONOUNS. 247 § 9. 56-59.] letters. He never answered a single word 1 to my very kindly expressed 2 letters . a I cannot but 3 return some answer to your very acceptable letters. Those wrong opinions °of yours must be rooted-up out of your mind. Is it °the part of a Christian to spend all his life in making gain ? You must strive to retain 4 that great reputation °of yours. You must take care 5 lest your so-great reputation should be endangered. No obstacle shall be placed by me (° in the way of accom¬ plishing) this so great and difficu.i, an object. 1 Is it then the part of a Christian to increase this unpopu¬ larityi* of mine ? Nullum unquam verbum. 2 humanissimus. Df. (1), 18. 4 Pt. I. 75. 5 cavere. 6 See Odium. § 9. Pronouns continued. k 56. Quisque with a superlative or ordinal numeral follows the adjective. Optimus quisque : altissima quaeque flumina : quinto quoque verbo. * Quisque is generally placed immediately after a case of sui or suus referring to it. Placet Stoicis suo quamque rem nomine appellare. C. * 57. ( a ) Quidam generally follows its noun, whether substantive or adjective : but * 58. ( b ) Quidam precedes its noun, when there is an opposition between the quidam and some others: and in other cases where the quidam is very emphatic. (c) For instance, where the quidam means ‘some that I could name:' ‘ some we know of.' to) 1. Interim Agyllius quidam vincula laxavit. Nep.—2. Sed audio majorem quendam in urbe timorem esse. C. ( b) Clamor iste indicat esse quosdam cives imperitos, sed non multos. C. (c) Otium praestaturi videntur, si quidam homines patientius eorum poten¬ tiam ferre potuerint. C. * 59. The ille of celebrity follows its substantive, if there is no adjective with it: if there is, it generally stands between the two. Obs. Not always: e. g. illam acerbissimam ministram Praetorum avari¬ tiae calumniam. C. Ep. ad Q. Fratr. i. 1, 8. Herculem Xenophontium illum. C. Xenophon Socraticus ille. C. 1. Habetur vir egregius L. Paullus ille, qui, &c. C .—2. Omnis illa vis et quasi flamma oratoris, &c. C. —3. Antipater ille Sidonius. C. —4. Mne¬ sarchus, auditor Panaetii i Ilius tui. C. 248 pronouns. [§ 9 . 60 - 64 . * 60. Aliquis in connection with another adjective generally takes the second place. 1 Bene dicere non habet definitam aliquam 2 regionem. * 61. (a) When its substantive has no other adjective or pronoun with it, aliquis generally follows the substantive, when both are unemphatic ; but ( b ) precedes it, when either is to receive promi¬ nence or emphasis. • Obs. Aliquis is emphatic and precedes the substantive, when it means ‘ some at all events,' 1 some if not much:' e. g. qui sedulitatem mali poetas duxerit aliquo tamen praemio dignam, &c. C. (а) 1. Aut de pingendo pictor aliquis diserte dixerit aut scripserit. C .—2 Si hujusce rei ratio aliqua , &c. C. (б) 1. Ejus facti, si non bonam, at aliquam rationem afferre. C.—2. Quid mihi—tamquam alicui Grceculo' otioso et loquaci—quaestiunculam—poni¬ tis? C.—3. Timide tamquam ad aliquem scopulum' libidinis, sic tuam mentem ad philosophiam appulisti. C. * 62. Two pronouns, or an adverb with the pron. from which it is derived, are generally brought close together. * Obs. Not always: even when the pronouns relate to the same person: e. g. “ cum quibus te non tuum judicium sed temporum vincla conjunxe¬ runt C. Fam. x. 6. Equites, sine duce relicti, alii alia in civitates suas dilapsi sunt. L. * 63. (a) When ipse with a case of sui stands for himself \ &c., it generally follows the case of sui : *but ( b) when there is to be particular ejnphasis on the subject , ipse precedes, and is used in the nominative, even though the opposition intended is between oneself and somebody else. (a) 1. Deforme est, de se ipsum praedicare, falsa praesertim. C —2. Non egeo medicina ; me ipse consolor. C. —3. Lentulum mihi ipsi antepono. C. (b) 1. Si quis ipse sibi inimicus est, &c.—2. Ipsi se curare non possunt. [Sometimes, however, the ipse follows : si te ipse contineas. C.] *64. In other words: whenever what is asserted of the agent with respect to himself is a strange thing, ipse is to be in the nom. and precede sui, even when the meaning is himself opposed to others (of whom the assertion might be expected to be made). 1 For ‘ any other,' alius ullus is more common (I think) than ullus alius: but this depends, of course, on the relative emphasis of ‘ any' or ‘ other. To express it strongly, separate the adjectives, as : non ullam rem aliam extimescens nisi , &c. C. 2 ln unus aliquis this order should be observed, unless there is another a4j (e. g. aliquis unus pluresve), or the aliquis is emphatic $10. 65, 66.J THE RELATIVE. 24a Exercise 12. [‘The '’famous/ ‘the °great,’ &c., to be translated by ille.] 65. I far prefer 1 this suburban gymnasium °of yours (53,/5) to the ° famous Academy and Lycseum. Every body loves himself. 2 Every one is dear to himself. The longest letters are 0 always 3 the most agreeable. To each virtue its own a pecu¬ liar praise is due. 4 Does it °then become an orator almost to die with laughing every third word ? They cry-out, that each man must abide by his own judgment. Would you/ dare to refuse to abide by the judgment of the ° g r e a t Plato ? I must explain, what 8 was the opinion of that god ° o f mine, Plato. That Epicurus °of yours boasts that he had no master. Epicu¬ rus says that he attended 6 °the lectures of a certain Pamphilus at Samos. It cannot be denied, that some 7 corpuscles are smooth, others rough, others round ( ab X ba). Do you 0 t h e n believe, that this immense and most beautiful world was made 8 of 9 certain corpuscles, by no natural compul¬ sion, 10 but by a certain fortuitous concourse ? Let us honour this °man’s a diligence with some reward , if not a great 0 o n e . 11 Do you °then compare me to some Scythian (61, b) ? Is it ° t h e n like a philosopher 12 to defend pugnaciously some doubtful opinion °or other? 1 Longe, anteponere. 2 I. 363. Begin with ipse. 3 I. 399, b. 4 peculiar, proprius. To be due, deberi. 5 quisnam. 6 to attend a person’s lectures, audire aliquem. Turn the verb into the passive, ‘ was heard by him.* 7 quidam. 8 ejjicere. 9 ex. 10 ‘ no nature compelling.’ 11 if with no (non) great, yet (at) with some reward.’ (See Ex. 61, b.) 12 Say: ‘of a philosopher.’ § 10. The Relative. * 66. ( a ) The relative (except when it refers to is, ea , id) should stand as near as possible to its antecedent: ( b ) the place of the antecedent being often determined with this view. (a) Xerxem per literas certiorem fecit id agi, ut pons, quern ille in Hellesponto fecerat, dissolveretur. Nep. (a) Bellum grave et periculosum vestris vectigalibus atque sociis a duobus potentissimis regibus infertur, Mithridate et Tigrane; quorum alter, &c. C. 11 * 250 THE RELATIVE. [§11.67-71, * 67. This applies only to strictly relative clauses : not to qui = the demonstr. is, with et, nam, igitur, autem, &c. - 68. Appositions, and even single adjectives (especially super¬ latives), that in English precede the relative clause, are in Latin generally placed in that clause. Hence ‘ the very celebrated general Epaminondas, in whose house’ would be: Epaminondas, cujus celeberrimi imperatoris in domo, &c. ‘ The im¬ mortal glory which the Greeks acquired,’ gloria, quam immortalem Greeci retulerunt. So: ‘ a city which,' 1 quse urbs, &c .— 1 the city he first visited' quam urbem primam adiit. —' an opinion which' quse sententia, &c., ( city and opinion being in apposition to something preceding.) Exercise 13. 69. In the same year Cumse, a city s which* the Greeks were then in possession of, 1 is taken by the Campanians. The Amanus divides Syria from Cilicia, a mountain which was full of °our constant 2 enemies.® I hope that you will 3 recover from the very gevere disease, with which you are now afflicted. I hope that you will 3 keep the many* and very beautiful 8 promises, which you made me. The very great* and beautiful® reward, with which I have been presented, wonderfully 4 delights me. That Athena¬ goras of Cyme, 5 who had dared to export corn in a famine, 1 * was scourged* with rods. 6 1 To be in possession of, tenere. 2 Constant, sempiternus : to end the sentence. 3 fore ut. . . 4 mirifice. 5 Cymaeus. 6 virgis caedi. § 11. The Relative continued. * 70. (a) When the subject is defined by ille and a relative clause, it is often placed in, and at the end of, the relative clause: so, ( b ) when a relative clause stands before the principal clause (the relative being in the nominative), the antecedent often ter¬ minates the relative clause. (a) Ille, qui in Timaeo mundum aedificavit Platonis deus. (b) Q,uae perspicuam omnibus veritatem continet propositio, nihil indiget ap¬ probationis. C. * 71. When the relative clause precedes the principal one, the rel. may give up its usual place (as the first word) in favour of a notion that is to be made prominent. $11 72-75. THE KELATIVE. 251 Tributa vix, in f aenus Pompeii quod satis sit, efficiunt. C. • 72. Of two cases of qui, an oblique case precedes a nomi< native. Senatus ille, quem qui ex regibus constare dixit, unus veram speciem Romani senatus cepit. L. ♦ 73. When qui refers to something preceding, no conjunctions can go with it but sect, et (before), tamen , quidem , que (after). I. Perturbat me, C. Caesar, illud interdum: quod tamen , quum te penitus recognovi, timere desino. C. —2. Morositas senum habet aliquid excusa- tionis, non illius quidem justae, sed quae probari posse videatur. C. * 74. Other conjunctions, such as autem , vero, enim, igitur, cannot stand with qui, unless its reference is to something that follows. 1. Quae autem secundum naturam essent, ea sumenda et quadam aestima¬ tione dignanda docebat. C.—2. Qui igitur adolescens, nondum tanta gloria praeditus, nihil unquam nisi severissime et gravissime fecerit, is eS existimatione, eaque aetate saltavit ? C.—3. Quorum vero patres aut ma¬ jores aliqua gloria praestiterunt, ii student plerumque eodem in genere laudis excellere. C. —4. Quae ergo ad vitam tuendam pertinent, partim sunt in animo, &c. C. Exercise 14. f r.f. means that the rei. clause is to stand first (see Part I. 30): a. v. that the sentence is to be translated by the active voice.] 75. That opinion i °of yours, which is injurious 1 to us, must be rooted-up out of your mind. That Rupilius, J who for so many years had sat at the helm of the state, had jled away secretly, (r. f.) Let those therefore, to whom we all owe our lives, be buried with military honours, (r.f) Will therefore! that Lu¬ cilius,! who is prepared for his fate, whatever it may be, fly away secretly? (r.f.) You are therefore! driving from the helm of the state those, to whom both you and I owe our lives, (r.f.) The General who had so often saved the state, was suf¬ fered by his fellow-citizens to be deprived of burial, (a. v.) We have scarcely corn & enough 2 for a month. Let °those therefore' who have kept back their corn, be fined a sum-of- money. 3 Peace must be sued for; which those who sue for it (fut.), will obtain. -Laedere. 2 Say: ‘ which may be enough f o r (‘in’) a m o n t h.* • Sea example (71) 3 pecunia, abl. 252 INTERROGATIVES. PREPOSITIONS. [§ 12,13.76-79' § 12. Interrogatives. * 76. ( a ) Interrogatives, except ne, take the first place in an indi¬ rect question that follows the principal sentence : but, * 77. (Z>) In direct questions, or indirect questions that precede the principal sentence, the interrogative sometimes yields the first place to an emphatic notion. (a) Quaeritur, cur doctissimi homines de maximis rebus dissentiant. C. (b) 1. Dii utrum, sint, necne sint, quaeritur. C. —2. Quid? Alexandrum Pkerceum quo animo vixisse arbitramur ? C. Exercise 15. 78. What ? is not nearly: the w hoi e-heave n a filled 1 with the human race ? But whether these numbers 1 are poetical, or of 8 some other kind, must be seen next. 3 When S o crates 1 was asked, 4 whether he did not think Archelaus, 1 the son of Perdiccas, happy ; I don’t know, said he, for I have never con¬ versed with him. 5 What ? did not the 0 f a m o u s Cato of Utica 6 die by his own hands ? What ? with what feelings do we think that Lucilius of Ariminum saw his mistake (b) ? I wish to remark 7 ° h e r e , what 8 a calamity over-confidence 9 usually 10 is. 1 Ramshorn says : complere , to fill completely ; implere , to fill what is hollow empty; opplere, to fill to the brim, to fill to overflowing, to cover a surface by filling. Nearly so Jentzen : plenum quod est ad satietatem dicitur completum, expletum: repletum est, quod exhaustum erat, ut fossa: applet us ad su¬ perficiem, r cf e rtus,d iff er tu s, c onf er tus ad spatium interius pertinent. 2 ex, 3 deinceps. 4 ‘ Socrates, when it had been inquired of hirn ’ ( suhj .) &c., qucerere ex aliquo. 5 colloqui cum aliquo. 6 Uticensis, adj.—so Ariminensis below. ? Libet interponere. 8 C. (1), 21. Df. (1), 50. 6 nimia fiducia. 10 ‘ is wont to be.’ §13. P repos i tions . 79. Prepositions (except versus and tenus ) generally stand be¬ fore their nouns, (a) When the substantive has an attributive with it, the preposition stands between the attributive and its sub¬ stantive, when either of them is emphatic. (/;) When the attrib¬ utive is a rel. pron., the ^reposition generally stands between the pron. and its substantiva PREPOSITIONS. 2o3 $ 13. 80-84.] Ca) 1. Magna cu/n cura atque diligentia scripsit. C.—2. Romani Horatium accipiunt eo viajore cum gaudio, quo prope metum res fuerat. (6) In some expressions the preposition nearly always takes the middle place, e. g. qu&tn re; quamob rem; ea de causa. \ 80. Even when the relative has no substantive with it, the pre¬ position often follows it. 1. Senatus, quos ad soleret, referendum eensuit. C. —2. Homo disertus non intelligit eum, quem contra dicit, laudari a se, &c. C. —3. Socii putandi sunt, quos inter res communicata est. C. —4. Res, qua de agitur. C. « 81. Cum is always appended to me, te, se, nobis, vobis, qui (= quo) : and also to quo, qua, quibus , when the cum is entirely unemphatic. i. Maxime cavendum est, ut eos, quibuscum sermonem conferimus, et vereri et diligere videamur. C.—2. Ira procul absit, cum (emphatic) qua nihil recte fieri, nihil considerate potest. C.—3. Noli adversum eos me velle ducere, cum quibus ( opp. to adversum cos'» ne contra te arma ferrem, Italiam reliqui. Ncp. 25, 4. * 82. When a substantive governed by a preposition has other words attached to it, these words are often placed between the preposition and its noun. 1. Erat olim mos ut faciles essent in suum cuique tribuendo. C. —2. Honore digni cum ignominia dignis non sunt comparandi. C. 4 A preposition is sometimes separated from its noun by que, ve, vero, autem, tamen, quidem, enim. 1. Sensim hanc consuetudinem et disciplinam jam antea minuebamus; post vero Sullae victoriam penitus amisimus. C. —2. So : post autem Alexan¬ dri mortem. Nep. —3. Post enim. Chrysippum. C. « 83. Even in prose, per in adjurations is separated from its case by the acc. pronoun of the person addressed, the verb adjure, beseech, implore being omitted. Nolite, judices, per vos fortunas , per liberos vestros, inimicis meis, iis prae¬ sertim quos ego pro vestra salute suscepi, dare laetitiam. C. Exercise 16. 84. On these matters I would wish 1 you (pi.) to deliberate 8 with Pomponius, with Camillus, with whomsoever 2 it shall seem °good to you. As to 3 him, in whose ° hands 4 all* power* ts °1 odged , I see nothing to fear.® Epicurus showed himself a sufficiently apt °scholar in °recei ving 4 this nerveless 7 and effeminate 8 opinion; after him Philonymus the Rhodian || £54 CONJUNCTIONS. 14. 85-89 asserted that to be without pain is the summum bonum. They fix a certain limit, 9 beyond which, ° t h e y say, we ought not to advance. Neither in those who frame constitutions, 10 nor in those who wage wars, is the desire of oratorical power 11 wont to arise. I believe that a limit in sepulchres is properly 12 required: for to what expenses that matter 13 has already advanced, you see in the tomb of C. Figulus. Pomponius is going to set out for Sicily : a matter* concerning which I have || fished out a g r e a t deal 14 from Hortensius. 1 Velim with subj. (ut omitted). 2 The simple relative. 3 de. 4 To be in any body’s hands, penes aliquem esse. Df. (1), 108. 6 ad aliquid satis docilem se 'praebere. 7 enervatus. 8 muliebris. 9 mo¬ dum adhibere. 10 constituere rempublicam. 11 dicendi, 12 recte. L '° res. '” i ~*—14 multa. ' § 14. Conjunctions. 85. A conjunction stands at the head of the clause to which it belongs. * 86. But the relative or demonstrative pronoun, and any em¬ phatic notion, may precede any but the co-ordinate conjunctions, tt. ac, atque ; vel, aut; sed ; at, verum ; nam, namque, etenim ; quamobrem, quapropter ; ita, itaque, sic, &c. 1. Id ille ut audivit, domum reverti noluit. Nep. —2. Huic si paucos puta tis affines esse, vehementer erratis.—3. Commentarios quosdam Aristotelis veni ut auferrem. C.— (So in subordinate sentences .) 4. Atilius Regulus - sententiam ne diceret, recusavit. C. —5. Gorgiae Leontino tantus honos habitus est a Graecis, soli ut ex omnibus Delphis non inaurata statua, sed aurea statueretur. C. * 87. When two conjunctions come together, the conjunction of the principal precedes that of the subordinate sentence. Itaque , si aut requietem natura non quaereret, aut eam posset alia quadam ratione consequi, facile pateremur. C. * 88. Quam (how) with an adjective is often separated from the adjective, for the purpose of adding emphasis to it. Ui credam ita esse, quam est id exiguum ? C. . Exercise 17. 89. When he 7 heard this,* he suffered nobody to rest. I am come to recompense you with some reward, if not a great ° o n o CONJUNCTIONS. 255 § 15. 90-92.] (86, S). When he heard this, a he uttered the name of Quine* tilius in a very 'pathetic manner. I will call upon Caius, whom,» though I think he will keep his promises, I will nevertheless bind by an oath. Do you °then think those evils are to be feared, which are over in a moment of time ? Listen to what that C a i u s (o f) y o u r s a has done. If Demetrius has an audience , it will be all over 1 with the army. Though Caius a owes his life to me, yet he endeavours to bring me into odium. If therefore (87, b ) they think that they owe their lives to me, I should be honoured °by them with some* reward.* If therefore (87, b) they have derived any advantage from my care, let them confer some* reward 8 upon me. 1 Actum esse de. § 15. Conjunctions. — Autem , enim , igitur , with esse. * 90. Obs. Igitur , tamen , ergo, deinde , praeterea, itaque, take the first place, when they modify the whole clause, and not merely any particular notion of it.» When they modify a particular notion, only or especially, they follow that notion, or the first and most important of the words by which it is expressed.* In Cicero, however, itaque always takes the first place, igitur never. * 91. If esse or the subject begins the sentence, autem, enim, igitur , take the second place. 1. Est enim effectrix multarum et magnarum voluptatum. C.—2. Sunt au¬ tem clariora-indicia naturae. C.—3. Id autem est perfectum offi¬ cium. C. % 92. If the sentence begins with the predicate or non, num, nemo, nihil quis or if esse is emphatic; esse (generally) takes the second, and the particle the third place. 1 Quis enim est, &c., occurs 'Tusc. iv. 2, and elsewhere. The thing to be con¬ sidered is : whether the question or assertion relates to the existance of the thing or to its nature. “ Q,uo minus recte dicatur quid enim est , nihil enim est, nulla obstat ratio.—Discrimen proficiscitur ex natura verbi esse , quod, quum non plenam significationem praestet, cum nomine conjungitur in unam notion¬ em, et encliticorum more comprehenditur uno accentu: sed ubi significat tere esse, exstare , attrahit interrogandi particulam.—Q,ui quaerit, quid est enim? aut exspectat responsionem nihil esse, vel nihil aliud esse; aut an res vere sit, dubitat . Q,ui interrogat, quid enim est ? de certo genere rei quaerit, vel, interrogationis 256 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 15. 93-95 1. Dicendum est enim quod sentio. C. —2. Nihil est enim aiiud, quamobrem, &c. C.—3. Quis est enim qui, &c. ?—4. Nemo est igitur , qui. %. 93. (a) A preposition throws these particles into the third place, unless it is emphatic ; ( b ) when they may stand between the preposition and its noun. (a) Ex hac igitur illud efficitur. C. (b) 1. Post vero Sullae victoriam (hanc consuetudinem) penitus amisimus. C .—2. Herillus jam pridem est rejectus: post enim Chrysippum non est disputatum. C. % 94. Sometimes est follows a preposition and its case, and thus the particle is thrown forward to the fourth place. Ab ca est - enim interfectus. C. * 95. Quoque , quidem (which always follow the word they belong to) also throw autem , enim , igitur to the third place. Ei quoque enim proconsuli imperium in annum prorogabatur. L. * 96. A partial exception to what is here said of quidem , arises from the affection of the pronominal particle quidem for a pronoun. Thus in tibique persuade esse te quidem mihi carissimum , sed multo fore cariorem , si, &c., the quidem, which properly belongs to carissimum, has deserted to the pronoun. v - 97. So with other verbs the particle takes the third place, when the verb has a word with it, from which it cannot well be sepa¬ rated. Non video autem , &c. - Num vis igitur audire, &c. ? k 98. The post-positive conjunctions may separate a pnenomen from a cognomen, and even such a compound word as jusjuran¬ dum, plebiscitum. 1. L . quidem Philippus gloriari solebat. C.—2. Rem vero publicam .—3 Jurisque jurandi. —4. Rogationibus, plebisve scitis. Exercise 18. _ 99. For I must say how salutary 1 religion is to men. For some reason must be given of this, as it appears to you at least, 2 strange counsel. For who is there, whose ears that report has vi intenta, non hoc esse, vel prorsus nihil esse. Nam tota vis continetur "no verbo quid .—Hoc ad alias quoque formas pertinet, quae verbum est encliticum uomini conjunctum habent.” {Hand. Purs. ii. 400.) NON. HAUD. 257 § 16 . 100 - 106 .] not reached ? 1 approve of that : 3 for there is nothing from which you can derive greater advantage. Be of good 3 courage : 4 for there is nobody to eject you from possession. Do you wish there¬ fore to listen to what that Pomponius a has done ? You see what prudence, and how firm 8 a mind 8 there is need of; for ° w e must take the helm of the state. For who is there who denies, that you both sit at the helm, as the saying is, and above all others 5 watch over 6 the state ? 0 W e waver 7 and change °our opinion even in clearer things: for in these there is some obscurity. I approve of that : 3 for there is no rapidity 8 which can come-into- competition 9 with that 10 of the mind. 1 To be salutary, saluti esse 2 quidem. 3 laudo id quidem. * animus. 5 unum ex omnibus maxime. 6 prospicere with dat. 7 labare. 8 celeritas. 9 contendere. 10 The subst. must be repeated. § 16. Non. Haud. » 100. (a) Non (or haud) generally stands before the word whose notion it denies: thus when there is an opposition, it is always prefixed to one of the antithetical words : but, • 101. ( b) Non (haud) takes the first place in negative senten¬ ces that express a consequence, (hence so frequently with ergo, igitur,) and (c) in hypothetical conclusions, when nisi is the con¬ ditional particle. (a) 1. Non paranda nobis solum sapientia sed f ruenda etiam. C.—2. Oti\ fructus est non contentio animi, sed relaxatio. C. (b) Non igitur de improbo, sed de callide improbo quaerimus. C. (c) Non jam Troicis temporibus tantum laudis in dicendo Ulyssi tribuisset Homerus, Timjam tum honos esset eloquentiae. C. * 102. Non (haud) may also take the first place, when the denial is to be very emphatic ; especially in negative questions. 1. Non ego jam Epaminondae, non Leonidae mortem hujus morti antepono. C.—2. Quid bestiae 1 non pro suo partu ita propugnant, ut vulnera reci¬ piant ? C. % 103. The place of non in the case of est, &c., with a participle, or of an auxiliary verb (with infin.) is next before est or the auxiliary verb (when there is no antithesis). 256 COMPARATIVES, ETC. [§ 17. 104-100. i. Hi vos, quoniam libere non licet , tacite rogant, &c. C .—2. Regulo non fuit Jupiter metuendus, ne, &c. C. — [When there is antithesis, the non precedes the antithetical uord.\ 3. Non modo— non deterritus, sed — concitatus est.—4. Hanc epistolam cur non scindi velim, causa nulla est. C. 104. The place of non is optional, when it belongs to a pre¬ dicate ( esse being the copula), or when it belongs to a universal negative proposition with quis or qui. 1. Jove tonante cum populo agi non est fas. C. —2. Nihil est, quod Deus efficere non possit. C. —3. Nihil est enim, quod non alicubi esse cogatur. c. Exercise 19. 105. V should not have risked all 3 my fortunes,* unless I had made you take an oath in words prescribed by me. I' should not have been banished , unless you had brought me into odium. You shall not therefore receive any reward of your improbity from me. I do not therefore consider myself to be 0 t o o richly rewarded for my great 1 labour. What therefore °did Caius°do? did not 2 he' receive from you the reward of his crimes? 3 I shall not therefore place much reliance on your promises. I know that you favour me : I will not therefore bind you by an oath. Caius would not have fallen into so great s a calamity 3 unless he had ceased to be in favor with you. There is hardly any thing which does not admit of the excuse of ignorance. 1 Say: ‘for my so-great labour.’ 2 Ask the question with non , which is often used for nonne in vehement interrogations. 3 See Dod. delictum. § 17. Comparatives , Spc. 106. In comparisons with quam , both the substantives connected oy quam often precede the comparative. 1. Adventus hostium fuit agris, quam urbi, terribilior. L.—2. Maris subita tempestas, quam ante provisa, terret navigantes vehementius. C. —3. Ex multis judicari potest virtutis esse, quam cetatis , cursum celeriorem. C .— 4. Themistoclis nomen, quam Solonis, est illustrius. C. —5. Pompejus fuit restituendi mei, quam retinendi, studiosior. C. —6. Facere , quam sanare, vulnera facilius est. Q. § 17. 107-112. COMPARATIVES, ETC. 259 * 107. A vocative is inserted after some words of the sentence. Q,uum in omnibus causis gravibus, C. Cccsar, initio dicendi commoveri si¬ leam vehementius. C. » 108. Inquam also is inserted after some words ; as ait is, when not followed bv an injin. or sic, ita, &c. 1 . Te, inquit , Appi, tuumque caput, &c. L. —2. Hoc te uno quo possum, ait , modo, fillia, in libertatem vindico. L. * 109. If inquam has a nom., the verb generally stands first. * 110. So with ut ait; ut narrat ; &c., the verb precedes its nominative. 1. Sed dum palato quid sit optimum judicat, cceli, palatum (ut ait Ennius) non suspexit. C. —2. Pacideianus aliquis hoc animo , ut narrat Lucilius, &c. * 111. So mihi crede ( usually in this order), credo, opinor, puto, existimo, (all four with or without ut,) quaeso, obsecro, are often thrown parenthetically into the middle of a sentence. 1. Rubeo, mihi crede , sed jam scripseram. C.—2. Tranquillatis autem rebus Romanis, remigravit Romam, ut opinor, L. Cotta et L. Torquato Coss.— 3. Nolite, obsecro ros, pati, mihi acerbiorem reditum esse, quam fuerit, ille ipse discessus. C. Obs. Crede mihi is by no means uncommon in Cicero : the ‘ believe ’ is then emphatic. Thus, Jam enim dico meum ; antea, crede mihi, subdubi¬ tabam.— Cic. ad Alt. xiv. 5, 2. Crede may then stand at the head of its clause; as, Crede, igitur mihi, Plance , omnes , &c.—Cic. Fam. x. 6. Exercise 20. 112. It is easier to tie a knot, than to untie ° i t. ° M y return was more bitter to me, than that departure itself. b Lucilius was honoured with a more splendid funeral than Demetrius. The Boii fled to ° t h e i r camp in more complete disorder than the iEdui. It is easier to make & promise than to perform it. Is it not sometimes 1 a harder ° t h i n g to perform a promise than to make it ? You ought to blush (111) believe me ; for you have wrested these things from my hands. Do not, I beseech you, allow this lucky opportunity to slip through your fingers . 2 These things, as I imagine, would not be in our power, 2 if you had not let this lucky opportunity slip through your fingers 2 Terrour 260 COMPARATIVES, ETC. [§17. 112. as Ennius says, banishes 3 all 8 wisdom* from my mind. Separate 1 yourself at length, 5 I beseech °you, from those, with whom not your °o wn judgment, but the circumstances of the times have united 5 you. 1 Rarius interdum quam normunquam esse memento. ' 2 See Hand. 3 qnidmihiex animo expectorare. For ex animo others read exanimato Terror, navor. 4 sejungere 3 aliquando. 8 conjungere. EXPLANATION OF MARKS, &c. Words in [ ] arc to be omitted in translation. 1 * J Words in italics, to which this mark is prefixed, are to stand at the head of their clause. If the word that follows II is not in italics, the mark applies to that word only. * This mark denotes, that the word to which it is prefixed is to be looked for in the Extracts from the ‘ Antibarbarus, 5 appended to the volume. I This mark means, that the clause to which it is prefixed is to precede the whole or part of that which stands before it in English. t This mark means, that the active voice is to be turned into the passive, or vice- versa. Numerals followed by a curve refer to the Cautions at the end of the volume. Numerals without a curve refer to the Differences of Idiom at the end of the volume. C. and Df. refer, respectively, to the Cautions and Differences of Idiom in Prac¬ tical Introduction, Part I. V. M refer to the Versus Memoriales at the end of the volume. M. L. refer to the Memorial Lines at the end of the volume. §pr Numerical references in the notes refer to the First Part of the ‘Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition. 5 gjT Words in the notes marked by single inverted commas, are the literal trans¬ lation of the Latin to be used. 1 In the first five Exercises, words to be omitted are marked by ° prefixed to words in spaced printing. ' r r * ■ PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. ii. LONGER LATIN EXERCISES. (On connecting propositions by the relative pronoun, where in English we should use a demonstrative.) % 1. Propositions are in Latin often connected by the relative qui, qua, quod, where in English we should use and, for, but, now, &c., with the demonstrative. 2. (a) Nam et praetor pedestribus exercitibus praefuit, et praefectus classis res magnas mari gessit. Quas ob causas ( = atque ob eas causas, ‘ and for these reasons’) praecipuus ei honos est habitus. ( b ) Namque omnibus unus insulis praefuit. In qua ( = nam in ea) po¬ testate Pheras cepit, coloniamque Lacedaemoniorum. ( Nep . ix. 1.) ♦ 3. The relative in these propositions is equivalent to the unem- phatic is, ea, id, with et, autem, igitur ; or even nam , tamen, sed, vero. % If the demonstrative pronoun required is the more strongly demonstrative hic, ille, or even if there would be any emphasis on ‘ is,’ the relative must not be used : nor if the conjunction would be emphatic, e. g. itaque , ergo, at, verum, nempe, nimi¬ rum, &c. * 4. Whether is should be retained, or this construction with the relative used, depends on various considerations. Thus in Cic. Cluent. 7: Postremo unus , qui erat reliquus Dinece filius Cn. Magius est mortuus. Is fecit heredem illum adolescentem Oppianicum. Here the ‘is’ is retained because a qui had so lately preceded. * 5. The connection by the relative is very often used, when there is a dependent or subordinate sentence, which is then placed immediately after the relative : hence this qui very often precedes a quum, postquam, ut, ubi. 264 EXERCISE l. 6. Reddita inclusarum ex spelunca boum vox Herculem convertit. quum vadentem ad speluncam Cacus vi prohibere conatus esset, ictus clava fidem pastorum nequidquam invocans morte occubuit. ( Liv .) ♦ 7. When an English relative clause is followed by a subordi¬ nate clause containing a demonstrative, or has such a clause inserted in it, the relative is, in Latin, placed in this subordinate clause (which then stands first), and either ‘is 5 is used in the other clause or (if the pronoun is in the same case in both clauses) the pronoun is omitted. 8. An example or two will make this clear. (a) ‘ A man ( whom I should have spoken to), (if I had seen him).* In Latin this would be: ‘ A man (whom if I had seen), (I should have spoken to).’ (b) ‘A man by whose treachery I should have been ruined, if I had not dis¬ covered it in time.’ In Latin : ‘A man (whose treachery if I had not discovered in time), (I should have been ruined by it).'' (c) Thus instead of ‘Non vident id se cupere, quod (si adepti sunt id) fugitivo alicui aut gladiatori concedi sit necesse,’ A Roman would have written : ‘ Non vident id se cupere, (quod si adepti sunt) fugitivo alicui aut gladia¬ tori concedi sit necesse.’ (Cic.) 9. Hence never write qui, quum is, &c., qui, quum ejus, &c., qui, quum ei, &c.; but qui, quum — ; cujus quum — ; cui quum, &c. So not qui, si ejus, &c., but cujus si, &c. Exercise 1. [See Pract. Intr. Part I. 441.] Alexander died at Babylon, ° a m an who, if his life had been a longer ° one, would have subdued the whole world. 11 Alexan¬ der died at Babylon, °a m an who, if a longer life had fallen-to- his-lot, b would have subdued the whole world. Alexander died at Babylon, °a man who, if fate had kept 6 him alive °for a longer ° time, would have subdued the whole world. Alexander died at Babylon, a man who, unless fate had taken from him his life prematurely, d would have subdued the whole world.—His death was the ruin of e all his fellow-citizens/ by whom he was slain& because he wished to save them. I have very often read that there is no evil h in death, ° for that if any sense remains ON RHETORICAL FIGURES. 265 after it, 1 it ought to be considered immortality rather than death. The power] of conscience is great, and those who neglect it, be¬ tray 11 themselves. Philosophy contains the doctrine 1 both of duty and of morality : m those °the r efore who profess it seem to me to support a very important character." King Eucratides reduced India under his dominion, 0 but when he was returning thence ,p was slain on his march by his son. a Would should not be translated by mundus except when the meaning is universe. When the earth or its countries are meant, orbis terree or terrarum should be used; the latter especially when there is reference to different coun¬ tries. b Should you use contingit, or accidit ? c reservare. d immature. e perdere. f civis. s Dbd. interjicere. h Part I. 161, Obs ., and end of 162. i ‘ in it.’ The verb in the next clause should be subj., it being the speech or sentiment of the person or persons from whom the narrator had heard the opinion. Pt. I. 460 ( b ). J vis. k indicare. Express both ipse and suus. Pt. I. 368. 1 disciplina. m Say, ‘ of living well.’ * personam sustinere. 0 in potestatem redigere . P Use rel. adverb.— at recipere . (On Rhetorical Figures .) 1. Geminatio, or the doubling of an emphatic word. (a) Crux , crux inquam misero et aerumnoso parabatur. (C.) 2. Repetitio (enavaq>ogd), when several clauses or members of a sentence begin with the same word. (a) Nihilne te nocturnum presidium Palatii, nihil urbis vigiliae, nihil timor populi, nihil consensus bonorum omnium, nihil hic munitissimus habendi senatus locus, nihil horum ora vultusque moverunt? (C.) 3. Conversio (avTioiQocpr,), when several clauses or members of a sentence end with the same word. (a) Urbis vigiliae nihil te moverunt, timor populi nihil, consensus bonorum omnium nihil, &c. 4. Complexio is when several clauses or members of a sentence both begin with the same word and end with the same word. (a) Quis legem tulit ? Rullus. Quis majorem partem populi suffragiis pro¬ hibuit? Rullus. Quis comitiis praefuit? Rullus. Quis decemviros quos voluit renuntiavit ? Rullus. (C.) 5. Traductio, when a word occurring in a clause, occurs again (intentionally and as an ornament) in on^ or more subsequent clauses. 266 ON RHETORICAL FIGURES. (a) Eum tu hominem appellas, qui si fuisset homo, nunquam tam cxudelitei vitam hominis petisset. ( b ) Q,ui nihil habet in vita jucundius vita, is cum virtute vitam non potest tollere. (C.) 6. Polysyndeton ( tioIwvvSetov ), the using many conjunctions, i. e. one between each pair of words or notions. (a) Et inimico proderas, et amicum laedebas, et tibi ipsi non consulebas. (C.) 7. Anno minatio (nagovoyaala) is the antithesis of words of nearly the same sound. a) —ut eum non facile non modo extra tectum, sed ne extra tectum quidem quisquam videret. (C.) (b) Hanc reipublicte pestem non paulisper reprimi, sed in perpetuum com¬ primi volo. (C.) (c) Expetenda magis est decernendi ratio, quam deceilandi fortuna. (C.) 8. c OyoioTiTojzov, when the members of a sentence are of par¬ allel construction, having the same cases, or the same persons of the same tense. When they end with the corresponding case or tense, it makes oyoiorekevTov. —Both occur in tile following ex¬ ample : (a) Vicit pudorem libido, timorem audacia, rationem amentia. (C.) 9. 5 I gokmXov, when the clauses are very nearly of equal length. (a) Alii fortuna felicitatem dedit: huic industria virtutem Comparavit. 10. 'AvtI&etov (antithesis) requires this equality of length in the antithetical portions. ( a, Est igitur haec, judices, non scripta sed nata lex; quam non didicimus, accepimus, legimus, verum ex natura ipsa arripuimus, hausimus, expres¬ simus ; ad quam non docti, sed facti, non imbuti, sed instituti sumus ut &c. (C.) 11. Commutatio (avTiyeza^olri) is when the antithesis consists in the conversion of a proposition. (a) Q,uia stultus es, ea re taces; non tamen quia taces, ea re stultus es: si poema loquens pictura est, pictura tacitum poema debet esse. 12. Regressio (en avodog) is when this kind of conversion is a conversion of a part only of a proposition. (a) Ut eloquentium juris peritissimus Crassus, juris peritorum eloquentissi- mus Scaevola haberetur. (C.) 13. Gradatio (xXiya*) is the mounting up as it were from one word to another, the preceding word being repeated. (a) Imperium Gnecise fuit penes Athenienses; Atheniensium potiU EXERCISE 2. 267 Spartiatae ; Spartiatas superavere Thebani; Thebanos Macedbnes vice¬ runt, qui imperium Graeciae brevi tempore adjunxerunt Asian: bello sub¬ actam. (Ad Herenn.) 14. ’A7io at Ferrara : h except that» this was [of] a milder: [character.] 2. Accordingly it left me k on the eighth day after my seizure .' I was cured not only by medicine," 1 but also by bleeding," by 0 the advice of my [friend] Angelus Justinianus, who not only pre- EXERCISE 12 . 273 scribed p for me himself, but also made up q a great part of the medicines with his own hand. 1. *■ Convalescere. By what tense should ‘ lam well ’ be translated ? b'cer- tai nly.’ Both certe scio and certo scio occur. The difference is thus given by Hand: certe scio means, ‘ it is certain that I know ;’ certo scio, ‘/ have a certain knowledge of the thing stated .’ Which should be used here? c Dod. invenire. ‘ Certain :’ (Ex. 3, c.) c sancte religioseque vivere. Remember that this whole passage is a statement gathered from the poets : it is their doctrine, not the writer’s. I. 460. J inter se. e I. 393. f What is the proper word for beautiful, as ap¬ plied to objects that please the sight? [I. 212, note v.] s distinguere, properly to relieve a surface by ornaments placed upon different parts of it. h nitet diffuso lumine caelum. (Lucr.) i ‘ there.’ 3 ‘all [things].' k fabella, pi. 1 ventilare. Ut cum purpureas ventilat aura comas. (Ovid.) Obs. The words and general character of this passage do not always belong to sober prose; but as it is a representation of poetical descriptions, this is perhaps permissible here. m blandiri. What case ? Exercise 16. 1. Ancient authors are not agreed 1 upon .he reasons, why this 276 EXERCISE 17 . or that animal was sacrificed to this or that god. For some assert' that the favourite animal of each god was slain e before his altars; and thus the horse was the victim offered to Mars. And [on the other hand] it was not lawful to offer a wild boar to Venus, d ^be¬ cause that animal 9) had killed Adonis. 2. Others [however] held e that a god was best pleased with the blood of the animal, :j: which he 9) hated: that thus a cock f was sacrificed to Night, because that bird seemss to be calling forth the day by its song, [and] driving away the night: [and] a goat to Pallas, because [that animal] inflicts great injury upon h the olive- tree. 1. a ‘ We are not agreed ,’ non satis convenit inter nos (de aliqua re). See Ex. 15, note a.) b ‘ To assert ’is not asserere. c ‘ that the [animal] which was most acceptable {gratus ) to each was wont to be slain,’ &c. Relat. clause to precede. I. 31. a ‘and because a wild-boar had, &c.-it was not- lawful (nefas), that sacrifice should be made ( rem divinam fieri ) to Venus with a wild-boar.’ 2. e ‘ thought,’ putare. f gallus gallinaceus. s The verbs seems — inflicts express the reasons alleged by the holders of the opinion. Will this cir¬ cumstance have any effect on the mood ? If so, why 1 h insigniter laedere (Cic. has ins igniter diligere.) Exercise 17. If nothing 2 is sacred and religious, but what is without orna¬ ment, let gold be removed' from our temples; let jewels, images,® and b pictures be removed, and, in a word, votive-offerings of every kind. But if it is an impiety even to entertain such a thought as this, 0 let us confess what common-sense d itself in a (393) manner teaches [us], that wealth is not c better employed in anything f than in the worship of God, nor eloquences better h than in refining! and beautifying philosophy. a Dod. imago. Choose the word that means ‘ any plastic work : in opposi¬ tion to tabulae , picturae (pictures). b Use the fig. asyndeton. ‘ in a word,’ denique; ‘ votive-offerings,’ donaria. (Liv .) c ‘ this is impious (nefarius) even to be thought.’ Cogitare , which “ denotes the usual activity of the mind, which cannot exist without thinking or employing itself about something,” is here the best word for a thought entering the head. d ratio. e neque — neque. f ‘ any where.’ Usquam follows the same rule as ullus, i. e. stands in negative and virtually negative sentences : alicubi and uspiam answer respectively to aliquis and quispiam ; ubivis to quivis, quilibet. dicendi c opia. h praeclarius. i excolere. EXERCISES 18, 19. Exercise 18. 277 1. I should never have thought it possible a that I could derive pleasure, 15 I will not say e from your' grief, but from any d [man’s]. And yet if the truth* must be spoken, I am obliged f to confess, that it was most gratifying^ to me to learn h from your letter, that you were exceedingly* grieved, as soon as) the news of my illness k reached* you. ra 2. For that grief could not arise from any other source , n than from your great 0 affection for me ; and from [the time] that I first saw you, and heard from 3) very many others how distinguished you were for learning and virtue, p I have had no fonder zvish i than to be loved 1 ) by r you. 1. a ‘ that it would be 5 (that I could derive, &c.) b ‘ To derive or receive pleasure, pain, &c., from any thing,’ capere voluptatem, dolorem, &c., ex aliqua re. c nonmodo. <* I. 389-391. e ‘the truth’ must be trans¬ lated by vera (‘true things’), whenever the meaning is, ‘ ichat is true? '■true things .’ If a single thing is meant, the sing, verum may be used. Veritas is * truth,’ as an abstract notion. t necesse est. I. 504 (1): take the second form. £ gratissimus. h ‘ that (quod) I learnt.’ intelligere, the notion being, of ‘ being made aware.' i vehementer. ) 1.512. k valetudo (‘ state of health ’) or infirma valetudo. Cic. has two or three times invalitudo, but the reading is mostly doubtful. i afferri : allatum esse. m ‘ to where you are,’ istuc. I. 387. 2. n ‘ from elsewhere,’ aliunde. 0 eximius. p ‘ a man of what erudi¬ tion and virtue you' were.’ <* ‘ nothing has been more desirable ( optabilius ) to me.’ r I. 348. Exercise 19. 1. Socrates, in the 4 ) dialogue which is entitled 4 ‘the first Alci biades,’ employed || a witty b and refined* artifice to check 6 ) the presumption d of Alcibiades. For whereas e the young man per- suaded himself, with the characteristic self-confidence of his age, 1 that he was already abundantly furnished with all the knowledge that a statesman required,£ Socrates (p) accosted him courteously, and by proceeding from one question to another , h made it plain from his own answers,' that he had as yet obtained) no knowledge 1 ' of justice and injustice.* 2. And when Alcibiades took it impatiently, and was indignant as considering" 1 himself to be reproached with ignorance, 4 Socrate9 defended himself [from the charge], and asserted 8 ) that he' was 278 EXERCISE 20 . not saying any thing whatever 11 of that sort against him, [but] that it was Alcibiades himself, who was making the confession 0 about himself. 1. a inscribi. b urbanus, which denotes refined and polished wit. c elegans. Cicero speaks of an elegans jocandi genus: ‘to check,’ repri¬ mere. d Dod. superbia. e quum. I. 489. f ‘ which is wont to be the character ( ingenium ) of that age.’ What is the word for age = '‘time of life ? ’ s ‘ with all those things which had reference {pertinere ) to govern¬ ing tho state.’ ‘ To govern ,’ administrare, of a statesman managing it under a so'ereign power. h ‘ by questioning step-by-step ’ ( paulatim ). Quintilian nas paulatim et {ut dicitur) p edetentim interrogare. i ‘ brought him to that point, that it was plainly established by his own answers.’ ‘ To bring any body to that point,’ aliquem eo perducere, ut, &c. ‘ To be plainly es¬ tablished,’ aperte effici {ex). i Dod. invenire. k Dod. cognitio. l justum, injustum : not the abstract justitia, but that which is actually just or unjust in practice. 2. m ‘ because—he thought.’ (On the mood after quod, see I. 518.) * ‘not—any thing whatever,’ nihil prorsus. ° Fateri. Translate ‘de¬ fended,’ ‘ asserted ,’ by the historical present. I. 414. Exercise 20. 1. How highly the Athenians valued 1 || the poems of Homer, and how useful they judged them to be for inflaming 13 [men’s] minds with a love of honour 7 ) and worth, b may be perceived' from their having passed 7 a law, that d every' fifth year, at f the Pana- thenaic festival, the poems of Homer, and of none hut Homerf should be publicly recited. 2. For their opinion rvasf that laws do indeed enjoin 1 2 what is to be done and [what] avoided, but that from their [necessary] brevity, they do not teach [this knowledge ]; but that the poets, who, imitating human life, give a copious narrative J of brave and noble actions, and almost* 1 place them before [men’s] eyes, are letter calculated * to persuade [us to imitation]. 1. a To value highly, magni facere. How must this be modified to express ‘ how highly?’ b dignitas (= worth, virtue) as in Cic. voluptatem conces¬ suram dignitati, &c. c existimare. d I. 75. e I. p. 139, note d. f Express the preposition 'in.' The Panathenaic festival, Panathe- naica (sc. solemnia). Varr. s ‘of him alone out of the whole number of poets.’ 2. h ‘ thus they thought.’ » Dod. jubere. J copiose exponere. k pro pemodum. i aptior (ad aliquid faciendum). EXERCISES 21, 22. Exercise 21. 279 1. The Lacedaemonians paid a similar honour 11 to Tyrtaeus. For though in general b they were indisposed 0 to poetic studies, and not d fond e of listening to the strains of poets, they nevertheless had passed a law , f that whenever» an army [of theirs] was drawn up for a general engagement, h the soldiers should be summoned to the royal tent, and there * inspired with a contempt* of death in their country's cause , ) J by listening to the poems of Tyrtaeus. 2. To iEschylus, too, nearly the same honour was paid* by the Athenian people ; for it was enacted by a public decree that even after his (p) death Jus plays should he * acted, a privilege which was granted to no other tragic poet. v 1. a ‘To pay an honour to any body,’ honorem alicui habere, tribuere; honore aliquem afficere: not honorem alicui exhibere. b ceteroqui ( — 1 in other respects,’ ‘with this exception’). c alienus, I. p. 77, note y. d neque. e Diff. 111. Idiom given for ‘ don't like to,’ &c. f ‘had appointed by law,’ lege constituere. » ‘ as often as,’ quoties. h cum hostibus dimicaturus in procinctu constitisset. i Participle. Should you use spernere , contemnere, ox despicere? (V. M. 5.) J ‘for (pro) their country.’ 2. k (the plays) ‘of [him] alone out of all the tragic poets—should be * acted.’ Exercise 22. {Breams.) ‘We sleep through whole nights, 4 and there is hardly any' 4 [night] in which b we do not dream: and do we [yet] wonder, that what we have dreamed sometimes® comes true V d These are the words || of a philosopher (p) who is discussing® the unreality f of dreams, and asserting 65 that [even] if some 7 dreams f are confirmed» by the event, it does not follow h from this, that dreams are not to be looked upon* as [mere dreams]. For out of j such k a number and variety [of them], it would be more wonderful if nothing ever* came true d of what we f see when we are asleep. m B I. 302. b I. 477. c I. 402. something which she desired very much, and the king having told i her to name k it openly and fearlessly, ^ whatever! it might be, ‘ I should wish you,’ she said, ‘ to f grant" 1 me this [favour,] that I might (128) sit on 16) your throne and ad¬ minister justice* for but 10 a single 0 day: and that, for the whole of that day, all should obey me [just] as they do you. ’p 1. a ‘ To gain a throne,’ ad regnum 'pervenire. r ex. J humilis et abjectus. d Dod. astutus. e Dod. paulatim. f‘had so bound {astringere) king Ninus to herself.’ s petere. (See I. 252, Remark.) 2. h aliquando. i injicere. ) jubere, I. 76. k profiteri. I quicquid tandem. ™ tribuere. n jus dicere. ° unus. P ‘ as (qmmadmodum) they do to you, so {ita) they should obey me.’ Exercise 24. ( Semiramis continued.) The king laughed, and granted [her] what she f requested. Immediately it is proclaimed, that on an (393) appointed 4 day, all men should obey the commands b of Semiramis : that such was the king's pleasure : c that she for that day f ivas placed over A them all with sovereign authority e and power. When (512) the 13) day ar¬ rived, the queen sat on l6) the throne in royal pomp. f Vast crowds assemble e [before her.] She at first, by way of experiment , h issues some commands of no great importanceJ a Certus. e dicto audientem esse, with dat. of person. * ‘that so it pleased the king.’ d prceesse. e imperium. f cultus, im¬ plying more than apparel only; all the attendant circumstances of a king’s sitting in state. ° ‘ A very great concourse ( concursus ) takes place.’ » experiendi causa. « ‘ commands some things (acc.) of no 12 ) great moment. 281 exercises 25, 26, 27. Exercise 25. ( Semiramis continued.) When* she saw that all men obeyed her in earnest, 1 whatever she commanded , c she orders the royal body-guard A to arrest' (75) the king himself: they arrest him. To bind him [in chains] : he is bound. To put him to death : f he is put to death. In this manner^ her reign of a day is made perpetual . h This is [the queen] who surrounded Babylon with walls of brick/ and whose famous J hanging 11 gardens were the objects of such admiration J a ‘ When ’ = ‘ as soon as ’ (512). What tense and mood ? (514.) b serio . c ‘in all things.’ With respect to the place of ‘aZZ,’ see p. 242, 39, which should laydown the rule as general, not as confined to substantives only. d satellites ac stipatores regii corporis. (Cic. Rull. 2. 13, 32, has; stipatores corporis constituit eosdem ministros et satellites potestatis.) e comprehendere, f interjicere. S ita. h ‘ from 3 -» [that] of-a-day ( diurnus) becomes a lasting [one].’ Lasting, diuturnus : there is a sort of play on the similarity of sound in diurnus and diuturnus. This is called Paronomasia , see above, p. 264. So non magis amore quam more , (C. Nep.); in ore atque amore , (Cic.), &c.’ • of brick, latericius. J I. 381. k pensilis. i 1 had such admiration.’ C. 10. Exercise 26. Cicero, an extremely® good judge b of eloquence, * thought so highly || of Plato, that he said Jupiter himself, if he wished to speak*Greek, would use no c language but Il) that H) of Plato. And then 22 Aristotle ! did he not d both lay down' the rules' - of eloquence better than any other man,z and possess such eloquence h himself, that the same Cicero called him a river flowing with gold ? a in primis. b existimator. c non alius. d Nonne is, of course, the regular interrogative particle here: but ‘non is often used without ne in vehement questions—especially questions of appeal.’ e tradere. ( praeceptum. s unus omnium optime. b ‘ of such (C. 10.) eloquence.’ Exercise 27. 1. Philosophy heals these and similar diseases, and produces* in her [followers] such 0 a firmness of mind, as c neither d the allurements of pleasure (pi.), nor the fires* of pain (pi.), nor the 282 EXERCISES 28, 29. splendour of riches, nor obscure and despised f poverty, nor the thirst of honour (pL), nor the fear of disgrace, nor the desire of life, nor the fear of death, can shakes and overthrow.* 1 2. For as the poets say that the top of Olympus is always calm, because* it is too high for j the power of the winds and tempests to reach it : k so the mind of philosophers is too lofty* and elevated* to feel those whirlwinds' 11 of desires ( p ) that rage and battle 0 together 0 on the ground for 17) things [of the] most worthless [nature]. 1. a efficere. *> is , ea, id. (See I. 483 (2)). c C. 9. <* Translate neither — nor — nor , by I. 478 (4). 0 fax (torch). f Dod. spernere. £ convellere , ‘ pull violently from its place.’ h labefactare. 2. i propter ea quod: which is stronger than quia or quod only, and gives more prominence to the reason assigned. j DifF. 94. k ‘ to arrive thither,* eo pervenire. l Dod. altus (i). m fatus (us). n digladiari. 0 inter se. Exercise 28. 1 should scarcely have dared to ask you to write a to me in Latin, fearing that this would seem to you an exceedingly b difficult [task]. Consequently,® the Latin d letters which I have lately received from you were the more acceptable,—[they were] not indeed** entirely* - faultless/ but yet much more correctly and elegantly written h than I should have believed [possible]. I en- courage* you therefore to hope with confidence ,3 and 14 not to doubt but 11 * that, under my guidance/ you will one day * attain" 1 to some" [considerable] facility in this accomplishment , as well as in others. 0 a 75. b oppido. c Quo (the relative adverb, instead of the de¬ monstrative eo ), with the comparative adj. <* ‘written by you in Latin,’ Latine. See I. 53, note*. e I. 383. f omni ex parte. £ emen¬ datus. *» nitidiores et cultiores. i jubeo , ‘ I bid you.’ J bene. k I. 364. \ aliquando. m Dod. invenire. n aliquis. °‘of this Kind also.’ Exercise 29. (On a Recovery from Illness .) Certainly, when all' my medical-attendants'* 1 asserted-repeat- edly b with one* consent, that there was hardly any hope left of EXERCISES 30, 31. 28 my recovery , d I had so prepared myself and composed my mind, as® to be neither grieved nor frightened by the fear of, as it was supposed, approaching f death: and asked nothing 14 else* of h the * Almighty, but 11 ) that He would deal with me * mercifully, would pardon the errours* of my past life, and, in that separation of body and soul, would not 14 suffer me to be tormented either in a greater degree or for a longer time) than my strength could bear. a medici. b dictitare. c summus. d ‘ of my escaping,* evadendi. e I. 66. f imminens. s alius. h I. 252, Obs. « errata. ) .* moTe violently, or longer. 1 Comparatives of vihementer and diu. Exercise 30. (Same subject continued.) But I hope that I have been allowed by God to remain in this world* that the stains contracted 1 * in former years may be blotted out by my tears; and that at last ( p ) I may slight® and reject the temptations' 1 of vice (pi-), and pursue noio at least in my old age 0 that course of life which I ought to have pursued 1- from the begin¬ ning. And I beseech you, * again and again, noble Sir,s that, as you stimulateh me to the (p) performance of this resolution* by your example, so you would be kind enough) to assist me [to do so], not only k by your admonitions and advice, but also by offering * prayers to God in my behalf J a ‘ I (1 have been left by God in this life.’ b ‘ To contract a stain,’ macu¬ lam concipere: ‘ to blot it out or efface it,’ maculam delere or «luere. c omittere. «1 Ulecebrce. e saltern jam senex. f C. g vir clarissime. h incitare. « animi mei propositum. J dignari. k ‘not only — but also,’ et — et: or in the usual way, non solum— sed etiam. i ‘for me.’ Exercise 31. [Obs. When a demonstrative is to be translated by a relative, the conjunction at the head of the sentence must be omitted.] Deucalion, in Ovid, a ingeniously interprets the response 1 * given him by Themis, (p) when lie &sked by what means® he could restore the human race, (p) which had been destroyed by the flood. For, being ordered ‘ to throw behind his back the bones 284 exercises 32, 33, 34. of his great mother, 5 || he (r) made out d [that] || by the name mother the earth [was meant], and that stories were called e the bones || in her (r) body. a ‘ The Ovidian Deucalion.’ Ovidianus. b sors. c ars. d %ntd ligere. e Subj., as being a thought of Deucalion's. Exercise 32. [All men] submit to punishment with a better grace,* when b they think that they deserve to be punished. 0 Wherefore Aristotle, in his second book on the Art of Rhetoric , d sets-down e this argument with others { among those which tend to soothe the mind ; that we should point out to those who think that an injury has been done them, that they' began/ and that what h they complain of 15 ) has befallen them deservedly. a 11 bear II with a more even mind that they should be punished.’ b Express ' all men — when ' by quicunque (whosoever). c I. 486 (b). d ‘On the rhetorical art,’ rhetoricus. e ponere. ( quoque. s ‘ were the firs ( priores ) in ^inflicting injury.’ h = ‘those things which.* Exercise 33. Soon [afterwards] he fell ill of* a * severe disease , and sufferea so much from it b for two 0 months, that his friends and medical, attendants feared for d his life, and 14 (p) though he "[shook ofF the disorder,® it was 10) but ll) very slowly indeed 1 that he recovered the * bodily strength ( p) he had lost, and his former^ health. a in morbum incidere or cadere. b ‘ was so shaken or oppressed by it;’ morbo urgeri , tentari, affligi (Cic.), conflictari (Corn. Nep.). c bini, the two months being considered as one space. Bini 1 extra distributionem sig¬ nificat duo, non separati m, sed simul sumpta .’ (Facdolati.) d I. 231. e To shake off a disorder, morbum ox vim morbi depellere. f ad¬ modum tarde ac lente. s pristinus. Exercise 34. I send you back your review, 1 in which I have scarcely found [any thing] to cavil at, b much less 0 to censure. Your judgment is correct' and sure: your style elegant and in good Latin. A That® you have made such progress f in this (r) I rejoice the more, because" it was ,0) principally* 1 by my advicei that you were EXERCISES 35, 36. 285 persuaded to add this accomplishment) of writing well, to your other graces* of genius and learning. a censura. b Diff. 108 (1). ‘To cavil at,’ calumniari. c ‘much less,’ nedum,* I. 443. *i ‘and quite {plane) Latin.’ e I. 517, note x. f ‘To make such progress,’ tantum projicere. s I. 516. h potissimum, I. 364. i Use the subst. auctor. (See I. 364.) j ‘ thought that this credit ( laus )—should be added,’— conjungere , as it was to be, not appended to ♦hem, but united with them. k ornamenta. Exercise 35. As if a my house were turned into an infirmary/ theie are ill in it both my youngest daughter, and my two maid-servants. I am therefore obliged to ask c you to defer d your coming/ which for 17) many reasons I was so anxiously f expecting, to a time more convenient to us. Farewell, excellent man. Leyden, March 19/ a I. 494. b Sen. uses valetudinarium. The term in Justinian’s Code of Laws is nosocomium , from voaoKoixeiov. 0 I. 252. d I. 75. 6 adventu* f tantopere. s I. 526, 528. These rules may be given thus:— Adde diem semper Nonis atque Idibus unum : Accipiatque dies mensis lux ultima binos. Exercise 36. The more a lazy b 1 grow c in writing letters, the more vehe¬ mently do I desire to converse with you, especially since d [we] have e innumerable subjects f of conversation/ You will there¬ fore highly gratify h both me and all mine, if you will revisit us, and [that after so] long a time,! during the Easter holidays.] The cold is sharp, I allow; but you shall have k a bright' fire' in your bed-room. a I. 407. b Dod. ignavia. c ‘age makes me.’ d I. 489. • esse. t argumentum. s Gerund. h ‘ will have done [a thing] most gratitying,’ gratissimus. i intervallum. J feriae Paschales. k ‘ there shall be prepared for you ’ l focus. * ‘ Nedum is rare in Cicero, who generally uses non modo instead of it afte; ne—quideml 286 exercises 37, 38, 39. Exercise 37. Your letters are few and far between ; a but they make up fon their rarity by their wonderful' tenderness. 0 Many parts of them? have delighted me, but nothing more than the 4) affection, which you not only manifest 6 to me in my life-time, { but also solemnly 8 promise to manifest 11 to my [family], when I am gone J * ‘ are certainly rare,’ rarus quidem. b compensare. c suavitas, i ‘ many [things] in them.’ e amorem pr cestar e (to manifest by sub¬ stantial kindness). f ‘ to me alive.’ s sancte. h DifF. 2 ' ‘ shall have ceased to be .’ Exercise 38. As to 1 my property 15 [which is] small 0 indeed/ but in a tolera bly good condition , e let us converse [about it] when you come in the spring. f I am so strongs both in body and mind, that unless I f am carried off by apoplexy/ I seem as if I mighU arrive at the same age that my mother reached :3 nor do I feel that I am * growing an old man \\from any tiling k but 111 my laziness in let¬ ter-writing. i a De. b res (pi.). c modicus. d I. 383. e ‘but sufficiently uninvolved,’ satis explicatus. (So Cic. provincia quam maxime apta exp lica- taque.) f sub tempus vernum. £ ‘ To be strong,’ vigere. h apo¬ plexia or apoplexia. i ‘ to be able.’ 3 attingere. k ‘ [from] anv other circumstance,’ res. i ‘ in writing letters.’ Exercise 39. Of our [men] 1 not more than twenty were [either killed or] missing 15 [after] all the engagements. But in the castle there was not a single 0 soldier who was not wounded : and of one cohort four centurions lost d their eyes. And desiring* to * produce evidence of their exertions 1 ' and the danger they had been in,£ they counted over before 11 Marius about thirty thousand arrows* [which had been] shot ) into the castle, and brought to him the shield k of the centurion Scoeva, in which there were found k a hundred and twenty holes.) a In such enumerations the possessive adjective is often used, of course in agreement, instead of partitive gen., or ex, &c. Caesar, especially, is fond of this construction: thus nostri circiter septuaginta ceciderunt. (Bell. Civ. 1 46. b To be [killed or] missing (i. e. lost in any way), desiderari. EXERCISES 40, 41 287 c * Single ‘ after general negatives, such as nemo, nullus, neque quisqiuim or ullus, is best translated by omnino = ‘at all, in all,’ which extends the meaning strictly to all. Here nemo — omnino. d I. 56, n. e ‘when ( quum) they desired.’ (subj.) f labor (sing.). s ‘ their danger.’ h ‘To count over (again) before any body,’ renumerare cui. i For miMtary mat¬ ters Caesar and Livy are the best authors to copy, but especially Caesar. With respect to compound numerals of this kind, he so nearly always places the thousands first, then the gen., and then the number of thousands, that this is a very good order to follow. Thus, millia passuum decem,; millia hominum circi¬ ter viginti, Ac. I ‘ To shoot ’ (of weapons hurled, as those of the ancients were), conjicere. k ‘ the shield being brought {referre), [there] were found in it,’ Ac. l foramen. Exercise 40. He sends thither M. Valerius with five cohorts of the eighth legion. The people of Veii* as soon as they saw our standards, opened 13 their gates; and all, 0 both inhabitants' 1 and soldiers, came forth e to meet f Valerius with their congratulations : s Sulpicius and Manlius threw themselves down from 3) the wall. Manlius, being brought 11 before 1 Valerius, begs to be senti to Marius. Valerius, with the cohorts and Manlius, returns on the same day that k he had set out [upon his march thither]. Marius incorporated 1 the legions with his own army, and dismissed Manlius unpunished." 1 \ / a Veienses i> V. M. 7. 0 universi. d oppidani (inhabitant? of the town). e exire. f ‘ To meet ’ is generally translated by obviam with a dat., ire {exire, Ac.) obviam alicui. s ‘ congratulating.’ h deduci. i ad. J I. 75. k C. 25. 1 conjungere aliquem cum aliqua re. a incolumis. Exercise 41. I have heard our friend Pomponius say* that he had two soldiers in Spain, rich brothers from 3) the Faliscan territory ; their father f having left them a small country-house , b and a field 0 of certainly 11 not more than one acre, th.ey h formed an apiary e round the whole house, and had a garden [there], and filled up f the rest with thyme, cytisus, and balm/ These h [brothers, he said] used never to make) less, on an average, l than ten thousand sest^tia by j their honey. B I have heard you say, is, audivi te (ipsum) dicere ; audivi, quum diceres, audivi te dicentem. b ‘ to whom when a small country-house had been left by their father.’ c agellus. d sane. e alvearium, i. e. a system of 288 EXERCISES 42, 43. bee-hives. f obsepire. s apiastrum. h Continue this in oblique narration. i ut percoque ducerent. i ‘ to make so much by any thing,’ recipere (with acc. of the thing) ex. Exercise 42. If there is no a food [for them] naturally-growing b [there], the owner ought to sow what bees like lest : c such as d roses, wild- thyme,® balm/ poppies, beans, lentils, peas, basil/ the [sweet- scented] rush/ lucerne, « and especially cytisus, which is extremely good j for them [when] in health. For it begins to flower at k the vernal equinox, and continues [in flower] to the autumnal equinox. But though 1 " this is best for 17 ) [their] health, thyme is best with reference to the n making of honey. 0 For 17) this reason the Sicilian honey bears the * palm, becauseP the thyme is there good and abundant. a ‘not.’ (See p. 257, 103.) b naturalis. c ‘most follow.’ d ‘ these are .’ Obs. All the names are to be in the singular. c serpyllum. f apiastrum, s ocimum. h cyperum. i medica (sc. herba). J utilissimus. fc ‘from,’ ab. l ‘ to the other equinox of autumn.’ What is the word for 'other' of two things? m ‘as this is best—so thyme,’ &c.,ut—sic. n ad. 0 mellificium: p quod. frequens . Exercise 43. (On the Medical Art.) As agriculture [provides] nourishment for healthy bodies, so medicine promises * health to [them when] diseased.' There is 10) indeed nowhere, [where] this [art] does not exist: since b even the most uncivilized® nations are acquainted with herbs and other sim- ple d [remedies] for e the cure f of wounds and diseases. Among 18 ) the Greeks, || however, it was cultivated considerably" more than amongst 11 other nations: and) [yet] even amongst these, not from the first beginning [of their national existence], but [only] a few centuries before us, since) Aesculapius was celebrated as the first inventor [of it] ; who, because he studied somewhat k more pro¬ foundly this science, [which was] still rude and in its infancy ,i was worshipped after his death as a god. m a V. M. II. b siquidem . c imperitissimus. d promptus (i. e. ready at hand). e ' ad. ( auxilium, i. e. help against them, whethei EXERCISES 44, 45. 289 the various kinds of diseases, but only as being accustomed to cure* wounds with the knife ) and medicinal appli¬ cations. 1 ' From which it [plainly] appears,' 80) that these [were] the only branches 1 of medicine which™ they f attempted ; and that [consequently] these are the oldest. And we | may learn [from] the same author," that diseases were referred to the anger of the gods, and that it was l0) from them [that] assistance used to be implored. a Deinde. b 1 Trojan.’ c mediocris. d commilitones. e proponere , with inf. f The regular words after negatives are quisquam and ullus : but aliquis is sometimes found. According to Matthias this is : ‘ when the thing either really exists , or might he supposed to have existed .’ (Ad. Cic. Cat. 1, 6,15.) Use aliquis here : and see I. 160. sin, with abl. h Dod. lues. i V. M. 19. J ferrum. k medicamentum. 1 pars. m DifF. 8 a ‘Author’ is never auctor (but scriptor, &c.) except when, as here, he is our authority for a statement. Exercise 45. (Same subject continued.) And it is * probable, that though there were no remedies x against bad health, yet that men for the most part enjoyed good health , b on account of their good habits* [of life], which neither sloth d nor luxury had corrupted. For 0 it is l0) these two [vices], which first* in Greece, and then 21> amongst 18) ourselves, have injured? [men’s] constitutions. And consequently, 11 this complicated 1 [art of] medicine, ichich was unnecessary in former days, and is so now amongst other nations,) enables* 1 but a very few 1 of us to reach the beginning (pi.) of old age. 290 EXERCISES 46, 47. «■ inter nulla auxilia , followed by gen. *> ‘ yet that it generally .plerumque,; fed-to-men’s-lot (contingere) good.’ c mores. d Dbd. ignavia. e siquidem. f prius , there being only two cases mentioned. s affligere : ‘ constitutions,’ corpora. h V. M. 20. > multiplex. 1 ‘ neithei necessary in former days—nor amongst 18 ) other nations.’ In former days: olim. V. M. 9. k ‘ Enables to reach,’ perducit ad , &c. i vix aliqui. Exercise 46. Sylla with an inferior force* was besieging troops which had yel suffered no loss or disaster , b they being 0 [also] supplied with an abundance of every thing : for every day d a great number of ships arrived from all parts' to bring them provisions : nor could the wind blow from any quarter that was not favourable to some of themf He,s on the other hand, 11 having consumed all the corn round about, 1 was in great distress ;i but yet his men 22) bore their privations k with extraordinary patience. For they called to mindp that, after 17 suffering the same [hardships]) in Bithynia the year before, they, by their exertions and patient endurance, 1 " put an end" to a very formidable 0 war: they rememberedp that, after 17 suffering great distress' 1 before Nicomedia, and much greater still 1 * before Mantinium, they gained a victory 3 over mighty nations. a militum numerus. t> copies integrae atque incolumes. According to Dbd. incolumis and integer both mean ‘ unhurt and untouched :’ integer , opp. to ‘ being attacked ,’ incolumis, to ‘ being wounded.’ Dbd. salvus. c quumilli. d 69,1. t. e undique. f ‘ nor could any wind blow, but (quin) they had a favourable course from some quarter (pars).’ ‘ Could ’ should be the imperfect , as it is an expression of a repeated possibility. S ipse. h autem. i far and wide. } angustiae (a ‘strait’), pi. it ‘these things.’ (See I. 24,) l See I. 24. ra patientia. n confixere. 0 maximus. p I. p. 72, note q. 'i inopia (distress for provisions). * V. M. 21. 8 ‘To gain a victory,’ victorem or victores decedere , with gen. of course. Exercise 47. 1. In the mean time, a L. Sanga, whom Sylla at his departure {p) had left in command of the camp, b being informed [of what was going on], came to the assistance 6 of the cohort with two legions. On his (r) arrival, the Africans were easily repulsed; they did || not d [so much as] stand e the sight f and [first] shock of our [troops], but [as soon as] ( p ) their first ranks were broken,* the rest turned their backs and fled from the field. h But Sango EXERCISE 48. 291 recalled our men, that they might not pursue them to any great distance J 2. Now) many men think, that if he had chosen 24) to pursue them more warmly , k the war might have been terminated on that day : it does not however * appear! that his decision was [justly] censurable : m for the duties" of a lieutenant are one, 0 those of a general another :° the formerP ought to act in every thing ac¬ cording to his instructions ; q the lattei’P to decide without restraint according to what seems best with reference to the whole state of affairs. 1. a I. p. 141, note g. b ‘had placed over the camp,’ praeficere. t I. 242 (1). d neque vero. e ferre. f Ddd. videre. s ‘To break the first ranks,’ primos dejicere. h loco cedere. i longius. 2 ) At. k acrius. i I. 297. m reprehendendus. The ad¬ jectives in - able , -ible, may be translated by the part, in dus, when they mean what ought to be done : not when they mean what can be done. n partes. 0 I. 38. p alter — alter. q ad praescriptum libere ad summam rerum consulere. Exercise 48. He a disposes his men [along] the 13) works he had begun b to raise, not at certain intervals , c as was done on d the preceding* days, but in a continued line of guards and posts, f so that [the par¬ ties] touched^ * each other, and [all together] filed up the whole line of works. h He orders 1 the military tribunes and officers of the cavalry to patrol [about the works], and begs) them not only to be on their guard against k sallies, but also to keep an eye upon individuals secretly leaving the gates J Nor m was there of the whole [army] a single individual? of so indifferent 0 and sluggish? a mind, as to take a wink of sleep q that night. a ‘ He ’ (of the general), ipse. b instituere. c ‘ certain space being intermitted.’ d ‘ as was the custom of,’ &c. e superior. f perpetuis vigiliis stationibusque. S ‘ disposes, being the historical pres¬ ent. What tenses would both be correct here? I. 414. b munitionem ex¬ plere : explere , to leave no gaps; complere , to fdl as full as a thing will hold, i 1 to order to patrol,’ circummittere. ) hortari , I. 75. k ‘ To be on one's guard against any thing,’ cavere ab aliqua re. 1 ‘ to observe the secret exits ( exitus ) of individuals,’ singuli homines. m neque vero : the vero adding emphasis to the assertion. n ‘any (one).’ What word fer ‘any?’ 1. 389—391. 0 remissus. p languidus. q ‘as to rest,’ can* C uiescere. (See J. 66, note s. Translate according to 1.483 (a).) 292 EXERCISES 49, 50. Exercise 49. (Death of Pol;/carp.) 1. When* they *j* arrived 11 j| there, 25) he being 0 from 3) his age weak in his legs, and [consequently] allowed to ride upon an ass,i a great concourse (pi-) took place both of Jews and Pagans : some' of whom, remembering his old reputation, had compassion { on his age : but most [of them] were * exasperated [against him] from 3) their hatred against” the Christians, and especially because h Poly carpus had prevented the offering of sacrifice * to the gods of their country. 2. Hence when, [upon] being ordered to curse Christ, he saidj that he would never do that to his King and Saviour, he was im¬ mediately handed-over k to the executioners to l) be burnt* alive. When they f were leading him to death, a certain presbyter, with whom he had been intimate," 1 met" him :° [and] said weeping, ‘ O Polycarp, what undeserved treatment art thou receiving !’p he [re¬ plied] ‘But not unexpected 1- [treatment], for many Christian bishops will hereafter 5 meet with this fate /’*• 1. a ubi: what tense? I. 512, 514. b pervenire. I. 296. c quum , with subj. d ‘riding upon an ass/ asino vehi. e Instead of making these principal sentences, connect them with the preceding by quum with subj. Some—but most; alii— plurimi vero. f miserari. ?I, 156. h maxi- meque quod. 2. i Diff. 2. a obviam esse, suffering!’ exitum habere. i sacra Jieri prohibuerat. k tradere. l comburi. m familiariter uti. 0 is quum. p ‘ what undeserved [things] thou art q huic ille. r inopinatus. 8 deinde. <• hunc Exercise 50. It is [kind in you and] like a brother 11 to exhort 13 me, but [you exhort me who am] now 7 , by Hercules, b running [apace, that way myself, so] that I lavish 0 all my [assiduous] attentions' 1 upon 1 ® him® alone. Nay, f I shall perhaps^ with my ardent zeal accom¬ plish 11 what often happens to travellers, :j:when they make haste;* [I mean] that as [they], if they have happened 20 to rise later than they intended/ [yet] by quickening their speed* they arrive even earlier* at their journey'’s end, m than if they had lain awake all the morning ; u so I, since I have so long overslept myself 0 in the oh EXERCISES 51, 52. 293 servanceP of this man, [though], by Hercules, you have many a time tried to awake me,* will make up for r my laziness by running. a frateme (adv.). b mehercule. The now' is to be made emphatic by quidem. 0 conferre . Why, b you cannot, by pardoning the guilty,° secure* 1 the safety of the inno¬ cent. a quaerere. b at. 4 V. M. 2. d ‘ by making very great outlays.’ sumptus. e conferre. (opes. £ nocentes. h custodire (guard). Exercise 56. Even the bravest men have not, except in extreme necessity, fiung their lives away a for the sake of avoiding some a disgrace : as [for instance] P. Crassus Mucianus, [when] conducting 13 the war against Aristonicus in Asia, being taken [prisoner] between Elsea and Smyrna by [some] Thracians, of whom that prince c had a large force in his fortified towns, d that he might not fall into his hands,* escaped [this] disgrace by a voluntary death J For he is reported to have thrust" his riding-stick h into the eye of one of the barbarians : who [then], enraged* by the violence of the pain, stabbed Crassus with his dagger in the side,] and [thus], whilst k he avenged himself, delivered a Roman general from the dis¬ graceful violation i of his dignity." 3 a ‘ sought death voluntarily,’ mortem ullro oppetere. Some, I. 392. b gerere ( bellum cum). c Only a pronoun. d ‘ had a great number in garrison.’ e in ditionem ejus pervenire. l arcessita ratio mortis. £ dirigere. b a riding stick, virga , qua aliquis ad regendum equum utitur. The tense of the verb, of course, to be altered according to circumstances. « accendi. J ‘ stabbed (< confodere ) Crassus’s side with his dagger.’ k I. 509. * turpitudo. m majestas: which Cic attributes to consuls, judges, &c. Exercise 57. It was ever my persuasion , a that* 3 all friendships should be maim tained 0 with a religious exactness , d but especially* those which* 296 EXERCISES 58 , 59 . are renewed® after 27) a quarrel : h because* in friendships [hith erto] uninterrupted) a failure k of duty is easily excused* by a plea m of inadvertency, or, to '> put a worse construction n upon it, of negligence : [whereas] if, after a reconciliation, 0 any [new] offence be given, r it does not pass for negligent , but wilful : q and is not * imputed 21 to inadvertency, but to perfidy. a II ‘ I have always thought.’ b Connect these two clauses by quum—turn Jboth — and). c tueri. d ‘ with the greatest scrupulousness ( religio ) and fidelity.’ e ‘ In quum—turn, the turn is often strengthened by vero, certe etiam , praecipue, maxime .’ f I. 476. ® reconciliari in gratiam. h inimicitia;, pi. i propterea quod. 1 integer. k praetermittere. l defendere. m excusatio. n gravius interpretari. 0 reditus in gratiam. P ‘any thing is committed.’ I. 389—91. q ‘ is not thought neglected, but violated.’ Exercise 58. Having called together his men for the purpose of addressing them,* ‘Know,’ he says, ‘that in a very few days from this time , b the king will be here' with ten legions, thirty thousand horse, a hundred thousand light-armed d [troops], and e three hundred elephants. Therefore let certain persons cease to inquire or * imagine [any thing] beyond [this], and let them believe me, who have certain knowledge ; f or, assuredly,® I will order them (p) to be put on board h the oldest vessels [in the service], and to be carried to whatever country the wind may happen to take them.’ a ‘ to an assembly.’ ad concionem vocare , advocare, or convocare. — in concionem advocare. (M. L. 4.) b The pron. hic. in agreement with ‘ days.’ In I. 311, paucis his diebus is given for ‘ a few days ago.’ > It may also mean ‘ within a few days ;’ the hie marks nearness to the speaker (i. e. to the time of his speaking), on either side. c adesse. d levis armatur ce. e Diff. 88. f See above, Ex. 3, c. compertum habere. Compare perspectum habere, absolutum habere. I. 364. s aut quidem : the quidem adding emphasis to the aut. h V. M. 23 i 1 by any wind whatever into any lands whatever.’ quicunque. Exercise 59. On 16) his approach being announced, L. Plancus, who ^com¬ manded the legions, being compelled by the critical state of affairs ,* takes [a position on] a rising ground, and draws up his army in two divisions' 6 facing different ways,' that he may not (414) be EXERCISE 60 . 297 surrounded by the cavalry. Thus, though his forces were infe¬ rior , d he kept his ground' against furious charges [both] of the legions and of the cavalry. When (p) the cavalry were already engaged, both parties f behold at a distance f the standards of two legions, which V. Attius had sent from the upper bridge to the support" of our troops, anticipating what really occurred, h that* the generals of the opposite party would use the opportunity unex¬ pectedly offered them, to fall upon our men. By the approach of these (r) legions the battle was broken off,] and each general marched back his legions to his camp. a necessaria res. b pars. c diversus , in agreement with acies. d ‘ having engaged ( congredi ) with an unequal number.’ e sustinere (to support: to bear without yielding). Use the historical present. f V. M. 24. s subsidium. Use the construction I. 242. h ‘ suspecting [that] that would be, which happened,’ accidere or contingere. Why 1 M. L. 1. i 5 Ut is sometimes used (with subj.) as explanatory of a demonstrative pronoun,- where quod might rather have been expected, or the acc. and inf. J Pres, nistor.— dirimere. Exercise 60. Whilst he was preparing and carrying out a these [plans], he sends his lieutenant, C. Fabius, before him into Spain, with three legions, which he had put into winter-quarters at Narbo and its neighbourhood ; b and directs that the passes' of the Pyrenees should be quickly seized, which L. Valerius fwas then occu¬ pying with his troops the other legions, which were in more remote winter-quarters, e he orders to follow. Fabius, according to his instructions, { having made great despatch, clears the pass,z and proceeded by forced marches against Valerius’s army. ft administrare. b circum ea loca. c saltus. So saltus Ther¬ mopylarum. (Liv.) d praesidia. e ‘ which were-in-winter-quarters (/uema re) further-off.’ f ‘as had been commanded.’ % praesidium ex saltu dejicere : dejicere in this sense is a technical term of military science. ON THE TENSES IN A LETTER. 1. It is a peculiarity in Roman letter-writing, that the writer puts himself (as it were) in the time when the letter will be re¬ ceived, and thus speaks of what he is doing, as what he was doing : 13 * 298 EXERCISE 61 . and so uses the imperfect and pluperfect instead of the present and 2. Thus: ‘I have nothing to write,’ nihil ha l eh am quod scriberem : ‘I have heard no news,’ nihil novi audier am. And this extends to the adverbs : instead of ‘ yesterday ,’ we find ‘ the day before .’ 3. To see that these are the tenses the receiver would use, sup¬ pose him relating the substance of such a letter: tum quum Cicero hanc epistolam scripsit, nihil habebat quod scriberet, neque enim novi quidquam audierat, et ad omnes meas epistolas r e- scripserat pridie, Spe, 4. But general truths and statements that are not made rela¬ tively to the time of writing stand in the usual tenses (e. g. ego te maximi et feci semper et facio) : nor does the use of the imperf. and pluperf. always occur where it might stand. Exercise 61. Although I have nothing to write, a and moreover *[ am possessed by a 27 strange unwillingness 1 to write 6) [at all], yet I am unwil¬ ling that this good-for-nothing 0 [lad of] mine should go to your neighbourhood 01 without [any] letters of mineto you. I love you more every day, c because I am * persuaded that you' •|Tove f your studies* in the same way. But I would wish you to write to me an accurate statement h with what * author you are now engaged, whether Cicero or Terence, or as* 1 would rather [have it], with both ? You ought also to take painsj to employ, in what you write k to me, the phrases 1 which you have observed in their works : that this™ itself may be a proof" to me of the * accuracy ivith which you read them. 0 Farewell. Tibur, Aug. 28. a Use the favorite form nihil cst quod (477). b odium. 0 verbero (onis ). d What adv. expresses ‘ to where you are/ ‘ to your neighbourhood?’ I. 387. e Distinguish between quotidie , indies. Which is used in both senses? I. 69, t f To be expressed by the passive voice, to avoid the ambiguity which the two accusatives would occasion, ‘amuse yourself/ oblectare. See Dbd. oblectatio. ? litterarum studia. h ‘ ^accurately.’ i ‘ which.’ i dare ojperam (followed by ut). k shall write — shall have observed ( notare ): the conduct being recommended as what should be followed in future. i loquendi genera. m Express res. n Jidem facere cujus rei. 0 1 of your ♦accu¬ racy in reading them.* EXERCISES 62, 63. Exercise 62. 299 If I had as often 1 encountered 1 * toils and dangers against' you and my country, and our household-gods, as I have from the be¬ ginning* of my manhood j - scattered by my arms your most wicked enemies, and •|'won d safety for you, you could not have decided 9 any thing more against me in my absence, O Conscript Fathers, than you have hitherto been doing. You first f hurried me off, though not yet of the legal agef to a most cruel war, and then* destroyed me, with my most deserving army, by hunger, the most wretched of all deaths. 37 Was this the hope with which the Ro¬ man people sent out her children to war ? are these the rewards for our w r ounds, and for 13 our so often shedding our blood for our country ? Being tired of writing and sending messengers, I have exhausted all my private resources and expectations, whilst 11 you all the time have in three years sent the pay of scarcely one year.» ft ‘ so many ’ [toils, &c.]. A sentence is occasionally arranged in this not strictly accurate way, where tot refers to quoties. (Thus Cic. pro Balbo, 20; si tot consulibus meruisset, quoties ipse consul fuisset.) ‘ under my command,’ ductu meo. b suscipere. c I. 179. queerere (which is often used of a successful search : nearly c= invenire). e To ( do,’ when used in this way as the representative of a preceding verb (here to be doing — to be deciding), is mos\\y facere, but sometimes agere : e. g. Sail. Cat. 52,19. f First—then may often be translated by turning the verb with ( frst ’ into a past participle thus ‘me, being hastened away—you destroyed,’ &c. ‘To hurry a man off projicere (if he be sent away recklessly, to be never cared for afterwards). e 1 against [my] age,’ contra aetatem. t» quum — interim, words often used Indignantly of conduct that is a strong contrast to what it should have been. i ‘ scarcely one-year’s pay has been given by you.’ One-year’s, annuus. Pay, stipendium; but sumptus when considered as given to the commander-in-chief to defray with it all the expenses of the war. Exercise 63. (The same subject continued.) By the immortal gods, is it 1 " that you think I serve-" 1 for a trea¬ sury ? or that I can have an army without provisions and pay ? I confess that I set out for this war with more zeal than prudence ; seeing that b (p) though I had received from you only the name of general,* I raised an army in forty days, and drove back d the enemy, ( p ) who were already hanging over Italy, 9 from the Alps 300 EXERCISE 64 . into Spain. Over f these [mountains] I opened* a different* road from [that which] Hannibal [opened], and [one] more convenient for us. I recovered Gaul, the Pyrenees, Laletania, the Indigetes ; and with newly-raised* troops, and much inferior [in number], stoodj the first attack of the victorious 0 Sertorius : and [then] spent the winter in camp, amongst the most savage enemies ; not in the towns, or with any such indulgence to my troops as a regard to my own popularity with them would have suggested . k B praestare vicem (alicujus rei ). b quippe qui : here with indic. I. 482. c ‘ of a command,’ imperium. d summovere. e in cervicibus jam Italice agere. Nearly so: nunc in cervicibus sumus, ‘ are immediately upon them bellum ingens in cervicibus erat, ‘impended:’ both Liv. f per. s V. M. 7. h ‘ different from,’ alius atque. i novus. j sustinere. k ex ambitione mea. The kind of ambitio meant, is the courting popularity with an army by allowing it such indulgences as comfortable winter quarters, &c. Exercise 64. (The same subject continued .) Why should I go on to enumerate 81 the battles [I have fought], my winter expeditions, or the towns ( p ) that I have retaken or destroyed ? since facts are stronger 1 * than words. The taking e of the enemy’s camp at the Sucro, c the battle at the Durius, d the (p) utter destruction 6 of C. Herennius, the general of our enemies, with Valentia, and his whole army, are apparent enough to you: and for these (r) [benefits] you give us in return,* ye grateful Fathers, want and famine. And thus the condition of my army and that of my enemies is the same: for pay is given to neither h [of them]: and each, [if] || victorious, may come into Italy. [Wherefore] I advise and beseech you to* attend to this (r), and not compel me, by my necessities, to consult my own interests apart from those of the state.) * ‘Why should I after this (dein, for deinde ) enumerate?’ b ‘the thing (sing.) has more weight.’ plus valere. c The Xucar. d The Douro. • Use participles. I. 359. ( clarus. s reddere. h ‘is given to neither.’ * I. 75. 1 privatim. 301 EXERCISES 65 , 66 . Exercise 65. (The same subject continued.) Either I (pi.) or Sertorius have laid waste the whole of hither Spain, and cut off all its inhabitants ; a except the maritime cities, which [are however only] an additional 15 burden and expense to us. Last year [indeed] Gaul maintained* the army of Metellus with money and corn, but now, in consequence of a bad harvest , d that [country] hardly supports itself '. e [For myself] I have ex¬ hausted f not only my private fortune, but also my credit. You [alone] remain: and, unless you (r) succour us, the army, and with it the whole Spanish war, will remove? itself from this country h into Italy, ^ against my will, indeed, but according to my predictions A a ‘ have wasted hither Spain to extermination, 5 ad internecionem vastare. b Express by the adv. ultro (properly meaning, ‘further on 5 ). See I. 237. c alere. d malis fructibus. e ‘ itself hardly gets on. 5 agitare, t consumere. ? transgredi. h ‘ hence. 5 i ‘ I being unwilling and [yet] foretelling. 5 Exercise 66. Herennius, since his rear a was pressed by the cavalry, and he saw the enemy before him, ( p ) when he had reached 15 a certain hill, halted there. From this he despatched* four cohorts of tar geteers d to the highest of all the hills in sight ; e and orders them tc make all possible haste to take possession of this , f with the intention of following* them with all his troops, and, changing his route, reach Octogesa by the hills. As the targeteers were making for this hill in an oblique line, the cavalry of Marius (p) saw [themj *md charged the cohorts; wiiO h did not stand for a single moment against the impetuosity of the cavalry, but (p) were surrounded by them, and all cut to pieces in the sight of both armies. a novissimum agmen. b nancisci. c mittere. Use the histori¬ cal present. d cetrati. e ‘ to a hill which was the highest of all in sight. 5 Dbd. videre (4). f magno cursu concitatos occupare. c ‘with that intention, that he- would follow. 5 h ‘nordid the targeteers stand, 5 &c. 302 EXERCISES 67, 68 Exercise 67. I have received your three 345 letters: but in the last there were some [parts] so carelessly written, that it was plain 4 you were thinking of something else when you wrote it. I will show you these [faults], when I come to your part of the world ; b and shall pull your ear, c that you may be for the future more attentive when you write, A and avoid at least such blunders,® as even little boys f would avoid, who are learning their accidence.® Do not, however, be distressed by this admonition of mine: for I do not wish to f take away any h [thing] by it from your cheerfulness, but | to add [somewhat] to your attention. Adieu. Tibur, 23 Sept. a 1 it is plain, 5 facile constat : ‘ to be thinking of something else, 5 aliud agere . b ‘ to where you are : 5 to be expressed by an adv. derived from iste , the demon¬ strative of the second person. I. 387. c auriculam pervellere. d ‘in writing. 5 e error ox soloecismus (a solecism). f puerulus, a ‘ to be learning one’s accidence, 5 primis literis imbui. b I. 389—391. Exercise 68. Your letter gave me much pleasure,* as every thing [does] that proceeds 15 from you, although you had committed many 0 [faults] in it. But as lisping children 1 * are listened to with delight 6 by fathers, and even their very mistakes are a pleasure to them, so this your infancy of letter-writing { is delightful to me. I send you it® back corrected by my own hand. For so, you know, we agreed. h Do you, dear, dear * Alexander, pursue with spirit! the path, to which your natural disposition leads you, and which 1 have always exhorted and urged you to follow.* I have, by my report* [of you], raised great expectations in the minds of your parents : m and you must now take all possible pains" that neither I nor they fmay be disappointed 0 in them (r). Adieu. Tibur, July 7, 1570. a ‘ [was] II sweet to me. 5 b proficisci ( ab aliquo). c By multa peccare, d filioli. e libenter. f in literis. s ‘it itself. 5 h ‘ We agree [to do any thing], 5 convenit inter nos. i dulcissime ac suavissime. ) magno animo. k ‘and I have always been yourexhorterand impeller. 5 1 testi¬ monium. ,n magnam spem ( alicujus ) apud ( aliquem ) concitare. n omni urd ac studio providere. 0 spes fallit aliquem. CAUTIONS. 1. (a) Take care not to translate the English inf., when it expresses a purpose, by the Latin infinitive.—To make out whether the infin. expresses a purpose, try whether you can substitute for it ‘ in order that ,’ or ‘ that.' (6) The infin. after 'have,' ‘is,’ is to be translated by the part, in dus. with the proper tense of esse. (En °-) $ * ^ wx>e somet hing to do. ° ( There is something for me to do. (Lat.) Something is to be done by me. (c) ‘ There is something for me to do,' may also mean, ‘ there is somethings which I may do' est aliquid, quod a g am. 1 2. In translating ‘ ago' by abhinc, remember, (1) that it must precede the numeral; (2) that the numeral must be a cardinal, not an ordinal, nu¬ meral ; and (3) that the accusative is more common than the abl. (а) Hence abhinc annos quatuordecim is right; tertio abhinc anno, quarto decimo abhinc die, doubly wrong; tribus abhinc annis, or tres abhinc annos, wrong. « 3. Take care not to translate from' by ‘a’ or ‘ ab' in the following con¬ structions :— (1) To derive or receive pleasure, pain, profit, &c.,from, capere voluptatem , dolorem, fructum, desiderium ex (not ab) aliqua, re. (2) To hear from any body, audire ex aliquo. (3) ‘ From [being] such—becomes so and so.’— ex. (4) From such a district, town, Ac. (it being a man’s birth-place or resi¬ dence) — ex. (5) To recover from a disease, convalescere ex morbo. (б) To return/rowi a journey, redire, reverti ex itinere. (7) From, = ‘ on account of,’ propter. 1 From their hatred against an> body.’ (8) To fling or throw oneself from aw r all, se de muro dejicere {Cues.): see* muro praecipitare ( Cic.). (9) From, = out of ex. « 4 . When a substantive is followed by a relative clause which defines it, be careful not to omit the demonstrative is, ea, id, or ille (rfthere is empha¬ sis), with the substantive, if a particular thing is meant. To determine this, try whether you cannot substitute ‘ that' for ‘a’ or 'the.' (a) Thus : ‘ the oration which he delivered,’ Ac. ( = that particular oration which he delivered), e a oratio, quam habuit, Ac. (6) So, when a substantive is defined by a relative adverb, the'a or 'the' is to be translated by a pron. Thus : 304 CAUTIONS. (Eng.) There will be a day, when , &c. ( Lat .) There will be that day, when , &c. ( quum ). (Eng.) The day will come, when , &c. (Lat.) That day will come, when, Sic. (quum). [Comp. Caution 1». * 5 Be very careful not to translate the English infinitive after a substantive oi adjective, by the Lat. infinitive, unless you have authority for it. Al¬ ways consider what the relation is, in which the infinitive stands. Can it be translated by a gerund in di? by ad with the gerundive (a partici¬ ple in dus) 1 by a relative clause , &c. 'I Thus: A desire to pray, =r a desire ofi praying. A knife to cut my bread with, — (1) a knife for cutting my bread ; (2) a knife, with which I may cut my bread. » Obs. The for cutting my bread ’ will not in Latin depend on knife, but on the verb: e. g. 1 borrowed a knife for cutting my bread with, = for the purpos e of cutting my bread, I borrowed a knife.' * 6. Take care not to translate ‘ assert ’ = ‘ affirm,' by asserere, but by affirmare, confirmare, dicere, docere, pronuntiare, &c.; or, if followed by a not oi other negative, negare. > ?. Take care not to translate c honour' by honor or honos, when it means not ‘ an honour' (i. e. external mark of respect), but ‘ the inward principle of honour' (honestas); or ‘ integrity,' ' trustworthiness' (fides). » 8. From nemo, let me never see i but nullius and nullo : or (after nega- N eminis or nemine ; ( tives) cujusquam, quoquam. 9. When a clause that follows another in English, is to precede it in Latin, it is often necessary to place in it a word from the preceding sentence. Thus : ‘ Alexander was blamed | because he indulged in drinking.’ ‘ Because Alexander indulged in drinking, he was blamed.’ (a) This is especially the case, when a. pronoun in the second clause refers to a substantive in the first. 10. From our having hardly any power of altering the order of words in a sen¬ tence, it is very difficult to give emphasis to an oblique case without placing it in a separate sentence with the verb to be. Thus: ‘ I desire something ’ very much, (the 1 something' being emphatic) would become : ‘ there is something, that I desire very much.’ Hence i §[jr In a sentence beginning with ‘ it is’ or 'it icas' before t that,' the ‘it is' or ‘ it was' is omitted, and the sentence with 'that' made a prin¬ cipal sentence. (Eng.) It is the manufacturers, that I complain of. (Lat.) 1 complain of the manufacturers.* « (a) So in a sentence beginning with ‘ it is but' or 'it was but,' and followed by ‘ that,’ &c. (Eng.) It was but very slowly that he recovered. (Lat.) He did not recover but ( = except, nisi) very slowly. 11- * The boy has but a stupid head, Who always for a ‘ but' puts sed * Instead of 'that,' which is here a relative, who or which may occur. * ft it tne farmers of whom I complain.’ CAUTIONS. 305 Or at: for other meanings ‘ but ’ has got: ‘ Only? ' except? 'at least? or 'who' with 'not.' (1) ‘ Stay but one day * = stay only one day ( solum or modo). (2) ‘Do but stay ’ = at least (or at all events) stay (saltem). (3) ‘ Nobody but Caesar’ = nobody except Caesar (nisi or praeter). (4) ‘There is nobody but thinks’ = there is nobody who does not thini (quin or qui non). (5) ‘ Not to doubt but or but that ' . . . — non dubitare quin, &c. * 12- ‘ No ' before another adjective, as in ‘ a man of no great learning? must be translated by non, not nullus. 13. ‘ The? when it relates to something that preceded, is often to be translated by a demonstrative pronoun. For instance, if it had been mentioned that a day had been fixed, if it were afterwards stated that ‘ the day 5 ar¬ rived, it must be ‘ that day' in Latin. Hence, when ‘ the ' means a particular thing before-mentioned, it must be translated by a demonstrative pronoun. Or, in other words, when for 'the' we might substitute 'that? it must be translated by the demonstrative pronoun. [Compare Caution 4.]* ' 14. • That? in a clause following a comparative with quam, or alius, malle, &c., is not translated. (Eng.) I had rather support my country’s cause than that of a private man. ' (Lat.) Patrice causam malo, quam privati sustinere. • 15. Take care not to translate ‘ of ’ by a gen., in the following constructions:— (a) To deserve well of any body, bene mereri de aliquo. (b) To complain of any thing, queri de aliqua re. (c) To be made of any thing, factum esse ex aliqua re. (d) A book of mine, liber meus. (e) How many of us, three hundred of us, &c. See Pr. Intr. Pt. I. 174, 175. 16. ‘ upon' by super, in the following con Take care not to translate 'on' or structions :— (1) To lavish, &c. — upon any body, conferre — in aliquem. (2) To do any thing on his march, in itinere. (3) To sit on a throne, in solio sedere. (4) On this being known, Upon - , this being known,’ abl. abs. (5) To write on a subject, scribere de (sometimes super) aliqua re. (6) On descrying the troops, ‘ the troops being descried,’ abl. abs. ♦ 17. Take care not to translate ‘ for' by pro, in the following constructions:— (1) For many reasons, multis de causis. For which reason, qua de causa. Cic. For a weighty reason, gravi de causa. Cic. The reasons for which, . . . causae, propter quas, &c. ♦ I have inadvertently referred sometimes to this Caution instead of to Cau¬ tion 4. 806 CAUTIONS. For that reason, ob eam causam. Cic. For this reason, propter hoc. (2) Good or useful for any purpose, utilis ad aliquid. Fit/or, aptus or idoneus ad aliquid : also dative. * (3) For, = a cause, abl. * (4) For = concerning , e. g. to battle for any thing, de aliqua re. (5) My reaso nfor not doing this, causa non fa ciendce hujus rei. 18. Amongst , before the name of a nation, amongst whom a habit prevailed, is usually apud (not inter): sometimes ‘ in ’ with abl. 19. When two substantives are governed by the same preposition, the preposition is repeated, unless the two substantives are to form, as it were, one com¬ plex notion. Hence they are repeated whenever the two substantives are opposed to each other. Hence in (а) et — et; nec—nec; . . . always repeat the preposition. (б) out — aut; vel—vel ) after nisi, > generally: it is better, therefore, after quam following a comparative, ' to repeat it.* * Thus : et in bello et in pace: nec in bello nec in pace: in nulla alia re nisi in virtute : in nulla alia re quam in virtute. 20. Take care not to use apparere when ‘ appears’ — ‘ seems ’ (videtur) : nor to use videri (but apparere ) when appears = ‘ is manifest;’ or ‘ makes its appearance.’ 21. % A boy who is thoughtful is never perplext. By ‘ then’s’ meaning ‘at that time ,’ and £ therefore’ and ‘ next.’ * (a) Then, =■ ‘ at that time,’ turn tunc; = ‘ next,’ deinde; = ‘ there¬ fore,’ igitur, &c. 22. ‘ Men ’ is often used for ‘ soldiers,’ milites. 1 His men ’ should be ‘ sui,’ if there is any reference to their commander: if not, milites, 1 the soldiers’ 23. ‘ Before’ a town should bead, not ante. See I. 457. 24. Choose often means, to ‘ wish,’ to ‘ be pleased,’ &c., velle, not eligere, &c. : e. g. ‘if you had chosen to do this’ (si voluisses). 25. In modern English there is often used for thither, and must be translated by the adverbs meaning 1 to that place’ (huc, illuc , &c.) 26. ‘ Crime’ is not crimen (which is 1 a charge,’ ‘ an accusation’) but scelus, faci¬ nus, &c. 27. Take care not to translate after by post, in the following constructions : (1) To be reconciled after a quarrel, reconciliarim gratiam ex inimicitiis, &c (2) Immediately after the battle, confestim a pr oelio. 28. Take care not to translate in by ‘ in,’ in the following construction : (1) It is written in Greek authors, scriptum cst apud Crrcccos. 29. 11 In 1 this is life,’ let ‘this’ with ‘life’ agree: Hoc id, or illud, barbarous would be. 30. ‘ Ought’ is a word that requires care : for it is often translated by an lm- * Sometimes a common preposition preceding the conjunction is not repeated *vith et — et ; aut—aut; e. g. cum et nocturno et diurno metu. CAUTIONS. 307 perfect or fut. indicative, where our idiom would lead us to use the present. (a) When a present duty , &c., exists, but is not acted upon, the imperfect is often used, especially when it is a general duty. (Madvig. 308.) * HjT Hence, when l you ought ' — ‘ you ought (but do not),’ use debe¬ bam or oportebat. & (b) When ought refers to what will be right or proper, when or after some¬ thing has taken place, use oportebit , debebo. (1) The ‘ after ' is often implied by an abl. absol., the participle being of the passive voice. ' 31. Remember the care with which the Romans mark both the completion of every precedent action, and the futurity of every future action. * (a) Remember that the fut. perf. of direct becomes the pluperf. subj. in oblique narration. * 32. When one verb has ‘ indeed' and the next ‘ but ,’ take care not to omit the pronoun in Latin, if the nom. to the verb is a pronoun. (a) This pronoun should be followed by the quidem : if it is ego , write equi¬ dem for ego quidem.* (Eng.) He did not indeed laugh, but he smiled. ( Lat .) Non risit ille quidem , sed subrisit. ' 33. When for 'so that' (introducing a consequence) you could put l in such a manner , that' take care not to use ut only, but ita — ut , placing the ita in the preceding sentence. * 34. Take care to use a distributive numeral instead of a cardinal one, with a plural noun used in a singular sense, as Uteros, castra , &c. % But observe, uni and terni are used, not singuli or trini. * For equidem , though probably not compounded of ego quidem , is yet used where quidem with the personal pronoun would be used for the second or third person. TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM : English. 1 All—who or which, «fee. ) All men—who. £ 2. This was not done till afterwards. Nothing is beautiful, but what. Those things only are beautiful, which. 3. What do you mean by a wooden wall ? 4. I am reproached with ignorance. Participial Substantive. * 5. [Nom.] Grieving. Your sparing the conquered is a great thing. 6. [Acc.] Grieving. "• 7. From, with part, subst.:— (1) To prevent any thing from being done. (2) Either/?-om thinking, that, «fee. (3) He did it from remembering. (4) Far from doing this, &c. (5) Not from despising—but be¬ cause, «fee. • 8. By :— [The most usual way is the gerund in do; or partic. in dus (in agreement).] Latin. Often:— all — as-many-as (omnes — quotquot) : which is stronger; — all icithout exception. This was done afterwards at length {postea demum). Those things at length {ea demum) which. Quem tu intelligis murum ligneum 7 Ignorance is objected {objicitur or ex probratur, which is stronger) to mi Dolere. It is a great thing, that you have spare, the conquered. [Magnum est, quod victis pepercisti.'] Dolere. [ Se peccati insimulant , quod deler> intermiserin t . ] Prohibere — aliquid fieri* {rare). ■ - n e fiat. - quominus fiat. Sive eo quod — existimar ent,& c Ex eo quod meminisset, «fee. Tantum abest , ut hoc faciat , ut, «fee. Non quod aspernaretur — sed quod, «fee. * Principally with the inf. pass.: ignes fieri in castris prohibet (Caes.) * prohibuit migrari Veios (Liv.). 309 TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. English. By doing this. 9. In :— To be wrong in thinking, &c. ♦ .0. Without:— (1) He did any thing without being asked. (2) He went away without reading the letter. (3) Many praise poets without under¬ standing them. (4) He never praised him without adding, tic. Nor ever saw him without calling im a fratricide. (6) I enjoy any thing indeed , but not without perceiving , tic. (7) I enjoy any thing without per¬ ceiving, &c. 11. To:—Generally ad , with part, in dus. See Obs. on For. 12. Through :—By part, in dus, abl. of gerund ; or by ex eo quod with subj. See Df. 7, From ( 2 ). ♦ *12. Of: —The gerund in di, or the part, in dus, in the gen., is the most usual form ; but these forms do not always serve. (1) ‘ Let nobody repent o f h a v i n g preferred following,’ &c. ‘I do not despair of there e i n g some one,’ &c. (3) ‘I think he should repent of having given up his opinion.’ (4) ‘Theyaccused Socrates of cor¬ rupting,’ &c. .(5) ‘ Instead of.' See 32. ♦ 13. For :— (1) ‘ Pardon me f o r writing.’ ‘ To revile, abuse a man for avingdone any thing.’ (3) ‘ Many reasons occurred to me for thinking,’ accomplishments. Their ) 17. After with the participial subst. is mostly translated by the perf. participle. 18. It is kind in you to ask me, &c. 19. I shall accomplish ichat, &c. 20. If they happen to do, &c. 21. It is ascribed, &c. (of a general truth). 22. And then Aristotle ! (i. e. is not he a case in point ? &c. in appeals introduced in an argument.) 23. A. is right in saying. 24. From which. 25. It seems likely [enough] that he will call, &c. 26. For — not , &c. 27. A strange fury. 28. Must (of a necessary inference). See to what a condition the state must come. He must have made great progress. What progress he must have made ! 29. To be on the point of being killed. * To be on the point to run. 30. lta, sic are often used where they seem superfluous, e. g. * (1) With verbs of hearing, learning, affirming, doubting , cf-c.—They are then generally followed by the in- fin. (if the verb would otherwise be so constructed), or with ut and the subj. (2) Also in adverbial sentences of equality: He thinks as he speaks. To do any thing as if, &c. It is as is said. 31. In the case of the Nervii. 32. Participial substantive with ‘in¬ stead of.’ Latin. Prope nullus. Nemo fere. Sometimes : ‘ the accomplishments* which are in you, him , them,' &c. ( (Eng.) After having suffered (or suf¬ fering) this, I went, &c. (Lat.) Having suffered this, I went, [ &c. (Eng.) After consuming the corn, he went, &c. h (Lat.) The corn being consumed, he ( went, &c. You act kindly indeed, (in) that you ask me. ( facis amice tu quidem, quod me rogas, &c.) (Often) I shall accomplish that ( hoc or illud), quod, &c.: i. e. the dem. pron. is often inserted. If perchance they do, &c. (siforte). It is wont (solet) to be ascribed. (Often: not always.) What Aristotle? Quid Aristoteles ? A. rightly says (rede). Often ‘ whence unde. He seems about-to-call (videtur voca¬ turus). Neque enim : but non enim is not un¬ common even in Cic.; and is to be preferred, when there is any anti¬ thesis : i. e. when followed by a ‘ but.' A certain strange fury (quidam after the adj.—this addition of quidam to an adj. is very common). Cic. often translates this by putare. Vide quern in locum rempublicam ven¬ turam putetis. Putandus est multum profecisse. Quos progressus eum putamus fecisse ! In eo esse ut interficeretur; or with part, in rus with jam. Jam cursurum esse. Examples.—1. Sic a majoribus suis ac¬ ceperant, tanta esse beneficia, &c. C. —2. Quum sibi ita persuasisset ipse, meas — literas, &c.(withinfn.) C. —3. Se ita a patribus didicisse, ut magis virtute quam dolo contend¬ erent. Cces. —4. Ita Helvetios- institutos esse, ut -consuerint, &c. Cces. —5. Ita enim definit, ut pertur¬ batio sit. Ita sentit ut loquitur. Ita facere aliquid— tanquam. Est ita ut dicitur. In Nerviis. TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 311 English. u (1) Instead of reading, &c. * (2) Why do you laugh instead of crying ?' * 33. Participial subst. with 1 far from .’ (1) Far from doing this, he does that, &c. * (2) To be far from doing any thing. » (3) To be not far from doing, &c. 34. (1) A, B, C, and such, &c. > -similar, &c. $ (2) A, B, C, and the rest. ) --others. ) 35. Despairing. * 36. Not very ancient. 37. The most wretched of all s t a t e s. * 38. The very celebrated Cicero. Latin. Quumpossit, or qimm debeat le¬ gere, &c., according as the thing not done was a duly omitted, or merely a thing that might have been done. Cur rides ac non potius lacrima¬ ris? (1) Fantum abest ut —ut (with subj.)— or, if the verb has a ‘not’ with it, tantum abest ut — ut ne — quidem, &c. (2) Longe abesse ut, &c. (e. g. ille lon¬ gissime aberit, ut credat, &c.) (3) Paulum, haud or non multum, or haud procul abesse, ut, &c. Obs. The abesse is to be used im- personally. A, B, C, such. - similar. A, B, C, the rest. A, B, C, others. Since he despairs. } Consider which Since he despaired. > form should be (Qiium with subj.) ) used. Not so ancient, non ita antiquus: but non valde, non admodum, are not bar¬ barous, as some teach. The most wretched state of all. Cicero, a very celebrated man. Cicero, vir clarissimus. MEMORIAL LINES. 1. Contingit use of things we like, But accidit when evils strike. 2. From nemo let me never see Neminis or nemine. Use nullius , nulla. 3. For crime let crimen never come, But scelus, facinus, fagitium. 4. When the word ‘ men' means { soldiers,' these Should rendered be b y milites. 5. The boy has but a stupid head, Who always for a ‘but' puts sed Or at: for other meanings ‘ but ' has got; 1 Only,' 'except,' 1 at least,' and ‘ who ’ with ‘not. (See Caution it., 6. A boy who is thoughtful is never perplext By then's meaning ‘ at that time' and ‘ therefore' and ‘ next.* * (See Caution 2L) 7. In ‘ this is life' let 1 this' with ‘ life' agree; Hoc, id or illud barbarous would be. 8. In ‘so many apiece 5 leave apiece quite alone ; But of numerals use a distributive one. 9. After these impersonals ut Or ne will be correctly put: Contingit, evenit, or accidit, With restat, reliquum est and fit. °- 10. Let ‘that' translated be by quo, When with comparatives it does go. 11. Vereor ne, I fear he will; Vereor ut, I fear he won't: Turn fut. by subjunctive present After fear: forget it don’t. 12. By ut translate infinitive With ask, command, advise, and strive .b But never be this rule forgot: Put ne for ut when there’s a not. a So after sequitur sometimes. * » b Under ask are included beg, pray, beseech, &c.; under command, charge direct, &c. ; under advise, exhort, admonish, persuade , impel , induce, &c. f VERSUS MEMORIALES, 1. Sumimus usuri, capimusque ut possideamus ; a Prendunturque manu volumus quoscunque tenere. 2. Q,ui quaerit reperit, non quaesita inveni uNTUR.b 3. Navis, equus, currusque vehunt; portabit asellus Pondera, PORTABUNTque humeri : leviora feruntur. Loeva gerit clipeum, vestesque geruntur et arma. 4. Tu succende rogum ; taedas accende facesque. 5. Vilia despicimus : contemne pericula, miles; Sperne voluptates, foedasque libidinis escas. c 6. Pars ore: est litus : retinentur flumina ripis. 7. Clausa aut tecta aperi : patefit quod restat aper tum A 8. Rarius interdum quam nonnunquam esse memento. 9. Olim praeteritum spectatqu e futurum. 6 10. Bis terq.ue augebit, minuet bis terve notatum. 11. Mens egra est, eorpusque egrum : de corpore solo TEgrotum dicas : fiunt animalia tantum. Morbida, non homines: haec tu discrimina serves. 12. De spatio nusquam dicas, de tempore nunquam. 13. Plebs sciscit, jubet at populus, censeique senatus. 14. Nemo ablativum nec habet, nec habet genitivum | 15. Particulas si, ecquid-, nisi, ne num forte sequatur.f a But capere arma occurs as well as sumere arma. b This is true of reperire, but invenire is the general term for 1 finding, even after search or examination. * c Despicere relates to what we might value or respect: contemnere to what we might fear or think important: spernere to what we might accept, or to ob jects that we might pursue. 0 d Hence aperire os (never patefacere) : oculos aperire or pat efa cere: portas (fores, ostium) aperire or patefacere ; viam aperire, (for one occasion), patefacere (to tb"nw it open). Aperire is also 1 to make a Hung visible.' Patefa¬ cere often implies the permanent removal of obstacles. » e Hence olim—formerly, informer days once upon a time, and hereafter. * % f That is, perhaps or perchance must never he forte (but fortasse with indie.) except after the particles si, &c. The real meaning of forte is ‘ by accident,' ‘ by chance,' and it does not lose this meaning after si, &c.: this is also the original meaning of perchance, perhaps. 14 314 VERSUS MEMORIALES. 16. Dat - fido, - fici or, facio sed dat tibi -fio.S 17. Quicquid habet pennas ‘volucris ’ complectitur: ales Magna avis est: oscen praedicit voce futura. 18. Ne potius quam non post dum, modo , dummodo dicas. 19. Et morbum et morbi spectat medicamina sano : ^Egrotum medeor spectat medicumque peritum. 20. ‘ Atque igitur ' pravum est ‘ igiturquc:' — ‘ideoque’ Latinum eat.* 21. ‘ Major adhuc' Romae dicebat serior aetas : Cum Cicerone ‘ etiam' sed tu, et cum Caesare dicas.» 22. Festinare potes nimium: properare virorum est Optatam quicunque volunt contingere metam. 23. Rectius in navem quam nave imponere dicas: Dicere sed navi, scribas si carmina, fas est.i 24. Q,uod cernis procul esse potest: quae longius absunt Humanum effugient rerum discrimina visum.k 25. ‘ Non—pariter' vites : ‘ non—aeque' dicere fas est. 26. Nec {neque) ‘ vero' habeat post se: non accipit autem. 27. Particulas ut, ne recte neu, neve sequuntur.i 28. Eximo quae mala sunt; ad imo bona; demere possum Quidlibet: —haec teneas justo discrimine verba. = That is, the compounds of facio that retain the a, have fio in the pi.aiwive. Conficio has conjicior, according to the rule here given: but also sometimes tonfieri. # h That is, never use igitur when ‘ consequently' or ‘ therefore' follows 1 and? but ideo:— et ideo, atque ideo , or ideoque. » That is, etiam is the classical word for ‘ still' or ‘ yet,' with comparatives. not adhuc. i Milites in navem imponere, Caes. Liv.: nave , Suet.— carinae , Ov. * k Procul , far off but within sight; longe, so far off as to be out of sighX l But nec. ncaue are sometimes found: e. g. Liv. 24, 3. VO JABULARY aby = anybody athg = anything ci = alicui qA = aliquA cs = alicujus qd = aliquid qo = aliquo qm = aliquem qrm = aliquorum qs = aliquos * means that the phrase is not found in the classics, though probably correct. A. Ah use, v. (qA re perverse uti or abuti ; or immodice, intemperanter, inso¬ lenter abuti, when the a. lies in ex¬ cess : e. g. to a. = trespass on a man’s indulgence or patience, in¬ dulgentia, patientia cs immodice abuti). To a. a person = rail at (conviciis qm consectari or inces¬ sere). To load or cover a man with a., to heap every kind of a. on a man (omnibus maledictis qm vexare ; omnia maledicta in qm conferre). To fling a. at a man (maledicta in qm conjicere). To overwhelm aby with a. (qm contu¬ meliis operire atque opprimere). Abuse (usus or abusus perversus). An a. = a bad custom (mos pra¬ vus). To remove abuses (mores pravos abolere). Access. To have a. to athg (habere aditum ad qd): to aby (ci ad qm aditus patet). He is easy of a. (aditus ad eum est facilis). He is easy of a. to private individuals (faciles aditus sunt ad eum privato¬ rum)» He is difficult of a. (aditus ad eum sunt difficiliores). An a. of fever (accessio febris). I grant a. to me to everybody (omnibus conveniendi mei potestatem facio). Accessible (facilis accessu: of places). He is a. to flatterers, or flattery (qm or facilem aditum ad aurea ejus adulatores habent.) Acclamations. To receive athg with a.’s (plausu et clamore prosequi qd). Account (ratio). To look through an a. (rationem cognoscere, inspicere). To go through a man’s accounts; to examine them carefully (cs ra¬ tiones excutere, dispungere). The debtor and creditor a.’s balance (par est ratio e. g. acceptorum et datorum, accepti et expensi). To state and balance a.’s (rationes con¬ ficere et consolidare). To compare a.’s (rationes conferre). To bring a sum of money to a. (pecuniam in rationem inducere). To demand an a. from aby (rationem ab qo re¬ petere). To render an a. (rationem reddere with gen. of thing). To call upon a man to give an a. of his life (ab qo vitae rationem re¬ poscere). Acquit. To be unanimously acquit¬ ted (omnibus sententiis absolvi). Advantage ; Benefit To gain, de¬ rive a. or b. from athg (utilitatem or fructum ex qA re capere or perci¬ pere). It is to my a. (est e re meA, or est in rem mearn). Advice. To give a. (ci consilium dare). To ask a. of aby (petere consilium ab qo). To follow aby’s a. (sequi cs consilium: cs consilio 310 VOCABULARY. uti t). To do athg by aby’s a. (qd facere de or ex cs consilio). • - Advocate (advocatus, one who assist¬ ed with his advice; patronus, one who pleaded the cause). To em¬ ploy or engage an a. (adoptare sibi patronum or defensorem, if the per¬ son is accused: deferre causam ad patronum). Affluence. To live in a. (in omnium rerum abundantia, vivere. Circum¬ fluere omnibus copiis atque in om¬ nium rerum abundantia, vivere. C. Am. 15). Affront. To put an a. on aby (con¬ tumeliam ci imponere). To look upon athg as an a. (qd in or ad contumeliam accipere). Alms. To beg for a. from aby (sti¬ pem emendicare ab qo). To live by a. (aliena, misericordia, vivere). To give a. (stipem spargere, largiri). Ambition. To be ambitious; to be led by a. (gloria, duci, ambitione teneri). From a. or ambitious mo¬ tives (gloria, ductus). To be fired with a. (ambitione accensum esse). Answer. To receive an a. (respon¬ sum ferre, auferre). I received for a. (responsum est). To a. (if by letter, rescribere). To return no a. (nullum responsum dare). To a. not a word (nullum verbum re¬ spondere). Appetite. To have a good a. (liben¬ ter cibum sumere, of an invalid: libenter coenare). To have no a. (* cibum fastidire). To give a man an a.; produce an a. (appetentiam cibi facere, praestare, invitare). To get an a. by walking (opsonare am¬ bulando famem). Arrival. To be impatient for—or look forward with impatience to aby’s a. (cs adventum non mediocriter cap¬ tare). Audience. To grant aby an a. (admittere qm). To have an a. (admitti : aditum ad qm habere). Before a numerous a. (frequentibus auditoribus ; magna audientium ce¬ lebritate). B. Baggage (sarcinae, baggage of indi . vidual soldiers; impedimenta, of the army generally). To take the b. (impedimenta capere : impedi¬ mentis potiri). To strip the enemy of all their b. (omnibus impedimen¬ tis hostes exuere). To lose one’s b. (impedimenta amittere : impedi¬ mentis exui). To fight whilst en¬ cumbered with one’s b. (sub onere confligere). To attack the enemy whilst they are encumbered with their baggage, before they have disencumbered themselves of their b. (hostes sub sarcinis adoriri). To hide their b. in the wood (impedi menta in silvas abdere). To plun der the b. (impedimenta diripere.) Banish, Banishment. To banish ; te drive into banishment (exsilio affi¬ cere, in* exsilium ejicere, pellere, expellere, agere, ex urbe or civitate pellere, expellere, ejicere, ex urbe exturbare, de civitate ejicere. In Roman law ci aqu& et igni inter¬ dicere, to compel a man to go into b. by forbidding aby to give him fire or water: he kept the rank of a Roman citizen, but lost all its privileges and honors; rele¬ gare, to send him to a fixed place, but without loss of rank or goods; deportare, to banish him for life to some desert spot, with loss of rank and property : this kind of b. be¬ longed to the times of the Ccesars). To banish aby for ten years (rele¬ gare in decem annos). To b. aby to an island for life (deportare in insulam). To b. from the society of men (relegare ab hominibus) To recall from b. (revocare de or ab exsilio, reducere de exsilio, iu patriam revocare or restituere). — To return from b. (exsilio redire). Battle. A b. by land (proelium ter¬ restre) ; by sea (proelium navale ; pugna navalis). A long and severe b. was fought (pugnatum est diu atque acriter). To draw an army out in b. array, to offer b. (exer¬ citum in aciem educere). To be t Also cs consilio obtemperare. VOCABULARY. 317 gin the b.; to join b. (proelium com¬ mitteret). To fight a b. (proelium or pugnam facere or edere). To renew the b. (i. e. after an inter¬ val : pugnam repetere). To re¬ store the b.; to restore the fortune of the day (pugnam novam inte¬ grare, proelium redintegrare or reno¬ vare : generally of fresh troops arriving). To renew the b. the next day (postero die pugnam ite¬ rare). To win the b. (proelio or pugnS. superiorem discedere ; victo¬ rem proelio excedere). To win a b. (secundo Marte pugnare : rem pros¬ pere gerere). To lose the b. (pug- nit inferiorem discedere: proelio vinci or superari). To lose a b. (adverso Marte pugnare : rem male gerere). To offer aby b. (ci pug¬ nandi potestatem facere). To fight a pitched b. (dimicare). / Benefit. See Advantage. Blame. I am to b. (mea «culpa est). Nobody is to b. but myself (culpa mea propria est). To lay or throw the b. on aby (culpam or causam in qm conferre, transferre : the lat¬ ter of removing it from one's self, vertere). One throws the b. on an¬ other (causam alter in alterum con¬ fert). To be to b. (in noxiL esse or teneri ; in culpa esse). Blood. To stanch b. (sanguinem sistere, supprimere, cohibere). To thirst for b. (sanguinem sitire). To cost aby much b. (multo sanguine ci stare). To shed one’s b. for one’s country (sanguinem pro patria pro¬ fundere ; sanguinem suum patrias largiri). To be connected with aby by the ties of b.: to be related to aby (sanguine cum qo conjunctum esse: sanguine attingere qm). To do athg in cold b. (consulto et cogi¬ tatum facere qd). To shed b. (cae¬ dem or sanguinem facere: commit murder ). My own flesh and b. (i. e. children : viscera mea or nostra). To take some b. from aby, to bleed aby (ci sanguinem mit¬ te rs). t Or manum conserere. Body. The body is worn out, e g with labors, diseases (conficitur). Bury, Buried, Burial. See Funeral. C. Calamity, Affliction, Misfortune , Misery. C. visits aby (affligit qrn calamitas). To contrive aby’s mis¬ ery or c. (calamitatem ci machi¬ nari). To fall into a. (in calamita¬ tem incidere). Misfortune happens (accidit calamitas). To be in afflic¬ tion or misery (in malis esse or ja¬ cere ; malis urgeri : in miseria, esse or versari). To be the cause of a man’s misery or misfortune (cala¬ mitatem ci afferre, inferre, impor¬ tare). To alleviate aby’s a. (cs calamitatem levare). To ward off a. from aby (qm prohibere calami¬ tate, or a calamitate defendere). To pine away in a. or misery (in calamitate tabescere). To be born to misery (miseriis ferendis natum esse). To suffer a misfortune, un¬ dergo a. (calamitatem capere, ac¬ cipere, subire). To bear a misfor¬ tune (calamitatem ferre, tolerare). To be cast down by misfortune (calamitati or ad calamitatem ani¬ mum submitteret). Circumstances. According to c.’s (pro re. pro re natit—ex or pro tempore). Trifling c. (parvae res, parva momenta: the latter of points on which athg turns). C.’s of the time (tempora (pi.) : temporum ra¬ tio : temporum vincula. C. Fam, x. 6). Cloud. The heavens are covered with c.’s (coelum nubibus obducitur). Cold. To be able to endure c. (algo¬ ris, frigoris patientem esse). To be benumbed with c. (gelu torpere). Copy, see Example. Corn; Provisions. Corn is rising or getting up (annona carior fit; in¬ gravescit, incenditur) : is falling (laxat or levaturt). To keep back t Brut, in Cic. Ep. 11, 3, 3. Liv 23, 25. j Hence, to lower the frice of c., anno¬ nam levare or laxare ; to raise it, keep or force it up, incendere— also excande¬ facere, flagellare. VOCABULARY. 318 their c. (annonam or frumentum comprimere). To be straitened for provisions: to be in want of c. (re frumentarii laborare). Provisions are scarce (annonk laboratur). To get in a better supply of c., to remedy their deficient supply of c. (rei frumentari® mederi : rem fru¬ mentariam expedire). To order the states to bring in so much c. (frumentum imperare civitatibus). Dearness, cheapness of p. (annon® caritas, vilitas). D. Prnger, Endanger, Peril. To un¬ dergo d. (periculum obire, adire, Bubire, suscipere). To expose one’s self to d. (in periculum se offerre, se inferre, in discrimen se conferre, inferre, or objiceret). To peril one’s life for aby (inferre se in periculum capitis atque vit® discrimen pro cs salute). To bring aby into d.: to endanger (qm in periculum or dis¬ crimen adducere, deducere, vocare): into great or extreme d. (multum periculi ci inferre: magnum, sum¬ mum, maximum in periculum qm adducere). To bring the state into extreme d. (rempublicam in pr®- ceps dare). To seek or endeavor to bring aby into d. (periculum ci intendere or moliri). To be in d. (in periculo esse or versari, in dubio esse —of life). To be in extreme A. of things (in maximum pericu¬ lum et extremum p®ne discrimen adductum esse— of things : in pr®- cipiti esse ; in extremo situm esse). To share d.’s (pericula communi¬ care). D.’s threaten aby: or aby is threatened with d. (instant ci pericula : from ahy, ab qo). At my own risk (meo periculo). To ward oft’d. from aby (periculum ab qo prohibere ; propulsare). There is d. that (periculum est ne). At his own risk and expense (sumptu periculoque suo). To fall into d. (hi periculum venire, incidere). Athg is endangered (qd in discn* men venit). Darkness; Dark: Obscurity, Oh - scure. To make athg dark (ci rei tenebras obducere ; or obscuritatem et tenebras offundere). To be or remain in darkness; to bo vested in obscurity (in tenebris latere ; ob¬ scuritate involutum latere). To be buried in impenetrable darkness (crassis occultatum et. circumfusum tenebris latere). Born of an ob¬ scure family ; of obscure origin (obscuro loco natus, obscuris ortus majoribus). To explain what is obscure (res obscuras explanare : res involutas explicare). Death, Die. To die a violent d. (violenta morte perire). To die by his own hands: commit suicide (sua se manu interficere : mortem sibi consciscere, or inferre). To meet d. with resignation (®quo animo mortem oppetere : fidenti animo ad mortem gradi). To seek or court d. (mortem expetere). To meet an honorable d. (honeste occumbere). To punish with d. (morte multare ; supplicio afficere). The punishment is d. (ci rei sup¬ plicium constitutum est). To con¬ demn to d. (capitis or capite dam¬ nare, condemnare). To die of athg (ex q&. re mori). To starve himself to d. (per inediam a vita discedere). To die of laughter, or burst with 1. (risu p®ne emori, Ter. risu p®ne corruere. C.) To read one’s self to d. (in studiis mori). Desire : Longing: Regret. To les¬ sen the regret that athg causes (lenire desiderium quod qs ex qk re capit). To renew regret, or long¬ ing (desiderium refricare). To pine away with a longing d. (desiderio confici or tabescere). To excite or kindle the d. (cupiditatem incen¬ dere). Disease, III, Bad Health, Relapse, Poorly, Disorder, Sickness, Sick To fall ill (morbo affici, tentari, corripi). To catch a d., to fall ill of a disorder (morbum nancisci ; iu morbum cadere, incidere). To fall into bad health (in adversam vale- t Not se periculo exponere. VOCABJLARY. 319 tudinem incidere). To be danger- i ously ill (in periculosum morbum implicari). To be severely ill (gravi or graviore morbo implicari). To have bad health (infirmtt atquo Eegrft valetudine esse). To be poor¬ ly (leviter a;grotare, minus belle valere). To have a disease in his feet, reins, &c. (ex pedibus, reni¬ bus laborare ; pedibus aegrum esse). To have or suffer from a disease that must end fatally (aegrotare mortifere ; mortifero morbo affec¬ tum esse, urgeri; novissimi vale¬ tudine conflictari). To be sick or diseased in mind (ab animo aegrum esse). To recover from a sickness ; (ex morbo convalescere). To die of disease (morbo mori, a morbo perire ; in morbum implicitum mori or discedere). To recover one’s strength after a disease (ex morbo recreari ; vires recolligere). To have a relapse (in morbum recidere : do integro in morbum incidere). To be afflicted with a d. (morbo affici; affligi, afflictari, tentari). To treat a disease ; or use a treat¬ ment, employ a method of cure to ad. (morbo curationem adhibere: to a person, curationem adhibere ad qm). To apply, use, or employ remedies agst d.’s (morbis remedia adhibere : fig. morbis animi). E. Endanger, see Danger. Error, Mistake. To cause a rn. (errorem gignere, creare). To be in e.: labor under a m. (in errore esse or versau). To 6ee one’s m. (erratum suum agnoscere). To lead aby into e. (qm in errorem inducere or conjicere). To remove aby’s m. (errorem ci eripere, extorquere). From a mistaken notion (errore captus). Example, Instance, Warning, Copy. To produce an e. (exemplum sup¬ ponere, proponere). To have an e. for imitation in one’s own family (domesticum habere exemplum ad imitandum). To propose aby an e. for imitation (proponere ci exem¬ plum ad imitandum). To set a badt e. to others (mali esse exem¬ pli). To follow aby’s e. (sequi cs exemplum or auctoritatem). To take w. by aby; to take e. by aby (capere sibi exemplum de qo ; ex quo sumere sibi exemplum). To set up in any person a pernicious e. (prodere in qo perniciosum exem¬ plum). To form or fashion one’s self after aby’s e. (se formare in mores cs). To set an e. of severity (exemplum severitatis edere). For example, as an instance (exempli causa). To send a copy of my letter to aby (literarum exemplum ci or ad qm mittere). To set an e. (exemplum prcebere, prodere). Excuse, Plea. To admit of an e. (excusationem habere or qd excu¬ sationis). To admit of some e. (ha¬ bere qd excusationis). My igno¬ rance may be pleaded in e. : I may be excused on the ground of igno¬ rance (estmihi excusatio inscientiae). To plead bad health in e. (excusare morbum or valetudinem). To de¬ fend one’s self from any charge by pleading or urging athg; or, on the plea of athg (qd cs rei excusa¬ tione defendere). To accept an e. (excusationem or satisfactionem ac¬ cipere). To reject or not accept an e. (excusationem non accipere or probare). To e. one’s self to aby’s satisfaction (satisfacere ci) The plea of necessity is a valid or complete excuse for aby (necessita¬ tis excusatio qm facile defendit). Expectation ; Expect. To lead men to e. athg (facere exspectationem cs rei). To cause or raise in aby an eager e. of athg, to make aby eagerly expect athg (magnam ex¬ spectationem cs rei ci movere , t commovere, dare, afferre : qm in ex¬ spectationem adducere). To raise an e. (exspectationem concitare). A person satisfies or ccmes up to men’s e.’s (opinioni hor.iinum re- t Pessimi for very bad. i Also de: quantum tu mihi mo\es ex¬ spectationem de sermciie Bibuli. 320 VOCABULARY. spondet ; omnium existimationi sa¬ tisfacit : surpasses them, superat : disappoints them, fallit). To sur¬ pass e. (exspectationem vincere). F. Fate. All will suffer the same f. (omnes eundem fortunae exitum laturi sunt). To submit calmly to my f., whatever it may be (quem- cumque casum fortuna invexerit, quiete ferre). To be prepared for my f., whatever it may be (ad omnem eventum paratum esse). If you are fated to—(si tibi fatum est, with injin.) The blows or storms of f. (fulmina fortunae). Miserable, unhappy f. (fortuna ma¬ la, afflicta, misera). Happy, pros¬ perous f. (fortuna prospera, secun¬ da, florens). Favorite. My f. Dicaearchus (deli¬ ciae meae, Dicaearchus). That f. Panaetius of yours (Panaetius ille tuus). Favor. To be in aby’s f. (in gratis cs or cum qot esse, gratiosum esse ci or apud qm). To be in high f. with aby (cs gratia, florere). To obtain aby’s f. (se in gratiam ponere apud qm ; gratiam cs sibi colligere or conciliare). To court aby’s f. (gratiam cs aucupari). To forfeit aby’s f. by abusing it (gratiam cs effundere). To restore aby to an¬ other’s f., to reconcile aby to an¬ other (qm cum qo in gratiam redu¬ cere, reconciliare, restituere). To receive or take again into f. (in gratiam recipere). To lose aby’s f. (gratiam cs amittere, gratift cs ex¬ cidere). To recover aby’s f. (cs gratiam recuperare). To give a verdict in aby’s f. (secundum qm judicare or litem dare). To bring a man into great f. with aby (qm apud qm magnft in gratia ponere). To ask as a f. (beneficii gi.itiseque loco petere, ut, &.c.): to gi tnt as a f. (beneficii gratiasque caus i conce¬ dere). Fingers. See Hand. t With everybody (apud omnes). Flight, Jly, flee, Escape, Rout. To betake one’s self to f. (in fugam se conferre, dare, or conjicere). To put to f. (in fugam dare, vertere, convertere, conjicere). To rout (profligare). To cut off aby’s f. (fugam ci claudere or intercludere) To seek for safety by f. (fugft salu¬ tem petere). To save on«’s self or escape by f. (ex fugk evadere, fugi se eripere). There is no other escape fm this thing (alia fuga hujus rei non est). To fly in com¬ plete disorder to their camp (fugi effusi castra petere). To fly any¬ where (fugi locum petere : confu¬ gere or fugam capessere qo). To fly away secretly, to abscond (fugi se subtrahere : clam se subducere). Funeral, Burial, Bury. To honor aby with a splendid f. (amplo, ap¬ paratissimo, &c. funere efferre). To bury aby with military honors (militari honesto funere humare). To bury aby alive (qm vivum de¬ fodere). To be buried alive (vivum terri obrui). To be deprived of burial (sepulchro carere). To be buried in oblivion (oblivione obrui, obrutum esse): in the waves (undis obrui or hauriri). G. Gain, Profits. To make g. of aby (quaestum facere in qo) : of athg (lucrum facere ex q& re). To ob¬ tain immense profits (magnos quaes¬ tus praedasque facere). To turn athg to profit (quaestui habere qd). To count athg g. (in lucro qd po¬ nere : putare esse do lucro, depu¬ tare esse in lucro). Glory, Renown. To gain g., renown, credit, &c. (laudem sibi parere or colligere, gloriam quaerere, conse¬ qui, adipisci). To have an eye to g. in every thing, or make glory his first object (omnia ad gloriam revocare). To cover a man with immortal glory (immortali gloria, qm afficere, sempiternae gloriae qm commendare). Graft. To g. a treo (arborem inse¬ rere. surculum arbori inserere). To VOCABULARY. 321 g. a good pear on a wild stock (pirum bonam in pirum silvaticam inserere). Grafting, insitio. H. Hand, Traditional, Fingers, Art. To have a work, = book, in h. (opus in manibus habere). To take in one’s h.’s (in manus sumere qd). To hold athg in one’s h. (manu tenere qd). To have aby at h. i. e. to help one (habere sibi qm ad manum). The question which is now under discussion (quaestio quae nunc in manibus est). To be placed in our own h.’s, to be in our power (esse in nostri, manu). To give in: to drop my hands, i. e. in confession of defeat (dare ma¬ nus). Traditional (per manus tra- ditust). To wrest athg out of aby’s h. ’s (extorquere qd ci de manibus). To let the lucky opportunity slip through one’s fingers (fortunam ex manibus dimittere). Athg slips through one’s fingers (fugit, elabi- tur, or excidit qd e manibus: also elabitur do manibus). Not to stir or move a finger for athg (cs rei causk manum non vertere). A city strongly fortified by art (urbs manu munitissima). To lay h.’s on aby (manum, manus afferre, inferre, in¬ jicere ci). Not to lay h.’s on aby, to keep your h.’s off aby (manus ab¬ stinere a qo). The matter is en¬ tirely in your h.’st (hujus rei potes¬ tas omnis in vobis sita est). To die by one’s own h.’s (see Death). Health (valetudo: if by itself, it is mostly equivalent to good h., which is bona, prospera, firma valetudo). To take care, or some care, of one’s h. (valetudini parcere ; vale¬ tudinem curare: valetudini tribu¬ ere qd). To take great care of your h. (valetudini tuae servire). For your h.’s sake (corporis tuendi caush). To neglect, or take no t E. g. religiones ( religious observances) per manus traditae. t So, to be placed, in your hands, in vestrft manu situm esse. 14 * care of, one’s h. (valetudinem neg- ligere : valetudini parum parcere). To drink aby’s good h. (salutem ci propinare, Plant. *amicum nomi- natim vocare in bibendo). Bad h, (adversa, aegra, infirma valetudo). Your weak h. o: weak state of h. (ista imbecillitas valetudinis tuae). [Obs. after curatio, excusatio, ex¬ cusare, &,c. valetudo = bad health , just as in, “ to excuse himself on the ground of his health,” “ his health will not suffer him, &.c.” it is implied that bad health is meant.] To enjoy good h. (bonfL valetudine uti : excellent, optima.). To be in an indifferent state of h, (valetudine minus commoda uti).' To injure one’s h. by the neglect of one’s usual exercise (valetudinem intermissis exercitationibus amit¬ tere). I am recovering my h (melior fio valetudine). H. is re¬ established (confirmatur). To be in good h. (recte valere) : in better health (melius valere). To enjoy good h. (prosperitate valetudinis uti). Helm, Steer. To take the h. (ad gubernaculum accedere). To sit at the h. (sedere in pnppi clavum- que tenere. C. fig. of a statesman). To sit at the h. of the state (ad gu¬ bernacula reipublicae sedere). To steer the vessel, the state (gu¬ bernacula reipublicae tenere). To seize the h. of the state (guberna¬ cula reipublicae prendere). To drive or cast aby from the h. of the state (qm a gubernaculis reipubli¬ cae repellere or dejicere). To with¬ draw from or quit the helm (a gu¬ bernaculis recedere). Honor. To be held in h. (esse in honore : of persons and things) To hold in h. (in honore habere) To bestow h.’s on aby for athg (honores ci habere pro qh re: ho¬ nores dare or deferre propter qm rem). To load aby with h.’s (qm honore augere, ornare, decorare). To lavish h.’s upon aby (effundere, si ita vis,t honores in qm). To be- t These words show that this was an uncommon expression. 322 VOCABULARY, stow divine h.’s on aby (deorum honores ci tribuere). To raise a man to, or place him in, posts of h. (bonorem ci dare, mandare, cre¬ dere, committere). To arrive at h.’s (ad honores venire, pervenire). To climb to h.’s (ad honores as¬ cendere). To pay or show h. to aby (honorem ci habere, Nep., to a superior). I. In. Not difficult in itself (per se non difficilis). To be in our favor (a nobis facere ; of things). In front (a fronte). In the eyes of men (apud homines). In breadth (in latitudinem : so in longitudinem, &c.) To be in the prosecutor’s house (penes accusatorem esse: of ivitnesses in his power). To say athg in joke (qd per jocum dicere). To do athg in anger (qd per iram facere). Injury; Wrong. To commit an i. against aby (injuriam ci facere, inferre, imponere, &c.; injuria, qm afficere). To suffer an i. (injuriam accipere). To bear i. or w. (inju¬ riam pati, ferre). To abstain from committing any i. (abstinere inju¬ ria.). To pardon an i. at aby’s re¬ quest (injuriam cs precibus con¬ donare). To forget i.’s or w.’s (injurias oblivione conterere). Invite. To invite one’s self to dine with aby (coenam ci condicere). To invite aby to dinner (qm ad coenam invitare, vocare). J. Judge, Judgment, Sentence, Opinion. To acquiesce in a s. (judicium ac¬ cipere, ferre). To refuse to ac¬ quiesce in a s. (judicium recusare). A s. procured by bribery (emtum ju¬ dicium). To form a j. or pronounce s. about athg (facere judicium de q& re or cs rei. The thing by which, ex re). To change my o. (animi judicium mutare). To ask aby’s o. (cs judicium exquirere). To stand or abide by aby’s j. (cs judicio stare). | Let others judge (aliorum sit ju¬ dicium). I have always been of o (meum semper judicium fuit). To agree to abide by aby’s j. in any matter (cs judicio qd permittere). To submit one’s self to aby’s j (subjicere se cs judicio). In my opinion (meo judicio). One who has an opinion of his own (homo eui judicii). K. Knot. To tie a k. (nodum facere, nectere). To tie a fast k. (nodum astringere). To untie a k. (nodum solvere or expedire). Knowledge. It is easy or difficult to acquire a k. of these things (hrec facilem or difficilem habent cognh tionem). L, Law. To bring in a bill; to propose a 1. (legem rogare). The people passes the 1. (accipit legem) : throws the bill out; refuses to pass the 1. (antiquat legem). To be passed or carried through (perferri). To draw up l.’s (leges condere, scribere, conscribero). To pass a 1. (ferre legem, ut or ne ; lege san¬ cire, ut or ne ; of the people) To give l.’s to a state—of a ruler (leges dare or constituere ci civitati). To impose l.’s on a state—of a ty¬ rant (leges ci populo or civitati imponere). To overthrow l.’s (leges evertere or pervertere). To break a 1. (legem negligere, violare). To evade a I. (legi fraudem facere). To swear obedience to a 1. (in legem jurare). To advise the peo¬ ple to pass a 1. (legem suadere) : not to pass one (legem dissuadere). To oppose the passing of a 1. by his veto (legi intercederet). To abro¬ gate a 1. (legem abrogare). To abrogate it partially (derogare legi or qd de lege). To abrogate a 1. virtually by a subsequent enact¬ ment (legi obrogare). To trample t t. e. of a Tribune of the pec pie. VOCABULARY. 323 a I. underfoot (legem conculcare). | To see that a 1. is put in force or strictly executed (efficere ut lex valeat or valeret). To relax a 1. (laxamentum dare legi). To pro¬ cure the passing of a 1. (legem ferre) : on one’s self (legem mihi ipse dico: with gen. of law). To observe a law (legem servare, ob¬ servare, conservare), i 'iter. (1) Syllable; of the alpha¬ bet. Not to write a 1. (imllam lieram scribere). To know a single I. of Greek (unam literam Gi aecam scire). Not to be able to utter a s. (literam non posse dicere). (2) Epistle ; correspondence To write a 1. (epistolam scribere , exa¬ rare). To write or send a 1. lo aby (dare literas ad qm, literas mittere ci or ad qm). To answert a 1. (rescribere literis or ad literas or epistolam). To fold up a 1. (episto¬ lam complicare) : to seal (signare or obsignare) : to open (epistolam aperire or solvere). To break open the seal (literas resignare). To converse with aby by 1. (cum qo per literas colloqui or agere). To finish a 1. (literas conficere). To pester aby with l.’s (literis ci ob¬ strepere). To draw aby into a c. (cs literas elicere). To long, for a 1. (literas expetere, requirere, de¬ siderare). By 1. (per literas). To tear up a 1. (epistolam concerpere. C.) (3) Literature; Learning; Study; Books. To bury one’s self in one’s s.’s or b.’s (literis se involvere, ab¬ dere. in literas se abdere). To give up or devote one’s self to 1. or s. (literis se dare). Devoted to I. (literis deditus). To return to his s.’s ; betake one’s self to one’s s.’s or b.’s again (in literas se referre). To devour b.’s (literas vorare). To spend one’s life in s. (agere eetatem in literis). To have paid even the slightest attention to 1. (literas vel primis labris degustasse. Q.) - Adj., profound, rare, abstruse, ac¬ curate (liter® interiores [quaedam] et recondit®):— ordinary, super¬ ficial (vulgares, communes). Life, Live. As sure as I live I will, &c. (ita vivam, ut, &c., ne vivam, ne, salvus sim, ut). To live as one pleases (ad libidinem, ex libidine, ad arbitrium suum, arbitrio suo— vivere). Not to be able to live without athg (qk re carere non posse). If a longer 1. had been granted him (si vita longior suppe¬ tiisset). To live on very confined means, on a very narrow income (in tenui pecunia, vivere). To live in penury (in egestate vitam de¬ gere). To aim at aby’s 1. (cs capiti insidiari). To spare aby’st 1. (ci vitam concedere, or mortem re¬ mittere). To owe one’s 1. to aby (ci salutem debere ; also ab aliquo habere vitam ; cs beneficio vivere). To beseech aby to spare a person’s 1. (cs vitam deprecari a qo). To atone for, or expiate athg with one’s 1. (capite luere qd). My 1. is at stake ; I am in, or brought into, danger of my 1. (in vit® periculum adductus sum : caput agitur). The language of common 1. (genus ser¬ monis usitatum). To use the lan¬ guage of daily or common 1. (ver¬ bis quotidianis uti). To spend one’s 1. (omnem suam vitam consumere, or ffitatem agere in qft re). The rest of one’s 1. (qd reliquum est vit®). L. and spirit, i. e. in speak¬ ing (calor et vehementia). To depart this 1. (abire e vitii: hinc demigrare). Adverbs used with vivere are; molliter, delicate (deli¬ cate ac molliter) ; parce, continen¬ ter, severe, sobrie. Listen. Listen to what he has done (videte, quid fecerit). I cannot listen to this (aures me® a com¬ memoratione hujus rei abhorrent: qd ferre non possum). t To return some answer (rescribere huic verbo , quum beatum dicimus, «J-c. Tuse 5, 29. EXTRACTS FROM THE “ ANTIBARB ARCS.”* Accuracy, diligentia, cura, [accuratio once Cic. Brut. 67, 238.] Act a play, docere fabulam ( of those who get it up, and of the author): agere (of the play eh' acting his part.) Again and again, etiam atque etiam (■z=.very earnestly with verbs of entreating).—several times, often: iterum et or ac tertio: ite¬ rum et saepius ;+ iterum ac tertium. C. Against the stream, amne or flumine adverso [not fluvio adv.]. Agree. (1) I — make an agreement; agreement with any body, mihi cum quo convenit. \Ve agreed, internos convenit. Even the consuls were not thoroughly agreed, ne inter consules quidem ipsos satis conveniehat. L. [not convenio cum quo.] (2) = cor¬ respond with, answer to, consentire cum quare. (3) Of a thing it is used personally: pax convenerat : quae convenerant : si posset inter eos quid convenire C. Almighty, summus, maximus [not om¬ nipotens, except as a theological term] or by Deus only for 1 the Almighty.' The Romans used Optimus Maxi¬ mus with the name of Jupiter .— Jupiter O. M. Appear — ‘ make his appearance amongst us' (of one who is dead, exsistere. - = ‘ seem,' videri (not apparere). - — ‘ to be manifest,' apparere "ideri). (in a dream\ ostendere se cui in somnio ; videri cui in somnis ; per somnum, quiete, per quietem ; which likeness appears in their bodies , quae similitudo in corporibus apparet. C. Appear in any body's eyes, judicio cujus esse; ab quo existimari ; videri cui • esse apud quern. - . Day appears, dies venit (comes) : illucescit (begins to shine). Assert, dicere, affirmare [not asserere]. Author, scriptor. Authority. An authority (used of a person), auctor. A weighty authority , locuples auctor. Bodily (pleasures), corporis (volup¬ tates). Corporeus is ‘ consisting of a body.' Break. To break down a bridge, pon¬ tem rescindere, dissolvere, interrum¬ pere [not pontem rumpere or frangere]. Classical author, scriptor optimus, praestantissimus; or scriptor primae classis. Cic. [Gellius introduced scriptor classicus, as opposed to scriptor proletarius.] Command (an army), praeesse. Compassion. From compassion, mise¬ ricordia captus, ductus, or permotus. Demagogues, concionatores : popu¬ lares, or populares homines. [If demagogi be used quos Graeffi dicunt, or ut Graeco veroo utar should be added.] Each other, inter se; of what is done mutually or reciprocally: not invicem. * frica*) Extracts are taken from a larger work of Mr. Arnold’s, principally on the Latin Particles, which is in course of preparation for the American public. t To ask again and again, etiam atque etiam ; or iterum et saepius rogare Bui etiam atque etiam is never really numerical. 330 EXTRACTS FROM THE “ ANTIBARBARUS.” Exasperate : exacuere ( Nep .); in¬ fensum reddere : iram cujus incen¬ dere. [Exasperare, exacerbare. Liv.] Experience , usus rerum, usus [not ex¬ perientia]. From experience , re, usu, exitu doctus, expertus ’. from my own experience, expertus in me, expertus. \Fish out aihgjrum aoy , ab qo qd expis¬ cari, C. Flesh : in ‘ to lose flesh,' 1 ‘ gain flesh? 4~c. corpus amittere [not carnem]. Fleshly (of pleasures , $-c.), by gen., corporis. Greek. To speak Greek or good Greek, Graece loqui. Grow (an old man, <$ c. =‘ become'), fieri. Health, valetudo.— Good health, sanitas: bona or prospera valetudo (not vale¬ tudo only). — salus (the continued state or preservation of good health.) Imagine (1) — to form a representation in the mind , animo cogitare, conci¬ pere, complecti :—animo fingere, ef¬ fingere ; cogitatione fingere or depin¬ gere :—proponere sibi ante oculos animumque : (2) = conjecture , con¬ jecturam capere, facere: conjicere * [f^ imaginari belongs to the silver age], (3) — to entertain an unfounded notion , opinari, in opinione esse : in¬ duisse sibi falsam cujus rei per¬ suasionem. Q. quid somniare ( = dream it). (4) I imagine (insert¬ ed in a sentence ), opinor : ut opinor. Impure. An impure style , inquinatus sermo, inquinata oratio. Impute a thing to anybody , tribuere, attribuere, adscribere, adsignare, acceptum referre (quid cui). [Im¬ putare, Quint. Plin. jun.). Inspire anybody with hope, fear, rf*c., spem, admirationem, formidinem, cui injicere. - anybody with a desire, quern cupiditate cujus rei faciendae inci¬ tare, or incitare ad aliquid faciendum. Inspired , afflatus numine divino; in¬ stinctu divino perculsus ; instinctus divino spiritu. Invite (to supper, &c.), invitare (by word of mouth) : vocare (by a slave). Key of a country, janua, [‘quurn earn urbem sibi Mithridates Asi & januam fore putasset, qua effracta et revulsa tota pateret provincia.’ C .] hatin. To speak Latin or good Latin, Latine dicere, loqui. Mercifully [not misericorditer, but] cum misericordia or miseratione, miseri¬ cordia captus, &c. To deal merci¬ fully with anybody, misericordem esse in aliquem ; misericordia uti in aliquem ; misericordem se praebere in aliquem. Offer violence, vim afferre alicui. One or two, unus et alter, unusitemque alter. Unus alterve ( = o n e or ai most two). Open a way or road (e. g. by the sword), viam aperire, patefacere. L. Opportunity, occasio, locus or facultas ; tempus (alicujus rei faciendae). An opportunity of doing any thing is of¬ fered, locus faciendae alicujus rei datur. t Palm: to bear the palm, palmam ferre. Pay honours to anybody, cui honores habere, tribuere : honore aliquem afficere ( not honorem cui exhibere). Prayers. To offer prayers, precation¬ em or preces facere, preces Deo adhi¬ bere (C.). preces mittere (Liv.). Obs. preces fundere is poet. Preserve (states, fyc.), conservare. Probable , verisimilis [not probabilis, tvhich means, ‘ respectable,’ ‘ tolerably good’]. It seems probable that Milo killed Clodius, Milo Clodium inter¬ fecisse videtur (but verisimilis is quite correct). Produce a passage, to, locum (versum, &c.) afferre. - witnesses, producere or pro¬ ferre testes : to produce evidence , tes¬ timonium proferre. - a reason, to, causas afferre. Pure (of style), purus et emendatus. Purity of style, integritas, castitas or sinceritas orationis. Quote an author, to, producere, proferre scriptorem (producere, proferre tes¬ tes being used , but not locum). - a passage, locum afferre, proferre [not producere]. Reason, causa, when = 1 ground? 1 mo¬ tive? To bring another reason, al¬ teram afferre rationem or causam. Severe (of a disease), gravis. Shed tears, lachrymas effundere ot profundere. Shed blood zn kill, occidere. Slay oneself (lay violent hands on out EXTRACTS FROM THE ANTIBARBARUS. 331 u self, die by one's own hands, commit suicide), se interimere, mortem sibi consciscere ; mortem or vim sibi in¬ ferre ; se multare morte.* Speak. The thing speaks for itself si res verba desideraret, ac non pro s e ipso loqueretur. C. Style, oratio, dictio, genus scribendi or dicendi. •-. To express oneself in, or to pos¬ sess a good style (of a Latin author) is, oratione emendata et Latina uti; emendate et Latine dicere. Suicide (to commit), mortem sibi con-« • sciscere ; mortem or vim sibi inferre ; se interimere, &c. ;t mortem ultro oppetere (when the death is not com¬ mitted by one's own hands ; i. e. is virtv ai not actual, suicide ). Think highly of, fyc., de aliquo magni¬ fice sentire. * * Also; manus sibi afferre: manu sibi vitam exhaurire. (C.i INDE X r Jl ENGLISH. r Q, stands for Questions. — The numerals refer to the First Part of Latin Prose Composition.] A. A, sometimes translated by aliquis, quispiam, or quidam , 393. abandoned, perditus. able (to be), posse, quire (queo ), 125, e. Abdera (of), Abderites , G. se. abilities, ingenium (sing.). abound, abundare (abl.). about (= concerning), de (abl.). about ( = nearly), fere, adv.; circiter, prep. above (such an age), 306, and Q,. absence (in his), absens. absent (to be), abesse, 227. abstain from, temperare ab, 220. abundance of, abunde, adv. (gen.). acceptable, gratus, 212. accident (by), casu. accompany, comitari. accomplish, conficere, fee, feet. account: on — of, ergo (gen.): 207. accuse, accusare; (if not in a court of justice) incusare (gen. of charge), accused-person, reus. accustomed (to be), solere, solitus. acquainted, to become, noscere , 385. acquit, absolvere, solv, solut (gen. of charge). acquit of a capital charge, capitis absol¬ vere. adapted, accommodatus, 212. addition : in — to this, huc accedit, acce¬ debat, &c., 513. adherents (his own), sui. adjure, obtestari (acc.). admire, admirari. adopt a resolution, consilium inire or capere. advantage, emolumentum. advantageous : to be, prodesse (dat.). advantageous: to be very—, magnet utilitati esse, 24*2 (3). adversity, re's adversee. advice, consilium. advise, suadere (dat.) See 222; mo¬ nere (with acc. of person): both with ut, ne, by 75. affair, res. afraid : to be —, timere, vereri, S. 99, e. afterwards, postea : with nouns of time: post, used adverbially, after (before a sentence), postquam. See 514. after, prep, post (with acc.). after the battle, (confestim) a proelio. again and again, etiam atque etiam. again from the beginning, ab integro. against, adversus (acc.) ; in (with acc.; of feelings, actions, &c., against a person). against his will, invitus (adj.). against the will of Caius, Caio invito 364. age ( = time of life), octas, atis. agitate, perturbare. agitated (having his mind), incensus animum, 298. ago, abhinc (to precede the subst. or numeral), 305. agreeable, gratus, 212. agreed : it is —, constat (acc. with infin.), agricultural operations, res rusticce. all, omnis, cunctus ; ( = whole), unirer sus, totus. all together, cuncti universi, 443. all over again, ab integro all taken one by one, singuli. INDEX ..- ENGLISH. allowed: it is —, constat (acc. with infin.). allowed : I am—, licet mihi. allow it to happen, committere ut. almost, prope, pome. almost: I — think, haud scio an, 161. (See note on Diff. 25.) alone, solus; or (if one person) unus. Alps, Alpes, G. ium. already, jam. also, sometimes translated by the pro¬ noun idem, 387. altar, ara. although, 451, and Q,. on § 56. although indeed, quamquam (indic.). always, after superlat. by quisque. See 399. a man ( = any: indef.), quis. amanuensis, a manu servus. among, inter. amongst (a people), apud with acc. amuse, delectare. and, p. 18, d ; * to me and you,’ in Lat. ‘ to me with you,’ p. 78. and that too, not—, nec is, 385. anger, ira. angry : to be —, irasci (dat.): succsnsere (dat.) 222. animal, animal, alis. another, alter, era, &c. G. alterius : an¬ swering to ‘ it is one thing,' aliud, 38. another man’s, alienus. answer, respondere (dat.). antiquity, antiquitas. any * (after expers), omnis. any. See 389. any where (= any whither), usquam, 402. any man may, cujusvis est. (See 389—92.) appeal to, appellare (acc.). appear, (= seem), videri (visus). appear (show myself), apparere. apply vigorously to, incumbere in (with acc. ); cubu, cubit. approved (valour, quoad ejus fieri as far as can be done, ) potest, 512. as it were, quasi. as soon as, simul ac ; ut primum ; quum primum; ubi; ut, 512; 514. as many as 200, ad ducentos. as not to, after ‘ such ’ or ‘ so ’ in a nega¬ tive sentence, quin (85): if ‘ such ’ or 1 so ’ were in a positive sentence, ut would be used by 66. ashamed : am — of, pudet, 207. ask, rogare. ask pardon for a fault, delicti veniam petere. assault (a town), oppugnare. assault: to accuse of an —, reum facere de vi. assist, auxiliari, adjuvare , opitulari; sublevare, succurrere, subvenire , (See p. 81, k.) at anybody’s feet. See 75, 1. at once, — and ; idem — idem, 396. at, of place near which a battle is fought, &c., apud (or ad), 457. at two miles’ distance, a millibus pas¬ suum duobus , 348. at two miles off, a millibus passuum duobus. Athens, Athenae. Athenian, Atheniensis. attached to, amans; diligens (with gen.), 183. attack, adgredi, gressus ; adoriri, ortui (acc.). attend to, attendere, 229. averse to, alienus, 212. avoid, vitare. authority, auctoritas. aware, to be, intetligere. E. Baggage, impedimenta, pi. (properly hindrances). banish, pellere ex civitate ( pepul, puls). banished from, extorris (abl.), 276. banquet, convivium. barbarian, barbarus. base, turpis. battle, bellum. battle of Cannae, pugna Cannensis. be it far from us. See note t, p. 40. bear, ferre (tul, lat, 33). beasts, ferae. beaten (to be), vapulare (ah). become, fieri, factus sum. become acquainted with, noscere , 385. • The pronouns and adverbs for ‘ any' may be exhibited in a convenien and 334 INDEX I.-ENGLISH. becoming (to be) decere ( acc .). befa!, accidere (dat.). before, adv. antea. before, prep, ante (acc.). before (standing before a sentence), antequam , 498, &c. before one’s eyes, ob oculos. behold, adspicere, io, spex, sped. beg, petere, petiv, petit, ab. begin, coepisse (began, before pass. inf. coeptus est). beginning, initium. believe, credere, (dat.) credid, credit. believe, I can scarcely —, vix credide¬ rim, 428, and note. believed, I am, mihi creditur, 285. belongs. See 191. benefit, benejicium. benefit, v. benefacere (dat.). bereave, orbare (abl.). beseech, obsecrare. u„ an „ tfo _ C adspergere (aliquidalicui, besprinkle, ^ ° best, optimus. best to be done, ) ,. , \ best to do, \ ophmumfactu (sup.). betrayer, proditor. better, melior. better: it is — (= more satisfactory, preferable), satius est, 116. Ex. 34, p. '84. better: it would have been —, satius ot utilius fuit, 426 (5). between, inter. beware of, cavere, cav, caut, 233. bird, avis: (great bird) ales. Volucris — any winged creature, black, niger. blame, culpare. bleed afresh (of a wound), recrudescere , crudu. blessing: a — on your valour! macte virtute esto ! 280, a. blind, coccus. blood, sanguis, inis, m. (when shed , cruor). blot out, delere, delev, delet. boast, gloriari, (abl.) also de, in, 273. boast, to make the same, idem gloriari, body, corp-us, oris. border on, adjacere, 229. born, natus : born to, natus ad. born, to be, nasci (natus). both — and: et — et. bounds. See Exceed. boy, puer, G. pueri. branch-of-learning, doctrina. breach of duty: it is a—, contra offi¬ cium est. breadth, a finger’s. See Depart. break one’s word, ) fidem fallere ; break a promise, $ feftll. bribery, ambitus, us. concise form, as in the following table:— 1 Inclusion of some. Exclusion of all.* Inclusion of all alike. Less em- phatical after si,ne,num,& c. Pronouns. quisquam ullus quivis quilibet aliquis quispiam quis any (body) Adverbs. (a) Place. r ( to) usquam < ^ (af) quovis (to) ubivis 1 / A ubilibet i W aliquo (to) alicubi > . . uspiam ( quo (to) any place or any where. (b) Time. I_ unquam aliquando quando any time or ever. * ippAll are generally excluded when ‘any’ follows negatives; or ‘ without, scarcely'than:' and in questions that expect the answer 'no,' ('nobody,' 'nothing,') &c. INDEX I. - ENGLISH. 335 bridge, pons, ntis, m. bring an action or charge against, reuin facere; fee, fact: (with gen. or dc,) '187. burden, onus, oneris. burnt: to be—, clef agrare. burst-out afresh, recrudescere, crudu. business, negotium. but if, sin; sin autem, 451. but if not, sin minus, 451. but a little more, and he would have perished, minimum abfuit {jumpers.) quin periret, 91. * but, after universal negatives, (=who - not), quin, [or, qui — non,] 44. but, after universal negatives (= ex¬ cept), nisi, or prep, preeter. but, after cannot. See Cannot. butcher, trucidare. buy. emere, em, empt. by letter, per literas. by = near, prope. C. Caesar, Ccesar, aris. call, vocare, appellare, nominare , dicere, See 51. call = summon, vocare. call upon, convenire, ven,vent {acc.). call to mind, reminisci. camp, castra, pi. campaign, end of, 303. can, posse, quire (queo), 125, e. Cannae, of, Cannensis, adj. cannot: 1 cannot but— , facere non possum quin, &c. cannot: it cannot be but VnnX, fieri non , potest quin. capable of containing, capax (gen.). capital, cap-ut, itis. care a straw for, fiocci facere. care that for, hujus facere. care, cura. care: for any thing I care, 470. careless of, negligens (gen.). carry, portare. Carthage, Carthag-o, inis. cast forth, projicere jec, ject. cause to be done, faciendum curare, 351, 356. cease, desinere desi, desit: ceased, be¬ fore inf. pass, desitus cst. cease speaking tacere, 299. censure, reprehensio, onis. chameleon, chamcdeon. chance, casus, Us. character, mores pi. G. um. charge (falsely,) insimulare (gen. of charge). charge : bring, or pi efer a = to make him an accused person , reum facere de —, 187. charge ( = enjoin), mandare (dat.). chargeable (with a fault), affinis, 212 chaste, castus. children, liberi, pi. cheese, caseus. choose (= elect), eligere , leg, lect. Christian, christianus. circumstance. A circumstance which (referring to a preceding sentence), quee res. 36, 37 (6). citizen, civis. city, urbs, urbis. civil-gown, toga. claim, postulare. , clear ( = excuse), purgare. clothe oneself, induere, 283. coast, ora, 40. coldjjfrrg-ws, Sr is. come, venire, ten, vent. come to the assistance of, alicui aux- illio venire, 242. come to a determination, consilium inire. command, imperare (dat.). comrftand an army, prceesse (dat.). commission, mandare (dat.). commit many sins, multa peccare. common, communis. common : of a — kind, vulgaris. compassion, misericordia. compel, cogere, colg, coact. completed : 1 have — the work, opus absolutum habeo, 364. concerns (it), interest, 207. condemn, damnare, condemnare : to death, capitis. condemn a man to pay his vow, voti damnare. conduct, honorable, honestas. confer (benefits) on, conferre (benefeia) in ; acc ; tul, lat. confer an obligation on, gratiam inire ab aliquo (Cic.) apud aliquem (Liv .) 339. congratulate, congratulari, 492. connection with, conjunctio. See 157. conquer, vincere, vie, viet. consequence : it is of—, interest. consequence: it is of no—, nihil in¬ terest, or refert, 207. consider = think, existimare, arbitrari, consider = attend to, attendere, 229. considerable quantity, aliquantum. considerably, aliquanto, 406. constancy, constantia. constantly, perpetuo. constellation, astrum; sid-us , eri». consul, consul , utis. 336 INDEX I.-ENGLISH. consult, consulere , sulu, suit., acc. consult, for, ) consulere consult a man’s interests, s alicui, 233. contemporary, aequalis. contented, contentus (abl.). contention, contentio. continue, pergere , perrex, perrect. contract to build, conducere faciendum; dux, duct. contrary to each other, inter se con¬ trarii, os, a. convenient, commodus. conversant, to be, callere (acc.). converse, loqui, locutus. corrupt, corrumpere, rup, rupt. cost, stare, constare, 266. abl.: (dat. of person). count, numerare. country, patria; as opposed to town, rus, ruris. country, in the, ruri. country, into the, rus. country, from the, rure. courage, virtus, utis. courageously, fortiter. courtesy, humanitas. cross over, transjicere or trajicere, jec, ject, (acc.). crown, corona. cruelly, crudeliter. cruelty, crudelitas. cry out, clamare. cultivate, colere, colu, cult: if it be a study, e. g. eloquence — studere (dot.). cure, mederi (dat.). custom, consuetud-o, inis. cut off, intercludere, clus , 233. D. Daily, quotidie, indies or in dies singu¬ los. (See 69, t). danger, periculum. dare, audere, ausus sum. day, by, interdiu, 311. deaf, surdus. dearer, pluris, G. 266. death, mors. death, to (after condemn), capitis. debt, ccs alienum , 273. debt, heavy, magnum ces alienum. deceive, decipere , io, cep, cept. decree, decernere, crev, cret. deem, putare. defend what is actually attacked, de¬ fendere (fend, fens) : — what may be attacked, tueri. Degree, to what a—! quo, (with gen.) 612 . deliberation (after opus est). consulto 271. delight, delectare. delightful, jucundus. delightful to the sense of sight, amoenus. demand, postulare ; poscere, poposc; to demand importunately, efflagitare. (See 257). deny, negare. depart a finger’s breadth, transversum digitum discedere. depend on, niti, nisus or nixus : (in with abl. ). deprive of, spoliare, orbare ; (abl.). desert, deserere, seru , sert. deserve, mereri (merit); well of, bene de deserving of, dignus (abl.). deserving to be, &c., dignus esse qui, with subj. design, consilium. desire, velle ; cupere, cupiv, cupit : = ex¬ press a wish, optare (See 420, x). desirous, cupidus (gen.). despair of, desperare. destroy utterly, delere, delev, delet. destroy (= burn), concremare, 141, c. destroy : go about to destroy, perditum ire , 362,* a. deter, deterrere. [See From .] determine, constituere. detrimental, to be, detrimento esse, 242. devote oneself to, incumbere in, with acc. ( cubu, cubit). devote oneself to, studere (dat.). die, mori, ior, mortuus ; mortem or su¬ premum diem obire, 249. difficult, difficilis. difficulty: there is — in doing, &c. = it is done, difficile. difficulty: he lias—in doing, tic. = he does it, difficile. difference, distantia. difference, it makes a very great, per¬ multum interest , 122. difference, what is there 7 quid interest ? difference, there is no, ) nihil interest, difference, it makes no, $ or refert, 207. diligence, diligentia. dinner, ccena. direct = instruct, praecipere, cep , cept. discharge, fungi, functus, (abl.) per¬ fungi. discipline, disciplina. discontented, am—with, pcenitet me, 207. discourse, sermo, onis. discover, invenire, repirere. See 177, o. disease, moi'bus. disgraceful, turjris. disgusted: am — at, taedet (perf. per* tccsum est) me, 207. INDEX I. - ENGLISH. S3 7 dishonorably, turpiter. displease, displicere , (dat.). dissatisfied: am — with, pcenitet me, 207. distance: to be at a distance of, &c. abesse, distare , 319. distance: at two miles’ distance, 348. distant: to be — from, abesse; distare (a), 319. ditch,, fossa. divest, exuere, exu, exut, 233. do nothing but —, nihil aliud quam ( faciunt omitted), 420. do well, praeclare facere. dog, canis. doubt: dubitare. doubt: I don’t at all—, nullus dubito (i quin ). See note 492. doubt: there is no — , non est dubium (quin), 89. dream, somniare. dream, s. somnium. draw, ( = call) away, avocare. draw up an army, aciem instruere; strux, struct. draw up an army in three lines, tripli¬ cem aciem instruere. dress, vestitus. drink, bibere, bib, bibit. drink, s. potus, Us, ) drinking, potio, $ drive, pellere, pepul, puls : — drive away, abigere, eg, act. dutiful affection, pietas. duty, officium. E. Each (of two), uterque , utraque, utrum- que, G. utriusquc. each one, unusquisque. each other (after 1 to love,’ &c.), inter se, 470. each of them, singly, singuli , pi. eagerly desirous, studiosus, (gen.); avidus, (gen.). easy, facilis. Easily, facile. eat, edere (?d, cs); vesci (See 273). eclipse, defectio. eclipsed, to be, deficere, fee, fed. efface, delere, delev, delet. either — or : aut — aut; vel — r el; sive — sire, 456. elect, eligere , leg, led. election, comitia, n. pi. eloquence, eloquentia, facundia (natu¬ ral eloquence), emulate, aemulari, 229. encamp, considere, sed, sess. 15 encounter death, mortem oppetere. encounter a danger, periculum obire. end of, extremus, agreeing with its subst., 179. endued with, praeditus (abl). endure, sustinere, tinu, tent. enemy (private), inimicus. enemy (public), hostis. engage = fight with, confligere , flix , .fi tct. engage = undertake, recipere, cep, cept. engaged in : to be —, operam dare , 337: (in a battle, affair, &c.) in- ter esse, 224. enjoy, frui, (abl.). enough, satis, affdtim. (See 512.) enquire of, quaerere ex; queesiv, queesit. enter into partnership, coire societatem. entrust, credere, credid, credit (dat. of person). envy, invidere, vid, vis (dat.). Ephesian, Ephesius. equal, par, dat. Equal to (in magni¬ tude, real or figurative), instar (gen.), 207. error, error. escape from, s.fuga, 157. escape : it escapes me, me fugit, fallit, praeterit , 259. eternal, aeternus (= everlasting); sem¬ piternus, 123, c. even, etiam. even mind, aequus animus. even — not, ne — quidem. evening, in the, vesperi every, omnis. every body, quisque, 396. every tenth man, decimus quisque. every body who or that, quisquis, quu cunque, 396. every thing, omnia, pi. ever, unquam, aliquando , quando, 402. evil, malum, neut. adj. exactly, with a numeral; ipse, in agree¬ ment, 308. exceed the bounds of moderation, mo¬ dum excedere, cess. exceedingly, vehementer. excel, antecellere, praestare, 229. exhort, hortari , adhortari. expedient, utilis (dat.). expedient: it is —, expedit. expediency, utilitas. experience (familiarity with a thing). usus, Us. exposed to, obnoxius, 212. extortion, pecuniae repetundae ; or only repetundae. extremely flourishing, longe opulenti #• simus, eye, oculus. 338 INDEX I.-ENGLISH. F. Face, to know a man by, de facie nosse. fail (a friend), deesse (dat .), fail (one), deficere, 229. faith, fides, 5. faithful, fidelis. fall on (= seize on), incessere , 229. false, falsus. falsehoods, utter many, multa mentiri , 38. family, familia. far from (thinking) this, tantum abest ut — {ut). far : not to be — from, haud multum or •procul abesse {quin), 91. far be it from me not, 83. See note t, p. 40. far, multo (with compar, and superl.), 410. farewell, are, salve, vale, 281. fate, fatum. fault, culpa. favour, a, beneficium. favour, favere {dat.), fav, faut. fawn upon, adulari (dat. or acc .). fear, of body, timor ; of mind, metus , us. fear, timere, metuere , vereri. See 99. feeble, imbecillus. feed on, vesci. See 273. feel thankful, gratiam habere. fever, febris, abl. i. few, pauci, cc, a. few : a few days ago, paucis his diebus. few: a few days before, paucis illis diebus. fidelity, fides. field, in the, militiae. fight, pugnare; fight on horseback, ex equo. find, invenire, reperire, 177. find: hard to find, difficilis inventu , 364. finger’s breadth. See Depart, finish, conficere. fire, ignis, { = conflagration) incen¬ dium. first, primum: at first, primo. See 83. fit, aptus, 212. fitted, accommodatus, 219. fix by edict, edicZre {ut ). flank, on the, a latere. flatter, adulari {dat. or acc.). flaw, vitium. flight, fuga. flogged, to be, virgis caedi ; caesus. folly, stultitia. fond, cupidus {gen.). food, cibus, i. foot, pes, pedis. for, when untranslated, 255. for how much ? quanti ? for as much—as, tanti — quanti , 266. for less, minoris, 266. for just as much—as, > tantidem — for no more, than ( quanti , 226. for { = in behalf of), pro. for ( = owing to, of obstacles), prce,{abl.) for instance, verbi causa. for some time, dudum, jamdudum, 420, for (after to fear), sign of dat. for any thing I care, per me licet. for us (after make), a nobis. foreign to, alienus, 212. foretell, praedicere. forget, oblivisci, oblitus, 199. former, the, ille, 378. forsooth : as if—, quasi vero, 494. fortune. See Good. fortune : let — see to it, id Fortuna vidgrit. found, condere, condid, condit. founder (of a family), princeps familiae. free from, liberare {abl.). freedman, libertinus : (but with refer¬ ence to his master, libertus.) friendly, amicus. friends, his own, sui. from a boy, puero. from the heart, exanimo. from a wall, ex muro. from your neighbourhood, istinc. from a different direction, aliunde. from, after conceal, omitted, 251. from, after prevents, deters, &c., quomi¬ nus, 94. from, after recover, ex. front, in, a fronte. frugality , frugalitas. fruits (of the earth), fruges : (of a tree), fructus. full, plenus, 182. fury, furor. G. Gain an advantage, emolumentum ca¬ pere {cep, capt), — ex. gain possession of, potiri {abl. gen.). Gaul, Gallus. get possession of, potiri, potitus {abl.). gift, doman, munus, eris. (See 242.) give information, docere, 253: give much information, midla docere {de), 252. give battle to, proelium committere cum; mis, miss. given over, despen atus. given it is, datur. glad, to be, laetari, 521. glory, gloria. INDEX 1.- ENGLISH. 339 glorious, gloriosus, go wrong, errare. go away, abire, decedere , cess. See 308. go about to destroy, ‘perditum ire, 362*, a. go on, pergere, perrex, perrect. go on in your valour! macte virtute esto ! 280. god, Deus, 56. gold, aurum. golden, aureus. good, bonus; (= beneficial, expedient) utilis. good : to do—, prodesse (dat.). good fortune : it was my — ( contigit mihi, — ut, 374). good time, in, govern, imperare , dat.; (= regulate, direct) moderari {acc. or dat. See 220 ). grateful, gratus. gratitude, gratia. greatest (when degree is meant rather than size), summus. greedy, avidus {gen.). Greece, Graecia. Greek, Graecus. grief, dolor. grieve, dolere, maerere. See 521. ground, humus ; on the ground, humi. grudge, invidere {dat.), vut, vis. guard against, £ cavere {acc. 233), cav, guard, be on my, $ caut. guidance, under your, te duce; under the guidance of Herdonius, Her¬ donii ductu. H. Habit of silence, taciturnitas. had rather, malle , 150 (conjug. 142, 1). hail, ave, salve, 281. hand, manus, Us, 4. f. hanging, suspendium. happen (of evils), accidere : of fortunate events, contingere {tig): = turn out, evenire. (See 374). happen : how does it happen that... 7 qui Jit ut, &c. happy, beatus, felix. (See 443.) hard: are hard to avoid, difficile vi¬ tantur. hard to find, difficilis inventu {sup.). hardly ( = scarcely), vix. hardly any body, nemo fere. harvest, messis, f. hate, odisse (with tenses derived from perf.). hateful, to be, odio esse. 242. have, habere. have a thing done, faciendum curare, 356. have an interview with, convenire, {acc). have, in such sentences as, l with whom we have to do.’ (See 336.) head, caput, capitis, n. heal, mederi {dat.). healed, to be (of a wound), consanes- cere. health, to be in good, valere. hear, audire. hearing: without hearing him ( = him unheard), inauditum {acc. masc.) heart (as the seat of th e affections), ani¬ mus, 92. heart, cor, cordis, n. heavy, gravis. height: to such a —, eo, adv. {gen.). help (a person in perplexity), subvenire {dat .); juvare {acc.), auxiliari {dat.), succurrere {dat. See 222, k.). her {acc. sing.), se, if relating to nom. of sentence ; if not, earn. her, adj. suus, a, um ., if relating to nom. of sentence; if not, ejus. hesitate, dubitare. hidden, occultus. him, se, if relating to nom. of sentence if not, eum. himself, 369; 373, c. (Q,. on § 48.) hinder, impedire. See Q,. on § 15. hindrance, impedimentum. his own friends, adherents, &c. sui. hit ( = strike), ferire, icere, caedere , ce- cid, cces. See 299, i. hold, tenere. hold a levy of troops, delectum habere hold one’s tongue, silere , tacere , Set 299, g. hold cheap, parvi pendere, 266. home, to, domum : at, domi: from, domo honey, mei, mellis. honour ( = the honorable), honestas, ( = probity) fdes, ei. honour, to be an, > lwnor{ 242 . honorable, to be, $ ’ honorable conduct, honestas. Honor¬ able, honestus Honorably, honeste. hope, sperare. (See 15.) horseback, on, ex equo : (of more than one person) ex equis. house, at my, domi mecc. how (with adj.), quam. how disgraceful it is, quanto opprobris est. how many, quot. how much, quantum. how does it nappen? qui Jit, ut . . .7 340 INDEX I.-ENGLISH. how few there are, who — 7 quolu-t- quisque est, qui . . ? (with subj.) 477. human-feeling, humanity, hunger, fames, hurry, to be in a, festinare. hurt, nocere , dat. ; Icedere ( acc. tecs.) hurtful, to be, nocere. husband, vir, 291. humanitas. is. 1 . I for my part, equidem. if — not, nisi, 451. if however, sin autem, 451. ignorant, to be, ignorare (acc.). ignorant: not to be ignorant that, &c., non ignorare , quin. ignorant: who is ignorant that, &c. 1 quis ignorat, quin . . .? ignorant of, rudis teen.). immediately after the battle, confestim a proelio, 348. immense, ingens. immortal, immortalis. impiety, impietas. impiety : if it may be said without —, si fas est dictu, 364. * impiety : it cannot be said without—, nefas est dictu , 364. importance, it is of, interest (gen.), 203. importance, it is of great, magni (or multum) interest, 206, a. important, gravior. i m p or t une, “fiagitar e. impose on, imponere, posu, posit, 233. impute as a fault, vitio or culpoc dare or vertere, 242. in the presence of the people, apud populum. in (an author), apud (Xenophontem, &c.). in front, a fronte. in flank, a latere. in the rear, a tergo. in triumph (to lead), per triumphum. inattentive to, negligens (gen.), 183. increase, augere, aux, auct, (trans.) crescere, crev (neut.). incredible, incredibilis. inconsistent with, alienus, 212. inconvenient, incommodus. induce, adducere ut, &c. indulge, indulgere, duls, dull (dat.). industry, diligentia. inflict punishment on, aliquem pcend afficere, 276. Influence: to have great — with, mul¬ tum valere apud aliquem. inform, certiorem facere, 187. information. See Give. inhabit, incolere, colu, cult. injure, violare , ( = do harm to) lesder» (acc.). injurious, it is, nocet (dat.). injury, injuria. innocent, innocens. insignificant: how —! quam nullus } insolence to such a height of, eo (adv.) insolentice, 512. instance, for, verbi causa. interest ( = true interest), utilitas. interest: it is the— of, interest (gen.), 203. interests (to consult the). See 233. interests (to provide for). See 233. interview. See Have. intimate : to be — with , familiariter uti , abi. inventor, inventor, fern, inventrix. invest ( = blockade), obsidere , sed , scss . invoke, appellare. iron-hearted, ./e/veus. is ( = is distant), distat. island, insula. it cannot be but that, fieri non potest quin. it is not every man who can, &c., non cujusvis est, &c. 190. Italy, Italia. J. Javelin, jaculum. jest, jocus. jewel, gemma. join battle with, committere praelium (cum). journey, on the, inter viam. joyful, laetus. just (equitable), cequus. justice, justitia. K. Keep, servare. keep one’s word, fidem praestare. keep up a certain state, splendide m gerere. kill, interficere, occidere, necare, 308 king, rex , regis. know, scire, novisse, callere , 335. L. Labour, labor. lame of one leg, claudus altero pede . lamp, lucerna. INDEX I. - ENGLISH. 341 large, magnus. lasting, sempiternus. latter, the, hie. laugh, ridere, ris, rls. law, lex, legis. lay on, imponere. lay down, ) .. lay aside, ' \vonere, P 0Slt - lay a person under an obligation, gra¬ tiam ab aliquo mire. lay down a magistracy, magistratum abdicare; (or se with abl., 308.) lead a life, agere vitam ; eg, act. league, foedus, eris. learning, branch of, doctrina. lean on, niti, nisus, nixus (abl. 273). learn, discere , didic. learn by heart, ediscere. leave, relinquere, liq, lid: (by will), re¬ linquere. leave ( = go out of), excedere (with abl) cess, 83. leave nothing undone, nihil praetermit¬ tere quin. leave off, desinere, desi, desit. leg. See Lame. leisure: I have—, vacat mihi, 154. Lemnos, Lemnos, G. i. let me know, fac sciam (with ut omitted). let out to be built by contract, locare faciendum. letter, literae, pi.: epistola. levy troops, delectum habere. liable to, obnoxius, 212. liar, mendax ( adj .). lie, mentiri. lie near, adjacere, 229. life, vita; ( = life-time) actas. In the life-time of Augustus, Augusto vivo, 364 lift up, tollere , sustul, sublat. light, levis. light ( = kindle), accendere : succendere rogum, &c. (See 299, h.) lightning, fulmen , inis. like, similis, dat.: (= equal to in size) instar, (gen). like (verb). See 491, d. lines : to draw up an army in three—, triplicem aciem instruere. literature, literae. little, or a little ( =few things) pauca , 23. little : but or too —, parum. little, a (= some, but not much), pau¬ lum ; paululum, 402. long, diu : pridem, jamdiu, jampridem. See 420. long for, avere, of an impatient, gestire of a. joyous longing. look to that yourself, id ipse vidSris. loquacious, loquax. lose, perdere, perdid, perdit : lose (pas¬ sively), amittere. (See 56.) lose an opportunity, occasionem amit¬ tere. lose flesh, corpus amittere. love, amare, diligere. (See 185, a.) lover of, amans, diligens (gen., 183.), lover, such a lover of, adeo amans or diligens (gen., 183). lowest, infimus, imus. lust, libido , inis. luxurious, luxuriosus. lyre, to play on the. See Teach. M. Mad, to he, furere. madness, amentia, 512. magistracy, to hold, magistratum ge¬ rere. make, facere (fee, fact); efficio : am made,^o. Obs. ‘ makes all things (acc.) flourish;’ in Lat. ‘makes that (ut) all things (nom.) should flourish,’ 254. make the same promise, idem polliceri, pollicitus. make treaty, &c., foedus icere, 299. make this request of you, illud te rogo (ut ne). make (= appoint to an office), creare. make mention of, meminisse, recor¬ dari, 201. make sport of, ) 7/ / , (ff , make merry with, $ lUuaere > lus (' aat ■) make the same boast, idem gloriari. make it my first object, id agere (ut). make for us, a nobis facere. make a decree in a man’s favour, se¬ cundum aliquem decernere; decrev, decret. making haste (after onus est), prope¬ rate, (abl. part. 171). maker, effector: fern, effectrix. man, homo, vir. (See 38, y.) man : I am not the — to; non is sum, qui (subj). manners ( = morals, character,) mores, urn, pi. many, multi. march against the enemy, obviam ire hostibus. marry (of a female), nubere (dat. 222). Marseilles, Massilia. master, magi.ier, dominus, herus. (See 180 .) matter, res. mean, sibi velle. 342 INDEX I. ■ENGLISH. mean time ; in the —, interim, interea. (See 402.) means, by no, minime. meat, cibus, medicine, medicina. meditate, meditari ( acc.). meet, to go to, obviam ire ( dat.). melt, liquescere , lieu. merchant, mercator. middle of, medius (in agreement with * its subst. 179). mile (= 1000 paces), mille passus : pi. Millia passuum. Miletus, of, Milesius. milk, lac , lactis. mind, mens, mentis; animus. mindful, memor {gen.). miserable, miser, era , &c. mistaken, to b e, falli. mistaken, I am, me fallit. mock, illudere {dat. 229). moderate, moderari {acc. or dat. 220). money, pecunia. month, mensis , m. moon, luna. moral, sanctus. morals, mores, um. more, plus (with gen.). For more, pluris. mortal, mortalis. most men, plerique. motion, motus , Us. mound, agger. move, movere , mov , mot. Move, neut. moveri. much, multa, n. pi. (but if opposed to many things, or followed by gen. multum.) much less, nedum, 443. multitude, multitudo , inis. N. Naked, nudus. name, nominare (also = to appoint), nature, natura ; rerum natura. near, prope {acc.). near, to be very, minimum abesse (im- pers.) quin, 92. nearer, propior ; {adv.) propius, 211. nearer am, propius absum {quam), 319. nearest, proximus. nearly, prope, paene. need, egere, indigere {abi. or gen.). need, have —of, opus est, 176, e. need, you have no —, nihil opus est. negligent, negligens (gen.), 183. neighbourhood, in your, istic, } neighbourhood, from your, istinc. > 387 neighbourhood, to your, istuc. i neither-nor, S ~ ’ ( nec — nec. neutral, medius. never, nunquam. nevertheless, tamen. news of the town, res urbanae. next: the next thing is, sequitur ut 85. night, by, noctu or nocte. no, nullus ; after ne, quis. no one, nemo. mo pictor. nusquam. temporis. nobody, nemo, inis* none of you, nemo vestrum. none of those things, nihil eorum. nor, neque, nec: but after ut or ne it is neve or neu. not, non. After rel., see p. 215, d. not yet, nondum. not one’s own, alienus. not even, ne — quidem. not only — but also, non solum— sed, or verum etiam. not so far off, to be, propius abesse. not to say, ne dicam. not that — but, non quod — sed; non quo — sed ; non eo or ideo quod — sed, 492. not at all, nihil. not as if not, non quin, with subj. not to be far from, haud multum (or haud procul) abesse {quin). nothing, nihil. nothing but, nihil aliud nisi, 185. nourish, alere, alu, alit or alt. now ( = already), jam. number, numerare. O. Obey, parere, obedire {dat. See 222) object, not to, non recusare quin, 92. obligation, lay a man under a great, confer an — on, magnam ab aliquo {Cic.), apud aliquem {Liv.), gra¬ tiam mire, 339. obliging, commodus. obstruct, intercludere, clus. obtain, potiri {abl. gen ). occasion: you have no — to hurry, nihil est quod festines , 477. no painter, ne no where, > no whither, $ no time, nihil * Neminis and nemine are not found, but nullius, nullo :—except now and then nemine with pass, participle —Nemo ablativum nec habet, nec habet genitivum. INDEX I. - ENGLISH. 343 Tjweasion: have — for, opus est, 170. ocean, oceanus. occupy myself in, operam dare , 337. odious, to be, odio esse. 242. ol after ‘strip,’ &c. (abl .) of, after ‘become,’ ‘deserve well,’ &c. ‘am persuaded,’ and when of — concerning, de. of, after ‘enquire,’ ex. of others, alienus, a, urn.. of such a kind, ejusmodi. offend, offendere, fend, fens ( acc.). offend against, violare. offence: if I may say so without —, pace tud dixerim. old, vetus, veteris ( n. pi. vetera). old man, senex, G. sen,zs, G. pi. um. old age, senectus , atis. one (of two), alter, G. ius. one thing — another, aliud — aliud, 38. one ( = a certain), quidam. one (= some one, no matter who), aliquis. one’s, suus. only, adj. solus, G. ius. only: the — one who, unus qui (with subj.). only son, unicus filius. opinion, to be of, censere. opportunity, occasio. oppose, repugnare (dat.), obstare (dat.). or, aut, vel , ve, 456 (in questions an). or not, necne. See 122. orator, orator. order, jubere, juss (acc. with inf). ought, oportet. See 126. out of, e, ex. out of doors, foras. out: to dine out, caenare foris , 339. over: it is all over with, actum est de. over against, adversus. overpower (with emotion), frangere, fregffract. overthrow, evertere, vert, vers. owe, debere. owing: it is owing to, per aliquem stat, quominus, &c. 99. own (emphatic), ipsius or ipsorum , after meus, tuus, &o. P. Pace, passus, Us. pained, to be, dolere (acc. or abl. with de.). pardon, venia. pardon, ignoscere, nov (dat.); (of a su¬ perior) vsniam dare. parent, parens; genitor, fern genitrix. part, para , partis. partner, consors, 185. party, to be on our, a nobis senlirc. past, the, praeterita. peck, modius. peculiar, proprius, 212. perceive, sentire. perchance (in questions), quid in ee quid, numquid, 400. perform, fungi, perfungi, functus (abl.). perhaps, fortasse. permitted, it is, licet. permitted, I am, licet mihi. perpetual, sempiternus. perseverance, perseverantia. persist, perseverare. persuade (= advise), suadere (dat.) ; = advise effectually, persuadere, suas (dat.). persuaded, I am, persuasum est mihi de, &c., ox persuasum habeo, 291. perverse, perversus. perversely, perverse. philosopher, philosophus. philosophy, philosophia. piety, pietas. pity (J), miseret me, or misereor, gen. (See 201, r.) pity, misericordia. plainly: see — through, perspectum habeo, 364. planet, planeta or es. plan, consilium. plant, serere, sev, sat. play, ludere, lus. play on the lyre. See Peach. pleaf a cause, agere causam. plebant, jucundus. please, placere (dat.). pleasure, voluptas. poet, poeta. point : to be on the — of, in eo esse ut, 479. poison, venenum. Pompey, Pompejus. possession, to be in, tenere. possession, to gain, potior (abl. or gen.). possible as (after superi.), quam, vel, 410. possibly. As great as can possibly be, quantus maximus potest esse, 412. post nimself, considere, sed, sess. poor, pauper. power, potentia of actual, potestas of legal , conceded, &c., power, power: to put himself in their—, po teSlatem sui facere. power: to be in our—, in nostra po> testate esse. powerful, potens. practice (justice, &c.), colere , colu, suH praise, laus, laudis. 344 INDEX I.-ENGLISH. praise, to, laudare. pray (= beg earnestly), orare. predict, prccdicere. prefer, anteponere, posu, posit. prefer a charge, reum facere de, 187. prefer a capital charge against, rei capitalis reum facere, 187. prefer a charge of immorality against, de moribus reum facere, 187. prejudicial, to be, obesse (dat.). prepare, parare. present with, donare, 207. present, give us a, dono ox muneri dare, 242, (3.) present, to be, adesse (dat.). preservation: tend to the —, 335, c. pretend, simulare. pretty often, nonnunquam. prevent, obstare, obstit (dat.). priest, ? sacerdos, otis. priestess, $ ’ proceed against a person, consulere in aliquem. produce (= fruits), fruges , pi. productive of, efficiens (gen.), 183. profitable, to be, prodesse (dat.). promise, polliceri, licitus; promittere. See 17, 1. See 15. prompt execution (after opus est), ma¬ ture facto, 177. prone, proclivis (ad.). property, all my, omnia mea. property, all their, omnia sua. prosecute, postulare , 201. protection, take under one’s, tueri, 374. proud, superbus. prove an honour, honori esse; (prove done by sum with the dat., 242.) prove myself mindful; praestare me memorem. re¬ prove my gratitude, prove myself grateful, provide for the interests of, providere vid, vis; prospicere, spex, sped gratiam ferre. (both with dat.). provided that, dum, modo, or dum- miklo 494. (after which ‘ not ’ is ne), pull down, diruere, ru, rut. punishment, pcena. purpose, for the, causa. purpose, to no, nequicquam, frustra. put; put ‘down, ponere , posu, posit. put oflj exuere, txu, exut. put in mind of, admonere, 194. pyre, rogus. Q. Quite (to be without), plane (carere). R. Ratify a treaty, icere fucchiA rather, I had, mdlo. rational faculty, mens. rear, in the, a ter go. reason, you, &c., have no, nihil esl quod (subj.). receive, ac-, ex-, re- cipere, cep, cept. (See 308.) receive favourably, boni consulere (in Quintii., Seneca, - several, plures. several times, 420. severe, gravis: gravior, 409, g. severity, gravitas. shadow, umbra. shed, profundere, fud,fus. should, = ought, debere, oportet, 126 or (after Exerc. 49, Pt. I.) part in dus, 326, 327. show (myself brave), praebere. Sicily, Sicilia. sick, aeger, gra, grum: (of body or mind) aegrotus. side, to be on our, a nobis stare. siege, obsidio. silence, silentium: (habit of) tacilur- nitas. silent, tacitus : (habitually) taciturnus. silent, to be, silere, tacere. See 299. silver, argentum. sin, peccare. since, quum, quoniam, 492. sister, soror. size, magnitudo. skilled in, peritus (gen.). slaughter, trucidare. slave, servus. slave, to be the, servire (dat.). slay, occidere, cid, cis. sleep, somnus. smack of, redolere (acc.), ) smell of, olere, $ snatch away, eripere, ripu, rept (dat of pers.). snares, insidiae. 346 INDEX I.-ENGLISH. snow, nix, nivis. so near home, tam prope a domo. so. The thing is so, res itase habet. Socrates, Socrates, Gen. is. sold, to be, venire (veneo), 267. some, aliquis, quispiam, 392. See note x. and 390, v. some one or other, nescio quis, 394. some body of consequence, aliquis, 396. some other place, to, alio. 394. some other place, from, aliunde. some other direction, in, alio. some other direction, from, aliunde. some considerable, aliquantum. some — others, alii — alii. sometimes nonnunquam, aliquando, interdum. See 402.* somewhat. Omit, and put adj. in compar. 408: or translate by paulo with compar. sorry : I am — for, piget me (gen.). soul, animus. sow, serere, sev, sat. Spain, Hispania. spare, parcere, peperc (dat.). speak, loqui, locutus. speak the truth, verum dicere. spear, hasta. speech, oratio, 249. spend his life, vitam agere. spend his time (in), tempus impendSre, 337. spoken ill of, to be, male audire. sport: to make — of, illudere, lus (dat.). stand in need of, egere (gen. abl.). stand by, adesse (dat.). star, stella, See 51. stay (in a place), commorari. starvation, fames. state, respublica. stick, bacillum. stir out of the city, urbe excedere, 249. stone, lapis, adj. lapideus. storm, oppugnare (acc.). storm, to take by, per vim expugnare. strange, mirus. strength, vires, ium. strip ofF, exuere. strive, niti, eniti, nisus, nixus, ut. struck (by stones, lightning, &c.), ictus. study, studere (datj). subject to, obnoxius (dat.). succeed ( = follow), excipere (acc.). successfully, ex sententia. • uccour, succurere (dat.). such, talis. such is your temperance, quae tua es* temperantia, 56. such a manner, in, ita (ut). suffer, sinere, siv; pati , passus. See 532. suggestion, at your, te auctore. suitable, idoneus, 212. sun, sol. superior, to be, ) antecellere , praestare, surpass, $ 229. superstition, superstitio. supper, ccena. support ( = nourish), alere, alu, alit, or alt. surround, circumdhre (urbem muro, or murum urbi). survive, super esse. survivor, superstes , itis. suspense, to be in anxious, pendere animi, animo (or if necessary, animis. suspicion, suspicio. swallow, hirundo, dinis swear, jurare. Syracuse, Syracusae. T. Take,t capere (cep, capt) : sumere (sums, sumpt). See 492. take by storm, expugnare. take in good part, boni consulere, 185. take away, adimere, eximere. See 385, o (em, empt): eripere (dat. of pers.). take measures against, consulere in (acc.). take cruel measures against, crudeliter in (aliquem) consulere. take a camp, exuere hostes castris, 233. take care, cavere, cav, caut. take care that, vide (ne). take under one’s protection, tueri, 374. take hold of, prehendere. teach, docere, two acc. 257. teach to play on the lyre, fidibus doceri (i. e. teach with or on the strings). teacher, magister ; fern, magistra. temple, templum. tenacious, tenax (gen.). tend, to, 335, c. terrify, terrere. territory, ager. thank, gratias agere. that (after doubt, deny, &c. with neg.), quin. * Rarius interdum quam nonnunquam esse memento, t Take arms, arma capere, or sumere. (Cicero.) iNDEX I. that (after .fear), ne; that — not, ut (or ne non). that, as nom. to ‘is,’ &c., agrees with nom. after it, 386, m. that famous, ilie, 381. that (after ‘ it remains' 1 it follows'), ut. that too, et is ; idemque, ) ope that too not, nec is, y that only, is demum , 385. Thebes, Thebas. , arum. then (= at that time), turn. then ( = after), deinde , inde. then ( = therefore), igitur, itaque. there, ibi. there is no doubt, non est dubium quin. there are some who (think), sunt qui {putent). there are not wanting, non desunt qui $ubj.). there are found some who, reperiuntur qui {subj.). think, censere, putare, existimare, ar¬ bitrari, See 257. think nothing of, nihili facere , 266. thigh, femur, oris, n. thing. A thing which (referring to a preceding sentence), id quod : sometimes, quae res , 36. thirst for, sitire, acc., 240. this being the case, quae quum ita sint. thousand, mille , adj.; pi. millia, subst. threaten, minari. See end of 222. three hundred, trecenti. three days, space of, triduum. three years, space of, triennium. through, expressing the cause, sign of abl. throw before, projic'Sre, jec, ject (see throw off| exuere. till, colere, colu, cult. till, donee, dum, quoad, 507, &c. time, at that, id temporis. time: at the time oi the Latin Games, Ludis Latinis. time, for a long, dudum, diu, jamdu- dum, &c. See 420. times, tw"? or three (= several times),* bis terque. times, two or three (= not more than),* bis terve. times. many times as great, multis partibus major. timid, timidus. tired : am — of, taedet me {gen .). to death (after condemn), capitis. to no purpose, nequicquam, frustra. See 33. —ENGLISH. 347 to each other (after contrary, compare\ inter se. toga, toga. together (after to compare), inter se. to-morrow, eras. tongues: to hold their —, 299. too much, nimius {nimius somnus, or nimium somni). too dear, nimio. top of, summus , {adj. See 179). torch, taeda. tortured : to be — in mind, discruciari animi. towards, adversus, erga, 470 : in, 281. treachery, proditio. treason, proditio. treaty, foedus, eris. tribune, tribunus. triumph, triumphus. triumph in, per triumphum {ducere). triumph : gain a — for a victory over the Gauls, de Gallis triumphare. troublesome, molestus. Troy, Troja. true: it is —but, ille quidem — sed, 383. truly, vere. trustworthy, fdelis. truth, veritas. turn back, revertere, reverti, 339. turn out, evadere, vas. turn it into a fault, vitio vertere, 242, ( 2 ). Tuscan, 1 uscus. two days, space of, biduum. U. Unacquainted with, rudis {gen.). unbecoming, it is, dedecet {acc.). unburied, inhumatus. under favour, bond tud venid. under such an age, 306. understand, intelligere, lex, led. undertake, suscipere : (= engage to do) recipere. undertake to corrupt, corrumpendum suscipere. unexpectedly, de improviso. unfriendly, inimicus. unless, nisi, 451. unless indeed, nisi vero, ox forte. unless I am mistaken, nisime fallit. unlike, dissimilis {dat.). unmindful, immemor {gen.). unskilled in, imperitus {gen.). unteach, dedocere ; {two accus.) unwilling, to be, nolle. * Bis tkrque augebit , minuet bis terve notatum. 348 INDEX I.-ENGLISH. unwilling, > . u unwillingly, ) unworthy, indignus (abl .). use, uti ( usus ), abl. use, make a bad— of, male uti (abl.). use, make a perverse — of, perverse uli (abl.). useful, utilis , 212. useless, inutilis , 212. utter many falsehoods, multa mentiri (de), 38. y. Vain, in, necquicquam; frustra (See 33). value, (Bstimare , 264. valuable, pretiosus. very (with superl.), vel, 410. very many, permulti. very much, permulta. very little, perpauca. very, to be translated by magnus or summus, when the adj. after ‘ very ’ is translated by a subst. ‘ Is very honorable,’ ‘ magno honori est,’ 242. vice, vitium. violence, vis. virtue, virtus , virtutis. virtuous, honestus. virtuously, honeste. visit (on business), adire; (as a friend) visere; (on business, or not) con- venire. See 249. voyage, to have a prosperous, ex sen¬ tentia navigare. W. Wage, gerere, gess, gest. wait, manere. wait for, expectare , opperiri, praestolari, See 299. wait upon, convenire (acc.). walk, ambulare. wall, murus ; (of a walled city) mcenia, pi.; (of a house) paries, etis: (of a garden, Ac.) maceria. wanting to be, deesse (dat.). war, in, bello. warn, monere (ut, ne). See p. 222, note, washed, to be (of an island), circum¬ fundi, fusus. watch over, cavere, cav, caut (dal.). water, aqua. Wave, fluctus, Us. way, in such a, ita (ut). weary, am, taedet me (gen.). weight, onus, eris. well, bene: ( = rightly), recte. whatever, quicquid, neut. to, subst. | quicunque (adj.). wheat, triticum. when, quum, quando, 105. ( = as soon as) ubi, ut, 512. whence, unde. where, ubi. where you are, istic ; from where you are, istinc ; to where, Ac. istuc. where in the world, ubi or ubinam gentium. whether—or (of two statements left doubtful), sive—sive : seu — seu. whether (in double dependent ques¬ tions), see 118, 119; num (in single dependent questions), which (of two), uter. whip with rods, virgis caedere ; cecid, cues. white, albus. whither, quo. why, cur, quare, 105. whole, totus, universus. (See 179.) will, against my, invitus. Against tho will of Caius, invito Caio. willing to be, velle. wind, ventus. wine, vinum. winter (as adj.), hibernus. wisdom, sapientia. wise, sapiens. wish, velle, 142. wish well to, cupcre alicui. with, cum. with, after, ‘ to do,’ de. with, after ‘ to make a beginning,’ a, ab. (in the house of, 1 ,, v in the mind of/ with= in the estimation S & multurr . in the presence of,, valere.) without, sine; ox adj. expers (gen.). without, to be, carere (abl.). without being heard, inauditus, a, um. without: before partic. subst., non, or some other negative, with parti¬ ciple, 363, 520. c. neque, ut non, quin , without, after nunquam and before particip. subst. quin with subj.. 88, c. wolf, lupus. wonder at, admirari. wonderful, mimis. wont, to be, solere, solitus sum. wool, lana. word, verbum. word for word, ad verbum. worship, to, colere , colu, cult. INDEX I. - ENGLISH. 349 world, mundus: orbis terree or terra¬ rum. world, in the (after superl.), vel, 410. worthy, dignus ( abl.). would have been (better), > fuit , not would be (tedious, &c.), $ fuisset . wound, vulnus, eris. wound, ferire, icere, 299 wretched, miser , a, urn. write (news), perscribere. Y. Yesterday, heri. young, juvenis. youth (= time of), juventus, utis; ju> venta. youth (= body of), juventus. See 339. 1IN D E X II. LATIN, AND CRITICAL REMARKS. Words followed by (s) are distinguished from their synonymea. A, ab, abs, 348. ab hinc : not with ordinals. Place of \ abhinc, 305. a nobis stare; facere ; sentire, 348. a manu servus, 348. abdicare magistratum, or se magis¬ tratu, 308. abesse (s), 227, r. (propius), ac, atque (s), 4, d. accedit (huc — quod or ut), 513. accendere (s), 299, h. accidere (s), 374, d. accipere (s), 299, h. accusative of the personal pronoun seldom omitted before the infin, ex¬ cept after fateri, dicere, opinari. &c. p. 55, s. acies (s), 348, t. actum est de, 59. adesse (s), 227, q. adimere (s), 385. adire (s), 294, k. adjuvare (s), 222, k. adspergere aliquid alicui, or aliquem aliqua re, 233. sedes (s), 356, y. aequalis, 212, x. sequi boni facere, 185*. aeternus (s), p. 49, c. ait esse paratus, 149, c. ales (s), 480, u. aliquando (s), ) 402 aliquantum (s), $ aliud — aliud, 38. aliud alio (fertur), *00, d. . amare (s), p. 68, a. ambulatum est, 296. amittere (s), 56, n. amnis (s), 472, o. amoenus (s), 212, v. an, in single questions , 120, f. an non (s), 122, b. an quisquam 1 p. 139, c. anima, -us (s), 92, c. apparere (s), 150, w. appellare (s), 51, i aptus (s), 212. astrum (s), 51. audis seu Jane , 272, p. aut (s), 456. auxiliari (s), 222, k. ave (s), 281, s. avere (s), 420. avis (s), 480, u. B. Beatus (s), 443. bibere (s), 257, k. bis terque, > 4?n . bis terve, $ bona tua venia, 428. boni consulere, 185. but cfter nemo, nullus, &c. 44. C. cadere ts), 299, i. callere (s), 385. capere (s), 492. caput feritur alicui, 294 (b). carere (s), 273, h. caritas (s), 281, r. cave putes, 539. cavere alicui; aliquem; sibi; ab ali quo, 233. censere (s), 257, x. certiorem facere, 187. t Bis TEBQ.UE augebit , minuet bis terve notatum. INDEX II.- LATIN. 351 charge in the acc. if expressed by a neut. pron., 194. circumdare urbem muro, ) «qo circumdare murum urbi, ) civitas in appos. to the plural name of a people: Carmonenses, quce est civitas , 138, k. claudus altero pede, 276. caepi (s), 150, x. coeptus est, 150, x. comes (s), 185, z. comissatio (s), 428, b. committere ut, 479. COMPARATIVE of an ADVERB, p. 37, V. compilare, 257, g. componere (s), 222, r. concessum est (s), 124, d. conditional forms of the infin., p. 160, x. conferre (s), 222, r. consequence in perf. subj. for im~ pcrf , 418.t consors (s), 185, z. consulere alicui: in aliquem, 233. contendere (s), 222, r. contingere (s), 374, d. convenire (s), 249, f. convivium (s), 428, b. creber (s), 410, n. crederes, 426. credor ( when right), 474, r. eruor, 229, f. cujus es temperantiae, 56. culpa (s), 242, g. cuncti (s), 443. cupere (s), 420. cur (s), 105, f. curare aliquid faciendum, 351. D. desitus est, 150, y. desperatus, 229. deterior (s), 410. dicere (sj, 177, q. diligere (s), p. 68, a. diu (s), 420. dolere (s), 521, a. dominus (s), 180. dono dare, 242, (3). donum (s), 242, h. dubito. See Questions, § 14 dudum (s), 420. dulcis, 211, v. dum, 494, dummodo (ne), 494. E. E re mea est, 542. ecquis, \ 400 . «• edere ('s), 257. egere (s), 273, h. ego credor, when correct , 474, r. eo insolentiae, 512. epulae (s), 428, b. ergo, with g en., 207. esse honori alicui, 242. est infinitum, 426. et is (idem, &c.), 385. evenire, 374, d. ever, how translated, p. 141, k. ex pedibus laborare, 542. excedere urbe, urbem, 244, q. excipere (s), 299, a. eximere (s), 385. expilare (s), 257, g. exspectare (s), 227, z. ESU «.**«• damnare voti, votis, 201, s. damnare capitis, 201. damnor a nolente esse bono, not Latin, 152, y. dapes (s), 428, b. de facie nosse, i de improviso, >521. de industria, ) debere (s), 126, f. deesse (s), 227, r. defendere, 374. delictum (s), 428, c. demonstrative pron. sometimes ex¬ pressed after quin, p. 30, note e. See 88, (a). P. fac ut, 539. facere de, 291; facere non possum quin, 89. facturos pollicentur, 149, c. fallere (s), 38, z. fallit me, 209. familiariter uti, 456. fanum (s), 356, y. fari (s), 177, q. fas est, 124, d. faustus (s), 443. felix (s), 443. t Potius dixerim, ubi de re prseterita agatur, perfectum subjunctivi magi» eventum facti spectare; imperfectum mentem et consilium agentis. Glinther. 352 INDEX II.-LATIN. festinare (s), 177, m fieri potest ut, 129. flagitare (s), 257. fluvius (s), 472, v. forsitan, 494. fortior quam prudentior, 452, w. frequens (s), 410, n. Eg? j W. 33, u. frustra (s), 33, v. fugit me, 209. fuit utilius, &c., 426. fundamental rule for the sequence of tenses, 40. FUTURE SUBJUNCT., 41. G. gaudere (s), 521, a. gestire (s), 420. oratus (s), 212, v. H. haeres ex drodante, &c., 556. baud (s), p. 70, h. haud scio an, 116. baud scio an nemo, stronger than haud scio an quisquam. Is the latter form correct? See note on Diff. of Idiom , 25. herus (s), 180. hie, 377, &c., relating to the more remote word, 378, h: to id de quo potissi¬ mum agimus, 378, h (3). homo (s), 38, y. hostis (s), 221, z. I. incendere (s), 299, h. incipere (s), 150, x. incolumis (s), 542. incumbere rei or in rem, p. 88. incusare (s), p. 72, m. indigere (s), 257. induere, 233. inimicus (s), 212, z. infinitive, with participle or subst. in the nom. by attraction , 54. inquit, 177, q. inspergere aliquid alicui or aliquem ali- iqua re, p. 86, d. instar: when to be used, 207. inter se contraria, 25. interdum (s), 402. interea (s), 402; in neg. sentences, see note g. interesse (s), 227, q. interest Ciceronis esse eloquentis, wrong, 152, z. interficere (s), 308, interim (s), 402. invenire (s), 177, o. ipse ( = exactly), 308. ipse, ivithpers. pron., when in the nom., when in oblique case, 368. ipse, hardly ever in the nom. (in Cic.) after appended met, p. 131, c. irasci (s), 222. is sum qui, 483. is (ea, id), the usual pron. for the third person where there is no emphasis, no distinction to be marked, 37, u. iste, that of yours, 377 (c). iste, in letters, refers to the place where one’s correspondent resides, 382. istinc, 387. ito justum, si est, &c., 451. icere (s), 299, i. id, not to be used as nom. to { to be' when a subst. fellows, but to agree with that subst., p. 135, m. id aetatis 163, /?. ir> quod far quod only, adds emphasis, p. 27, note *. idem (= also ), 387. idem est qui (or ac, atque), 45, b. idoneus (s), 212* ; qui, 486. ignoscere (s), 428, c. file, 49, 377, &c.: with quidem in par¬ tial concessions, followed by a‘but,' 383. imperare (s), 78, w. impertire aliquid alicui; or aliquem aliqua re, p. 86, c. in ante diem, 530. in dies, 69, t. J. jampridem cupio, 413. jubere (acc. with, inf.; ut when used absolutely), p. 80, h. jucunde vivi non potest, 504. jucundus (s), 211, v. juvare (s), 222, k. L. laetari, 521. latet me, or mihi (bad), 259, a. libenter (= like to), 492. libertinus libertus 561. licet (s), 124, d. licet esse beatum, or beato, 153, b, c. INDEX II. •LATIN. 353 licet (although), 451. locare aliquid faciendum, locare (s), 480, v. loqui (s), 177, q. ludis Latinis, 311. lugere (s), 521, a. M. maceria (s), 233. macte esto, &c., 280, q. major annis viginti, &c., Q,. on § 42. male audire, 492. mandare (s), 78, w. me (miserum) qui, 486, i. mederi (s), 222,1. medicina ? 057 , medicamentum $ 1# memini (s), 62, q. 61, 1. memini legere, 426. mens (s), 92, c. metuere (ne, ut), 95; s. 99, e. minari mortem alicui, 222. miserari ) misereri > (s), 201, r. miseret me ) modo, 494. moenia (s), 233. moerere (s), 521, monere t, ut; ne; acc. with inf., 189, k. monere (s), 222, i. munus (s), 242, h. murus (s), 233. neque, with verb = without , 520. nequicquarn (s), 33, v. nescio quis, 394. nescio an, 116. nihil me terret, 443. nihil habeo quod, 477. nihi aliud nisi, 185. nihil aliud quam rident, 450. nisi, 451. nisi forte, or vero, 451. noli putare, 539. nolle = would not, 541. nomen est mihi Caio, 239. non (s), p. 70, h. non possum quin (for facere non pos¬ sum quin; or, non possum non with infin.) should not be imitated. [Cicero quotes non possum quin exclamem, from Plautus.] non quod, or quo — sed, 492. non desunt qui putent, 477. non solum — verum (or sed) etiam, 257. non est quod, 477. nonne, 102. nonnunquam (s), 402. noscere (s), 365. nostrum, vestrum, after partitives, and with omnium, 372. nullus dubito, 492. num, 102 nuptam esse, 222, m. O. N. nam appended to interrogates, p. 140, 398. when a purpose is expressed without emphasis on the negative, 80. ne quis (not, ut nemo), ne quid (not, ut nihil), ne unquam (not, ut nunquam), . ne = that after verbs of fear, 95. ne — quidem, 185. ne dicam, 443. necare (s), 308. necesse est, 504. necne (s), 122, b. nedum (ut), 145. nemo pictor, 443: neminis, nemine ; see note p. 129. or, in oberro, &c. = amb, lucbt, 248, r. obedire (s), 222. obire mortem, &c. (s), 249, u. obtingere ) ( . 374 . obvenire $ ^ 6 Q * obviam ire, 512. occidere (s), 308. operae pretium est, 532. opitulari (s), 222, k. oportet (s), 126, f. oportet me facere, ) .«g oportet (ego) faciam, $ opperiri (s), 229, z. oppetere mortem (s), 249, u. oppidum (s), 63, z. opprobrium (s), 242, i. optare (s), 420, opto ut, p. 214. opus est (s), 126, f. 170, i. opus est properato, 177. opus absolutum habeo, 364. t Moneo, = to warn a person to do something, sometimes takes infin. instead of ut with subj.—Cic. hardly ever uses the infin. if any particular subject is named :—ratio ipsa monet, amicitias comparare. 354 INDEX I.- LATIN. orare (s), 257.* ORIGIN OF THE PERFECT WITH ( HAVE ’ IN MODERN LANGUAGES, p. 130, a. 551 - P. pace tua dixerim, 428. par (s), 212, x. parere (s), 222. parum (s), 402. paries (s), 233. PARTICIPIAL SUBSTANTIVE, Caution 26. See also p. 151, e. PARTICIPLES IN RUS AND DUS, § 46, p. 126. participles of deponent verbs, 365. pasci (s), 257, k. pati (s), 532.* paululum > , V 402 paulum \ v s b quz - pejor (s), 410. perf. subj. (for imperf.) in a conse¬ quence with ut, 418 : in obi. narr. p. 161, z. personal pron. expressed, when there is a distinction between two actions of the same person , p. 17, note. persuadere (s), 222, i. persuasum est mihi, 291. persuasissimum habeo (bad), 291, z. petere (s), 257.* pietas (s), 281, r. plerique: plerorumque plerarumque, not found, 291. polliceri (s), 17, 1. polliceri, with infin. fut. 15, a. ponere (s), 480, v. poscere (s), 257.* possum (s), 125, e. post — annos quam excesserat; or ex¬ cessit, 310, s. 514. posthabere aliquid alicui, 227. postquam, 512. postulare (s), 257.* potare, 257, k. potentials 4 ki potestas $' ^ ’ potestatem sui facere, 451. pnesfare | se fortem ' 229 - praemium (s), 242. praesens, > 227 praesentem esse, \ praestolari (s), 227, z. praeterit (non mei, 259. prehendere (s), 492. present after si in connection with fut., p. 14< t. PRESENT and IMPERF. passive of Eng* lish verb, 135, e. present or perf. subj. in connection with infin. where the general ruli would require imperf or pluperf, pridem (s), 420. prim-um, o (s), 83, a. probrum (s), 242, i. f pro re nata, < pro virili, ( pro eo ac mereor, pro tua temperantia, proelium (s), 348, t. profugus (s), 276, n. projicere se alicui ad pedes; or ad alicujus pedes, p. 89, note 1. promitto (s), 17, J properare (s), 177, m. propior, 211. propius (dat. or acc.), 512. propius abesse, 319. prosper (s), 443. prospicere, > 9 qo providere, ) 66 ‘ proxime, 512. proximus, 211. pugna (s), 348, t. purgandi sui causa, 334. putares (you would have thought ), 426. ► 542. 56. a. quae res, 36. quae quum ita sint, 492. quae tua est temperantia, 56. quam pro (after compar.), 409, f. quam nullus, 492. quam ut sit, &c. (after compar.), 486. quam brevissime, &c., 410. quam omitted after amplius, &c., 552, k. ST I 451 - Se “- quanta maxima potest esse, &c., 410 quare, 105, f. quasi, 494. queo (s), 125, e. quid aetatis, 164, 0. quid facerem ? 427, c. quilibet (s), 390, u. quin, 44, 3. See note e, p. 30, and note d, p. 215. quin after verbs of doubting, &c. t in negative sentences, 85, 86. quippe (qui), 482, a. quis est qui 1 477. quis sum qui 7 483. quisquam, 389, 390, ()). si quisquam, 391, w. quisquam: an est — qui ? 477. INDEX I. - LATIN. 355 quisque : doctissimus quisque, 399. quivis (s), 390, u. quo, 63, without compar., p. 215, e. quo amentiae. 512. quoad ejus, Ac., 512. quod sciam. 56. quominus, 94. quoniam, 492. quot estis, Ac., 174. quotidie, 69, t. quotusquisque est qui (subj.), 477. quum interrogaretur, not interrogatus esset. 415. s. 1W. re = forth, 249, v. (= ipt ?) recipere (s), 308, a. recordari, p 72: (s), 201, q. redire (s), 330, p. relative pronoun, when it does not agree with its proper antecedent, 48. remedium (s), 257, 1. reminisci (s), 201, q. reperire (s), 177, o. reperiuntur, Ac., qui, 477. res ita se habet, 451. reum facere, 187. reus, its meaning, 188, f. revenire reverti rivus (s), 472, v. rogare (s), 257.* £ (s), 339, 391, w. si quis, si quisquam, _ sive, seu, 456, a. sidus (s), 51. silere (s), 299, g. similis tui, tibi, 212, w. (212, x.) simulae, Ac., 512. simulare, 15 (a); (s), 17, m. sin minus, j sin autem, ! sin secus, j * sin aliter, J sine aliquo or aliqua,, when right , 390, * sine omni cura, wrong, 391, w. sinere (s), 532.* l (s). 185 > z - spoliare (s), 273. stella (s), 57. stipendium mereri, 308. suadere (s), 222, i. suavis (s), 212, v. sublevare ) , . 999 . subvenire ) ' '* ’ ' succendere (s), 299, h. succurrere (s), 222, k. sumere (s), 492. succensere (s), 222. summus mons, 179. sunt qui putent, 45 and 477. superlative and other adjj. placed in the relat. instead of in the principal clause , 53. S. salutare (s), 249, f. salve (s), 281, s. salvus (s), 542. sanare (s), 222, 1. sanguis (s), 299, f. sapientior Caio, ? 405 sapientior quam Caius, ) ’ ' satis, 512. satius, ex. 34. scelus (s), 243, g. scire (s), 385. se often inserted by Cic. after velle, p. 55, r. secundum aliquem decernere, 504. securus (s), 542. sempiternus (s), 123, c. sensit delapsus, 149, u. sententia (ex), 17. si = whether, p. 158, t. si hoc dicas, p. 153, h. si (mood), 451, t. si aliquis ) / v 391 w . 402 h. si quisquam ) v h * 1 T. tacere (s), 299, g. tanquam, 494. tantum abest ut — ut, 534. templum (s), 356, y. timere (s), 99, e. triplicem aciem instruere, 456. trucidare (s), 308. -to, -tote ( imperative forms in), 480, x tueri, 374. tutus (s), 542. U. ubi terrarum, ) ubinam gentium, ) 0 * universi (s). 443. unquam, 402. ut = as soon as; when, 512. ut = that not, 95. ut omitted, 417, 6. ut ne, when used for ne, 77, note. ut quisque — ita, 407. at ajunt, 319. 356 INDEX I.-LATIN. uterlibet (s), 390, u. utervis (s), 390, u. utinam, 494. vtpote qui, 482. V. vacat mihi, 154 : 337. valere apud aliquem, 463. vapulare ab 291. velim (ut) judices, 417, b velle = would, 541. velle sibi, 242. veniam dare, 428, c. verbi causl, 443. vereri (s), 99, e. videri, 150, w. vir (s), 38, y. vis, decl. p 69, note g. visere (s), 249, s. vitium (s), 242, g. vitio vertere, &c., 242. vix crediderim, 42».* vocare (s), 51, i. volucres (s), 480, u. vult < se esse principem, f ( esse princep*. ( v D. APPLETON & CO., PUBLISHERS. ARNOLD’S FIRST LATIN BOOK; BEUODELLED AND REWRITTEN, AND ADAPTED TO THE OLLENDORFF METHOD OF INSTRUCTION. By ALBERT IIARKNESS, A. M. 12 mo. 302 pages. Price 75 Cents. This book is designed to take the place of the American edition of Arnold’s First and Second Latin Book, issued five years since. Under the labors of the present author, the work of Arnold has undergone radical changes, and been adapted to the Ollendorff improved method of instruction, and is superior to the former work in its plan and all of the details of instruction. From N. W. Benedict, Prin. Grammar School, Rochester University. “ Having thoroughly examined Harkness 1 Arnold’s First Latin Book, and watched the results of its introduction into several seminaries of learning in this section of the State, I can safely say that I consider it superior to any of the primary Latin works with which I am acquainted. Its plan and execution are such as to render correct instruction in the LatiD language, in its initiatory steps, practicable to a greater number of teachers than have hitherto been accustomed to instruct in that department, and such as to lay open the practical benefits of such instruction to very many who have not heretofore been thought to be in circumstances to derive any benefit from attention to classical studies.” From W. E. Tolman, Instructor in Providence High School. “ I have used * Arnold’s First Latin Book, remodelled and rewritten , 1 by Mr. Hark¬ ness, in my classes during the past year, and I find it to be a work not so much ‘re¬ modelled and rewritten 1 as one entirely new, both in its plan and in its adaptation to the wants of the beginner in Latin.” From J. R. Boise, Professor of Ancient Languages, in Michigan University. “ I have examined your First Book in Latin, and am exceedingly pleased both with the plan and execution. I shall not fail to use my influence towards introducing it into the classical schools of this State . 11 From George Capron, Principal of Worcester High School. “ I have examined the work with care, and am happy to say that I find it superior to any similar work with which I am acquainted. I shall recommend it to my next class.” From Mr. A. P. S. Stewart, Principal of Holton High School. “The clearness with which principles are stated and illustrated, and especially the syntax in which the nature and the relations of the different elements of a sentence are more fully developed than in works of similar kind, have struck me as being among its chief excellencies. It is better suited to the wants of beginners than any other work with which I am acquainted.” From Prof. Gammell, of Brown University. “ The book seems to me, as I anticipated it would be, a valuable additior to the works now in use among teachers of Latin in the schools of the United States, and fc* many of them it will undoubtedly form an advantageous substitute.” 28 D. APPLETON $ CO., PhBLISHERS. SECOND LATIN BOOK; Comprising a Historical Latin Reader, with Notes and R ales for Tinus* lating, and an Exercise Book, developing a complete Analytical Syntax, in a Series of Lessons and Exercises, involving the Con¬ struction, Analysis, and Reconstruction of Latin Sentences. By ALBERT HARKNESS, A. M. 12 mo. 361 pages. Price 90 Cents. This work is designed as a sequel to the author’s “ First Latin Book/ which has acquired a wide reputation. It comprises a complete ana lytical syntax, exhibiting the essential structure of the Latin language from its simplest to its most expanded and modified form. From J. F. Richardson, Professor of the Latin Language and Literature, Roches¬ ter University. “ I have examined it with considerable care, and I am glad to see this addition to the valuable series of classical works now issued by the Appletons. “ A faithful study of the work upon the plan indicated by the author, will greatly facilitate the student’s acquisition of the general principles of the language, and prepare him for the intelligent reading of the Latin classics.” From Prof. Haven of the University of Michigan “ I am fully convinced that a faithful use of the First and Second Latin Books will place the pupil securely on the right track, and facilitate, more than any other element¬ ary treatises with which I am acquainted, his thorough understanding of the language. “ I heartily wish that all students preparing for this college would 6tudy both books thoroughly.” From Prof. Anderson, of Lewisburg University , Pa. “ A faithful use of the work would diminish the drudgery of the student’s earliest studies, and facilitate his progress in his subsequent course. I wish the work a wide circulation.” From Prof. Lincoln, of Brown University. “ It seems to me, to carry on most successfully the method pursued in the First Book. Though brief, it is very comprehensive, and combines judicious and skilfully formed exercises with systematic instruction.” From Rev. J. A. Spencer, D. D., late Prof. Latin and Omental Languages in Burlington College , N. J. “ The present volume appears to me to carry out excellently the system on which tho late lamented Arnold based his educational works; and in the selections for Read¬ ing, the Notes and Rules for Translating, the Exercises in Translating into Latin, the Analyses, &c., I think it admirably adapted to advance the diligent student, not only rapidly, but soundly, in an acquaintance with the Latin language.” From J. J. Owen, D. D. Prof, of the Latin and Greek. Languages and Literature in the Free Academy , New York. “This Second Latin Book gives abundant evidence of the Author's learning and tact to arrange, simplify, and make accessible to the youthful mind tho great and fun¬ damental principles of the Latin language. The book is worthy of a dace in every alassical school, and I trust will have an extensive sale.” 2 # D. APPLETON $ CO ., PUBLISHERS. DR. ARNOLD’S CLASSICAL SERIES. FIRST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK AND PRACTICAL GRAMAR . Revised and carefully corrected by J. A. Spencer, D.D 1 vol. 12mo. Price 75 Cents. PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN PROSE COMPO SITION. Revised and carefully corrected by J. A. Spencer, D. D, 1 vol. 12mo. Price $1 00. CORNELIUS NEPOS , with Practical Questions and Answers, and an Imitative Exercise on eaoh Chapter. Carefully Revised, with Notes byE. A. Johnson, Prof, of Latin in Univ. of New York. New Edition, enlarged, with a Lexicon, Historical and Geographical Index,